USER'S MANUAL

RADview (Windows)
Carrier-Class Network Management System
Version 4.0
 RADview (Windows)
Notice
This manual contains information that is proprietary to RAD Data Communications Ltd. (“RAD”).
No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without prior written
approval by RAD.
Right, title and interest, all information, copyrights, patents, know-how, trade secrets and other
intellectual property or other proprietary rights relating to this manual and to the RADview
(Windows) are proprietary products of RAD protected under international copyright law and shall
be and remain solely with RAD.
You shall not copy, reverse compile or reverse assemble all or any portion of the manual or the
RADview (Windows). You are prohibited from, and shall not, directly or indirectly, develop,
market, distribute, license or sell any product that supports substantially similar functionality as
the RADview (Windows), based on or derived in any way from the RADview (Windows). Your
undertaking in this paragraph shall survive the termination of this Agreement.
This Agreement is effective upon your opening of the RADview (Windows) package or to
downloading it and shall continue until terminated. RAD may terminate this Agreement upon the
breach by you of any term hereof. Upon such termination by RAD, you agree to return to RAD
the RADview (Windows) and all copies and portions thereof.
For further information contact RAD at the address below or contact your local distributor.

International Headquarters North America Headquarters

RAD Data Communications Ltd. RAD Data Communications Inc.

24 Raoul Wallenberg St. 900 Corporate Drive

Tel Aviv 69719 Israel Mahwah, NJ 07430 USA
Tel: 972-3-6458181 Tel: (201) 529-1100, Toll free: 1-800-444-7234
Fax: 972-3-6498250 Fax: (201) 529-5777
E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]

© 1988–2014 RAD Data Communications Ltd. Publication No. 357-264-10/14

Front Matter User's Manual

License Terms
RAD hereby grants a non-exclusive, nontransferable worldwide license to the licensee of this
software product to use and install this RAD software product on one workstation only, in object
code only for the sole and internal purpose of configuring, monitoring and managing RAD’s
hardware products.
Title. All claims to the contrary contained herein notwithstanding, title in and to this RAD
software product and documentation, including but not limited to, all copyright, patent, trade
secret rights, and intellectual property rights shall remain in and with RAD. The licensee of this
software product shall not copy, reverse compile or reverse assemble all or any portion of this
software product.
Copies. This RAD software product and documentation shall not be copied, in whole or in part,
except as explicitly permitted by RAD or for internal backup or archival purposes.

Warranty
RAD does not warrant that this software product is free from errors and/or will run properly on
all computer hardware and/or operating systems. RAD does not warrant that this software
product will meet requirements of its licensee or operate in the combinations which may be
selected for use by a licensee or the end users or that the operation of this software product
will be uninterrupted or error free.
THE WARRANTIES ABOVE ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Limitation of Liability
RAD’s cumulative liability to you or any other party for any loss or damages resulting from any
claims, demands, or actions arising out of or relating to this Agreement and the RADview
(Windows) shall not exceed the sum paid to RAD for the purchase of the RADview (Windows). In
no event shall RAD be liable for any indirect, incidental, consequential, special or exemplary
damages or lost profits, even if RAD has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
This Agreement shall be construed and governed in accordance with the laws of the State of
Israel.

Foreword
RADview, RAD’s network management software is a portfolio of integrated software suites that
allows management of heterogeneous networks from a single console. The PC and Unix-based
solutions are Client-Server based systems that include “System” software application that’s
integrated with several “Agent” applications that enable management of individual elements
within the network.
RADview (Windows) is a PC-based Element Management System (EMS) providing configuration,
fault and performance management over SNMP. The modular Element Management System
(EMS) implements the first three layers of the industry standard TMN model:
• Network element layer
• Element management layer

ii RADview (Windows) Ver. 4.0

User's Manual Front Matter

• Network management layer

The RADview solutions conform to ITU-T Telecommunication Management Network (TMN)
recommendations for SNMP management systems, known as the FCAPS model:
• Fault management – detects and correlates fault in network devices, isolates faults and
initiates recovery actions.
• Configuration management – tracks configuration changes, configures, installs and
distributes software and configuration files across the network.
• Accounting management – collects accounting data and generates network usage reports.
• Performance management – continuously monitors network performance (QoS, CoS) and
resource allocation.
• Security management – controls and restricts access to network resources.
In addition to this system manual, RAD provides separate user manuals for each of the SNMP
agents supported by the RADview (Windows) system.
The table below details the FCAPS management functions.

Fault Configuration Accounting Performance Security

Alarm handling Map status color Viewing bundle Adding a new user
propagation statistics
Viewing history Configuring Viewing Ethernet Changing users
log Auto-discovery statistics
Masking traps Configuring Status Viewing port Removing users
Polling statistics
Viewing self-test Configuring Poll Displaying the
results Intervals security log
Running Configuring SNMP
loopbacks parameters
Configuring Server
Maps
Configuring Services
Creating a Net
Hierarchy
Creating an agent for
the RAD device
Adding a connection
Configuring Mesh
Service
Configuring Normal
Service
Adding sites
Adding Managed
Elements

RADview (Windows) Ver. 4.0 iii

Front Matter User's Manual

Glossary

Address A coded representation of the origin or destination of data.

Agent In SNMP, this refers to the managed device.

Bit The smallest unit of information in a binary system. Represents

either a one or zero (“1” or “0”).

Cell The 53-byte basic information unit within an ATM network. The
user traffic is segmented into cells at the source and reassembled
at the destination. An ATM cell consists of a 5-byte ATM header
and a 48-byte ATM payload, which contains the user data.

Channel A path for electrical transmission between two or more points.

Also called a link, line, circuit or facility.

CIDR Stands for Classless Inter-Domain Routing and refers to a method

for for allocating IP addresses and routing Internet Protocol
packets. The CIDR notation is a syntax that specifies IP address
and subnet as follows:
<IP address>/<subnet bits in decimal numbers>, e.g. 192.0.2.0/24

CLI Command Line Interface (CLI) is a mechanism for interacting with a

RAD product by typing commands in response to a prompt.

Clock A term for the source(s) of timing signals used in synchronous

transmission.

CORBA The acronym for Common Object Request Broker Architecture,

OMG's open, vendor-independent architecture and infrastructure
that computer applications use to work together over networks.
One of its most important uses is in servers that must handle large
number of clients, at high hit rates, with high reliability, such as
network management systems.

Data Information represented in digital form, including voice, text,

facsimile and video.

Diagnostics The detection and isolation of a malfunction or mistake in a

communications device, network or system.

E1 Line A 2.048 Mbps line, common in Europe, that supports thirty-two 64

kbps channels, each of which can transmit and receive data or
digitized voice. The line uses framing and signaling to achieve
synchronous and reliable transmission. The most common
configurations for E1 lines are E1 PRI, and unchannelized E1.

E3 The European standard for high speed digital transmission,

operating at 34 Mbps.

EMS Client The Client side of the EMS application.

EMS Server The application that manages client devices and provides RADview
system functions.

iv RADview (Windows) Ver. 4.0

User's Manual Front Matter

Ethernet A local area network (LAN) technology which has extended into
the wide area networks. Ethernet operates at many speeds,
including data rates of 10 Mbps (Ethernet), 100 Mbps (Fast
Ethernet), 1,000 Mbps (Gigabit Ethernet), 10 Gbps, 40 Gbps, and
100 Gbps.

Frame A logical grouping of information sent as a link-layer unit over a

transmission medium. The terms packet, datagram, segment, and
message are also used to describe logical information groupings.

Interface A shared boundary, defined by common physical interconnection

characteristics, signal characteristics, and meanings of exchanged
signals.

IP Address Also known as an Internet address. A unique string of numbers

that identifies a computer or device on a TCP/IP network. The
format of an IP address is a 32-bit numeric address written as four
numbers from 0 to 255, separated by periods (for example,
1.0.255.123).

Jitter The deviation of a transmission signal in time or phase. It can

introduce errors and loss of synchronization in high speed
synchronous communications.

Latency The time between initiating a request for data and the beginning
of the actual data transfer. Network latency is the delay
introduced when a packet is momentarily stored, analyzed and
then forwarded.

Load Balancing A technique that distributes network traffic along parallel paths in
order to maximize the available network bandwidth while providing
redundancy.

Loading The addition of inductance to a line in order to minimize amplitude

distortion. Used commonly on public telephone lines to improve
voice quality, it can make the lines impassable to high speed data,
and baseband modems.

Loopback A type of diagnostic test in which the transmitted signal is

returned to the sending device after passing through all or part of
a communications link or network.

Manager An application that receives Simple Network Management Protocol

(SNMP) information from an agent. An agent and manager share a
database of information, called the Management Information Base
(MIB). An agent can use a message called a traps-PDU to send
unsolicited information to the manager. A manager that uses the
RADview MIB can query the RAD device, set parameters, sound
alarms when certain conditions appear, and perform other
administrative tasks.

Mark In telecommunications, this means the presence of a signal. A

mark is equivalent to a binary 1. A mark is the opposite of a space
(0).

Modular Modular interfaces enable field-changeable conversion.

RADview (Windows) Ver. 4.0 v

Front Matter User's Manual

Multidrop A communications configuration in which multiple devices share a

common transmission facility (or multipoint line), although
generally only one may transmit at a time. Usually used with some
kind of polling mechanism to address each connected terminal
with a unique address code.

Network (1) An interconnected group of nodes. (2) A series of points,

nodes, or stations connected by communications channels; the
collection of equipment through which connections are made
between data stations.

Network Element A manageable logical entity that represents a physical device. This
allows distributed devices to be managed by a network
management system.

Node A point of interconnection to a network.

Packet An ordered group of data and control signals transmitted through

a network, as a subset of a larger message.

Parameters Parameters are often called arguments, and the two words are
used interchangeably. However, some computer languages such as
C define argument to mean actual parameter (i.e., the value), and
parameter to mean formal parameter. In RAD CLI, parameter
means formal parameter, not value.

Polling See Multidrop.

Port The physical interface to a computer or multiplexer, for connection

of terminals and modems.

Prompt One or more characters in a command line interface to indicate

that the computer is ready to accept typed input.

Protocol A formal set of conventions governing the formatting and relative

timing of message exchange between two communicating
systems.

Router An interconnection device that connects individual LANs. Unlike

bridges, which logically connect at OSI Layer 2, routers provide
logical paths at OSI Layer 3. Like bridges, remote sites can be
connected using routers over dedicated or switched lines to create
WANs.

Routing The process of selecting the most efficient circuit path for a
message.

Scalable Able to be changed in size or configuration to suit changing

conditions. For example, a scalable network can be expanded from
a few nodes to thousands of nodes.

Shelf View Network Element (NE) management application for managing and
monitoring node configuration (formerly referred to as zoom)

T1 A digital transmission link with a capacity of 1.544 Mbps used in

North America. Typically channelized into 24 DS0s, each capable of
carrying a single voice conversation or data stream. Uses two pairs
of twisted pair wires.

vi RADview (Windows) Ver. 4.0

User's Manual Front Matter

T3 A digital transmission link with a capacity of 45 Mbps, or 28 T1

lines.

Telnet The virtual terminal protocol in the Internet suite of protocols. It

lets users on one host access another host and work as terminal
users of that remote host. Instead of dialing into the computer,
the user connects to it over the Internet using Telnet. When
issuing a Telnet session, it connects to the Telnet host and logs in.
The connection enables the user to work with the remote machine
as though a terminal was connected to it.

RADview (Windows) Ver. 4.0 vii

Front Matter User's Manual

viii RADview (Windows) Ver. 4.0

 Quick Start Guide
This guide focuses on the RADview system and assumes that RADview has been
installed. It provides an overview on adding required licenses and configuring
RADview for use. In addition, it provides an overview on adding and configuring
levels and network elements.

Note Make sure to install an ENW license with a sufficient number of points installed
for the number and nature of devices being added. For further information, refer
to Chapter 2 of the RADview System manual.

1. Installing Licenses
Use the License Service Manager to add the required licenses as listed below..

 To open the License Manager:

• In the Start menu, navigate to
All Programs > Network Manager > General > License Service Manager.
The License Service Manager appears displaying licenses that have been
added. If you just installed RADview, this list is empty and licenses must
be installed for RADview to be able to run.
RADview offers the following licenses:
• ENW – Stands for Equivalent Node Weight status and specifies the max
number of RAD devices supported on the network. This number depends on
the number of ENW points you purchased.
• EMS-MAP – Enables opening the RADview Network Manager.
• EMS-Clients – Enables working with more than five RADview Network
Manager clients simultaneously.
• RV-LIC/SERVICE-MANAGEMENT – Enables working with RADview-Service
Manager and RADview-Service Center.
• RV-LIC/PERFORMANCE-MANAGEMENT – Enables accessing the Performance
Monitor.
• DXC-100 – Enables working with the DXC-100 shelf view application for
standalone or stack.
For additional information and instructions on installing licenses, refer to
Installing License in Chapter 2 of the RADview System User manual.
For additional information on licenses, refer to Licensing in Chapter 4 of the
RADview System User manual.

RADview Installing Licenses 1

Quick Start Guide User's Manual

2. Operation
This section provides an overview on how to log on and populate the topology
map with levels and network elements.
The instructions below assume that the topology map is empty and no levels
have been added to the root level.

 To log on to RADview:
1. Navigate to
All Programs > Network Manager > RADview > Network Manager.
The Logon prompt appears.
2. Log on using the default user name and password. The default user name
and the default password are both root.
The RADview Network Manager window appears displaying the Topology
view. The map is empty when logging in for the first time after installing.

 To add levels:
3. Right-click the root level in the Network Element Repository (/) and select
New Level from the shortcut menu.
The New Level dialog box appears.
4. Under Level Name, assign a name to the level and click <OK>.
The new level is added with default settings.
5. To modify parameters such as SNMP settings for the entire level, refer to
Working with Levels in Chapter 3 of the RADview System User Manual.

 To add devices manually:

• To add one network element, right-click the desired level and select
New NE and follow the onscreen instructions to specify its IP address and
assign a name.
• To add multiple network elements, right-click the desired level and select
New NEs and follow the onscreen instructions to specify a range of IP
addresses within which the system locates the desired devices.

 To add clouds for use in RADview-Service Manager:

Note • Clouds are only relevant if RADview is run with RADview-Service Manager
• For additional information on adding a cloud if RADview-Service Center is
installed, refer to Chapter 3 of the System User’s Manual for Unix or Windows.

1. Add a provider using the Business Entities work space in RADview.

2. Right-click the desired level and select New Cloud .

The New Cloud dialog box appears.
3. Specify the following:

2 Operation RADview
User's Manual Quick Start Guide

 Cloud Name: Assign a name of your choice

 Provider: Select the desired provider previously added in the Business
Entities work space
 Description: Add a short description (optional)
 Domain Name: Assign a name to the domain to which the cloud belongs
 Connectivity Type: Select the type of service to which the cloud belongs.
The options are E-Line and E-LAN.
4. Click <Set> to add the cloud to the map.

 To search and automatically add devices according to rules using Zero Touch:

Note You cannot include clouds in automatic searches for devices.

1. From the menu, select Tools > Zero Touch.

The Zero Touch Configuration dialog box appears.
2. Specify the following:
 General Parameters: Assign a name to the new rule, specify the subnet
and the IP address range to search for devices.
 NER Population: Define the target location in the NER and a naming
convention for devices found.
 Provisioning Actions. Define configuration tasks such as software and/or
configuration uploads, scripts to be executed and define how the system
should respond if a unit is replaced.
 Network Scan Configuration: Specify criteria according to which the
network is scanned, such as scan interval, SNMP parameters, user
credentials for access etc.

 To create user groups:

Note Device names must have the group name as part of the file name. For example, if
the name of devices is <IP address> and the desired group name is Group1, the
relevant devices must be renamed to Group1-<IP address>.

3. Rename the relevant devices across all levels from <Name> to <Group1>-
<Name>.
4. Under Groups, Right-click the respective group.

5. Select New Dynamic Group .

You are asked to define the units and the group as follows:
 Group Name: The name of the newly created group
 Criterion: Search criterion to locate members of the group
 Condition: Starting point and values to include or exclude
 Value: The group value

RADview Operation 3
Quick Start Guide User's Manual

For additional information and instructions on user groups, refer to Creating a

New Dynamic Group in Chapter 6 of the RADview System User’s Manual.

 To configure selected network elements using the Jobs utility:

1. Select the method to define the network elements.
 Explicit: NEs selected from the Network Element Repository tree.
 NE Group: NEs selected from a user group from the Groups tree.
 By Criteria: NEs that comply with a pre-defined set of criteria.
 By Customer: NEs associated with a specific customer.
2. Select the NEs according to the selected method.
3. Select the desired task for the selected network elements.
4. Set the parameters for the specific task.
5. Define whether to execute the task once or periodically. If periodically,
specify a schedule for the recurrence.
For additional information on supported network elements, available tasks and
further instructions, refer to Working with Jobs in Chapter 4 of the RADview
System and User’s Manual.

 To remove network elements:

6. Make sure to remove all services routed over the unit that you wish to
permanently remove.
7. Enter the Topology workspace and right-click the desired network element on
the map or the network element repository.

8. Select Delete from the shortcut menu to delete the respective network
element..

 To remove levels:
9. Remove all network elements from the desired levels.

10. Select Delete from the shortcut menu to delete the respective level.

3. Configuration Management

Viewing and Managing Configurations of Processes and Services

The system console allows you to control and monitor a mixed set of RADview
server processes and services and can therefore understood as a switchboard for
RADview. A full list with instructions on services and processes is available under
Working with RADview Settings and Utilities in Chapter 4.

4 Configuration Management RADview

User's Manual Quick Start Guide

 To access the System Console:

1. From the RADview Network Manager menu, select Tools > System Console.
The password prompt is displayed.
2. Enter the password, and click <OK>. The default password is root..
The System Console opening window is displayed showing the RADview
server’s name.
3. Click the expansion icon to show the process manager and processes, then
click the expansion next to Process 1 to show the processes and services.

Managing SNMPv3 Settings

You can enable SNMPv3 and set defaults for each device that supports it
separately, or for the entire level. In addition, you can manage SNMPv3 settings
either via the Jobs Utility or the SNMPv3 Manager.

 To define SNMPv3 defaults for a specific network element:

1. On the map or in the NER, right-click the relevant device and then select
Properties from the shortcut menu.
The Properties dialog box is displayed.
2. For additional information, refer to Configuring Existing Network Elements in
Chapter 3.

 To define SNMPv3 defaults for a level and its sublevels in the NER:
1. Right-click the desired level of the NER or on the desired tab of the
respective level of the map and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
The Level Properties dialog box appears.
2. To modify the SNMP parameters, refer to Configuring Level Properties in
Chapter 3.

 To manage SNMPv3 settings:

• Creating/editing user accounts
• Creating/editing communities
• Creating/editing notifications
• Saving changes to the persistent storage
• Updating/refreshing agents.
For FURTHER information and instructions on managing SNMPv3 settings via the
Jobs Utility, refer to Working with Jobs IChapter 4) and the user manual of the
respective device for information on the required syntax. For information on
using the SNMPv3 Manager, refer to Managing SNMPv3 Settings in Chapter 4.

RADview Configuration Management 5

Quick Start Guide User's Manual

4. Security Management
This section explains how to manage basic security settings such as users,
passwords, permissions etc. For additional information, refer to Security
Management (Chapter 6). Security settings are available in the Security
Administrator.

Managing your RADview Password

The default user name and password are root.

 To change the RADview password:

3. In the Login dialog box click <Change Password>.
The Replace Password dialog box appears.
4. Enter the Username and the Old Password (current password) of the user
whose password you are changing.
5. Enter the user’s new password in the New Password and Verify fields.
6. Click <OK>.
The new password takes effect immediately.

Notes • The password must be between four and eight characters.

• Only letters and numbers are valid characters. At least two characters must be
letters and at least two characters must be numbers.

Password restrictions can be modified. For additional information refer to Setting

Password Policies in Chapter 6.

Managing Users
 To open the Security Administrator:

1. From the RADview Manager menu, select Tools > Admin Console .
The Admin Console appears.
2. In the Admin Console’s navigation pane, select Security Service.
The Profiles tree appears with existing security profiles and users.

 To add users:
1. From the menu, select User > Add...
The Add User dialog box is displayed.
2. Under User Name and Description, enter the desired user name and a
description (optional) respectively.
3. To base the new user on a security profile, select Profile and select the
desired user profile.

6 Security Management RADview

User's Manual Quick Start Guide

4. Under Password, enter the desired password.

5. Under Confirm Password, re-enter the password.
6. Click <Set>.
The new user is added.

 To edit a user and/or change the relevant user’s password:

1. Under User(s), select the desired user.
2. From the menu, select User > Edit…
The Edit User dialog box is displayed.
3. Make the desired changes to User Name, Description, Profile and/or Lock.
4. To change the password, click <Password> and follow the onscreen
instructions to assign a new password.
5. Click <Set>.
The changes are applied to the selected user.

Managing User Permissions

The profile of allowed and forbidden tasks can be customized for user profiles. It
applies to all users associated with that profile.
The following can be customized:
• Managing Security Profiles: Allows creating a profile with permissions and
restrictions that affect all NEs and is specific to a user based on this profile
• Configuring Security Domains: Allows creating a profile that allows viewing
specific NEs that are part of a pre-defined shared group. It also allows
applying permissions and restrictions to the associated NEs
• Restricting Job Permissions: Allows applying a profile with permissions and
restrictions on running certain jobs.
• Configuring Security Options: Allows defining password, account and audit.
For additional information and instructions, refer to Managing Permissions in
Chapter 6.

RADview Security Management 7

Quick Start Guide User's Manual

8 Security Management RADview

 Contents
Chapter 1. Introduction
1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 1-1
Management Modules ...................................................................................................... 1-1
System ........................................................................................................................ 1-1
Service Manager .......................................................................................................... 1-2
Service Center ............................................................................................................. 1-2
Performance Monitor................................................................................................... 1-3
Features .......................................................................................................................... 1-3
Service Applications ......................................................................................................... 1-3
Advantages of Using RADview .......................................................................................... 1-4
Managed Products ........................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2 New in This Version ............................................................................................................ 1-5
1.3 Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 1-6
Hardware Requirements ................................................................................................... 1-6
Hard Disk Allocation for RADview-Performance Monitoring ........................................... 1-7
Virtual Machines .......................................................................................................... 1-8
Software Requirements.................................................................................................... 1-8
Server-Client Combinations .............................................................................................. 1-9

Chapter 2. Installation and Setup

2.1 Package Contents ............................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Installation ......................................................................................................................... 2-1
Opening Firewall Ports ..................................................................................................... 2-2
Removing Restrictions from Administrators ...................................................................... 2-5
Creating a Power Plan for RADview ................................................................................. 2-12
Switching Regional Settings to English ............................................................................ 2-16
Installing the Oracle Database ........................................................................................ 2-19
Installing Virtual Network Adapter .............................................................................. 2-19
Editing the Hosts File................................................................................................. 2-28
Installing Oracle ......................................................................................................... 2-31
Installing RADview .......................................................................................................... 2-39
Installing Additional Devices ........................................................................................... 2-58
Installing Additional Clients............................................................................................. 2-58
Installing Windows Clients.......................................................................................... 2-58
Installing Unix Clients ................................................................................................. 2-70
Setting Up the License Manager ..................................................................................... 2-78
Using Default Settings ............................................................................................... 2-78
Accessing a Different License Server .......................................................................... 2-79
Configuring Access to a License Server ...................................................................... 2-80
Specifying a License Server Location from the System Console................................... 2-81
Installing Licenses...................................................................................................... 2-81
Removing Licenses .................................................................................................... 2-83
Enabling Telnet Client ..................................................................................................... 2-83
2.3 Upgrade ........................................................................................................................... 2-84
2.4 Uninstallation ................................................................................................................... 2-86
Uninstalling RADview ...................................................................................................... 2-86
Uninstalling the Oracle Database .................................................................................... 2-90

RADview i
Table of Contents User's Manual

Chapter 3. Operation
3.1 Running RADview ............................................................................................................... 3-1
Logging Into RADview ...................................................................................................... 3-1
Logging Out of RADview................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2 Using the RADview GUI ....................................................................................................... 3-3
The RADview GUI.............................................................................................................. 3-4
Customizing the RADview View ......................................................................................... 3-5
Customizing the Windows ............................................................................................ 3-5
Setting the Preferences ............................................................................................... 3-8
Customizing Tables .................................................................................................... 3-13
Customizing Displayed Fields ..................................................................................... 3-18
Sorting the Displayed Table ....................................................................................... 3-19
Customizing Views ..................................................................................................... 3-23
Searching Table Data ................................................................................................. 3-24
Filtering Table Data ................................................................................................... 3-26
Exporting the Table Data ........................................................................................... 3-38
Working with Topology................................................................................................... 3-38
Searching in Topology Panes ..................................................................................... 3-39
Working with the Map ............................................................................................... 3-41
Working with Levels................................................................................................... 3-48
Working with Network Elements ................................................................................ 3-61
Working with Links .................................................................................................... 3-87
Working with Groups ................................................................................................. 3-90
Working with the Jobs GUI .............................................................................................. 3-93
Working with the Jobs Table ...................................................................................... 3-94
Working with the Job Toolbar ..................................................................................... 3-96
Working with Wizards..................................................................................................... 3-97
Jobs........................................................................................................................... 3-98
Zero Touch .............................................................................................................. 3-100
Maintenance Windows ............................................................................................. 3-101
Service Catalogs and Services .................................................................................. 3-102
3.3 Working with Utilities ..................................................................................................... 3-102
3.4 Accessing Devices for Configuration ............................................................................... 3-103
Using the Shelf View .................................................................................................... 3-103
Edit and Agent Configurations ................................................................................. 3-108
Device Level ............................................................................................................ 3-109
Card Level ............................................................................................................... 3-110
Port Level ................................................................................................................ 3-112
Using the Web Browser ................................................................................................ 3-113
Using Telnet/PuTTY ...................................................................................................... 3-115

Chapter 4. Configuration Management

4.1 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities ....................................................................... 4-1
Viewing EMS Server Process Information........................................................................... 4-4
Starting/Stopping/Managing Services ................................................................................ 4-6
Setting Server SMTP and Security Parameters ................................................................... 4-7
Viewing the Java Name and Directory Service .................................................................... 4-9
Configuring the Data Source........................................................................................... 4-10
Viewing the CORBA Name Service ................................................................................... 4-10
Viewing the CORBA Event Service ................................................................................... 4-11
Configuring the EMS Log Service ..................................................................................... 4-11
Viewing the EMS Network Element Repository Service .................................................... 4-12
Specifying a License Server Location from the System Console ....................................... 4-13

ii RADview
User's Manual Table of Contents

Configuring the EMS Trap Listener Service ...................................................................... 4-14

Configuring the EMS Fault Management (Back End) ........................................................ 4-15
Viewing the EMS Fault Management (Front End) ............................................................. 4-17
Configuring EMS Polling .................................................................................................. 4-17
Viewing the EMS Configuration Management Service ...................................................... 4-18
Viewing NMS Security ..................................................................................................... 4-18
Configuring EMS Discovery ............................................................................................. 4-19
Configuring EMS OSS Heartbeat...................................................................................... 4-19
Configuring EMS Maintenance ........................................................................................ 4-20
Configuring Service Center Parameters ........................................................................... 4-21
Configuring EMS Performance Management Service ........................................................ 4-22
Configuring EMS Snapshot Service .................................................................................. 4-23
Enabling the Zero Touch Application Service ................................................................... 4-23
Setting Job Management Service Parameters .................................................................. 4-23
Configuring the EMS Jobs Management (Back End) ..................................................... 4-23
Configuring the EMS Jobs Management (Front End) .................................................... 4-25
Adding and Configuring Network Elements Automatically ................................................ 4-29
Adding and Modifying Search and Add Rules .............................................................. 4-32
Removing a Search and Add Rule ............................................................................... 4-43
Configuring the Network Element Repository.................................................................. 4-44
Adding an Entry ......................................................................................................... 4-46
Renaming an Entry .................................................................................................... 4-46
Removing an Entry .................................................................................................... 4-47
Adding an Attribute ................................................................................................... 4-47
Modifying an Attribute............................................................................................... 4-48
Removing an Attribute ............................................................................................... 4-49
Viewing Applied Changes ........................................................................................... 4-49
Configuring SNMPv3 Settings.......................................................................................... 4-49
Preparing the Devices for SNMPv3 Management ........................................................ 4-50
Defining SNMPv3 Defaults ......................................................................................... 4-50
Managing SNMPv3 Settings ........................................................................................ 4-51
4.2 Configuring the Network .................................................................................................. 4-72
Preparing for Uploading and Downloading Files .............................................................. 4-72
Working with Jobs .......................................................................................................... 4-72
Creating Jobs ............................................................................................................. 4-73
Editing Jobs ............................................................................................................. 4-129
Copying Jobs............................................................................................................ 4-129
Viewing and Configuring Job Properties and Security ................................................ 4-130
Running a Job .......................................................................................................... 4-132
Viewing Progress of Running Jobs ............................................................................ 4-132
Stopping Jobs .......................................................................................................... 4-136
Cancelling Jobs ........................................................................................................ 4-136
Deleting Jobs ........................................................................................................... 4-136
Working with Job Reports ........................................................................................ 4-137
Job Security ............................................................................................................. 4-141
Working with the Configuration Archive ........................................................................ 4-146
Working with Configuration Status........................................................................... 4-147
Working with Archive Files ....................................................................................... 4-150
4.3 Performing Additional Tasks ........................................................................................... 4-154
Adding External Tools ................................................................................................... 4-154
Managing Software File Versions .................................................................................. 4-156
Opening Software File Management ........................................................................ 4-156
Software File Operations ......................................................................................... 4-157
Adding Software Files .............................................................................................. 4-158

RADview iii
Table of Contents User's Manual

Viewing and Configuring Software File Properties ..................................................... 4-160

Deleting Software Files ............................................................................................ 4-160
Viewing the RADview Package Contents ....................................................................... 4-161
System Backup and Restore ......................................................................................... 4-165
Backup and Restore Requirements........................................................................... 4-166
Backup and Restore Across Operating Systems ........................................................ 4-166
Configuring Backup and Restore Files....................................................................... 4-167
Backing up System Components .............................................................................. 4-170
Restoring System Components ................................................................................ 4-170
Automatic Backup and Restore ................................................................................ 4-171
Net Inventory ............................................................................................................... 4-183
Opening the Application .......................................................................................... 4-183
Filtering the Display ................................................................................................. 4-185
Editing an Entity ...................................................................................................... 4-187
Expanding/Collapsing Sublevels ................................................................................ 4-187
Maintenance Windows ................................................................................................. 4-188
Licensing...................................................................................................................... 4-193
Available Licenses .................................................................................................... 4-193
Working with the License Service Manager ............................................................... 4-193
Equivalent Node Weights (ENW) .............................................................................. 4-198
Bundled License Points ............................................................................................ 4-198
Calculating License Points ........................................................................................ 4-198
Licensing for RV-SC Applications .............................................................................. 4-199

Chapter 5. Performance Management

5.1 Viewing the Device Status .................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Viewing Resources of Legacy Products ................................................................................ 5-1
Interface Components ...................................................................................................... 5-2
Supported Devices ........................................................................................................... 5-2
Working with Resources Table .......................................................................................... 5-2
Viewing Resource Details ............................................................................................. 5-5
Viewing Resource Alarms ............................................................................................. 5-6
Changing Resource Information ................................................................................... 5-6
5.3 Monitoring SNMP Messages ................................................................................................ 5-8
Filtering SNMP Requests and Traps ................................................................................... 5-9
Description Filter ......................................................................................................... 5-9
Options Filter .............................................................................................................. 5-9
Reconnecting ................................................................................................................. 5-10
Configuring the Server SNMP Spy Parameters ................................................................. 5-10
5.4 Synchronizing Traps ......................................................................................................... 5-12

Chapter 6. Security Management

6.1 Managing Users .................................................................................................................. 6-1
Changing your own RADview Password ............................................................................. 6-1
Editing the User Profile Using the Security Administrator .................................................. 6-2
Adding Users ............................................................................................................... 6-3
Editing Users ............................................................................................................... 6-4
Changing User Passwords ............................................................................................ 6-5
Removing Users........................................................................................................... 6-6
Administering Login Names ......................................................................................... 6-6

iv RADview
User's Manual Table of Contents

6.2 Managing Permissions ........................................................................................................ 6-7

Managing Security Profiles ............................................................................................... 6-8
Overview ..................................................................................................................... 6-8
Working with Permissions .......................................................................................... 6-10
Basic Permissions ...................................................................................................... 6-14
Manually Loading Security Profiles ............................................................................. 6-31
Adding Profiles .......................................................................................................... 6-32
Editing Profiles .......................................................................................................... 6-37
Removing Profiles ...................................................................................................... 6-38
Configuring Security Domains ......................................................................................... 6-38
Example .................................................................................................................... 6-39
Creating a New Dynamic Group .................................................................................. 6-39
Creating a New Security Profile .................................................................................. 6-41
Creating a User Based on the New Profile .................................................................. 6-55
Restricting Job Permissions ............................................................................................. 6-57
Restricting Job Permissions to All NEs ........................................................................ 6-57
Restricting Job Permissions to Specific NEs ................................................................ 6-63
Working with Job Domains ......................................................................................... 6-66
Configuring Security Options .......................................................................................... 6-71
Setting Password Policies .......................................................................................... 6-71
Setting Account Policies............................................................................................. 6-73
Setting Audit Policies ................................................................................................. 6-75
6.3 Configuring the EMS Security Service ................................................................................ 6-76

Chapter 7. Fault Management

7.1 Configuring the Fault Management Service ......................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Detecting Problems ............................................................................................................ 7-1
Alarms ............................................................................................................................. 7-2
Events ............................................................................................................................. 7-2
Error Messages ................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.3 Handling RADview Device Events ........................................................................................ 7-2
Working with the Event Browser....................................................................................... 7-2
Toolbar Icons............................................................................................................... 7-4
Filtering Events ............................................................................................................ 7-5
Refreshing Event Display ........................................................................................... 7-14
Acknowledging Events ............................................................................................... 7-14
Removing Events ....................................................................................................... 7-15
Viewing Event Details ................................................................................................ 7-16
Entering Event Notes ................................................................................................. 7-17
Enabling/Disabling a Sound Profile ............................................................................. 7-19
Viewing Event Browser Information............................................................................ 7-20
Working with the Fault Administrator ............................................................................. 7-20
Setting Event Policies ................................................................................................ 7-26
Defining SNMP Trap Forwarding Destinations ............................................................. 7-43
Defining Fault Clearance Procedures .......................................................................... 7-44
Setting Parameters for the Event Browser Log ........................................................... 7-48
7.4 Handling RADview System Events ..................................................................................... 7-51
Configuring the Log Properties ....................................................................................... 7-51
Viewing RADview Events in the Log Viewer ..................................................................... 7-54
Setting the Log Display .............................................................................................. 7-55
Saving, Printing, or Deleting Logs ............................................................................... 7-56

RADview v
Table of Contents User's Manual

7.5 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................... 7-57

7.6 Frequently Asked Questions ............................................................................................. 7-61
7.7 Technical Support ............................................................................................................. 7-62

Chapter 8. Application Tutorial

8.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 8-1
RADview/PACK1 Product Overview .................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Installing RADview .............................................................................................................. 8-1
RADview Installation Process ............................................................................................ 8-1
Pre-Installation ................................................................................................................ 8-2
RADview/PACK1 Client/Server PC .................................................................................. 8-2
RADview/PACK1 Client/Server UNIX .............................................................................. 8-2
RADview/WIN/PACK1 Client PC ..................................................................................... 8-2
Installing RADview/PACK1 on a Server Station ................................................................... 8-2
Installing RADview/WIN/PACK1 Client PC ........................................................................... 8-5
Additional Installation Procedures..................................................................................... 8-6
Configuring TFTP server on RADView UNIX Server.............................................................. 8-6
Configuring TFTP Server on RADview PC Server ................................................................. 8-7
TFTP Server Initialization .............................................................................................. 8-9
8.3 RADview Operation ............................................................................................................ 8-9
Objectives ........................................................................................................................ 8-9
Configuration via RADview (FCAPS) ................................................................................. 8-10
Verifying Loaded RV Licenses ......................................................................................... 8-11
Topology Map ................................................................................................................ 8-11
Working with the Map .................................................................................................... 8-12
Working with RADview Links ........................................................................................... 8-15
Viewing Level, Device and Link Status ............................................................................. 8-17
Verifying Icon Status.................................................................................................. 8-17
RADview Discovery Service ............................................................................................. 8-18
Creating Groups ............................................................................................................. 8-19
8.4 RADview Jobs and Automation .......................................................................................... 8-21
Overview........................................................................................................................ 8-21
Configuration Archive ................................................................................................ 8-21
Jobs and Automation ................................................................................................. 8-21
Jobs and Automation ...................................................................................................... 8-22
Software File Management ............................................................................................. 8-22
Create a Job – Upload Software ................................................................................. 8-24
Configuration Management ............................................................................................ 8-27
Creating a Job – Download Configuration ................................................................... 8-27
Configuration Archive ..................................................................................................... 8-31
Configuration Archive – File Types ............................................................................. 8-33
Baseline .................................................................................................................... 8-33
Creating a Job – Upload Configuration from Archive ................................................... 8-34
Creating a Job – Execute Script .................................................................................. 8-36
8.5 RADview Performance Monitoring Portal ........................................................................... 8-37
Objectives ...................................................................................................................... 8-37
Overview........................................................................................................................ 8-37
RADview PM Portal Requirements ................................................................................... 8-38
RADview PM Configuration ............................................................................................. 8-38
Configuring Business Entities (End-Customers) and Resources ................................... 8-38
Configuring PM Parameters ........................................................................................ 8-42

vi RADview
User's Manual Table of Contents

Collecting Statistics ........................................................................................................ 8-45

Generating Monthly SLA Reports .................................................................................... 8-50
Monitoring Services with PM Portal ................................................................................. 8-55
8.6 Fault Management via RADview (FCAPS) ........................................................................... 8-62
Overview........................................................................................................................ 8-62
Working with Event Filter ............................................................................................... 8-62
Setting Event Policies ..................................................................................................... 8-64
Creating Masking Policy for Authentication Failure Trap .................................................. 8-66
Testing Masking Authentication Failure Event ................................................................. 8-68
8.7 RADview Security (FCAPS) ................................................................................................. 8-69
Overview........................................................................................................................ 8-69
Defining Password Policy ................................................................................................ 8-70
Working with Security Profiles ........................................................................................ 8-72
Creating a New Security Profile ...................................................................................... 8-73
Creating a New User ...................................................................................................... 8-77
Testing the New User ..................................................................................................... 8-79
8.8 RADview Administration (FCAPS)....................................................................................... 8-79
Log Viewer ..................................................................................................................... 8-79
Viewing Logged-in Users ................................................................................................ 8-81

Appendix A. Updating RADview Clients Automatically

Appendix B. Updating RADview Clients with Multiple Server Information

RADview vii
Table of Contents User's Manual

viii RADview
 Chapter 1
Introduction

1.1 Overview
RADview is a Windows-based modular, client-server, scalable management
system that can be used in a distributed network topology or a single-station
configuration. RADview consists of the system and the following optional
modules:
• Service Manager (SM) – end-to-end Carrier Ethernet service provisioning for
Ethernet Access products. This module includes the Service Center (SC)
module, which is an end-to-end Carrier Ethernet and TDM service provisioning
for AXCESS+ products.
• Performance Monitor (PM) – Portal for service SLA monitoring for both
carriers and their customers.
The RADview element and network management systems include a CORBA
northbound interface, enabling easy integration into the customer’s umbrella
NMS. CORBA enables interconnectivity and communication across heterogeneous
operating systems and telecommunications networks. CORBA effectively supplies
a software interface that defines data models used between various
management layers. It supports multi-vendor distributed network management
applications, providing the data interface between clients and servers.
The system is bundled with agent components, each dedicated to controlling a
specific RAD product on the network. For a list of currently supported RAD
products, refer to Managed Products.

Management Modules
This section introduces and explains the RADview modules.

System
The RADview system contains the element management system (EMS/NMS)
system with FCAPS (Fault, Configuration, Administration, Performance and
Security) capabilities and provides an intuitive graphical user interface for
discovery, management and monitoring of the network elements.

RADview Ver. Overview 1-1

Chapter 1 Introduction User’s Manual

In addition, the EMS/NMS features the following utilities:

• Inventory (to display ports and devices)
• Jobs (to perform all tasks from one central location)
• Zero Touch (to automatically configure devices)
• Archive.

Service Manager
The Service Manager module is designed to minimize the effort of a multi-service
Carrier Ethernet network management. RADview-Service Manager enables easy
point-and-click E-Line and ELAN Ethernet service creation, monitoring and SLA
assurance for networks based on RAD Ethernet Access product family. For
additional information, refer to Section 1 of the RADview-Service Manager
manual section.

Service Center
As part of the Service Manager module, Service Center extends Service Manager
capabilities to the AXCESS+ product family, such as the Megaplex-4 product line
and to PDH and SDH/SONET networks for providing TDM-based services in
addition to E-Line Ethernet services.

Note Service Center supports MP-2 and MP-4 with ASMi-52/53/54 and OP-108, as well
as the FCD family.

Service Center provides:

• Complete management of a network’s configuration by defining the
necessary paths across the network, to ensure smooth operation of the
network
• Discovery of the best route for a path
• Assignment of priority values (cost) to a path. This enables easy identification
of the Path with the least cost (fewest hops), ensuring the most effective
routing possible when configuring the network
• Definition of alternate paths with protection routes that take over in the
event of a failure of a Network Element in the original route, and automatic
rerouting of paths in case of faults
• Open system design, based on Client-Server architecture and CORBA’s
northbound interface for higher level OSS applications
• Java-based client application, which enables platform independence (PC or
Unix) for the client
• Utilization of available bandwidth in the most efficient manner
• Alarm status for each node and active path in the network
• The ability to determine faulty paths by traps received from the agents
• Simulator mode for network planning.
For additional information, refer to Section 2 of the RADview-Service Manager
manual section.

1-2 Overview RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

Performance Monitor
The Performance Monitoring portal is an SLA assurance monitoring system. This
system enables long term monitoring of Ethernet service performance by
collecting KPI (key performance indicators) data from RAD devices. Measured
metrics are based on ITU-T Y.1731 and include Frame Delay, Delay Variation,
Frame Loss, and Availability. Latency and jitter results are based on round-trip
measurements. It allows service providers to easily evaluate actual performance
over time and compare it to their committed SLA agreements. In addition, it
enables immediate detection of service degradation, so that action can be taken
to quickly restore committed performance levels to the end customer.

Features
RADview includes the following features:
• Supports inband and out-of-band management
• Presents networks and their components in an easy-to-view graphical map
format. Maps can be grouped according to hierarchies and their sublevels.
User-defined graphics can be included.
• “Learns” the network by automatically discovering SNMP-manageable
elements
• Polls nodes at periodic intervals or on user command, and relays the results
of the polls by a combination of messages, color codes, log files, and other
action.
• Allows exporting and printing information from selected screens
• Gathers real-time statistics that can be displayed in line graph, bar chart, or
tabular format
• Allows for security control at the lobe and segment levels
• Supports basic management of third-party equipment
• Supports security protocols
• Allows creating sound profiles for events and event groups.

Service Applications
RADview includes utilities that improve system performance and simplify its
maintenance:
• Backup and Restore – Back up and restore RADview system components
• License Manager – Manage RADview licenses
• Net Inventory – Display inventory table of RADview agents
• SNMPv3 Manager – Manage SNMPv3 parameters of RAD devices that support
SNMPv3.
• Zero Touch – Automatically add network elements and upload software and
configurations according to user-defined rules.

RADview Overview 1-3

Chapter 1 Introduction User’s Manual

Advantages of Using RADview

RADview provides an end-to-end network management solution. It is highly
scalable with no limit on network size, therefore ideal for growing networks. The
system provides an open, detailed, and user-friendly GUI, enabling easy
integration of a wide range of management capabilities.
Using RADview, you have a flexible, reliable environment for planning and
preparing network configurations for the managed devices, while complying with
standard management protocols for monitoring, control, and diagnostics.
RADview maintains its own database to support sanity check algorithms and
enforce integrity among involved network components. The reliability of the
integrity depends partially on the accuracy of the information provided by the
network manager.
RADview provides monitoring and management functions that extend from the
network (net) level down to the level of individual ports. Management functions
include hardware/software configuration, monitoring alarms, initiating tests and
monitoring performance.
In addition, RADview allows the automatic addition of network elements to the
Network Manager map according to search criteria users can define. Such units
can be managed and configured as a group.

Managed Products
RADview provides network management for the products shown in the following
table. The information shown in the table applies to the latest product version
released for general availability (GA).
Devices that support RADOS Generic Agent also support trap synchronization
explained under Configuring Trap Synchronization in Chapter 3. These devices
reflect the device status with respect to alarms and their respective coloring and
symbols on the map, in the Resources table and the Network Element Repository.
For a table that reflects the device status accordingly, refer to Monitoring Agents
in Chapter 5.

Note The agent manuals of ETX-1002 can be found in the User Manual folder on the
RADview DVD, as it does not have a shelf view from where you could access it.

 To view a table of supported products and features:

• Click the pin image down below for an Excel list with all products and the
supported features.

1-4 Overview RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

• Each product is assigned an Equivalent Node Weight (ENW) according to the

product's complexity. This weight determines the license points required for
operating the product via RADview. For more information, see Licensing in
Chapter 4.
• IPmux and Gmux devices can be managed via RADview, however you must
install RV-SC/TDMoIP to perform functions such as circuit management.
• If SecFlow devices are installed, the SecFlow tools (formerly RADiFlow iSIM
tools) are available in the RADview Network Manager. For additional
information, refer to the relevant documentation.
• Ping, trace route, Telnet, and Web access are supported only if the RADview
client station has direct connectivity to the agent device, i.e. the client station
must be directly connected to the network where the devices are connected.
• Shelf view is supported for non-legacy agent devices even if there is no SNMP
connectivity from the RADview client station to the device, For legacy devices,
shelf view is supported only if the RADview client station has SNMP
connectivity to the agent device. For a complete list refer to the RADview
release note.

To learn about the management and configuration of a specific product:

• If the product supports shelf view, refer to its agent user manual,
complemented with this system manual and the product hardware manual
• If the product does not support shelf view, any management via RADview is
covered in this system manual, therefore there is no agent user manual.
Configuration of the product is performed via Web or Telnet, and described in
the product hardware manual.

1.2 New in This Version

The following are new in version 4.0:
• Support for Windows 8.0, 8.1 and Windows Server 2012
• Support for sending system messages to a Syslog server
Additional new functionalities affect RADview-Service Manager and RADview-
Performance Manager. Refer to the respective agent manual section for
additional information.

RADview New in This Version 1-5

Chapter 1 Introduction User’s Manual

1.3 Requirements

Note If you install RADview-Service Center, you have to install the server on Unix and
the RADview and RADview-Service Center clients on a PC.

The RADview package can be installed with various Windows operating systems
as outlined under Software Requirements.

Hardware Requirements
Requirements for CPU, RAM and hard disk resources depend on the number of
managed elements in the system as outlined in the table below.
This section also outlines required hard disk resources for sample collection using
RADview-Performance Manager.

Table 1-1. Required Resources

Managed Elements CPU Number of CPUs RAM Number of Hard Disks

Up to 200 Core-i3-2xxx 2.1GHz or 1 4 GB 1

higher architecture

200-500 Core-i7-2xxx 2.1GHz or 1 4 GB 2

higher architecture

500-1000 Intel® Xeon® E5-2603 1 (quad-core) 8 GB 2 SAS

1.80GHz

1000-3000 Intel® Xeon® E5-2603 2 (quad-core) 12 GB 4 SAS

1.80GHz

3000-5000 Intel® Xeon® E5-2650 2 (eight-core) 16 GB 4 SAS

2.00GHz

Notes
• Operating RADview together with RADview-Service Manager and/or RADview-
Performance Manager also requires a minimum of 8GB for installations of 500
managed elements or less.
• Each simultaneous user working on the server via any remote desktop client
technology requires an additional 512 MB RAM and 1 CPU core
• If installing more than 10 clients, consult your RAD distributor for the required
hardware configuration.
• When running the RADview client on a different workstation than the RADview
server, it is not necessary to add RAM or CPU for simultaneous users.

In addition, the following is required

• At least 40 GB free disk space for Oracle database
• NTFS-formatted partition

1-6 Requirements RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

• Color monitor (17-inch minimum), supporting 1280 × 1024 resolution or

higher
• DVD drive.

Notes • Additional disk space may be required when using the Jobs utility to collect
statistics for the RADview Performance Portal, according to the amount of
data collected and saved in the system.
• It is recommended to work with a 19-inch or larger monitor.

Hard Disk Allocation for RADview-Performance Monitoring

Required hard disk space for sample collection depends on the type of samples
and the sample rate.
• The calculation assumes that collected raw samples are saved for 12 months.
• There is a different calculation per service throughput, OAM and ports.
• Service throughput assumes 4 flows. (Tx+Rx flows for two devices). If
additional flows are part of the service, the required capacity must be
multiplied accordingly.
• OAM assumes single COS. For multiple COSs, the required capacity must be
multiplied accordingly.

Table 1-2. Hard Disk Requirements for Performance Monitoring – 12-Month Period
*
Scope Servic Flows per OAM, CoS Ports Sample Rate of Required Hard
es Service per Service Collection / [Min] Disk Space / [GB]

Full 10 4 (2 flows 1 6 15 0.8

[TX & RX]
per device)

Full 10 4 (2 flows 1 6 5 1
[TX & RX]
per device)

Full 10 4 (2 flows 1 6 1 2
[TX & RX]
per device)

Service 1 4 (2 flows 0 0 5 0.11

throughput [TX & RX]
only per device)

OAM only 1 0 1 0 5 0.26

Ports 0 0 0 6 5 0.63
throughput
only

* PM Data of one service, assuming that raw samples are saved for 12 months

RADview Requirements 1-7

Chapter 1 Introduction User’s Manual

Virtual Machines
In addition to physical stations, RADview systems can be installed on virtual
machines. The RADview and database requirements for virtual machines are the
same as for physical stations.

Note The virtual machine’s infrastructure consumes memory and disk space of its own,
which must be taken into account when dimensioning the server.

Software Requirements
Before starting the RADview installation and setup, the following software
components must be installed and working:
• One of the following Windows operating systems:
 Microsoft Windows 7 or Windows 8.x (64-bit) Professional Edition, with
English Multilingual User Interface (MUI)
 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows Server 2012 R2 (64-bit)
Standard Edition, with English Multilingual User Interface (MUI)
• Microsoft Windows display font size set to normal (96 dpi)
• Microsoft Windows default input language set to English;
• Microsoft Windows SNMP trap service, configured to run automatically (only if
installing Airmux or LRS-24 devices)
• Microsoft .NET Framework version 4.0 (required only if installing Airmux
devices; an installation file for .NET Framework version 4.0 is included on the
RADview installation DVD)
• In addition, the Oracle database requires .NET Framework version 3.5 be
installed prior to its installation under Microsoft Windows 8/8.1 and Windows
Server 2012.
• Oracle 11g (Version 11.2.0.2 64-bit) for Microsoft Windows 7 (64-bit) or
Server 2008 Server
• Mozilla Firefox, latest version (required for Web-based access to devices)
• Adobe Reader, latest version (required for opening help files)
• TFTP/SFTP server for running jobs (if you wish to collect OAM statistics, you
must install a TFTP server).

Note • It is recommended to use a TFTP server with support for a large number of
concurrent sessions. See Table 1-3 for recommended SFTP/TFTP servers that
work optimally with RADview.
• If you run the Zero-Touch functionality, the WinAgents (enterprise) TFTP
server is required.
• Software upload and download to and from ETX-5 require an SFTP server.

• Google Chrome web browser if you wish to work with the RADview
Performance Portal. You must be connected to the Internet in order to view
the graphs.

1-8 Requirements RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

Table 1-3. Recommended TFTP/SFTP Servers

RADview Network Size Recommended Server

TFTP SFTP
* SolarWinds SolarWinds
0–1000 network elements, with PM
* WinAgents (standard) Cerberus
1001–5000 network elements, with PM
* WinAgents (enterprise) Cerberus
More than 5000 network elements, with PM
* SolarWinds SolarWinds
0–1000 network elements, without PM

More than 5000 network elements, without WinAgents (standard) Cerberus

*
PM

* PM = Performance management statistics are being collected

Server-Client Combinations
RADview servers can run on Windows, Unix and Linux operating systems as
specified under Software Requirements and support clients across platforms as
outlined below.

Note Servers and clients must be of the same version and build, otherwise the attempt
of opening a client results in an error message indicating a version mismatch.

Table 1-4. Possible Combinations of RADview Servers and Clients

Windows Server Unix Server Linux Server

Windows Client √ √ √

Unix Client √ √

Linux Client √ (only local client)

RADview Requirements 1-9

Chapter 1 Introduction User’s Manual

1-10 Requirements RADview

 Chapter 2
Installation and Setup
RADview is typically installed on a single station, which acts as a server from
which all management functions are initiated.

Note • The Windows station on which you install must be actively connected to the
hub/IP network throughout the entire installation process.
• This version of RADview supports Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012. The
procedures for pre-installation steps, installing the database, installing
RADview and post-installation steps are identical unless noted otherwise.
• Before you start installing, make sure that no antivirus, antispyware or firewall
application blocks Oracle or RADview applications.

2.1 Package Contents

The RADview package includes the following items:

• RADview installation DVD

• RADview/Windows/Database/Oracle 11g 64 Bits DVD (for Microsoft Windows

Server 2008)

• Installation guide.

2.2 Installation
If you are installing RADview-Service Center or RV-SC/TDMOIP on top of RADview,
the installation order is:
1. RADview
2. RADview-Service Center and/or RV-SC/TDMOIP.

Note RV-SC/Vmux is not supported with RADview anymore.

RADview Installation 2-1

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

The RADview package must be installed in the following sequence:

1. Opening Firewall Ports
2. Removing Restrictions from Administrators
3. Creating a Power Plan for RADview
4. Switching Regional Settings to English
5. Installing the Oracle Database
6. Installing RADview

Opening Firewall Ports

You may need to open ports in the firewalls of RADview components to enable
communication during the installation. Figure 2-1 and the tables below illustrate
which ports to open.
In the Windows firewall, RADview opens the required ports automatically.
NTU NTU

Network

OSS

Network

RADview
Server

Network

RADview
Client

Figure 2-1. RADview - Firewall Ports

Table 2-1. RADview Server -> OSS

Protocol Port (TCP/UDP)

IGMP Not applicable

SNMP Trap 162 (UDP)

Table 2-2. RADview Server -> Clients

Protocol Port (TCP/UDP)

Client – Shelf View x2 16500-16699 (TCP)

Trace Mnitor* 16492 (TCP)

SNMP Spy* 16493 (TCP)

Trap Sync Spy* 16494 (TCP)

2-2 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Protocol Port (TCP/UDP)

MTOSI Spy* 16496 (TCP)

*Optional

Table 2-3. RADview Client -> RADview Server

Protocol Port (TCP/UDP)

RMI Registry/Objects 16499-16501 (TCP)

MTOSI Spy 16495 (TCP)

Service Center HTTP 16491 (TCP)

Corba 16490 (TCP)

Java Mgmt HTTP 16489 (TCP)

For SCTDMoIP 16432 (TCP)

License Server 16430-16431 (TCP)

Database 1521 (TCP)

JMX* HTTP 16497 (TCP)

For ETX-1002 1009 (TCP)

*Optional

Table 2-4. RADview Server -> NTU

Protocol Port (TCP/UDP)

Telnet* 23 (TCP)

SSH* 22 (TCP)

ICMP* Not applicable

SNMP 161 (UDP)

HTTP* 80 (TCP)

SSL* 443 (TCP)

*Optional

Table 2-5. NTU -> RADview Server

Protocol Port (TCP/UDP)

TFTP 69 (UDP)

SFTP 22 (TCP)

SNMP Trap 162 (UDP)

RADview Installation 2-3

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Table 2-6. Client-> NTU

Protocol Port (TCP/UDP)

Telnet* 23 (TCP)

SSH* 22 (TCP)

ICMP* Not applicable

SNMP** 161 (UDP)

HTTP* 80 (TCP)

SSL* 443 (TCP)

*Optional
**For devices with Legacy Shelf View
In case you are using a DMZ configuration, you have to open the ports of
RADview components and the DMZ station in addition to the ports listed in the
tables associated with Figure 2-1.
A DMZ (De-Militarized Zone) configuration enables end users outside the firewall
to view the performance monitoring (PM) portal.

Note DMZ configurations are not standard and are implemented only upon request.
-

NTU NTU

Network

OSS

Network

RADview
Server

Network

Apache Web Server/ RADview

DMZ RADview Client Client

Figure 2-2. RADview and DMZ Station Firewall Ports

Table 2-7. DMZ -> RADview Server

Protocol Port (TCP/UDP)

RMI Registry/Objects 16499-16501 (TCP)

MTOSI Spy 16491 (TCP)

Corba 16490 (TCP)

For SCTDMoIP 16431-16432 (TCP)

License Server 16430-16431 (TCP)

2-4 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Protocol Port (TCP/UDP)

Database 1521 (TCP)

For ETX-1002 1099 (TCP)

Table 2-8. End Customer PM Portal -> DMZ RADview Client

Protocol Port

HTTP 80

HTTPS 443

Removing Restrictions from Administrators

You have to ensure access to all files and folders that are relevant for installing
the RADview application. To do so, you have to remove possible restrictions from
the Administrator user in the User Account Control Settings dialog.
To do so, you have to access the Action Center user account control settings,
which you do differently in Windows 7/Server 2008 R2 and Windows 8/Server
2012.

 To access the Action Center in Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012:

1. If you use Windows 8.1 and you are in the Desktop view, click to toggle
to the Start (tile) view.

Note This button does not exist for Windows 8.0, which only operates from the Start
(tile) view.

2. In the Start view, to the lower left, click the arrow .

The complete list of utilities and installed applications appears.

3. Navigate to and click Control Panel (located to the right under Windows
Systems).
The All Control Panel Items dialog box appears.

RADview Installation 2-5

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-3. Windows 8 – All Control Panel Items

1. Click Action Center

The Action Center window appears.

2-6 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-4. Windows 8 – Action Center

 To access the Action Center in Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2:
2. From the Start menu, open the Control Panel.
The Control Panel appears (Figure 2-5).

RADview Installation 2-7

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-5. Windows 7 – Control Panel

2-8 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

3. Click System and Security

The System and Security dialog box appears (Figure 2-6).

Figure 2-6. Windows 7 – System and Security

4. Click Action Center

The Action Center window appears (Figure 2-7).

RADview Installation 2-9

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-7. Windows 7 System and Security – Action Center

 To remove all limitations from the Administrator user:

1. In the Action Center window, from the repository, select Change User
Account Control Settings.
The User Account Control Settings window appears.
2. Push the slider to the bottom (in order not to get notified when making
changes) as illustrated in Figure 2-8.

2-10 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-8. Windows 7 System and Security – User Account Control Settings

3. Click <OK> and close the Control Panel.

4. Restart your PC.
You are now ready to install software and edit installation files as
needed.

RADview Installation 2-11

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Creating a Power Plan for RADview

In order to properly operate RADview, you have to add a power plan that disables
hibernating and sleep mode as power saving options.

Notes • In some cases, corporate policies regarding power plans may apply. Before
creating a power plan and installing RADview, it is recommended to verify with
the local IT department that changes to existing power plans and new power
plans are persistent.
• The instructions below apply to all supported Windows operating systems,
although they illustrate dialog boxes using Windows 7.

 To create a new power plan:

1. Go to All Control Panel Items as explained above for the respective Windows
versions on the previous pages.
The All Control Panel Items dialog box appears (see Figure 2-9).

Figure 2-9. Windows 7 – All Control Panel Items

2. Click Power Options.

The Power Options dialog box appears (see Figure 2-10).

2-12 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-10. Windows 7 – Power Options

3. Create a new power plan. To do so, click Create a Power Plan in the
Navigation pane.
4. The Create Power Plan dialog box appears (see Figure 2-11).

RADview Installation 2-13

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-11. Windows 7 – Create a Power Plan

5. Assign a name to your new power plan, for example RV-EMS and select High
Performance.
6. Click <Next>.
You are asked to change settings for the plan (see Figure 2-12).
7. Set Turn Off the Display and Put the Computer to sleep to Never and then
click <Create> as illustrated in Figure 2-12.

2-14 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-12. Windows 7 – Change Settings

The new power plan is added to the list of preferred plans and selected
as illustrated in Figure 2-13.

RADview Installation 2-15

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-13. Windows 7 – New Power Plan Created and Selected

Note If this PC is mainly used for RADview management, It is recommended not to

change the power plan settings.

Switching Regional Settings to English

RADview requires date and time set to the English format. To do so, you have to
set the regional settings to English. These instructions apply to installations
performed in a non-English environment on all supported Windows operating
systems, although the instructions are illustrated with Windows 7 dialog boxes.

 To set the regional settings to English:

1. Go to the All Control Panel Items dialog box as explained on the previous
pages.
The All Control Panel Items dialog box appears (see Figure 2-9).
2. Under Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, select Region and Language.
Under Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012, select Region.
The respective dialog box appears (see Figure 2-14).

2-16 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-14. Windows 7 – Region and Language Dialog Box

3. Under Format, select English (United States) and select the options illustrated
below for Short Date, Long Date, Short Time and Long Time as illustrated in
Figure 2-14.
For First Day of Week, select the first business day of the week in your
region.
4. Click <Apply>.
The changes are applied to the current user and the Region or Region
and Language dialog box remains open respectively.
You have to copy these settings now to all system and user accounts.

RADview Installation 2-17

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

 To copy the settings to all system and user accounts:

1. In the Region and Language or Region dialog box, open the Administrative tab
and then click <Copy Settings>.
The Welcome Screen and New User Accounts Settings dialog box appears
(see Figure 2-15).
2. In the Welcome Screen and New User Accounts Settings dialog box, check
Welcome Screen and System Accounts and New User Accounts.

Figure 2-15. Windows 7 – Copying Settings to all New User and System Accounts

2-18 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Installing the Oracle Database

Note When installing the Oracle database under Windows 8/8.1 or Windows Server
2012, Microsoft .NET Framework version 3.5 must be installed and enabled prior
to installing the Oracle database. The installation for Microsoft .NET Framework
version 3.5 is available on the RADview installation DVD.

Before installing Oracle the first time, some adjustments of the computer settings
may be needed. If this has already been done or is not necessary, refer to
Installing Oracle for the procedure to install the Oracle database.
The adjustments depend on the computer IP address setting:
• Static IP address – The computer is assigned a specific IP address. No
adjustment is necessary in this case.
• Multiple IP addresses – The computer is assigned multiple specific IP
addresses. No adjustment is necessary in this case.
• DHCP – The computer IP address is obtained from a DHCP server, and can
vary. In this case, it is necessary to do the following, in order to provide a
fixed IP address for Oracle:
 Install a virtual network adapter (Microsoft Loopback Adapter), assign it
an IP address, and set it to be the primary network adapter – see
Installing Virtual Network Adapter
 Enter the IP address in the hosts file – see Editing the Hosts File.
• Non-network – The computer does not have a network adapter, or the
network adapter has not been configured for use. In this case, it is necessary
to make the same adjustments as described above for the DHCP case.

Installing Virtual Network Adapter

You need to install the Microsoft Loopback Adapter, assign it an IP address, and
set it to be the primary network adapter.

 To install the Microsoft Loopback Adapter:

1. If not already done, navigate to the Control Panel as explained above for
creating a power plan.
2. Open the Device Manager.
The Device Manager dialog box appears.

RADview Installation 2-19

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-16. Windows 7 – Device Manager

3. Right-click the computer name at the top, and select Add legacy hardware
from the shortcut menu.

Figure 2-17. Device Manager, Add Legacy Hardware

The Add Hardware wizard appears.

Notes • The Add Hardware wizard is identical for all supported Windows platforms,
although illustrated for Windows 7 in this example.
• Available options visible in the illustrations vary from PC to PC, depending on
their respective configurations.

2-20 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-18. Add Hardware Wizard – Welcome

4. Click <Next>.

Figure 2-19. Add Hardware Wizard –Specify List

5. Select Install the hardware that I manually select from a list (Advanced), and
click <Next>.
A list of hardware types is displayed.

RADview Installation 2-21

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-20. Add Hardware Wizard – List of Hardware Types

6. Select Network adapters, and click <Next>.

A list of manufacturers and corresponding network adapters is displayed.

Figure 2-21. Add Hardware Wizard – Select Network Adapter

7. Select Microsoft as the manufacture and Microsoft Loopback Adapter as the

network adapter, then click <Next>.

2-22 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

A message is displayed that the wizard is ready to install your hardware.

Figure 2-22. Add Hardware Wizard – Ready to Install

8. Click <Next>.
The adapter is installed, and when the installation is completed, the
following is displayed:

Figure 2-23. Add Hardware Wizard –Installed

RADview Installation 2-23

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

9. Click <Finish> to close the wizard.

 To assign an IP address to the Microsoft Loopback Adapter:

1. Navigate to Network Connections (for instance by clicking <Start> and typing
network connections in the search textbox, then selecting View network
connections).
The computer network connections are displayed.

Figure 2-24. Network Connections

2. Locate the network connection that corresponds to the Microsoft Loopback

Adapter, then right-click it and select Properties.
The Properties dialog box for the network connection appears.

2-24 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-25. Network Connection Properties

3. Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4), and click <Properties>.

The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties dialog box appears.

RADview Installation 2-25

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-26. Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties

4. Select Use the following IP address and do the following (see Figure 2-27 for
an example):
a. In IP address, enter a non-routable IP address that is not used in your
network. Oracle recommends using one of the following non-routable IP
addresses:
 192.168.x.y
(x = 0–255; y = 1–254)
 10.10.10.x
(x = 1–254; recommended value is 10).

Note Be sure to verify that the IP address does not conflict with IP addresses being
used in your network.

b. In Subnet mask, enter 255.255.255.0.

c. Leave all other fields empty.

2-26 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-27. Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties, Filled In

d. Make a note of the IP address, as it is needed for the procedure in Editing

the Hosts File.
e. Click <OK> to close the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
dialog box.
5. Click <Close> to close the network connection Properties dialog box.

RADview Installation 2-27

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

 To set the Microsoft Loopback Adapter as primary:

1. In the Network Connections dialog box (see Figure 2-24), select Advanced >
Advanced Settings.

Note If the Advanced entry is not visible in the Network Connections dialog box, type
<ALT>+n to access it.

The Advanced Settings dialog box appears.

Figure 2-28. Advanced Settings

2. In the Adapters and Bindings tab, verify that the network connection
corresponding to the Microsoft Loopback Adaptor is on the top of the
Connections list. If it is not on top, use the arrows on the side of the dialog
box to move it to the top.

Editing the Hosts File

This section explains how to edit the hosts file in case that one of the following
two scenarios applies:
• Add the IP address entry for the Microsoft Loopback Adaptor.
• Define the RADview server’s IP address used by the client, if the RADview
Server station has more than one IP address and not all IP addresses are
accessible to the client.
• If your computer has multiple IP addresses (not including the Microsoft
Loopback Adapter) and not all IP addresses are accessible to the relevant EMS
client installed on a separate workstation.

2-28 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Note It is necessary to view the computer system information to obtain the ‘computer
name’ and the ‘full computer name’ as explained below.

 To obtain the computer name and open the hosts file:

1. If not already done, open the Control Panel as explained above for creating a
power plan.
2. In the Control Panel, go to System and then right-click Computer and select
Properties.
The System dialog box appears with system information (Figure 2-29 and
Figure 2-30).

Figure 2-29. Windows 8 - System Dialog Box

RADview Installation 2-29

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-30. Windows 7 - System Dialog Box

3. Write down the Computer name and the Full computer name (highlighted
yellow).
4. Navigate to <system-drive>:\Windows\System32\drivers\etc\ and open the
hosts file in an editor.

Note Substitute your Windows installation drive for <system-drive>, usually C or D.

 To edit the hosts file with the IP address for the Microsoft Loop Adaptor:
• In the hosts file, add the following line after the localhost line:
<IP-address> <Full-computer-name> <Computer-name> ORACLE_LOOPBACK
 <IP-address> – Use the IP address assigned to the Microsoft Loopback
Adapter in Installing Virtual Network Adapter

2-30 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

 <Full-computer-name> – Use the Full computer name shown in the

System dialog box
 <Computer-name> – Use the Computer name shown in the System dialog
box.
Using the values shown in the procedures in this section, the line added to the
hosts file would look as follows:
10.10.10.10 JOHANNES-745-W7.ad.rad.co.il JOHANNES-745-W7
ORACLE_LOOPBACK

 To define the RADview server’s IP address used by the client:

• In the hosts file, add the following line:
<server-IP-address> RV_EMS_SERVER
The line to enter looks as follows:
172.17.170.140 RV_EMS_SERVER

 To complete editing the hosts file:

1. Save your changes and close the hosts file.
2. Restart the computer for the changes to take effect.

Installing Oracle
Before initiating the Oracle installation, close all running applications.

 To start installing under Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012:

Notes • If you use an Oracle installation available from a network drive, make sure to
first copy the entire installation to the relevant PC and then install from a local
drive.
• The instructions apply to all supplied Windows platforms, although the screen
images reflect the installation under Windows 7.
• During the installation, you may be asked whether you wish to install a Java
Virtual Machine (JVM) that overwrites files in a certain folder. In this case, you
have to click <Yes> to allow as the Java Virtual Machine is required.

1. Insert the RADview/Windows/Database/Oracle DVD into the DVD drive.

A message appears indicating that the database DVD has been inserted.

Figure 2-31. Oracle Database DVD Inserted – Windows 8

2. Click this message.

DVD options appear.

RADview Installation 2-31

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-32. DVD Options for Oracle DVD – Windows 8

3. Click Folders.
The DVD content appears.

Figure 2-33. Oracle DVD Content – Windows 8

4. Click Setup.
The Oracle installation wizard appears as illustrated in Figure 2-36 (for
Windows 7).

 To start installing under Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008:

5. Insert the RADview/Windows/Database/Oracle DVD into the DVD drive.
The AutoPlay dialog box appears.

2-32 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-34. Oracle DVD AutoPlay Window

6. Click Open Folders to view Files.

The DVD content appears.

Figure 2-35. Oracle DVD Content

7. Click Setup.exe.
The Oracle installation wizard starts as illustrated below.

RADview Installation 2-33

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-36. Installation Wizard Dialog Box – Windows 7

 To install the Oracle database:

Note The instructions apply to all supported Windows platforms, although the screen
images below illustrate the installation under Windows 7.

8. In the first step of the wizard (see above), click <Next>.

The License Agreement dialog box is displayed.

2-34 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-37. Oracle License Agreement

9. Read the license agreement and select I accept the terms of the license
agreement to indicate that you accept the terms of the license agreement,
then click <Next>.
The Select Installation Type dialog box is displayed.

RADview Installation 2-35

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-38. Oracle Installation Type

10. Select Express Install, and click <Next>.

The Oracle Server Software Settings dialog box is displayed.

2-36 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-39. Oracle Installation –Software Settings

11. Leave the default settings, and click <Next>.

Note The default DBA password is oracle.

The Oracle installation starts, and a progress bar is displayed.

RADview Installation 2-37

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-40. Oracle Installation in Progress

Note During the installation, the Oracle setup detects previously installed files. If such
files are detected (for example, DLL files), a confirmation message appears,
asking you whether to replace a specific file or all files. It is recommended to
replace all files, by clicking <Yes to All>.

Figure 2-41. File Replacement Confirmation Message

2-38 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

When the installation completes, a dialog box is displayed notifying you

of successful installation.

Figure 2-42. Oracle Installation Successful

12. Click <Finish> to exit the installation process.

Installing RADview
This section explains how to install. If you already have RADview installed and you
wish to install a newer version, you can upgrade to the newer version by
installing it without uninstalling your existing version, which preserves your
existing database. For further information, refer to Upgrade.

RADview Installation 2-39

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Notes • To properly manage Gmux and IPmux products, you have to select them in the
Select Products dialog box (Figure 2-56) during the RADview installation.
• For circuit management in Gmux and IPmux products, you must install
RV-SC/TDMOIP after installing RADview.
• If you are installing Airmux or LRS-24 devices, Windows SNMP trap service
must be active. To enable this service, open the Control Panel, navigate to
All Control Panel Items > Administrative Tools > Services.
• If you are installing Airmux products, Microsoft .NET Framework version 4.0
must be installed before you start installing RADview. You can use the
installation file provided in the RADview disk to install it if necessary.
• The service corresponding to the database should be active before starting
installation (OracleServiceMNG164). Normally this service starts automatically
and there is no need to start it manually.
• To perform the installation you must be defined as a “Computer
Administrator” (found in the Control Panel under User Accounts).
• Do not press <Cancel> during the installation.

 To start installing under Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012:

Notes • Do not run the RADview setup from a network drive.

• You can run the RADview setup from a local hard drive by copying the
contents of the disk1 directory, then executing setup.bat. In this case, the
Welcome dialog box is the first dialog box that appears (refer to the
instructions starting with Figure 2-47.

13. Insert the RADview DVD into the DVD drive.

A message appears indicating that the RADview DVD has been inserted.

Figure 2-43. RADview DVD Inserted – Windows 8

14. Click this message.

DVD options appear.

2-40 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-44. DVD Options for RADview DVD – Windows 8

15. Click Run AutoRun.exe.

The RADview Setup window is displayed as illustrated in Figure 2-46 (for
Windows 7).

Note It can take up to a minute for the RADview Setup window to appear. If for some
reason the window does not appear automatically, execute setup.bat from the
DVD directory \EMS\disk1.

 To start installing under Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008:

1. Insert the RADview DVD into the CD/DVD drive.
The AutoPlay window is displayed.

Note • You can run the RADview setup from a local hard drive by copying the
contents of the disk1 directory, then executing setup.bat. In this case, the
Welcome dialog box is the first dialog box that appears (refer to the
instructions starting with Figure 2-47).
• Do not run the RADview setup from a network drive.
• The instructions below apply to all supported Windows platforms, although
they are illustrated with Windows 7 screen images.

RADview Installation 2-41

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-45. RADview DVD AutoPlay Window

2. Click Run AutoRun.exe.

The RADview Setup window is displayed as illustrated below.

Note It can take up to a minute for the RADview Setup window to appear. If for some
reason the window does not appear automatically, execute setup.bat from the
DVD directory \EMS\disk1.

2-42 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-46. RADview Setup Window

 To install RADview:
1. In the RADview Setup window click RADview.
The Welcome dialog box is displayed.

RADview Installation 2-43

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-47. Welcome Dialog Box

2. Click <Next>.
The Select Installation Directory dialog box is displayed.

2-44 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-48. Select Folder

3. Click <Next> to install in the default directory.

The Select Installation Type dialog box is displayed.

RADview Installation 2-45

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-49. RADview Setup – Select Installation Type

4. Select Server and Client.

5. Click <Next>.
The Select Installation Method dialog box is displayed.

2-46 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-50. RADview Setup – Select Installation Method

6. Choose the installation method:

 Typical – For installation/upgrade with the default settings.
 Advanced – Includes the International Settings (Figure 2-52) and the
Database Settings (Figure 2-54) dialog boxes.

Note If you choose Typical and this is the first time you are installing RADview, the
Database Settings dialog box is displayed in this case as well.

7. Click <Next>.
The General Information dialog box appears with your station’s system
name displayed.

RADview Installation 2-47

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-51. RADview Setup – General Information Dialog Box

8. Click <Next>.
The OS international information is loaded and then one of the following
occurs:
 If this is an Advanced installation, the International Settings dialog box is
displayed (Figure 2-52).
 If this is a Typical installation and this is the first time you are installing
RADview on this station, the Database Settings dialog box is displayed
(Figure 2-54), and you should skip to step 13 of this procedure.
 If this is a typical installation and you are performing an upgrade, the
Installation Summary dialog box is displayed (Figure 2-59) and you should
skip to step 18 of this procedure.

2-48 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-52. RADview Setup – International Settings

9. Select the Language, Country, Time Zone, and First business day of the week
as needed (the default values for the first three are taken from the operating
system).

Notes • Language support for the RADview packages may apply to specific
components and is subject to change from version to version.
• Select the appropriate Time Zone so that the time that is displayed in Current
Time Test matches the correct time in your country and area.
• You can change the first business day of the week after installation, via the
system console (EMS server parameters – Advanced tab).

RADview Installation 2-49

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

10. Click <Next>.

The Target Database Selection dialog box is displayed.

Figure 2-53. RADview Setup – Select Map and Database

11. Select Standalone EMS Network Manager with Oracle Database to install
RADview.
12. Click <Next>.
The installation attempts to connect to the Oracle database, and when
the connection is established the Database Settings dialog box is
displayed.

2-50 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-54. Database Settings Dialog Box

13. Set the option to create new database according to the following:
 For first-time installation on this station or if you want to overwrite the
existing database, select the option to create a new database
 If you are upgrading and you want to keep the existing database, do not
select the option to create a new database (by default the option to
create a new database is not selected if you are upgrading).

Note If this is not a first-time installation and you create a new database, your map is
deleted along with all network elements.

14. Verify that the values displayed are correct. If you are upgrading RADview,
the displayed user and password should be the ones formerly used for the
database. You must use them to be able to connect to the database.

RADview Installation 2-51

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Notes • The default DBA user password for system is system

• The default EMS user password for ems is ems.

15. Click <Next>.

 If you selected the option to create a new database, a warning message
is displayed that your database information will be lost if you continue.

Figure 2-55. Database Warning Message

 If you did not select the option to create a new database, the Select
Products dialog box is displayed; skip to step 17.
16. Click <OK> to continue.
The Select Products dialog box is displayed. All products are selected by
default.

Note If there are products that you do not want to install, you can select the
corresponding product group from the list on the left to display a list of products
on the right side of the dialog box, and then clear the products that you do not
want to install. The <All Products> can be clicked to toggle between all products
selected and none selected.

2-52 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-56. RADview Setup – Select Products

17. Click <Next>.

If Airmux or LRS-24 devices were selected for installation, and Windows
SNMP trap service is not active, a dialog box is displayed with the
message that Windows SNMP trap service must be active in Automatic
mode. It also includes information where to find the SNMP Trap Services.

RADview Installation 2-53

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-57. SNMP Trap Service Required – Windows 7

Figure 2-58. SNMP Trap Service Required – Windows 8

When the condition above was not true or it has been fixed, the
Installation Summary dialog box is displayed, showing the products that
you selected for installation.

2-54 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-59. Installation Summary Dialog Box

18. Click <Next>.

The installation starts, and a progress bar is displayed.

RADview Installation 2-55

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-60. RADview Setup in Progress

Note During the installation, the RADview setup detects any previously installed files
that are used by the EMS system. If such files are detected, a confirmation
message appears, asking you whether to replace a specific file or all files. It is
recommended to replace all files, by clicking Yes to All.

Figure 2-61. File Replacement Confirmation Message

19. When installation of all RADview components is completed, the Installation

Complete dialog box is displayed.

2-56 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-62. EMS Installation Complete

20. Click <Finish> to close the dialog box.

21. Return to the RADview Setup window (Figure 2-46) and click <Exit>.
The Setup complete dialog box appears stating that you must restart your
computer for the installation to take effect.

Figure 2-63. Setup Complete

RADview Installation 2-57

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

22. Click <Restart> to restart your computer.

Once the restart is completed, RADview is fully installed. In order to start
working with RADview after initial installation, you need to do the
following:
a. Install licenses to enable you to work with the RADview devices and
the map (see Installing Licenses).
b. Create map icons for the devices (refer to Chapter 3).
c. Enable the Windows Telnet client if necessary (refer to Enabling
Telnet Client)

Note The RADview setup disables hibernate and sleep mode upon installation, by
creating and adding the power plan RV-EMS to the computer power options. For
additional information and instructions, refer to Creating a Power Plan for
RADview.

Installing Additional Devices

To add support for additional devices, you have to re-install RADview as explained
under Installing RADview and select all the desired devices (current and new) as
illustrated in Figure 2-71.

Notes • Verify that your license has enough license points for the additional devices.
For further information, refer to Licensing in Chapter 4.
• If you selected all supported devices by when installing RADview as illustrated
in Figure 2-71, all supported devices are already installed.

Installing Additional Clients

If necessary, additional Windows and Unix clients can be installed.

Installing Windows Clients

If needed, additional Windows-based clients can be installed on separate
Windows stations.

Notes • Make sure that client and server belong to the same version of RADview
• Do not run the RADview setup from a network drive.
• You can run the RADview setup from a local hard drive by copying the
contents of the disk1 directory, then executing setup.bat. In this case, the
Welcome dialog box is the first dialog box that appears (refer to the
instructions starting at step 3).
• It can take up to a minute for the RADview Setup window to appear. If for
some reason the window does not appear automatically, execute setup.bat
from the DVD directory \EMS\disk1.

1. Insert the RADview DVD into the CD/DVD drive and follow the instructions
under Installing RADview until the first step of the wizard appears as
illustrated below.

2-58 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-64. RADview Setup Window

2. In the RADview Setup window click RADview.

The Welcome dialog box is displayed.

RADview Installation 2-59

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-65. RADview Setup – Welcome Dialog Box

3. Click <Next>.
The Select Installation Directory dialog box is displayed.

2-60 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-66. RADview Setup – Select Directory

4. Click <Next> to install in the default directory.

The Select Installation Type dialog box is displayed.

RADview Installation 2-61

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-67. RADview Setup – Select Installation Type

5. Select the Client Only installation type, and click <Next>.

The Select Installation Method dialog box is displayed.

2-62 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-68. RADview Setup – Select Installation Method

6. Select Advanced and click <Next>.

The General Information dialog box is displayed.

RADview Installation 2-63

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-69. General Information Dialog Box

7. Enter the following:

 Station Name: Type the host name of the client station.
 Master Server Address: Type the IP address of the master server Unix
station. Alternatively, you can type the station name (returned by the
command hostname). If you enter the station name instead of the IP
address, edit the file hosts in C:\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc\ to add
the IP address and station name of the master server Unix station.

Note For a single-station installation, any string of characters without a space can be
used for Zone/Area names.

8. Click <Next>.
The International Settings dialog box is displayed.

2-64 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-70. International Settings

9. Select the Language, Country, and Time Zone for your station, and click
<Next>. The default values are taken from the operating system.

Notes • Language support for the RADview packages may apply to specific
components and is subject to change from version to version.
• Select the appropriate Time Zone so that the time that is displayed in Current
Time Test matches the correct time in your country and area.

The Select Products dialog box is displayed. All products are selected by
default.

RADview Installation 2-65

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Note If there are products that you do not want to install, you can select the
corresponding product group from the list on the left to display a list of products
on the right side of the dialog box, and then clear the products that you do not
want to install.

Figure 2-71. Select Products

10. Click <Next>.

The Installation Summary dialog box is displayed.

2-66 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-72. Installation Summary

11. Click <Next>.

The installation starts, and a progress bar is displayed.

RADview Installation 2-67

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-73. Installation in Progress

12. When the installation completes, the Installation Complete dialog box is
displayed.

2-68 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-74. Installation Complete

13. Click <Finish> to close the dialog box.

14. Return to the RADview Setup window (Figure 2-46) and click <Exit>.
The Setup complete dialog box appears stating that you must restart your
computer for the installation to take effect.

Figure 2-75. Setup Complete

RADview Installation 2-69

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

15. Click <Restart> to restart your computer.

Once the restart is completed, RADview is fully installed and ready for use
on the Windows client.

Installing Unix Clients

Note Make sure that client and server belong to the same version of RADview. If the
versions do not match, an error message appears and the relevant RADview client
does not run.

 To install a Unix client:

1. Log in as root.
2. Insert the RADview DVD into the CD/DVD drive.
3. Type: cd /cdrom/cdrom0/radview/disk1.
4. Type: ./setup.
The Welcome dialog box is displayed.

Notes • It can take up to a minute for the dialog box to appear.

• You can run the RADview setup from a local hard drive by copying the
contents of the disk1 directory, then executing setup. Do not run the RADview
setup from a network drive.

2-70 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-76. Welcome Dialog Box

5. In the Welcome dialog box, click <Next>.

The Select Installation Type dialog box is displayed.

RADview Installation 2-71

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-77. Select Installation Type – Client Only

6. Select Client Only and then click <Next>.

The Select Installation Method dialog box is displayed.

2-72 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-78. Select Installation Method

7. Choose the installation method:

 Typical – For installation/upgrade with the default settings.
 Advanced – Includes the International Settings dialog box.
8. Click <Next>.
 If you selected Typical, the Product Selection dialog appears
(Figure 2-80).
 If you selected Advanced, the International Settings dialog box appears
(Figure 2-79).

RADview Installation 2-73

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-79. International Settings

Note Language support for the RADview packages may apply to specific components
and is subject to change from version to version.

9. Click <Next>.
The Product Selection dialog box appears.

2-74 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-80. Product Selection

10. Select the desired products or select All Products to include all products
supported with the current version of RADview and then click <Next>.
The list of selected products appears.

RADview Installation 2-75

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-81. Product Selection

11. Click <Next> to start the installation.

A progress bar indicates the progress of the installation. When the
installation completes, the Installation Completed dialog box is displayed.

2-76 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-82. Progress

12. When the installation is completed and the Installation Completed dialog box
appears, click <Finish>.
The installation is complete.

RADview Installation 2-77

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-83. Installation Completed

Setting Up the License Manager

The License Manager consists of a License Server and the License Service
Manager. The following scenarios are possible and require the steps outlined and
explained according to the relevant scenario.

Using Default Settings

The following default scenarios are possible and do not require additional steps:
• RADview Server and Client installed on the same station. License Server and
License Service Manager are installed together with RADview on the same
station as well.
• RADview Client and Server installed on different stations. The License Service
Manager on the client side accesses the License server on the RADview Server
side.

2-78 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Accessing a Different License Server

To retrieve the licenses from a different location, you have to specify the
respective station in the License Service Manager. This scenario may apply if you
want to use the licenses associated with a different RADview server.

 To define a different License Server:

1. From the Start menu, select
All Programs > Network Manager > General > License Service Manager.
The License Service Manager appears. For an example for the License
Service manager dialog box, refer to Figure 2-86.
2. From the menu, select Options > Client Side Configuration.
The Client Side Configuration dialog box appears as illustrated below.

Figure 2-84. Client Side Configuration Dialog

3. Under Server IP Address, enter the IP address of the station that hosts the
RADview server with the desired License Server.
4. Make sure that the other settings match the settings on the other side.
 If you have to adapt the settings to different settings on the other side,
refer to Table 2-9.
 If you have to change settings on the other side to match the settings on
your client side, refer to Configuring Access to a License Server.
Table 2-9. Client Side Configuration

Parameter Function

Server CORBA Mode For future use

Socket Port The server's socket port

Valid values: ≥ 1000 (blank is not a valid value)

INS Port The server's INS port

Valid values: ≥ 1000 (blank is not a valid value)

Server IP Address The server's IP Address

RADview Installation 2-79

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

• If you make any changes to the Server Side Configuration, you must restart
Note
the License Server before they can take effect.
• Once you restart the License Service Manager, the license profile defined for
the new License server applies. For additional information on licenses, refer to
Licensing in Chapter 4.

Configuring Access to a License Server

This section explains how to configure the ports used to communicate with the
License Service Manager on your RADview server side.

 To define the communication ports on the server side:

1. From the Start menu, select
All Programs > Network Manager > General > License Manager.
The License Service Manager appears. For an example for the License
Service manager dialog box, refer to Figure 2-86.
2. From the menu, select Options > Server Side Configuration.
The Server Side Configuration dialog box appears as illustrated in
Figure 2-85.
3. Make sure that the Socket and INS Port settings match for the server and the
relevant client sides as explained in Table 2-10.

Figure 2-85. Server Side Configuration Dialog

Table 2-10. Server Side Configuration Parameters

Parameter Function

Socket Port Socket Port of the Server

Valid values: ≥ 1000 (blank is not a valid value)
INS Port INS Port of the Server
Valid values: ≥ 1000 (blank is not a valid value)

2-80 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Specifying a License Server Location from the System Console

You can also specify the license server on a different RADview server station via
the System Console as explained under Working with RADview Settings and
Utilities in Chapter 4.

Installing Licenses
Each RADview license is associated with a single management station. This
station is identified by its IP address/MAC address for Windows-based stations. If
you do not know for which IP address/MAC address to obtain the license, refer to
Frequently Asked Questions in Chapter 7.
If you need a RADview license for your RADview package, you can activate it at
the RAD Value Point website (via MyRAD or the Customer Information
application). You can also add license points at the RAD Value Point website.
Details on using RAD Value Point can be obtained from your local RAD distributor.

Note The Windows station must be connected to the LAN/IP network in order to work
with the license.

The following licenses are required:

• ENW – Stands for Equivalent Node Weight status and specifies the max
number of RAD devices supported on the network.
• EMS-MAP – Enables opening the RADview Network Manager.
• EMS-Clients – Enables working with more than five RADview Network
Manager clients simultaneously.
• RV-LIC/SERVICE-MANAGEMENT – Enables working with RADview-Service
Manager and RADview-Service Center.
• RV-LIC/PERFORMANCE-MANAGEMENT – Enables accessing the Performance
Monitor.
• DXC-100 – Enables working with the DXC-100 shelf view application for
standalone or stack.
For additional information on Licensing and license types, refer to Licensing in
Chapter 4.

Note • Without ENW and EMS-MAP licenses, RADview does not log you on. A message
returns indicating that no sufficient license is installed.
• No EMS-Clients license is required for up to five RADview clients logged on
simultaneously.

 To install licenses:

Note You have to install each license separately. You cannot select and install multiple
licenses.

1. Open the License Service Manager by selecting All Programs > Network
Manager > General > License Service Manager.
The License Service Manager dialog box appears.

RADview Installation 2-81

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-86. License Service Manager

2. From the menu, select File > Add License.

The Open License File dialog box is displayed.

Figure 2-87. Open License File – With all Possible License Files Except for DXC-100

2-82 Installation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

3. Navigate to the license folder and select the desired license file, and then
click <Save>.
The Open License File dialog box closes and the license is installed.
4. Repeat this procedure for every license file you need to install.

Removing Licenses
If you decide not to use an already-installed license (for example the DXC-100
license) or if you installed a temporary license that has expired, you may wish to
remove the respective license file.

Note Expired temporary licenses appear red in the list.

 To remove a license file:

1. In the License Service Manager dialog (see Figure 2-86), select the desired
row.
2. From the menu, select File > Remove License.
 If the selected row has a red background, it is removed from the General
tab list.
 If the removal of this row causes the number of total installed license
points to be higher or equal than the number of consumed license points,
the row is removed from the General tab list.
 If removing this row causes the number of total installed license points to
be lower than the number of consumed license points, the following
warning appears.

Figure 2-88. Removing a License - Warning

• Click <OK> to confirm, or <Cancel> to cancel this operation.

The license is uninstalled and the row s removed from the General tab
list.

Note If there are no additional valid ENW and/or EMS-MAP licenses installed, you
cannot continue to use management services until another valid license is added.

Enabling Telnet Client

By default the Telnet client is disabled in Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008. It
must be enabled, as it is necessary for RADview functions.

RADview Installation 2-83

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

 To enable the Telnet client in Windows 7:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Programs or Programs and Features.
2. Click Turn Windows features on or off.
3. In the Windows Features dialog box, select Telnet Client.
4. Click <OK>.

 To enable the Telnet client in Windows Server 2008:

1. Open Server Manager by selecting Start > Server Manager.
2. In the Server Manager left pane, click Features and then click Add Features in
the right pane.
3. In the Select Features window, scroll down the list of features and select
Telnet Client, then click <Next>.
4. In the Confirm Installation Selections window, click <Install>.
5. When installation is completed, click <Close>.

Note Alternatively, you can enable the Telnet client by typing the following in a
command prompt window:
servermanagercmd –install Telnet-Client

2.3 Upgrade
Earlier versions of RADview installed can be upgraded as explained below.

Notes Verify that your hardware and the installed Windows version are supported. For
additional information, refer to Requirements in Chapter 1.

Some files related to RADview-Performance Manager are overwritten during the

upgrade process.
These files are located in the folders listed below, which are backed up in the
automatically created backup folder C:\RV32\ems\utils\backups\pm_yyMMdd:
• XML files under C:\RV32\ems\conf\pm. These files are not overwritten,
although backed up as well for safety reasons.
• PM files under C:\RV32\ems\conf\pm contents
• apacheConf under C:\RV32\apache\apache-tomcat-7.0.2\conf contents
• apachePmImages under C:\RV32\apache\apache-tomcat-
7.0.2\webapps\pmweb\pm_images contents

Note yyMMdd stands for the installation date. If the installation date is the 29/9/2014,
the backup folder is called C:\RV32\ems\utils\backups\pm_140929

2-84 Upgrade RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

 To upgrade RADview running with the Oracle database:

1. Review the hardware and software requirements for the current version of
RADview to verify that your station and the expected network size comply
with these requirements.
2. Install the new RADview version over your currently installed version of
RADview as explained under Installing RADview.
3. Install additional licenses as needed. Refer to Installing Licenses for further
information and instructions.

Note You can install the new version of RADview over the current one only if the
current one is not more than two versions older than the new version. To
upgrade an older version requires uninstalling RADview, manually deleting the
RV32 folder and then re-installing RADview.

 To upgrade RADview running with the Informix database:

1. Install the required Oracle database as specified under Software
Requirements in Chapter 1.
2. Install the Oracle based RADview setup associated with the same version of
your currently installed Informix based RADview setup.
For example, if the Informix based RADview setup is Version 2.9, the Oracle
based RADview setup that you install must also be Version 2.9.
3. Refer to the system user manuals of the respective RADview versions for
additional information on the upgrade and migration procedure.
4. Once the migration process is complete, install the new RADview version over
the previously installed RADview version as explained under Installing
RADview.
5. Install the new RADview version on a new station with a supported operating
system according to the hardware and software requirements listed under
Requirements in Chapter 1.
6. Create a backup on the current station as explained under Backing Up System
Components in Chapter 4.
7. Restore the content to the newly installed station as explained under
Restoring Components in Chapter 4.
The table below lists supported backup & restore combinations.

Table 2-11. Supported Backup &Restore Options across Windows Operating Systems

From To Windows 7 32-bit Windows 7 64-bit Windows 2008 Server 64-bit

Windows XP √

Windows 7 32-bit √ √ √

Windows 7 64-bit √ √ √

Windows 2003 Server 32-bit √ √ √

Windows 2008 Server 64-bit √ √ √

RADview Upgrade 2-85

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Notes • Newer RADview versions can still be installed on Windows XP and Windows
2003 Server for migration and upgrade procedures, although full support for
new functionalities and options of RADview is not guaranteed.
• Make sure to upgrade all clients that access the upgraded RADview server.
• Make sure to install additional licenses as needed. Refer to Installing Licenses
for further information and instructions.

2.4 Uninstallation

Uninstalling RADview

Notes • If you have other RADview system packages installed on your workstation (e.g.
RV-SC/TDMoIP) and you uninstall RADview then you must also uninstall the
other RADview system packages
• The RADview system packages should be uninstalled in the opposite order in
which they were installed.
• The instructions below apply to all supported Windows platforms, although the
steps are illustrated with Windows 7 dialogs.

 To uninstall RADview:
1. Go to the Control Panel as explained above and click Programs and Features.
The list of installed programs appears.

Figure 2-89. Installed Programs

2-86 Uninstallation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

2. In the list, right-click RADview and click <Uninstall/Change>.

The RADview Uninstallation wizard appears.

Figure 2-90. RADview Uninstall Welcome

3. Click <Next>.
The RADview system and all its components are uninstalled.

RADview Uninstallation 2-87

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-91. RADview Uninstall in Progress

Once RADview has been uninstalled, the Uninstallation Complete dialog

box is displayed.

2-88 Uninstallation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-92. RADview Uninstallation Complete

4. Click <Finish> to exit the wizard.

5. Delete the RV32 folder from the installation drive.
6. Reboot the computer.

Note If you plan to uninstall Oracle as well, you can postpone the reboot until Oracle is
uninstalled.

RADview Uninstallation 2-89

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Uninstalling the Oracle Database

This section describes how to uninstall the Oracle database.

Note If the uninstallation is unsuccessful, consult the Troubleshooting section of this

manual for a procedure to uninstall manually.

 To uninstall Oracle:
1. Insert the Oracle database DVD into the CD/DVD drive.
2. Run Setup.exe from the CD.
The Oracle installation wizard starts.

Figure 2-93. Installation Wizard Dialog Box

3. Click <Next>.
The License Agreement dialog box is displayed.

2-90 Uninstallation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-94. Oracle License Agreement

4. Read the license agreement and select I accept the terms of the license
agreement to indicate that you accept the terms of the license agreement,
then click <Next>.
The Select Installation Type dialog box is displayed.

RADview Uninstallation 2-91

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-95. Oracle Installation Type

5. Select Advanced Install, and click <Next>.

The Oracle Database Setup Type dialog box is displayed.

2-92 Uninstallation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-96. Oracle Uninstallation – Database Setup Type

6. Select Uninstall Oracle Database Server, and click <Next>.

The Oracle Server Software Settings dialog box is displayed.

RADview Uninstallation 2-93

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

Figure 2-97. Oracle Uninstallation –Software Settings

7. Leave the default settings, and click <Next>.

The Oracle uninstallation starts.

2-94 Uninstallation RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-98. Oracle Uninstallation in Progress

A dialog box is displayed informing you once the uninstallation completes.

8. Click <Finish> to exit the uninstallation process.
9. Restart the computer.

RADview Uninstallation 2-95

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup User’s Manual

2-96 Uninstallation RADview

 Chapter 3
Operation
This chapter describes the following operation activities:
• Running RADview
• Using the RADview GUI
• Working with Utilities
• Accessing Devices for Configuration.

3.1 Running RADview

•

Notes • After installing RADview, it is necessary to restart the workstation and wait at
least 2–3 minutes before starting to work with the RADview system. This is
required for the Oracle database to initialize its tables and for the RADview
Server service to start, before using the system for the first time.
• RADview does not operate in an NAT environment.
• If the Low Memory Detected message appears, click <OK> and refer to
Troubleshooting in Chapter 7 for further instructions.

Logging Into RADview

Login is performed via the RADview Network Manager, which provides the
RADview user interface.

Notes • For the very first login (before users are defined) use the default user:
Username=root, Password=root
• You must install a license for the EMS Map feature to be able to login to
RADview
• If you want to have more than five users logged in to the RADview Network
Manager simultaneously, you must install a license for multiple RADview clients
• The same user can have many open sessions (logged in from different
sessions/terminals, subject to the limit on multiple RADview Network Manager
clients as mentioned above
• You can change your password or another user’s password. Refer to Chapter 6
for instructions.

 To start RADview:
• From the Windows Start menu, select
All Programs > Network Manager > RADview > Network Manager.

RADview Ver. Running RADview 3-1

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

The RADview Network Manager and login dialog box appear, with the
RADview server name and Logged Out displayed in the lower right
corner of the RADview Network Manager (see Figure 3-1).

Figure 3-1. RADview Network Manager and Login Dialog Box

1. Enter your user name and password and click <OK>.

The RADview Network Manager opens. The user name and the server
name are displayed in the lower right corner. Refer to Using the RADview
GUI for an explanation on working with the RADview Network Manager.

Note • If the user name is displayed in yellow instead of green, this indicates there is
a problem with one of the RADview services, which can be viewed via the
system console (see Chapter 4 for details on the RADview services).
• If you did not install the appropriate license or exceed available license points
or the number of clients, you receive an error message. In this case, refer to
Installing Licenses in Chapter 2 for information and instructions on installing
the required license(s).
• If the client and server versions do not match, an error message appears
stating the currently installed client and server versions.

3-2 Running RADview RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Logging Out of RADview

In addition to manual log out, the server automatically logs you out after a
specified time if for some reason the connection with the server is lost.

 To manually log out:

• From the RADview Network Manager menu, select File > Logout.
You are logged out. Logged Out is displayed in the bottom right-hand
corner as illustrated in Figure 3-1.
You can log back in by entering your user name and password in the Login dialog
box. If this dialog box does not show, select File > Login from the RADview
Network Manager menu.

3.2 Using the RADview GUI

RADview is an element management, network management, and service
management network application that allows configuring and managing devices
and network services. In order to facilitate these tasks, users can switch between
various work spaces that provide the relevant tasks and resources.
This section introduces the RADview Network Manager GUI, and lists and explains
the various work spaces under The RADview GUI. Figure 3-2 illustrates the
RADview GUI using the Topology view as an example.

Menu
Work Space
Selection

Work
Space
Navigation
Panes

Task
Auxiliary
Bar
Pane

Figure 3-2. The RADview GUI (Topology View)

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-3

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Note • When logging in for the first time, all devices and levels n the map may appear
superimposed at the same spot. To display them correctly, click Layout
and then select a layout option, for example Orthogonal Layout.
• When logging in again, the work space from where you logged out appears.
For example, if you logged off from your last session after working in the Jobs
work space, the Jobs work space shows when you log in the next time.

The RADview GUI

As illustrated above, the RADview GUI consists of the following components:
• Menu bar. Opens various applications and tools.
• Work space selection. This area is used to select the various work spaces.
• Work space. Provides device maps, task lists, lists of services, catalog entries
etc. For additional information, refer to the summary in Table 3-1.
• Navigation panes. Navigate devices, user profiles, catalog entries, filters etc.
Various navigation panes appear, depending on the work space you choose.
• Auxiliary Pane. Displays summaries, lists or events etc, depending on the
currently selected work space. For additional information, refer to the
relevant section.
• Task bar. Displays the user name, the name or the IP address of the active
sever and the connection status.
RADview GUI components are associated with the work space you select as
explained in the table below.

Table 3-1. Window Elements of Work Spaces

Selection Work Space Navigation Panes Auxiliary Pane

Topology map(s). For • Network Element Repository. Displays Event Browser. Events and
additional the managed devices on their alarms of network
information, refer to respective levels, adds single devices elements. For additional
Working with or groups of devices. The network information, refer to
Topology repository tree appears when Chapter 7.
selecting the Topology view
• Groups. Dynamic user groups, for
additional information, refer to
Chapter 6.

Resources*. Devices Filters. Options to display selected Details, associated alarms,

and interfaces of resources services, events and
devices alarms associated with the
resource selected from the
list in the Resources
workspace.

3-4 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Selection Work Space Navigation Panes Auxiliary Pane

Configuration Status. • Network Element Repository Archive Files. Displays

Displays a list of • Groups inactive configuration files
configuration statuses for the selected device
of one or more
devices

Jobs Table. List of • Network Element Repository Reports. Job reports

jobs. The Jobs utility • Groups
enables transferring
files to/from network
elements. For
additional
information, refer to
Chapter 4.

Catalog*

Services*

Business Entities*.

Transport*

Note
Work spaces marked with * are relevant for RADview-Service Manager only.

Customizing the RADview View

You can dock or auto-hide navigation panes, displays, the work space etc. The
sections below provide instructions on customzing the various GUI components
using the Topology work space as an example.

Customizing the Windows

You can arrange the layout of the windows and the Event Browser in the
RADview Network Manager to fit specific operational needs or to suit personal
convenience. They provide the following customization features:
• Dockable. The windows can be docked inside the RADview Network Manager
or changed to floating windows
• Autohide. The windows can be hidden when not in use.

Docking Windows
You can undock each dockable window component so that it becomes a floating
window, and you can redock it, in whatever position is suitable.

Note You can specify dockable windows by selecting Floatable Views in the Look and
Feel parameters in the Preferences dialog boxes (see Table 3-4).

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-5

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

 To undock a window:

• On the window title bar, click Toggle floating to change the window to a
floating window.
The window is undocked and becomes a floating window.

 To dock a floating window:

1. On the window title bar, click Toggle floating to change the window to a
dockable window.
Or
Right-click the title bar of the window and in the submenu that appears, clear
Floating and select Dockable

Figure 3-3. Dockable Window Title Bar Right-click Submenu

2. Drag the window to the desired position.

Autohiding Windows
You can autohide the windows when it is not necessary to view their contents.

 To enable the autohide feature:

• On the window title bar, click Toggle auto-hide .

The window is hidden and a corresponding tab is displayed at the edge of
the screen (see Figure 3-4).

 To disable the autohide feature:

• Click the window tab.

The window is restored temporarily. The Toggle auto-hide icon

indicates that the autohide feature is still active for the window (see
Figure 3-5).

• To permanently restore the window, click Toggle auto-hide .

The window is restored permanently.

3-6 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Figure 3-4. RADview Network Manager, Network Element Repository Window Hidden

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-7

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Figure 3-5. RADview Network Manager, Network Element Repository Window with Autohide Still
Active (Windows)

Setting the Preferences

You can modify various parameters in the RADview Network Manager to control
the window and map behavior, the appearance etc. The parameters you can
modify are listed below and explained on the next pages:
• General
• Security
• Window Settings
• Map Settings
• Wallpaper

3-8 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

 To set the preferences:

1. From the RADview Network Manager menu bar, select Options > Preferences
The Preferences dialog box appears, with the General tab displayed.

Figure 3-6. Preferences Dialog Box –General Tab

2. Configure the preferences in the tabs as desired, referring to the following

sections. When you change the parameters in a tab, click <Apply> to apply
the changes.

Setting General Parameters

This section explains the general parameters in the Preferences dialog box. The
General Settings are illustrated in Figure 3-6.

Table 3-2. Preferences Parameters –General

Parameter Description

Master Server Settings

Master Server Address Selects the IP address of the RADview server

Default: The RADview server selected during installation

Network Element Repository Settings

Context Specifies an existing level to be displayed in the NER pane or adds

a new level and displays this new level in the NER
Note: You have to log out and then back in for this setting to take
effect.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-9

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Parameter Description

Regional and Language Settings

Language Selects the interface language.

Default: The language selected during installation
Note: Multi-language support for RADview packages may apply to
specific components and is subject to change from version to
version.
Country Selects the country for your RADview installation
Default: The country selected during installation

Time Zone

Time Zone Selects the time zone for your RADview installation
Default: The time zone selected during installation

Current Time Test Displays the current date and time

EMS Monitor
Monitor Interval (sec) Specifies time interval for monitoring EMS server status

Viewing Security Domain Settings

This section displays how a device is identified as allowed or restricted to specific
users in the security domain.

Note These settings are read-only.

Table 3-3. Preferences Parameters – Security

Parameter Description

Check Security Domain by Name If checked, the device is identified by its node name
Check Security Domain by Net If checked, the device is identified by its IP address
Address

Modifying Windows Settings

This section explains the parameters in the Preferences dialog box that control
the window settings for the RADview Network Manager.

Table 3-4. Preferences Parameters – Windows Settings

Parameter Description

Look & Feel Settings

Look & Feel Vsnet

Eclipse
Eclipse3x
Xerto
Metal
RADview
Default: RADview

3-10 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Parameter Description

Look & Feel Motif

Metal
RADview
Default: RADview
Themes (for Office 2003 L&F only)

Windows Settings

Always on Top If selected, other windows cannot overlap the RADview Network
Manager window; it is always on top of other windows
Rearrangable Views If selected, you can rearrange the position of the panes in the
RADview Network Manager, such as the Network Element
Repository or Groups
Default: cleared
Note: When you change this parameter, you must log out and back
in before the change is applied.
Floatable Views If selected, panes are floatable and dockable (see Docking
Windows for details on docking)
Default: cleared
Note: When you change this parameter, you must log out and back
in before the change is applied.

Modifying Map Settings

This section explains the parameters in the Preferences dialog box that control
map settings.

Note When you change a map parameter, the change is applied only to maps that are
opened after changing the setting; it is not applied to maps that are already
open. To see the change in a map that is open, you must close and reopen the
map.

Table 3-5. Preferences Parameters – Map Settings

Parameter Description

Opened Maps –Controls whether more than one map can be opened simultaneously

Multiple If selected, you can open more than one map (each map opens a
new tab in the map pane)
Single If selected, you can open only one map. When you open another
map, the current map is automatically closed.

Duplication Policies

Allow Duplicated Net Addresses If checked, you can create more than one network element with
the same IP address

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-11

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Parameter Description

Graph Settings

Low Resolution Scale Trigger This specifies the resolution of the map. The higher the number,
the less detail can be seen.
Range of values: 0.1 to 1.0, in increments of 0.1
Default: 0.5
Mouse Zoom Reverse Default: Cleared
Animation Enabled If checked, applying a new layout to a map displays animated
movement of the network elements.
Default: Cleared
Note: This setting can cause excessive CPU load when the layout is
changed for large maps.
Show parent clouds If checked, shows the parent cloud of a cloud on the map.
Default: Checked

Node Settings

Embedded Title Default: Cleared

Framed If checked, a frame shows around the node and its label.
Default: Cleared

Transparent Background Specifies the network element background, as follows:

Selected – The background is transparent, for example:

Cleared – The background is colored according to the status of the

network element, for example:

Label Settings

Floating Labels If checked, title moves with the node. If cleared, you have to move
the title separately, allowing you to individually position it.
Default: Checked

Modifying Wallpaper Parameters

This section explains the parameters in the Preferences dialog box that control
the wallpaper.

3-12 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Table 3-6. Preferences Parameters – Wallpaper

Parameter Description

MAP Wallpaper Settings

Gradient Color Specifies if background should be colored with gradient shading. If

checked, the next three parameters are available.
Default: Checked
Gradient Orientation Specifies gradient orientation:
Vertical
Horizontal
Start Color Specifies the gradient shading according to setting of Gradient
Orientation:
Vertical – Top color
Horizontal – Left color
End Color Specifies the gradient shading according to setting of Gradient
Orientation:
Vertical – Bottom color
Horizontal: – Right color
Plain Color Specifies the color for the background, available if Gradient Color is
cleared.

Customizing Tables
This section provides an overview of customizable tables, which are used by some
device shelf view GUIs and RADview system tables such as Software File
Management, and the tables in the workspaces Configuration, Jobs,
Customers/Providers (Business Entities), and Resources. The customizable tables
in devices provide the customizing functions via buttons, and the system-level
customizable tables provide the customizing functions via a toolbar and right-click
menus.
This section describes only the customizable table functions. For device-specific
configuration details, refer to the device agent manual. For details of
system-level tables refer to the relevant sections in this manual.
Customizable tables provide the following options:
• Show/hide a details pane that displays all the fields of a particular table entry
(device shelf view GUIs only)
• Customize the displayed table data, by adding/removing/reordering displayed
fields
• Auto-resize column widths to make all data visible
• Sort the displayed table data according to one or multiple columns (ascending
or descending)
• Search the table data
• Filter the displayed table data
• Save customized table view for later use, load previously saved views
• Export the displayed table data.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-13

 Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

The following shows the customizable toolbar in system tables.

Figure 3-7. Customizable Table Toolbar in System Tables

Figure 3-8. View Submenu from System Table Toolbar

The following customizable table items appear in every right-click menu in system
tables that have customizable table functions.

Figure 3-9. Customizable Table Functions in Right-Click Menus in System Tables

Table 3-7. Customizable Table Functions in System Tables

Toolbar Menu Description

View Click to open a submenu that includes commands for customizing views and
columns.

Not Provides a quick search function via an editable dropdown box, containing a list of
applicable previously typed items. If the list does not contain any items, the default text
Search appears in italic font.
You can type search text in the box or select a previously typed item from the list,
then click <Enter> to search.
To remove an item from the list, select the item in the dropdown box and click
<Delete>.

Search Click to search the table.

Not Provides a quick search function according to a certain criteria via a text field. If
applicable there is no list entry, the default text Search appears in italic font.
To filter list entries, type search text in the text field and then click <Enter> to only
display the list entries matching the criteria you entered.

Not Provides a quick filter function via a non-editable dropdown box, containing a list of
applicable previously saved filters.
To apply a filter, select it in the box. Alternatively, you can start to type the filter
name; it is applied if filter name is in list (even partially).
To remove the filtering from the table, select No Filter.

3-14 Using the RADview GUI RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Toolbar Menu Description

Filter Click to perform advanced filtering of the table data

Advanced Click to perform advanced filtering of the table data

Filter

Sort Click to sort the table

Export Click to export the table data

Table

Print Table Click to print the table

The following examples show a device customizable table.

Figure 3-10. Customizable Table

Figure 3-11. Customizable Table (Windows 7)

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-15

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

A right-click menu on the table header of system tables and device tables
provides quick access to auto-resizing columns and customizing the displayed
table data.

Figure 3-12. Table Header Right-Click Menu – Device

Figure 3-13. Table Header Right-Click Menu – System

3-16 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Table 3-8. Header Right-Click Menu

Menu Entry Description

Auto Resize Column <Column Name> Auto-resize the specific column such that all the data in the column
can be displayed

Auto Resize All Columns Auto-resize all columns such that all the data in all the columns can
be displayed

[List of column names] Each column name appears in the menu. Visible columns are checked
and hidden columns are unchecked.
Select a visible column to hide it.
Select a hidden column to make it visible as the last column

Back To Default Columns Set default visible and hidden columns

Select All Rows Select all rows, same as <CTRL-A>

Clear Selection Deselect all rows (if any selected)

A customizable table in a device shelf-view GUI consists of rows of table data in

the upper part, and a detail pane in the lower part. You can change the size of
the table data relative to the details pane by dragging the split bar between
them. In some devices the default display of the table does not show all the
fields.

Note The customizable tables in some RADview devices may not have all the functions
described in this section. Also, some devices could have additional device-specific
buttons in their customizable tables.

Table 3-9. Buttons in Customizable Table

Button Description

Add Add an entry to the table

Change Change the selected table entry

Remove Remove the selected table entry

View Click to open a submenu that includes commands for customizing the columns, sorting,
and filtering. Refer to the sections following this table for details.

Show Details/ Click <Show Details> to show the data for the selected table entry in the details pane.
Hide Details This button changes to <Hide Details> when the details are displayed.
Click <Hide Details> to close the details pane. This button changes to <Show Details>
when the details are hidden.
Note: You can also double-click a table entry to show/hide the details.

Export Export the table data to a file, or print it.

Close Close the dialog box

Refresh Refresh the displayed table data

You can customize the displayed fields and the dialog size as desired, then save
your customized view. An administrator can save a common customized view to
be available for all users, and a user can save a view to be available to that user.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-17

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

When the device shelf view dialog box with the table is opened it displays the last
displayed view. The first time the dialog box is opened, it tries to load the
common view if available, then the user view, then the default view.

The <View> submenu is used to customize the view of the displayed table data.

Figure 3-14. View Submenu for Device Tables

Customizing Displayed Fields

You can customize which columns are displayed, via the View menu. You can also
customize the display via the table header right-click menu.

 To customize the displayed fields:

1. In the table or on the toolbar, select View > Customize Columns.
The Customize Columns dialog box appears, containing the following:
 The Available Fields text box lists the fields that are not displayed.
 The Show Fields text box lists the fields that are displayed

Figure 3-15. Customize Columns Dialog Box

2. To change the order of the displayed fields, select a field and click
<Move Up> or <Move Down> to change its order, or drag it to the desired
postion.
3. To stop displaying a field, select it in the Show Fields text box and click
<Remove> to move it to the Available Fields text box, or drag it to the
Available Fields text box.

3-18 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

4. To display a field, select it in the Available Fields text box and click <Add> to
move it to the Show Fields text box, or drag it to the Show Fields text box.

Note You can select single or multiple fields.

5. To stop displaying all fields, click <Remove All>.

6. To display all fields, click <Add All>.
7. To return to the default display, click <Back to Default>.
8. When you have finished customizing the displayed fields, click <OK> to
implement the changes.
The table data is displayed according to your customization.
9. To save your customized column view for later use, select View > Save > My
Settings for details on saving views). If you don’t save the view, next time
you open the table dialog box the view does not reflect your customized
columns.

Sorting the Displayed Table

You can sort the displayed table by a single field or by multiple fields.

 To sort the table view by a single field:

1. In the table, click the column header for the field by which you want to sort
the table.
The table data is displayed sorted according to the values in the column.
A triangle is displayed in the header of the column according to the
sorting direction (ascending or descending).
2. If you want to reverse the sorting order, click the header again.
The sorting order is reversed and the triangle changes accordingly.

Note To sort by a different field, simply click that field’s column header.

If you add or change table entries or refresh the table data, the table entries
remain sorted. You can cancel the sorting in the following ways:
• Close the table dialog box
• Click any column header with <CTRL> held down. Although the sorting is
canceled, the table remains sorted until you perform an add, change, or
refresh operation.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-19

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Figure 3-16. Table Sorted by CIR Column in Ascending Order

Figure 3-17. Table Sorted by CIR Column in Descending Order

 To sort the table view by multiple fields:

1. In a device table, select View > Sort. In a system table, click on the
toolbar or select Sort from the right-click menu on the table data.
The Sort dialog box appears, giving you the possibility to select up to
three columns by which to sort, and select ascending or descending order
for each column.

Note If you want to sort by more columns than are available in the Sort dialog box,
click <Add Category>. The maximum number of columns by which you can sort is
smaller: six or the number of columns in the table.

2. Select the fields by which to sort and then click <OK> to implement the
sorting.
The table rows are sorted as specified. Triangles are displayed in the
column header according to the sorting level and direction. Up to three
triangle indicators appear even if sorted by more than three columns.

3-20 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Notes • If you selected the same column name more than once, the Sort dialog box
stays open, the sort is not done, and message box appears to notify you of
the duplication.
• If you selected columns that are currently not visible in the table a message
box appears for each field with the option to add it to the table.
• If you click <Yes>, the column is added at the right side of the table. The table
is sorted by all the selected columns even if some of them remain invisible.

If you add or change table entries or refresh the table data, the table entries
remain sorted. You can cancel the sorting in the following ways:
• Close the table dialog box
• Click any column header with <CTRL> held down. Although the sorting is
canceled, the table remains sorted until you perform an add, change, or
refresh
• Open the Sort dialog box, select (None) in the top Sort By field, then click
<OK>. Although the sorting is canceled, the table remains sorted until you
perform an add, change, or refresh.

Figure 3-18. Sort Dialog Box

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-21

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Figure 3-19. Table Sorted by CIR Column in Descending Order, CBS Column in Ascending Order, EIR
Column in Descending Order

Figure 3-20. Sort Dialog Box After Adding Category

3-22 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Figure 3-21. Duplicated Field in Sort

Figure 3-22. Add Invisible Field in Sort

Customizing Views
You can save customized views including the size of the dialog box for later use,
and load views that were saved. If the dialog box size is too small it is not saved.
If you have applied sorting or filtering before saving a view, it remains active
when loading the view only while the table dialog box remains open. After you
close the table dialog box, the sorting or filtering is no longer active in the view
when you load it.

 To save a customized view:

• In the table or toolbar, select View > Save.
A submenu appears as shown below.

Figure 3-23. Save Submenu

 Select Common Settings to save the view as a common view for all users
using this table.

Note You can save the view as a common view only if you have administrator rights.
Users can load a common view that was saved by their administrator.

 Select My Settings to save the view for the specific user.

 To load a customized view:

• In the table, select View > Load.
A submenu appears as shown below, with a check indicating the currently
loaded view.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-23

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Figure 3-24. Load Submenu

 Select Common Settings to load the view that was defined as a common
view for all users using this table.
 Select My Settings to load the view that was defined the specific user
 Select Default to load the default view.

Searching Table Data

You can search the table for any occurrence of a particular string in any table cell.
The search is cyclic.

 To search the table:

1. In a device table, select View > Search. In a system table, click on the
toolbar or select Search from the right-click menu.
The Search dialog box appears.

Figure 3-25. Search Dialog Box

2. Fill in the parameters as described in Table 3-10.

3. Click <Find Next> to start the search.
If a cell was found that meets the specified search criteria, its row is
selected, otherwise nothing is selected.
If you click <Find Next> again, the search is continued from the last row
where an item was found. If there is no such row the search starts from
the first row if the direction of the search is forward, or the last row if
the direction is backward.

3-24 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

After clicking <Find Next> the status bar displays:

 If the end of the table was reached and the item was found at least
once:
Search completed.

Note If the item was found and the end of the table has not been reached, the status
bar does not display any message.

 If the item was not found:

Search completed. The search item was not found.

Table 3-10. Search Dialog Box Parameters

Parameter Function

Find what Specifies the text string to search for.

You can type the text in this field or select text from the
dropdown list. Text that you type in remains in the dropdown
list for use in future searches. Up to 20 text items can be saved
in the list. When the maximum is reached the oldest text is
removed and the new text replaces it.
You can delete a text item from the list by selecting it and
clicking <Delete>.

Match case Specifies if search is case sensitive (Selected) or ignores case

(Cleared).
Default: Cleared

Whole words only Selected – The text being searched for must match a whole
word
Cleared – The text being searched for can match a whole word
or part of a word.
Default: Cleared

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-25

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Parameter Function

Direction Select the search direction: Forward or Backward.

Default: Forward
Forward –The search starts from the first cell in the first column
and first row and searches forward until it reaches the last cell
in the last column and last row.
If the search was successful the next search starts one cell
forward from the location of the cell where the item was found
(if the cell is in the last column the search moves to the next
row if such exists, otherwise moves to the first row).
If the search was not successful the next search starts again
from the first cell in the first column and first row.
Backward – The search starts from the last cell in the last
column and last row and searches backwards until it reaches the
first cell in the first column and first row.
If the search was successful the next search starts one cell
backward from the location of the cell where the item was
found (if the cell is in the first column the search moves to the
previous row if such exists, otherwise moves to the last row).
If the search was not successful the next search starts again
from the last cell in the last column and last row.

<Find Next> Click <Find Next> to search for the next occurrence of the string

<Close> Click <Close> to close the Search dialog box

Filtering Table Data

You can filter the table data to display only the rows that meet various criteria.
Filtering by single or multiple criteria is available.

Note Single column sorting of device tables by clicking a column header is not available
while filtering is applied.

Figure 3-26. View Submenu in Device Table with Filtering Options

3-26 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Simple Filtering
You can filter each column by a single criterion.

 To apply simple filtering:

1. In a device table, select View > Filter. In a system table, click on the
toolbar or select Filter from the right-click menu.
The column headers in the table are changed to contain dropdown
filtering lists. For device tables, the Filter option in the View submenu is
marked with a checkmark to indicate that filtering is enabled.
2. In the column(s) which you wish to filter, click the arrow to open the list of
filtering options.
The list opens to show all unique values, and also the following standard
items that are in each column filtering list:
 All – This can be selected to disable filtering
 Top 10 – This can be selected to display all rows that fall within
user-specified upper or lower limits.
 Custom – This can be selected to display rows according to user-specified
criteria.
3. Select the desired filtering criteria.
Only the rows meeting the criteria are displayed, and the status bar of
the table displays Filtering Applied.
If you add or change table entries, the table entries remain filtered. You can
disable the filtering in device tables in the following ways:
• Close the table dialog box
• Click <Refresh>. This closes the dropdown filtering lists in the column headers
and removes the filtering (displays all the table rows).
• Select All in the filtering lists in one of the column headings. This does not
close the dropdown filtering lists in the column headers, but it removes the
filtering (displays all the table rows).
• Select View > Filter. This closes the dropdown filtering lists in the column
headers but the table remains filtered. You can click <Refresh> to view the
unfiltered table.

You can disable the filtering in system tables by clicking on the toolbar when
filtering is enabled.

Note The examples below are provided for Windows 7, but apply to Windows 2008
Server and Unix as well.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-27

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Figure 3-27. Filtering Enabled in Device Table

Figure 3-28. Selecting Filter By Administrative Status Up

Figure 3-29. Result of Filtering By Administrative Status Up

3-28 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Figure 3-30. Top 10 Filter Dialog Box

Figure 3-31. Custom Filter Dialog Box

Advanced Filtering

Working with Advanced Filtering

 To apply advanced filtering:

1. In a device table, select View > Advanced Filter. In a system table, click
on the toolbar or select Advanced Filter from the right-click menu.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-29

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

The Advanced Filter dialog box appears. It contains rows of fields called
categories where each category contains:
 Dropdown list of table columns – Select the column for filtering
 Dropdown list of filtering criteria that specify how to check the table
column against the value list:
Equals
Do not equal
Is less than
Is less than or equal to
Is greater than
Is greater than or equal to
Contains
Matches – Refer to Filtering by Match for details on filtering by
match.
 Value list, filled according to the selected table column – Select the
value(s) for which to filter (if filtering by match then refer toFiltering
by Match)
 And option and Or option (for all categories except the last one) –
Select And to perform ‘AND’ operation between this category and the
next category.
Select Or to perform ‘OR’ operation between this category and the
next category.
2. Select the columns, criteria, and values for which you wish to filter. You can
apply multiple criteria to a single column or to multiple columns.
3. If you need more categories than are shown in the dialog box, click <Add
Category> to add another.
Fields for another category are added in the Advanced Filter dialog box.

Note The maximum number of categories in the Advanced Filter dialog box is the
number of table columns or six, whichever is the smaller value.

4. Click <OK> to close the Advanced Filter dialog box and apply the filtering.
Only the rows meeting the criteria are displayed, and the column headers
in the table are changed to contain dropdown filtering lists. In device
tables the Filter option in the View submenu is marked with a check to
indicate that filtering is enabled. In system tables the quick filter
dropdown box displays Filter Applied. The status bar of device tables
displays Filter Applied. Figure 3-34 shows a filtered device table.
If you add or change table entries, the table entries remain filtered. You can
disable the filtering in device tables in the following ways:
• Close the table dialog box
• Click <Refresh>. This closes the dropdown filtering lists in the column headers
and removes the filtering (displays all the table rows).
• Select View > Filter. This closes the dropdown filtering lists in the column
headers but the table remains filtered. You can click <Refresh> to view the
unfiltered table.

3-30 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

You can disable the filtering in system tables by selecting No Filter in the quick
filter dropdown box.

Figure 3-32. Advanced Filter Dialog Box

Figure 3-33. Advanced Filter Dialog Box after Adding Category

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-31

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Figure 3-34. Result of Advanced Filtering

Filtering by Match
When you select matches in the criteria dropdown list in the Advanced Filter
dialog box, the value list changes to a text box with an info button next to it
(click the info button to see information on filtering expressions, as shown in
Figure 3-33). You have to type a filtering expression in the text box as specified
in the following.

Figure 3-35. Information Displayed on Filtering Expressions

The filtering expression language comprises two basic character types: literal text
characters and meta-characters. The following table describes some basic filter
expression language definitions.

Table 3-11. Filter Expression Definitions

Definition Description Example

Literal A literal is any character used in ‘cat’ is a literal string to match

a matching text in ‘communication’

Metacharacters Ametacharacter is a special ?

character that has a meaning $
other than its literal value
*

3-32 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Definition Description Example

Escape sequence Place the escape sequence \ To match ‘?cat’ in

(backslash) in front of a ‘communi?cation’ use the
metacharacters that you wantto expression ‘\?cat’
use as a literal in a filter
expression

The following tables describe some of the basic meta-characters of the filter
expression language.

Table 3-12. Simple Matching Meta-characters

Definition Description Example

A literal Match all strings with the exact ‘mux’ matche ‘mux’ strings, but
expression not ‘Vmux’

Table 3-13. Meta-characters for Sets, Ranges, and Negation

Definition Description Example

[] Specifies a set of characters to ‘[ab]’ matches either ‘a’ or ‘b’

match to a single character ‘[0123456789]’ matches one of
the characters from ‘0’ to ‘9’
‘[x.z]’ matches ‘x’, ‘.’, or ‘z’

[-] The - (hyphen) inside square ‘[0123456789]’ can be written

brackets defines a range to as ‘[0-9]’
match to a single character ‘[abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz]’
can be written as [a-z]

[^] A single character matches if it is ‘[^a-z]’ matches any single

not contained in the specified character that is not a
set lowercase letter from ‘a’ to ‘z’

The following table describes iteration meta-characters that control the number
of times a character or string matches.

Table 3-14. Iteration Meta-characters

Definition Description Example

? Matches the preceding character ‘ab?c’ matches only ‘ac’ and

0 or 1 times only ‘abc’

* Matches the preceding character ‘ab*c’ matches ‘ac’,’ abc’,

0 or more times ‘abbc’, ‘abbbc’, etc.
‘[abc]*’ matches ‘’, ‘a’, ‘b’, ‘c’,
‘ac’, ‘bca’, ‘bcaccb’, etc.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-33

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Definition Description Example

+ Matches the preceding character ‘ab+c’ matches ‘abc’, ‘abbc’,

0 or 1 or more times ‘abbbc’, etc.
‘a+b+c+’ matches ‘abc’,
‘aabbcc’, ‘abbbbbcc’, ‘aabcccc’,
etc.

{n} Matches the preceding character ‘[0-9]{3}-[0-9]{1}-[0-9]{7}‘

n times matches a phone number
format: 972-3-1234567

{n,m} Matches the preceding character ‘ab{3,4}a’ matches ‘abbba’ and

at least n times but not more ‘abbbba’, but not ‘aba’, ‘abba’,
than m times ‘abbbbba’

Table 3-15. Positioning Meta-characters

Definition Description Example

. (dot) Matches any single character ‘x.z’ matches ‘xyz’, ‘xgz’, ‘xpz’,
etc.

^ Matches only at the beginning of ‘^.*cat.*’ doesn’t match ‘this is

the string (only outside square a big cat’ but ‘^th.*’ matches
brackets) ‘*cat.*’ matches ‘this is a big
cat’

$. Matches only at the end of the ‘*cat$’ matches ‘this is a big

string cat’ but ‘th.*$’ doesn’t match

Table 3-16. Abbreviation Meta-characters

Definition Description Example

\d Match any character in the ‘\d{3}-\d{1}-\d{7}’ matches

range 0 - 9 a phone number format:
972-3-1234567

\D Match any character NOT in

the range 0 - 9

\s Match any whitespace ‘\s2000’ matches the string

characters (space, tab, etc.) ‘2000’ if it is preceded by
any whitespace character,
such as a space or a tab

\S Match any character that is

NOT whitespace (space,
tab)

\w Match any character in the

range 0 - 9, A – Z, and a - z

The following illustrates some examples of filtering by match. Table 3-17 shows a
table of data, and Table 3-18 shows examples of filtering the table with match
criteria.

3-34 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Table 3-17. Sample Table

Row Number Device Type

1 Vmux110

2 Vmux210

3 Vmux2100

4 MiniCVS

5 Gmux2000

6 SC-Vmux

7 Ip-Mux14

8 Gmux2000

Table 3-18. Filtering Examples

Filter all rows which... Filter Expression Filtered Rows that Match

Are Gmux2000 Gmux2000 5,8

Are related to any Vmux .*Vmux.* 1,2,3,6

device

Contain the number 0 .*00+.* 3, 5,8

sequentially two or more
times

End with exactly three .*\D[0-9]{3} 1,2

digits

Start with a capital letter [A-Z][a-z]-[\w]* 7

followed by a lower case
letter, then a hyphen
followed by any letter or
digit

Start with a capital letter [A-Z][\d]{2,4}-[A-Za-z]* None

followed by exactly 2 or 3
or 4 digits, then a hyphen
followed by any letter

Start with G and end with 0 G.*0 5,8

Start with G or V or M, [VGM].*[15].*[0S] 1,2,3

contain the digit 1 or 5, and
end with 0 or S

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-35

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Saving Advanced Filters

Advanced filtering is not saved when view settings are saved, but you can save
advanced filters to be used later.

Figure 3-36. Filter Submenu in Advanced Filter Dialog Box

 To save an advanced filter:

1. In the Advanced Filter dialog box that contains the criteria you wish to save,
select Filter > Save.
The Save Filter dialog box appears, containing a list of previously saved
filters.

Figure 3-37. Save Filter Dialog Box

2. Enter a new name for the filter or select one of the existing filter names to
overwrite. If you enter a new filter name, it must start with a letter, must not
contain spaces, and must not contain any of the following characters: / \ : * ?
"<>|,

Note Select Save as Common if you have administrator rights and you wish the filter to
be available for other users. Users can load a common filter that was saved by
their administrator.

3. Click <OK>.
The filter is saved.

3-36 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Loading Advanced Filters

 To load a filter:

Note In system tables you can load a filter by selecting it in the quick filter dropdown
box.

1. In the Advanced Filter dialog box, select Filter > Load.

The Load Filter dialog box appears, containing a list of previously saved
filters.

Figure 3-38. Load Filter Dialog Box

2. Select the filter that you want to load.

3. Click <OK> to load the filter.
The Advanced Filter dialog box contains the configuration saved in the
filter.

Removing Advanced Filters

 To remove a filter:
1. In the Advanced Filter dialog box, select Filter > Remove.
The Remove Filter dialog box appears, containing a list of previously saved
filters.

Figure 3-39. Remove Filter Dialog Box

2. Select the filter that you want to remove.

Note You can remove common filters only if you have administrator rights.

3. Click <OK> to remove the filter.

The filter is removed and is no longer available to be loaded.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-37

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Exporting the Table Data

You can print the table as it is shown in the view, or print selected rows. You can
also save the table to a file.

 To export:

• In a device table, select Export. In a system table, click on the toolbar or

select Export from the right-click menu.
A submenu appears as shown below.

Figure 3-40. Export Submenu

 Select Print to print the visible table columns and the filtered rows. If
rows are selected then only the selected rows are printed.
 Select Save to File to save all table columns (including the invisible
columns) with the filtered rows.

Working with Topology

The Topology workspace is available by selecting Topology in the work

space selection area. It is divided into panes that contain the following
components:

Network Element Provides a navigation tree of levels (submaps) and nodes

Repository (network elements and clouds) in the network

Groups Provides a tree of user-defined groups of network

elements, used for map viewing/configuration archive/jobs

Term Definition

Map Covers the main part of the user interface and provides a
visual representation of levels (submaps) and nodes
(network elements and clouds) and links in the RADview
network. The levels and the nodes on each level of the
map correspond with the tree in the Network Element
Repository

Event Browser Shows events received from the network devices. Refer to
Chapter 7 for details on the Event Browser.

You can add new levels and nodes in the Network Element Repository or map
pane. New levels and nodes added in the Network Element Repository are
immediately shown in the map, and new levels and nodes added in the map are
immediately shown in the Network Element Repository.

3-38 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Figure 3-41. RADview Network Manager – Topology Workspace

Searching in Topology Panes

You can search for elements by name in the Network Element Repository (NER),
Groups, and map panes, by typing directly into the search box, or opening a
search dialog box with more advanced options.
When searching the NER or the Groups, you can perform a recursive search (to
search all levels) or a regular search (to only search the current level).

Note
For the search utility to operate, you have to select Topology . All other
work spaces do not support the search for devices (NEs), even if the Navigation
Pane displays the NER.

 To search via the textbox:

1. Enter the complete search term or part of it in the text box

, then press <Enter>.

A flag appears, notifying you that a recursive search is in progress.

Figure 3-42. Recursive Search in Progress

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-39

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

2. If an element is found with a name that matches the text, the element is
highlighted in the Network Element Repository or Groups, or is surrounded by
a frame in the map.

 To search via the dialog box

1. Click the search icon .

The Search dialog box appears.

Figure 3-43. Search Dialog Box

2. Fill in the parameters as explained in Table 3-19.

3. Click <Find Next> to start the search.
If an element was found with a name that meets the specified search
criteria, the element is highlighted in the Network Element Repository or
Groups, or is surrounded by a frame in the map, and the message
Search completed is displayed in the status bar of the dialog box. If no
match was found, the message Search item was not found is
displayed in the status bar of the dialog box.
4. Click <Find Next> to search for the next match.
The search continues as described above. After you find the last match,
when you click <Find Next> the message Search item was not found
is displayed. If you click <Find Next> after receiving this message, the
search starts again at the beginning.

Table 3-19. Search Dialog Box Parameters

Parameter Function

Find what Specifies the text string to search for. If you choose to run a
recursive search, you can enter part of the string to search for.

Match case Specifies if search is case sensitive (Checked) or ignores case

(Cleared).
Default: Cleared

3-40 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Parameter Function

Whole words only Checked – The text being searched for must match a whole
word
Cleared – The text being searched for can match a whole word
or part of a word.
Default: Cleared

Direction Select the search direction: Forward or Backward.

Default: Forward

Recursive Search Checked – a recursive search is performed as explained above.

Cleared – a regular search is performed. Y
Default: Cleared
Note: This option is available only when searching the Network
Element Repository.

<Find Next> Click <Find Next> to search for the next occurrence of the string

<Close> Click <Close> to close the Search dialog box

Notes
• In the Network Element Repository or under Groups, all elements found with a
name that match at least part of the text are highlighted or surrounded by a
frame in the map respectively.
• On the map, only the current level is searched while in the Network Element
Repository, a search through all levels (recursive) is performed. Therefore,
searches in the Network Element Repository can take up to a minute,
depending on the number of nodes in the system.

Working with the Map

Map Functions
You can perform the following functions with the map.

Table 3-20. Map Functions

Task Description

Move up one level Click on the map toolbar

Note: This button does not show if you ae already in the highest level

Change layout of map Click on the map toolbar. Refer to Changing Level Layout for details.

Locate other end of link

Click (Link Navigation Tool) on the map toolbar

Move all map icons at the same

Click (Pan Tool) on the map toolbar
time

Remove selection of Pan Tool Click on the map toolbar

or Link Navigation Tool

Display overview of map

Click on the map toolbar. See Figure 3-44 for an example.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-41

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Task Description

Save the map as an image file Right-click and select Save as image

Export the map as Tom Sawyer To export the map, right-click somewhere inside the map, select Export
Visualization file (*.TSV). which from the shortcut menu, and then choose Tom Sawyer Visualization File
can be loaded by the Tom and specify the desired location.
Sawyer Tomahawk utility for
review.

Print the map Right-click and select Print

Zoom in on the map

Click on the map toolbar

Zoom out the map

Click on the map toolbar

View the map without any

Click on the map toolbar
zoom

Configure the map to fit the

Click on the map toolbar
screen

Figure 3-44. Overview

Working with Submaps

Each level can be shown as a submap in the map pane, with a corresponding tab
at the bottom of the map (see Figure 3-41). The map can be arranged to display
just one submap, or several submaps arranged horizontally or vertically.

3-42 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

 To display a submap:
• In the Network Element Repository, double-click the desired level.
The submap of the desired sublevel appears.

Note The level and the corresponding submap have been highlighted yellow for
illustration purposes.

Figure 3-45. Displaying the Submap of an Existing Level

Each submap contains icons corresponding to the content belonging to the level
in the Network Element Repository.
You are able to navigate between submaps, view multiple submaps in the work
space or close submaps from the Submap Tab menu.

 To access the Submap Tab menu:

• Right-click the submap tab of any submap.
The Submap Tab menu appears.

Figure 3-46. Submap Tab Menu

 To navigate between submaps:

• To move to the next or previous submap, select Next or Previous respectively.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-43

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

 To divide the map into horizontal or vertical groups

• Select New Horizontal Group or New Vertical Group respectively.

The map is divided into two horizontal groups.

Figure 3-47. Map with two Horizontal Groups from two Submaps

 To add horizontal or vertical groups respectively:

1. If there are more than two submaps, right-click the tab of each submap that
you want to create an additional horizontal or vertical group for.

2. Select New Horizontal Group or New Vertical Group respectively again

from the Submap Tab menu.

Figure 3-48. Map with two Horizontal Groups from three Submaps

3-44 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Figure 3-49. Submap Tab Menu – for two Horizontal Groups from three Submaps

Figure 3-50. Submap Tab Menu – for three Horizontal Groups from three Submaps

Note The New Horizontal Group menu item does not show if horizontal groups already
exist for all submaps.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-45

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Figure 3-51. Map with two Vertical Groups from three Submaps

Figure 3-52. Submap Tab Menu – for two Horizontal Groups from three Submaps

 To create a floating submap:

• Right-click the tab of the desired submap and select Floating from the
Submap Tab menu.
The selected submap appears in a new floating window.
• To add a submap to an already existing floating submap window, select
Floating To and select the desired submap to which you want to add the
current one.

Figure 3-53. Submap Tab Menu – Add a Submap to an Existing Floating Window

3-46 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Figure 3-54. Map with two Horizontal Groups from three Submaps – One Floating

 To dock a floating submap:

• Right-click the submap tab of the floating submap and select Docking.
The submap returns to its previous position in the Map area.

Figure 3-55. Submap Tab Menu – for One Floating Submap

Saving the Layout

Once you customize the layout of the maps in the topology workspace, you can
save this layout so that it will be retrieved the way you left it for the next session
even if the server has been restarted in between your sessions.

 To save the layout:

• From the menu, select Options > Save Layout.
The current layout is saved and updated with additional changes you may
make until you log out. When logging on the next time, RADview loads
with your latest layout.

 To reset the layout to the default:

• From the menu, select Options > Reset Layout.
The layout is reset to the default layout the next time you log on to
RADview.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-47

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Working with Levels

Summary of Level Tasks

The following table shows the tasks you can perform with levels and the
corresponding menu items/toolbar icons.

Table 3-21. Level Tasks

Task Accessed via:

Network Element Map

Repository

Right-click Toolbar Right-click Right-click Toolbar

menu, level icon menu, no icon menu, level icon
selected selected selected

Add a level under the selected New Level New Level –––
level (see Adding New Levels)

Add an NE (network element) to New NE New NE –––

the selected level (see Adding
RAD Devices)

Add a range of IP addresses as New NEs ––– New NEs ––– –––
network elements to the selected
level (see Adding RAD Devices)

Configure the properties of the Properties ––– Properties Properties –––

selected level and, if desired, all
subordinate levels and network
elements (see Configuring Level
Properties)

Expand all levels as overview maps ––– ––– Expand > ––– –––
(see Expanding Levels) Expand All

Expand level as overview map (see ––– ––– ––– Expand –––
Expanding Levels)

Open submap corresponding to ––– ––– ––– Expand As Map

the level (you can also
double-click the level in the
Network Element Repository) (see
Expanding Levels)

Collapse all expanded level ––– ––– Collapse > ––– –––
overview maps Collapse All

Collapse expanded level overview ––– ––– ––– Collapse –––

map

Remove the selected level and all Delete ––– ––– Delete –––
subordinate levels (this function is
not available for the highest level)
(see Deleting Levels)

3-48 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Task Accessed via:

Network Element Map

Repository

Right-click Toolbar Right-click Right-click Toolbar

menu, level icon menu, no icon menu, level icon
selected selected selected

Change level background (see ––– ––– Wallpaper ––– –––

Changing Level Background)

Change level layout (see Changing ––– ––– Layout –––

Level Layout)

Locate the level icon on the map Locate on Map ––– ––– ––– –––
(this function is not available for
the highest level) (see Locating
Levels)

Search for level by name (see ––– ––– –––

Searching in Topology Panes)

Select network elements/levels ––– ––– ––– Show –––

that are connected by links to the Neighbors
level

Deselect network elements/levels ––– ––– ––– Hide Neighbors –––

that are connected by links to the
level, that were selected via Show
Neighbors

Hide the nearest neighbors of the ––– ––– Hide > Hide ––– –––
level Neighbors >
One Level

Hide the entire neighbor hierarchy ––– ––– Hide > Hide ––– –––
of the level Neighbors> All
Levels

Represent the nearest neighbors ––– ––– Fold > Fold ––– –––
of the level as a folder, which can Neighbors >
be double-clicked to open an One Level
overview

Represent the level’s entire ––– ––– Fold > Fold ––– –––
neighbor hierarchy as a folder, Neighbors> All
which can be double-clicked to Levels
open an overview

Transfer any elements in a folder ––– ––– Fold > Unfold –––
back to their original location

Update the level with the latest Refresh ––– Refresh ––– –––
configuration

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-49

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Navigating To Level Submaps

You can navigate to a specific level submap by double-clicking the level in the
Network Element Repository navigation tree, or clicking the corresponding
submap tab in the map pane (see Figure 3-41), or by right-clicking the level icon
and choosing Expand as Map.

Adding New Levels

 To add a level to the Network Element Repository and map:

1. Select the level in the Network Element Repository under which you wish to
add a level and click on the toolbar, or right-click the level in the
Network Element Repository or map and select New Level from the
shortcut menu.
The New Level dialog box is displayed (see Figure 3-56 to Figure 3-61). It
contains the following tabs:

General Defines the level’s name and the default double-click

action for network elements in the level. Refer to
Figure 3-56 and Table 3-22 for a description of the
parameters.

SNMP Defines the SNMP parameters of the level and, if desired,

all subordinate levels and nodes. Refer to Figure 3-57 and
Table 3-23 for a description of the parameters.
SNMPv3 Defines the SNMPv3 parameters of the level and, if
desired, all subordinate levels and nodes. Refer to
Figure 3-58 and Table 3-24 for a description of the
parameters.

Custom Ports Defines the ports for communication and access

protocols. For details, refer to Table 3-25.

Job Parameters Defines the job parameters of the level and, if desired, all
subordinate levels and nodes, for authentication if a
script is sent to network elements. Refer to Figure 3-59
and Table 3-26 for a description of the parameters.

External Tools Defines default command parameters for external tools

for nodes in the level. Refer to Figure 3-60 and
Table 3-27 for a description of the parameters
Notes Holds optional text description

2. Click <Set>.
The level is configured with the new properties and added to the Network
Element Repository tree under the selected level, and added to the map

as a level icon ( ). You can double-click the level icon to open the
submap for the new level.

3-50 Using the RADview GUI RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Note • The corresponding submap tab appears at the bottom of the map pane only
after you double-click the new level icon to open its submap.
• It is recommended to use systematic level names, such as names or locations
of units or a part of the IP address range. Names assigned to NEs should
reflect the naming convention of the respective levels. This allows for easy
location of NEs in large systems when grouping NEs and creating security
domains for those groups.

Figure 3-56. New Level Dialog Box – General Tab Figure 3-57. New Level Dialog Box – SNMP Tab

Figure 3-58. New Level Dialog Box – SNMPv3 Tab Figure 3-59. New Level Dialog Box – Job Parameters Tab

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-51

 Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Figure 3-60. New Level Dialog Box – External Tools Tab Figure 3-61. New Level Dialog Box – Note Tab

Configuring Level Properties

 To configure level properties:

1. Right-click a level in the Network Element Repository or on the map and
select Properties from the shortcut menu.
The Level Properties dialog box is displayed (see Figure 3-62 to
Figure 3-67). It contains the following tabs:

General Defines the level’s name and the default double-click

action for nodes in the level. Refer to Figure 3-62 and
Table 3-22 for a description of the parameters.
SNMP Specifies the SNMP parameters of the level and, if
desired, all subordinate levels and nodes. Refer to
Figure 3-63 and Table 3-23 for a description of the
parameters.

SNMPv3 Specifies the SNMPv3 parameters of the level and, if

desired, all subordinate levels and nodes. Refer to
Figure 3-64 and Table 3-24 for a description of the
parameters

Custom Ports Defines the ports for communication and access

protocols. For details, refer to Table 3-25.

Job Parameters Selets Telnet or SSH to access the device via the CLI or
menu interfaces respectively. Refer to Figure 3-65 and
Table 3-26 for additional information.
External Tools Defines default command parameters for external tools
for nodes in the level. Refer to Figure 3-66 and
Table 3-27 for a description of the parameters
Notes Holds optional text description

3-52 Using the RADview GUI RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

2. Click <Set>.
The level and, if selected, all subordinate levels and nodes, are configured
with the new properties.

Figure 3-62. Level Properties Dialog Box – General Tab Figure 3-63. Level Properties Dialog Box – SNMP Tab

Note
If you are not logged on as su, the Read and Write community entries appear as
read-only.

Figure 3-64. Level Properties Dialog Box – SNMPv3 Tab Figure 3-65. Level Properties Dialog Box –
Job Parameters Tab

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-53

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Figure 3-66. Level Properties Dialog Box – Figure 3-67. Level Properties Dialog Box – Note Tab
External Tools Tab

Table 3-22. Level General Parameters

Parameter Function Possible Values

Level Name Name of level

Default double-click Specifies default double-click action, used Shelf View: Open shelf
action for default node properties when new view
network elements are added as nodes to Web Browser: Connect to
the level network element via Web
browser
Telnet/SSH: Connect to
network element via
Telnet.

Table 3-23. Level SNMP Parameters

Parameter Function

Read Community SNMP Read request community

Write Community SNMP Write request community

Timeout (msec) The SNMP timeout for the level, in milliseconds

Retries The SNMP number of retries for the level

Polling Interval (sec) The SNMP polling interval for the level, in seconds

Apply changes to subnodes Select to apply the same changes to all levels and
and sublevels network elements subordinate to this level
Note: This parameter is available only in the Level
Properties dialog box.

3-54 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Table 3-24. Level SNMPv3 Parameters

Parameter Function Possible Values

Access Mode SNMP version used for level V1 – SNMPv1

Note: If V1 is selected, the rest of the USM – SNMPv3 (User
SNMPv3 parameters are not available. Security Model)
User Name SNMPv3 user
Authentication Protocol Authentication protocol to use No Authentication – No
authentication is performed
MD5 – The authentication
protocol MD5 is used
SHA – The authentication
protocol SHA is used
Authentication Authentication password
Password Note: This parameter is available only
if Authentication Protocol is not set to
No Authentication.
Privacy Protocol Privacy (encryption) protocol to use No Privacy – No encryption
is performed
DES – The privacy protocol
DES is used
Privacy Password Privacy (encryption) password
Note: This parameter is available only
if Privacy Protocol is not set to No
Privacy.
Context String that identifies the SNMPv3
information
Engine ID The ID of the SNMPv3 engine

Table 3-25. Level Custom Ports

Parameter Default Values

Telnet Port 23

SSH Port 22

HTTP Port 80

HTTPS Port 443

Table 3-26. Level Job Parameters

Parameter Function Possible Values

User Username for script authentication Username and password

Password Password for script authentication defined in NE
Username and password
must both be filled in or
both left empty

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-55

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Parameter Function Possible Values

Protocol Defines which protocol is used for SSH

access Telnet
SSH and Telnet can provide
secured access. Telnet can
be unsecured.
Port Port for protocol Default port = 23

Table 3-27. Level External Tool Parameters

Parameter Function Possible Values

Menu Option Specifies for which external tool to Ping – Define the command
define the command parameters line and parameters for
sending ping to network
element
Trace Route – Define the
command line and
parameters for tracing route
to network element
Note: If you added external
tools as described in , they
appear in the list.
Command Line Defines the command line for the
external tool, used for default node
properties when new network
elements are added as nodes to
the level
Note: This parameter is read-only.
Command Parameters Defines the command parameters
Note: If you change the for the external tool, used for
command parameters, the default node properties when new
attribute is stored in the network elements are added as
EMS database and used for nodes to the level
command line generation
for this object.

 To remove a level from the Network Element Repository:

1. Right-click the level in the Network Element Repository and choose Delete.
You are prompted to confirm the removal.

Figure 3-68. Network Element Repository –Confirmation of Level Deletion

3-56 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

2. Click <OK> to confirm the removal of the level.

The level, and all subordinate levels and nodes, are removed from the
Network Element Repository.

Expanding Levels
You can expand levels as overview maps, or expand a sublevel as a submap.

 To expand a level as overview map:

• In a map with sublevels, double-click a sublevel or right-click it and choose
Expand.
The sublevel is expanded into an overview map (see Figure 3-70).

 To expand a sublevel as a submap:

• In a map with sublevels, right-click a sublevel and choose Expand as Map
(alternatively, double-click the sublevel in the Network Element Repository).
A new tab opens in the map, showing the sublevel map.

 To expand all sublevels as overview maps:

• In a map with sublevels, right-click and choose Expand > All.
All the sublevels are expanded into overview maps (see Figure 3-70).

Figure 3-69. Level Expanded As Overview

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-57

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Figure 3-70. All Levels Expanded As Overviews

Deleting Levels
You can delete any level except the highest level.

 To delete a level from the Network Element Repository and map:

1. Right-click the level in the Network Element Repository navigation tree and
choose Delete.
You are prompted to confirm the removal.

Figure 3-71. Confirmation of Level Deletion

2. Click <OK> to confirm the removal.

The level is removed from the Network Element Repository and its
submap is removed from the map pane.

3-58 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Changing Level Background

You can change the level background.

 To set the background:

1. Right-click in the map/submap for which you want to set the background, and
select Wallpaper and then Select Wallpaper from the shortcut menu.
The Select Wallpaper Image File dialog box is displayed.
2. Browse to the desired image file and select it.
The level map background is set to the selected image file.

Figure 3-72. Select Wallpaper Image File Dialog Box

 To remove the background:

• Navigate to the level submap, right-click the level in the map and select
Wallpaper and then Discard Wallpaper from the shortcut menu.
The background is removed from the level map.

Changing Level Layout

You can change the level map layout.

 To change the layout:

1. In the level map’s toolbar, click Layout or right-click the level in the map
and select Layout from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Layout submenu, select or clear Incremental Layout. If Incremental
Layout is selected, RADview attempts to preserve map element locations
whenever possible, possibly relocating some elements if necessary, according
to the layout type.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-59

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

If Incremental Layout is cleared, the entire map is formatted and map

elements are relocated to best fit according to the layout type.
3. Select the desired layout type:
 Orthogonal –Produces compact map, using only horizontal and vertical
edge routing (see Figure 3-73 and Figure 3-75)
 Circular –Emphasizes clusters inherent in the drawing topology (see
Figure 3-74 and Figure 3-76)
 Symmetric –Emphasizes symmetries inherent in the drawing topology,
while ensuring that adjacent nodes are close to each other (see
Figure 3-77 and Figure 3-79)
 Hierarchical –Emphasizes dependency relationships (see Figure 3-78 and
Figure 3-80).

Figure 3-73. Orthogonal Layout Figure 3-74. Circular Layout

Figure 3-75. Orthogonal Layout Diagram Figure 3-76. Circular Layout Diagram

Figure 3-77. Symmetric Layout Figure 3-78. Hierarchical Layout

3-60 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Figure 3-79. Symmetric Layout Diagram Figure 3-80. Hierarchical Layout Diagram

Locating Levels
The locate function is useful for navigating directly to a level icon. This function
does not exist for the highest level.
 To locate the level on the map:
• Right-click the level in the Network Element Repository navigation tree and
choose Locate on Map.
The level submap is opened that contains the icon corresponding to the level that
you wish to locate. The submap is positioned to show the part that contains the
level icon, with a frame surrounding it.

Working with Network Elements

Network elements can be RAD devices, third-party devices or entire networks.
A RAD device appears as an icon that resembles the shape of the respective
device. Its color on the map indicates its current operational status.
Third-party devices and networks are symbolized as clouds on the map. For
instructions on working with clouds, refer to Adding and Deleting Clouds.
This section explains how to add, configure and test RAD devices as follows:
• Summary of Tasks
• Adding RAD devices
• Locating RAD devices
• Configuring Existing RAD devices
• Configuring Trap Synchronization
• Synchronizing Alarms
• Connecting to Network Elements
• Testing Connection to Network Elements
• Deleting Network Elements

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-61

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Summary of Tasks
The following table shows the tasks you can perform with RAD devices together
with the corresponding menu items/toolbar icons.

Table 3-28. Tasks

Task Accessed via:

Network Element Repository Map

Right-click menu Toolbar Right-click menu Toolbar

icon icon

Configure the properties of the Properties ––– Properties –––

selected network element (see
Configuring Existing Network
Element)

Configure trap synchronization Fault > Trap Sync ––– Fault > Trap Sync –––
groups for the selected network Groups Groups
element (see Configuring Trap
Synchronization)

Synchronizing the RADview fault Fault > Alarms ––– Fault > Alarms Sync –––
data with the network element Sync
(see Synchronizing Alarms)

Connect to network element via Shelf View Shelf View –––

shelf view (see Connecting to )

Connect to network element via Web Browser ––– Web Browser –––
Web Browser (see Connecting to )

Connect to network element via Telnet/SSH ––– Telnet/SSH –––

Telnet, unsecure or secured (SSH)
(see Connecting to )

Test connectivity of a network External Tools > ––– External Tools > –––
element by sending ping (see Ping Ping
Testing Connection to )

Test SNMP connectivity of a SNMP Ping ––– SNMP Ping –––

network element (see Testing
Connection to )

Trace route to network element External Tools > ––– External Tools > –––
(see Testing Connection to ) Trace Route Trace Route

Run a custom external tool for External Tools > ––– External Tools > –––
network element <customized tool> <customized tool>
Note: If you added external tools
as described in , they appear in
the External Tools submenu.

Poll the network element Poll ––– Poll –––

3-62 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Task Accessed via:

Network Element Repository Map

Right-click menu Toolbar Right-click menu Toolbar

icon icon

View active alarms for the Active Alarms ––– Active Alarms –––
network element in the Event
Browser, via filter (refer to
Chapter 7 for details on viewing
device events)

View previous alarms for the History Events ––– History Events –––
network element in the Event
Browser, via filter (refer to
Chapter 7 for details on viewing
device events)

Remove the network element Delete ––– Delete –––

from the Network Element
Repository and map (see Deleting
)

Locate the network element on Locate on Map ––– ––– –––

the map (see Locating )

Search for network element by ––– –––

name (see Searching in Topology
Panes)

Create a link between two ––– ––– New Link

network elements (see Adding
Legacy Links Between Network
Elements)

Display list of links associated ––– ––– Link List –––

with network element

Select network elements/levels ––– ––– Show Neighbors –––

that are connected by links to the
network element

Deselect network elements/levels ––– ––– Hide Neighbors –––

that are connected by links to the
network element, that were
selected via Show Neighbors

Hide the nearest neighbors of the ––– ––– Hide > Hide –––
network element Neighbors > One
Level

Hide the entire neighbor hierarchy ––– ––– Hide > Hide –––
of the network element Neighbors> All
Levels

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-63

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Task Accessed via:

Network Element Repository Map

Right-click menu Toolbar Right-click menu Toolbar

icon icon

Represent the nearest neighbors ––– ––– Fold > Fold –––
of the network element as a Neighbors > One
folder, which can be Level
double-clicked to open an
overview

Represent the network element’s ––– ––– Fold > Fold –––
entire neighbor hierarchy as a Neighbors> All
folder, which can be Levels
double-clicked to open an
overview

Transfer any elements in a folder ––– ––– Fold > Unfold –––
back to their original location

Note
If you added external tools, they appear in the External Tools submenu.

Adding RAD Devices

Notes • Devices must be SNMP-enabled, otherwise RADview cannot identify and

communicate with them. For additional information and instructions, refer to
the respective hardware manual.
• Sublevels can accommodate max 200 devices.

This section explains how to add network elements and configure them for the
first time. You have the following options to add network elements to a certain
level on the map:
• Adding a single network element manually
• Adding multiple network elements manually within a defined IP address
range. In addition, you can define adding RAD devices only and/or RAD and
third-party devices. You also have the option to add network elements
without verifying connectivity
• Adding and configuring network elements automatically according to preset
rules. For further information and instructions, refer to Adding and
Configuring Network Elements Automatically in Chapter 4.

3-64 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

 To add a single network element to the Network Element Repository and map:
1. Select the level in the Network Element Repository for which you wish to add
a network element and select New NE on the toolbar, or right-click the
level in the Network Element Repository or in the map and select New NE
from the shortcut menu.
The New NE dialog box is displayed (see Figure 3-81 to Figure 3-86). It
contains the following tabs:
 General – Defines general network element parameters. Refer to
Figure 3-81 and Table 3-29 for a description of the parameters.
 SNMP – Defines the SNMP parameters of the network element if it is
managed via SNMPv1. Refer to Figure 3-82 and Table 3-30 for a
description of the parameters.
 SNMPv3 – Defines the SNMP parameters of the network element if it is
managed via SNMPv3. Refer to Figure 3-83 and Table 3-31 for a
description of the parameters.
 Custom Ports - Defines the ports for communication and access
protocols. For details, refer to Table 3-32.
 Job Parameters – Defines the job parameters of the network element, for
authentication if a script is sent to it. Refer to Figure 3-84 and Table 3-33
for a description of the parameters.
 External Tools – Defines default command parameters for external tools.
Refer to Figure 3-85 and Table 3-34 for a description of the parameters
 Note – Holds optional text description.
2. Click <Set>.
The network element is configured with the new properties and appears
in the navigation tree as a node in the selected level. A new icon
corresponding to the network element appears on the level map.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-65

 Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Figure 3-81. New NE Dialog Box – General Tab Figure 3-82. New NE Dialog Box – SNMP Tab

Figure 3-83. New NE Dialog Box – SNMPv3 Tab Figure 3-84. New NE Dialog Box – Job Parameters Tab

3-66 Using the RADview GUI RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Figure 3-85. New NE Dialog Box – External Tools Tab Figure 3-86. New NE Dialog Box – Note Tab

Table 3-29. Network Element General Parameters

Parameter Function Possible Values

Node Name Name of network element. This

cannot be the same as the name
of a network element that already
exists in the network.

IP Address IP address of network element.

This cannot be equal to the IP
address of a network element
that already exists in the network,
unless you have allowed duplicate
net addresses via the Map
Settings tab of the Preferences
dialog box (refer to Setting the
Preferences)

Management Protocol Indicates if network element is SNMP

managed via SNMP or is a device Non-SNMP
(such as a computer or printer)
that is not managed via SNMP
Note: If Non-SNMP is selected,
then the SNMP, SNMPv3, and Job
Parameters tabs are not
accessible.

Commissioning Date Date of commissioning NE

Administrative Status Indicates if NE is active up – NE is active

down – NE is not active

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-67

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Parameter Function Possible Values

Default double-click action Specifies action to take when Shelf View: Open shelf view
node is double-clicked. The Web Browser: Connect to
default is the action that was network element via Web
defined for the level, but you can browser
specify a different action for the
Telnet/SSH: Connect to
node if you wish.
network element via Telnet.

Name Displays name configured in agent

Note: This parameter appears only device
in the Node properties dialog box.

Description Displays description configured in

Note: This parameter appears only agent device
in the Node properties dialog box.

Contact Displays contact information for

agent device

Location Displays location information for

agent device

Table 3-30. Network Element SNMP Parameters

Parameter Function

Read Community SNMP Read request community

Write Community SNMP Write request community

Timeout (msec) The SNMP timeout for the network element, in

milliseconds

Retries The SNMP number of retries for the network element(s)

Polling Interval (sec) The SNMP polling interval for the network element(s), in
seconds

Table 3-31. Network Element SNMPv3 Parameters

Parameter Function Possible Values

Access Mode SNMP version used for network element V1 – SNMPv1

Note: If V1 is selected, the rest of the USM – SNMPv3 (User
SNMPv3 parameters are not available. Security Model)
User Name SNMPv3 user
Authentication Authentication protocol to use No Authentication – No
Protocol authentication is performed
MD5 – The authentication
protocol MD5 is used
SHA – The authentication
protocol SHA is used

3-68 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Parameter Function Possible Values

Authentication Authentication password

Password Note: This parameter is available only if
Authentication Protocol is not set to No
Authentication.
Privacy Protocol Privacy (encryption) protocol to use No Privacy – No encryption
is performed
DES – The privacy protocol
DES is used
Privacy Password Privacy (encryption) password
Note: This parameter is available only if
Privacy Protocol is not set to No Privacy.
Context String that identifies the SNMPv3
information

Table 3-32. Network Element Custom Ports

Parameter Default Values

Telnet Port 23

SSH Port 22

HTTP Port 80

HTTPS Port 443

Table 3-33. Network Element Job Parameters

Parameter Function Possible Values

User Username for script authentication Username and password

Password Password for script authentication defined in NE
Username and password
must both be filled in or
both left empty
Protocol Defines which protocol is used for SSH
access Telnet
SSH and Telnet can provide
secured access. Telnet is
unsecured.
Port Port for protocol Default port = 23

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-69

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Table 3-34. Network Element External Tool Parameters

Parameter Function Possible Values

Menu Option Specifies for which external tool Ping – Define the command
to define the command line and parameters for
parameters sending ping to network
element
Trace Route – Define the
command line and parameters
for tracing route to network
element
Note: If you added external
tools as described in , they
appear in the list.
Command Line Defines the command line for
the external tool
Note: This parameter is read-
only.
Command Parameters Defines the command
Note: If you change the parameters for the external tool
command parameters, the
attribute is stored in the
EMS database and used for
command line generation
for this object, rather than
the value in the External
Tools tab in the Level
Properties dialog box.

 To add multiple network elements to the Network Element Repository and map:

1. Right-click the selected level and select New NEs from the shortcut menu.
The New NEs dialog box is displayed (see Figure 3-87 to Figure 3-92). It
contains the following tabs:
 General – Defines general network element parameters. Refer to
Figure 3-87 and Table 3-35 for a description of the parameters.
 SNMP – Defines the SNMP parameters of the network element. Refer to
Figure 3-88 and Table 3-30 for a description of the parameters.
 SNMPv3 – Defines the SNMPv3 parameters of the node. Refer to
Figure 3-89 and Table 3-31 for a description of the parameters.
 Custom Ports – Defines the ports for communication and access
protocols. For details, refer to Table 3-32.

3-70 Using the RADview GUI RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

 Job Parameters – Defines the job parameters of the network element, for
authentication if a script is sent to it. Refer to Figure 3-90 and Table 3-33
for a description of the parameters.
 External Tools – Defines default command parameters for external tools.
Refer to Figure 3-91 and Table 3-34 for a description of the parameters.
 Note – Holds optional text description.
2. Click <Set>.
The range of network elements is added as nodes with the new
properties to the selected level. They appear in the navigation tree, and
corresponding icons appear on the level map.

Figure 3-87. New NEs Dialog Box – General Tab Figure 3-88. New NEs Dialog Box – SNMP Tab

Figure 3-89. New NEs Dialog Box – SNMPv3 Tab Figure 3-90. New NEs Dialog Box – Job Parameters Tab

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-71

 Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Figure 3-91. New NEs Dialog Box – External Tools Tab Figure 3-92. New NEs Dialog Box – Note Tab

Table 3-35. New NEs General Parameters

Parameter Function Possible Values

From Specifies starting IP address for range

of network elements to add

To Specifies ending IP address for range

of network elements to add
Note: Nodes are not added for
IP addresses that already exist in the
network, even if duplicate net
addresses are allowed in the Map
Settings tab of the Preferences dialog
box.

Estimated amount of Displays how many devices might be

discovered devices added, according to the range of IP
addresses given by From and To

Management Protocol Indicates if network elements are SNMP

managed via SNMP or are devices Non-SNMP
(such as a computer or printer) that
are not managed via SNMP
Note: If Non-SNMP is selected, then
the SNMP, SNMPv3, and Job
Parameters tabs are not accessible.

Default double-click Specifies action to take when node is Shelf View: Open shelf
action double-clicked. The default is the view
action that was defined for the level, Web Browser: Connect
but you can specify a different action to network element via
for the range of network elements if Web browser
you wish.
Telnet/SSH: Connect to
network element via
Telnet.

3-72 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Parameter Function Possible Values

Add only connected If selected, only devices that respond Selected or cleared
devices to SNMP request for OID are added

Add only RAD devices If selected, only devices whose OIDs Selected or cleared
identify them as RAD devices are
added
Note: This option can be selected
only if the option Add only connected
devices is selected.

Ping Timeout Specifies timeout value for ping in 1– 4,294,967,296

milliseconds
Note: This parameter is relevant only
if the option Add only connected
devices is selected. It is
recommended to set it to a value
between 100 and 500.

Locating RAD Devices

The locate function is useful for when you have a large number of network
elements.
 To locate a RAD device on the map:
• Right-click the RAD device in the Network Element Repository navigation tree
and select Locate on Map from the shortcut menu.
The level submap that contains the network element is opened. The
submap is positioned to show the part with the network element. A
green frame is displayed surrounding the network element.

Configuring Existing Network Elements

This section explains how to (re)configure existing RAD devices in the system.
 To configure network element properties:
1. Right-click the network element in the Network Element Repository or in the
map and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
The Properties dialog box is displayed (see Figure 3-93 to Figure 3-98). It
contains the following tabs:
 General – Defines general network element parameters. Refer to
Figure 3-93 and Table 3-29 for a description of the parameters.
 SNMP – Defines the SNMP parameters of the network element if it is
managed via SNMPv1. Refer to Figure 3-94 and Table 3-30 for a
description of the parameters.
 SNMPv3 – Defines the SNMP parameters of the network element if it is
managed via SNMPv3. Refer to Figure 3-95 and Table 3-31 for a
description of the parameters.
 Custom Ports – Defines the ports for communication and access
protocols. For details, refer to Table 3-32.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-73

 Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

 Job Parameters – Defines the job parameters of the network element, for
authentication if a script is sent to it. Refer to Figure 3-96 and Table 3-33
for a description of the parameters.
 External Tools – Defines default command parameters for external tools.
Refer to Figure 3-97 and Table 3-34 for a description of the parameters.
 Note – Holds optional text description.
2. Click <Set>.
The network element is configured with the new properties.

Figure 3-93. Node Properties Dialog Box – General Tab Figure 3-94. Node Properties Dialog Box – SNMP Tab

3-74 Using the RADview GUI RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Figure 3-95. Node Properties Dialog Box – SNMPv3 Tab Figure 3-96. Node Properties Dialog Box –
Job Parameters Tab

Figure 3-97. Node Properties Dialog Box – External Tools Figure 3-98. Node Properties Dialog Box – Note Tab
Tab

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-75

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Configuring Trap Synchronization

Trap synchronization is used to ensure that traps sent by devices to network
managers are not lost. The network managers are assigned to trap
synchronization groups. The devices must be configured with the corresponding
trap synchronization group identifications.

Notes • Trap synchronization can be configured only for devices that support trap
synchronization, which is usually implemented with Generic RADOS. Refer to
the device Installation and operation manual to determine whether the device
supports trap synchronization.
• Service Center devices must have trap synchronization enabled and
configured.
• Refer to Chapter 7 for details on how to set the trap synchronization group ID
of the EMS server.
• In case that the TrapSync mechanism cannot synchronize the alarms between
the NMS and a specific device in a specified range (SoftSync), it requests all
active alarms from the device (HardSync).
• The TrapSync mechanism is supported for devices that support RADOS.

 To add trap synchronization groups:

1. Right-click the RAD device in the Network Element Repository or map, then
select Fault and then Trap Sync Groups from the shortcut menu.
The Trap Sync Groups dialog box appears.

Figure 3-99. Trap Sync Groups Dialog Box

2. Click <Add> to add a trap synchronization group.

The Trap Sync Groups dialog box displays a new entry with an editable
trap synchronization group ID.

3-76 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Figure 3-100. Trap Sync Groups Dialog Box –New Entry

3. Click the browse button next to the Managers column to display a list of
network managers. If the device is managed via SNMPv3, the list contains the
EMS servers that have been defined by the device to receive SNMPv3 traps,
otherwise it contains the EMS servers that have been defined in the device’s
manager list.

Notes You can use the SNMPv3 Manager application to add EMS servers that receive
SNMPv3 traps from the device (Notifications, snmpTargetParamsTable and
snmpTargetAddrTable). Refer to Chapter 4 for details on the SNMPv3 Manager
application.

Figure 3-101. Available Managers Dialog Box

Note If the device is not managed via SNMPv3, the :162 does not appear after the
manager IP address.

4. Select the manager(s) that you wish to add to the trap synchronization group
(hold down <CTRL> to select more than one manager), then click <Set>.
The selected managers are displayed in the Managers column.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-77

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Figure 3-102. Trap Sync Groups Dialog Box – Managers Selected

5. Click <Apply> to save the new trap synchronization group in the device.

Figure 3-103. Trap Sync Groups Dialog Box – Managers Saved

Synchronizing Alarms
You can manually synchronize RADview fault service data with a network
element, if for some reason traps from the device may have been lost, or if
device alarms were configured in some way that requires synchronization.
RADview performs internal alarm synchronization, but you may wish to manually
start the synchronization.

 To synchronize alarms:
1. Right-click the RAD device in the Network Element Repository or map, then
select Fault and then Alarms Sync from the shortcut menu.
You are prompted to confirm the synchronization.

3-78 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Figure 3-104. Alarm Synchronization Confirmation

2. Click <OK> to start the synchronization.

Connecting to RAD Devices

You can connect to RAD devices via shelf view, Web Browser, or Telnet,
depending on the node configuration.

 To connect to a RAD device via shelf view:

• Open the shelf view of the network element using one of the following
possibilities:
 Select the network element in the Network Element Repository and, on
the toolbar, click Shelf View .
 Right-click the network element in the Network Element Repository or in
the map and then select Shelf View from the shortcut menu.
 Double-click the network element (if the network element default
double-click action is set to Shelf View).
The agent’s shelf view appears as shown in Figure 3-130 through
Figure 3-133 if shelf view is supported for the device. For details on
working with the shelf view, refer to Using the Shelf View.

Note • If there is a shelf view already open for the device when you try to open the
shelf view, you are given the choice of opening the shelf view in read-only
mode or in read-write mode, or of canceling the open, since only one user at
a time can have the shelf view open in read-write mode (see Figure 3-134).
• If you choose to open the shelf view in read-write mode, the user that has it
already open receives a warning message that you have taken read-write
access. The other user now has read-only access (see Figure 3-135).

 To connect to network element via Web browser:

• Right-click the network element in the Network Element Repository and
select Web Browser from the shortcut menu, or double-click the node (if
the node default double-click action is set to Web Browser).
A Web browser login window appears for the agent (Figure 3-140) if web
access is supported by the device. For more information about
configuring a particular device via Web browser, refer to the Installation
and Operation manual associated with the relevant device.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-79

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

 To connect to a RAD device via Telnet:

• Right-click the network element in the Network Element Repository and
select Telnet/SSH from the shortcut menu, or double-click the network
element (if the network element default double-click action is set to
Telnet/SSH).
A Telnet login window appears for the agent (see Figure 3-140) if
Telnet/SSH is supported for the device. For more information about
configuring a particular device via Telnet, refer to the device Installation
and Operation manual.

Note You can quickly view system information and alarm status for an agent by
positioning the mouse over the node in the Network Element Repository
navigation tree or map, until a tooltip appears that displays the device
information.

Figure 3-105. Tooltip for Node

Note If you create a network element for a product that has not been selected when
installing RADview, you cannot connect to it. When you double-click such a
device, you receive a warning that no RADview application was defined for this
type of product.

Testing Connection to RAD Devices

You can send regular ping or SNMP ping to a network element or trace the route
to it. The SNMP ping tests the SNMP connectivity of the network elements by
verifying the following:
• SNMP access to the network element is enabled
• SNMP read settings in the RADview device properties match those actually
defined in the device.

Note The SNMP ping tests SNMP connectivity for an SNMP GET.

3-80 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

 To test the connectivity of a RAD device:

• Right-click the network element and select External Tools and then Ping
from the shortcut menu.
A command window appears showing ping to device. The ping continues
to be sent until you close the window.

Figure 3-106. Ping to Device

 To test the SNMP connectivity of a RAD device in the Network Element

Repository:

• Right-click the network element and select SNMP Ping from the shortcut
menu.
A command window appears showing SNMP ping to device.

Figure 3-107. SNMP Ping to Device

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-81

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

 To trace the route to a RAD device:

• Right-click the network element and select External Tools and then Trace
Route from the shortcut menu.
A command window appears showing the number of hops needed to
reach the device.

Figure 3-108. Tracing Route to Device

Deleting RAD Devices

 To delete a RAD device from the Network Element Repository and map:

Note Before removing a network element from the network, you have to first remove
all the links associated with the relevant network element.

1. Right-click the RAD device in the Network Element Repository and select
Delete from the shortcut menu.
You are prompted to confirm the deletion.

Figure 3-109. Confirmation of Network Element Deletion

2. Click <OK> to confirm the deletion.

The network element is deleted from the Network Element Repository
and map.

3-82 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Adding and Deleting Clouds

Note This section and the following ones are illustrated with screen images recorded
on a Windows station. These screen images are identical to the ones at Unix and
Linux platforms except for the frame.

Clouds can be entire networks or third-party devices that can be part of a service
you define. RADview supports the following types of clouds:
• Ethernet based clouds for EtherAcess devices managed via RADview-Service
Manager
• Ethernet based clouds for units managed via RADview-Service Center
• SDH/SONET clouds for DS0 and DS1 interfaces of units managed via RADview-
Service Center.
Once a cloud is added, existing physical interfaces must be specified. These
interfaces are referred to as logical access points and can be used for multiple
services.
This section explains how to add a cloud, specify logical access points and how to
remove a cloud.

Note • Clouds are associated with a provider, therefore at least one provider must be
added to the Business Entities list (in the Business Entities work space) before
you can add a cloud.
• If you try to add a cloud without selecting a provider, an error message is
displayed.

 To locate an existing cloud:

• Follow the instructions on locating RAD devices under Locating RAD Devices.

 To add a cloud:
1. Select the level in the Network Element Repository for which you wish to add
the cloud and select New Cloud on the toolbar, or right-click the level in
the Network Element Repository or in the map and select New Cloud
from the shortcut menu.
The New Cloud dialog box is displayed (see Figure 3-111).

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-83

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Figure 3-110. Adding a Cloud - RADview-Service Center not Installed

Figure 3-111. Adding a Cloud – RADview-Service Center Installed

Note If RADview-Service Center is not installed, the Technology list does not show and
the cloud is added for EtherAccess devices for use in RADview-Service Manager.

2. Assign a name to the cloud and enter a short description (optional).

3. Under Provider, click <…>.
The Providers list appears.
4. In the Providers list, select the desired provider and then click <Select>.

3-84 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Figure 3-112. Adding a Cloud _ Providers List

The selected provider is added to the Provider field in the New Cloud
dialog box.

Figure 3-113. Adding a Cloud – Provider Added (RADview-Service Center Installed)

5. If RADview-Service Center is installed, select the cloud type under

Technology. The following options are available:
 Multi – For EtherAcess devices via RADview-Service Manager
 SDH/SONET-DS0 – For TDM based devices with DS0 interfaces via
RADview-Service Center
 SDH/SONET-DS1 – For TDM based devices with DS1 interfaces via
RADview-Service Center
 Ethernet – For Ethernet based devices managed via RADview-Service
Center.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-85

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Note • Clouds for use with RADview-Service Center are added to both the Network
map of RADview and the RADview-SC Client map as illustrated in Figure 3-114
(highlighted pink).
• Clouds for use with RADview-Service Manager are added to the RADview
Network Manager map only as illustrated in Figure 3-114 (highlighted yellow).

6. Click <Set>.
The cloud is added to the map.

Figure 3-114. Clouds Added

In order to include it in services, you now have to define access points, virtual
private networks and a service level as explained under Configuring Clouds in the
RADview-Service Manager manual section.

Note Access points for SDH/SONET and Ethernet clouds used with RADview-Service
Center must be configured in the RADview-Service Center application as explained
in Chapter 4 of the RADview-Service Center manual section.

3-86 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

 To remove a cloud:
1. Remove all services that use the relevant cloud. For additional information on
removing services, refer to the RADview-Service Manager manual section.
2. Remove all VPNs and access points from the cloud.
3. Right-click the cloud.
A shortcut menu appears.

4. Click Delete and confirm your request.

Working with Links

You can create one or more links between nodes (network elements or clouds).
These can be ‘general’ links between two nodes and serve as a graphic
association. Such links are referred to as legacy links.
Links can also be between specific interfaces of two nodes and are referred to as
topology links. These links are required and used to define a service between two
nodes. For additional information and instructions, refer to he RADview-Service
Manager manual section.

Adding Legacy Links Between Network Elements

 To create a legacy link between two network elements:

1. Right-click the device on the map and select New Link.
The New Link dialog box appears, with the selected device as the link
starting point (EndPoint A).

Figure 3-115. New Link – End Point Not Selected

2. Under EndPoint Z, click <…>.

The Select End Point List dialog box appears.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-87

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Figure 3-116. New Legacy Link – Select End Point

3. Expand the list as necessary by clicking , select the desired network

element from the list and then click <Select>.
The New Link dialog box appears with the selected end point and the
message that the Legacy Link will be created.

3-88 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Figure 3-117. New Link – Network Elements Selected for Legacy Link

4. Click <Set>.
The legacy link is created and appears gray on the map.

Figure 3-118. Legacy Link Created on the Map between two NEs in the Same
Level

Deleting Links Between Network Elements

Before deleting a link, you have to first remove any service defined along this
link.

 To delete a link:

1. Right-click the link and select Delete from the shortcut menu.
The Delete Link dialog box opens, showing a list of links between the two
devices.
2. In the list, select the link that you wish to delete and click <Delete>.
You are prompted to confirm the deletion.
3. Click <Yes> to confirm the deletion.
The selected link is deleted.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-89

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Working with Groups

When working in the Topology tab, you can define groups of network elements.
There are two types of groups:
• Static – Group members are added by copy/paste of nodes/levels from the
tree/map. When levels are pasted to a static group, the corresponding
network elements are added to the group without the level hierarchy. You
can create levels in a static group.
• Dynamic – Group members are defined by criteria that determine which NEs
belong to the group. NEs that meet the criteria are automatically members of
the group. When an NE is added to the map, and it matches the specified
criteria, it is automatically added to the group. When an NE is changed, it may
automatically be added to or removed from the group, depending on the
group criteria. When an NE in the group is removed from the map, it is
automatically removed from the group.
The Groups pane contains the access levels with the associated group trees as
listed below:
• Public – Contains public groups created by any user. All users can view the
groups. Create, delete, and modify access are controlled via the user security
profile.
• Shared – Contains groups created by users according to access allowed by
the user security profile. Shared groups are meant for a group of users that
share a common security level or profile.
• Private – Named <user> after the currently logged-in user, private group tree
containing the user’s own created groups. Only the currently logged-in user
has view, create, delete, and modify access.

Group Operations
You can perform group operations as shown in Table 3-36.
You can perform the same operations on group members as for levels/NEs in the
Network Element Repository, except you cannot explicitly add or delete members
of dynamic groups.

Table 3-36. Group Operations

Operation Description

Open (double-click) Opens a tab in the map pane, showing the devices that belong to
group

New Level Opens a dialog box to add a new level to the group
(Static group only)

Locate on Map Opens a tab in the map pane, showing the groups in the subtree

Paste Pastes the previously copied or cut device(s) into the selected group
(Static group only)

Remove Deletes the group and its contents, after confirmation

Refresh Refresh view

3-90 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Operation Description

Properties Opens a dialog box displaying group properties. In case of dynamic

group, you can edit the group criteria.

Adding Static Groups

 To add a static group:

1. Right-click the group tree under which you wish to add a static group and
select New Static Group from the shortcut menu (Figure 3-119).
The New Static Group dialog box is displayed (Figure 3-120).
2. Fill in the group name and click <OK> to create the group.
The group appears in the Groups pane. Refer to Adding Static Group
Members for a description of how to add network elements to the group.

Figure 3-119. Group Tree Right-click Menu

Figure 3-120. Adding New Static Group Dialog Box

Adding Static Group Members

You can copy or move levels or network elements to groups as follows:
• Use copy and paste to copy levels or network elements from the map,
Network Element Repository, or other groups to a static group
• Use cut and paste to move levels or network elements from one static group
to another.

 To add static group members:

1. Right-click the level or network element that you wish to add and select Copy
or Cut.
2. Right-click the static group to which you wish to copy/move the level or
network element and choose Paste.
The network element(s) is/are copied/moved to the selected group.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-91

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Note • If you copy a level from the map or Network Element Repository, the
corresponding network elements are added to the group, but the level itself is
not copied
• If you copy/move a level from another static group, the level is added with the
corresponding network elements.

Adding Dynamic Groups

 To add a dynamic group:

1. Right-click the group tree under which you wish to add a dynamic group and
select New Dynamic Group from the shortcut menu (Figure 3-119).
The New Dynamic Group dialog box is displayed (Figure 3-121).
2. Fill in the group name.
3. Select the desired criterion (refer to Table 3-37) and select And or Or to
specify whether logical and or logical or is applied to the criterion condition.
4. Click <Add Criterion> to add it to the group criteria.
5. When you have finished specifying criteria, click <OK> to create the group.
The group appears in the Groups pane. Any network elements that meet
the criteria are automatically added.

Figure 3-121. New Dynamic Group Dialog Box

3-92 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Table 3-37. Dynamic Group Criteria

Criterion Condition Values

NE Type Equals Click <…> to open list of NE types. Select the

Do not equal desired type and click <Select> to place it into
Value.
Contains
Alternatively you can enter the NE type but this
is not recommended, as it is not checked for
correctness when the criterion is added.

Level Equals Click <…> to open Network Element Repository

tree. Select the desired level and click <Select>
to place it into Value. Alternatively you can enter
the full path of the level but this is not
recommended, as it is not checked for
correctness when the criterion is added.

IP Address Starts with Enter the IP address

Do not start with
Equals

SW Version Equals Enter software version. It is compared with the

Equals or greater device SW version string, as derived from the MIB
parameter sysDescr.
Equals or less
Greater than
Less than

HW Version Equals Enter hardware version. It is compared with the

Equals or greater device HW version string, as derived from the
MIB parameter sysDescr.
Equals or less
Greater than
Less than

Working with the Jobs GUI

Jobs is a utility that covers most configuration tasks on selected network
elements that are performed on the RADview system level and not on the agent
(shelf view) level.

To work with Jobs, you have to select Jobs in the work space selection
area.
When working with Jobs, the GUI is divided into the following four window
elements:

Network Element Shows a tree of levels (submaps) and nodes (network

Repository elements) in the RADview network.

Groups Provides a tree of user-defined groups of network

elements (refer to for more information).

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-93

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Jobs Table Displays the jobs that are defined in the system (refer to
Working with the Jobs Table for more information).
Reports Displays job reports (refer to Working with Job Reports in
Chapter 4 for more information).

Figure 3-122. Network Element Manager – Jobs Work space

Working with the Jobs Table

The Jobs Table has a row for each job that is defined in the system, with the job
attributes as the table columns (see Table 3-38 for a description of the job
attributes). The Jobs Table is divided into two tabs:
• Active – Shows all jobs that are currently running, or that are scheduled to
run (once or recurring).
• History – Shows jobs that have already run, and will not run again. This list
includes jobs that ran` once, as well as jobs that ran recurring but the date of
the last run has passed. All jobs in History tab have status Completed or
Stopped.
The Jobs Table is a customizable table, meaning you can customize the columns
and select which columns are visible. By default, the following columns are visible:
• ID
• Name
• Action
• Scheduling
• Active
• Status.
The Jobs table is customizable, Refer to Customizing Tables in Chapter 3 for
additional information.

3-94 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Table 3-38. Job Attributes

Attribute Description
Job Name A user-defined string of up to 255 characters that is used to identify the job
Job ID A number that is used to uniquely identify the job, set by the management
system at job creation. Each execution of a recurring job has the same job ID,
but can be distinguished by the execution date and time.
Action Action defined for job, e.g. Download Software
Description Description of job
Creator User name of the user who created the job
Creation Time Date and time (YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS) that the job was created
Last Updated By User name of the user who last updated the job parameters via edit job operation
Last Update Time Date and time (YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS) that the job parameters were last
updated
Last Operation By User name of the user who last performed any action on this job such as: run,
stop, activate, deactivate, cancel
Last Operation Time Date and time (YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS) that the job operation (stop, active,
deactive, cancel) was last performed – RO, set by the management system.

Active Indicates if the job is active:

• – The job is currently active, and is performed when its scheduling rules
are met
• – The job is not active, and is not performed when its scheduling rules
are met

Status • Running – Job is currently running

• Stopping – Job is preparing to stop
• Stopped – Job has been stopped by user
• Completed – Job has finished
• Scheduled – Job is scheduled to run
• Expired – Job scheduled time to run has passed, and job is not scheduled to
run again.
• “—“ - The job is not active
Notes:
• In the History tab, only two statusses exist, Completed or Stopped
• If a job is currently running, the status column displays a progress bar
• If a job was running and has been stopped , the status switches to
Stopping... Once it is stopped, the status switches to Stopped
• If a job is not running, the status column displays Stopped, Scheduled, or ‘--’
(if the job is not active).
Scheduling The contents of Scheduling differ according to whether job scheduling is once or
recurring:
• Once – Field contains:
At HH:MM on YYYY/MM/DD
• Recurring – Field contains:
At HH:MM every <recurrence pattern>, <recurrence range>

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-95

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Attribute Description
Next Execute Displays the date and time of the next execution of the job, in format
YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS

Owner The owner is the user name of the job owner. The default owner is the user
who created the job. A user can become the new owner of a job if permitted by
administrator.
Since job is running on server side, the owner security profile is used for the job.
Refer to Job Security in Chapter 4 for additional information.
Security Domain This is empty by default. You can add a domain name during job creation or
when editing a job, to control access to the job (the domain must be defined in
the user security profile with relevant permissions). When security domain is set
for a job, some users may not be able to access the job.
Refer to Job Security in Chapter 4 for additional information.

Working with the Job Toolbar

You can perform job operations from the toolbar or via right-click in the Active
and History tabs. Table 3-39 lists and explains all tools available for the jobs.
Figure 3-123 and Figure 3-124 illustrate options available in the Active tab and
the History tab respectively.

Table 3-39. Job Toolbar Operations

Icon Action Availability In History Tab

New Job, refer to Creating Jobs in Always No

Chapter 4 for additional information

Edit Job When a single non-running job is selected No

Copy Job When a single job is selected Yes

Delete Job When non-running job(s) is(are) selected Yes

Run Job When non-running job(s) is(are) selected No

Stop Job When running job(s) is(are) selected No

Activate Job When non-running and non-active job(s) No

is(are) selected

Deactivate Job When non-running active job(s) is(are) No

selected

Cancel Job When non-running job(s) is (are) selected No

Show Progress When a single running job is selected No

Note: You can also double-click the
row to view the job status dialog
box.

3-96 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Icon Action Availability In History Tab

View Reports When a single non-running job is selected Yes

Note: You can also double-click the
row to view the job reports in the
Reports pane.

Properties When a single job is selected Yes

The shortcut (right-click) menus for the History and Active tabs are illustrated
below.

Figure 3-123. Active Tab Shortcut Menu Figure 3-124. History Tab Shortcut Menu

Working with Wizards

RADview uses wizards (a sequence of dialog boxes) to guide users through a
series of steps in order to set up tasks, services etc. RADview uses wizards to set
up the following:
• Jobs
• Zero Touch
• Service catalogs
• Services

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-97

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

The sections below outline the wizards used to configure the utilities and explain
how to start each one of them.

Jobs
Jobs are administrative tasks performed on one or more pre-defined network
elements (NEs) at a specific time, usually involving TFTP/SFTP file transfers. For an
overview over the Jobs GUI, refer to Working with the Jobs GUI in Chapter 3.
Jobs can be scheduled to execute periodically or once. Table 3-40 outlines tasks
available via Jobs.

Note The availability of jobs depends on whether the selected NE(s) support(s) them.

 To view a list of supported jobs for the specific devices:

• Click the pin image down below for an Excel list with all jobs and the
devices supporting them.

Table 3-40. Currently Supported Jobs

Job Name Description

Collect Statistics Collect statistics from NE (refer to Chapter 5 for

details)

Download Auxiliary File Load a specific file from NE (for example the MAC
address table)

Download Configuration Load configuration file from NE

Download Log Load log file from NE

Download Software Load software file from NE

Download Software from Load software file from backup storage of NE

Backup

Download User File Load user file from NE

Execute Script Send CLI script to NE to be executed. RADview sends

the CLI scripts via SSH. If a device does not support
SSH, RADview-EMS sends it CLI scripts via Telnet

Execute SNMP Script Send SNMP commands to NE

Generate Data Report Generate inventory and other customizable reports

Note: This job can only be selected for MP-4100
version 2.0 and up, and only if RADview-Service
Center (previously SC-TDM) Version 5.0 or higher is
installed and running on the RADview server.

Generate Statistics Generate monthly SLA report (refer to Chapter 5 for

Report additional information)

Install Software Set a software file as active (results in automatic

reboot of NE)

3-98 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Job Name Description

Reboot Reboot NE

Save Configuration Copy running-config to startup-config file of NE

Swap Main and Backup Swap between the NE main and backup storage SW
Software

Upload Configuration Load configuration file to NE

Upload License Load license file to NE

Upload Software Load software file to NE

Upload Software to Load software file to backup storage of NE

Backup

Upload User File Load user file to NE

The Job wizard consists of max 7 steps. Depending on your choices, setting a task
may require two steps.

 To start the Jobs wizard:

1. In the work space selection area, select Jobs.

The Jobs work space appears.

2. In the Jobs Table, click New Job .

The Jobs wizard appears.

Figure 3-125. Creating a Job - Wizard

The table below highlights the wizard steps and provides reference to additional
information and instructions.

Table 3-41. Work Flow of Creating a Job

Step Name Task

NE Selection Method Select the method that defines the nework elements (NEs).

Selection Define criteria to identify the relevant network elements according to

the selected method.

Select an Action Define the task to execute from a list. Only tasks that apply to all
selected network elements can be selected. All others appar listed,
but are grayed out.

Validate an Action Appears only if a conflict occurs, for example one or more NEs do not
support the selected action.

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-99

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Step Name Task

<Job>: Job Parameters Define the parameters for the tasks

Validate the Job Appears only if a conflict occurs, for example one or more NEs
Parameters support the job, but not the selected job parameters.

Schedule Define whether to execute the job now, at a later stage or frequently
according to defined intervals

Zero Touch
Zero Touch is a utility that allows creating rules to automatically locate and
configure devices on the system level. Rules are defined using a wizard that
consists of up to four steps.

 To start defining a Zero Touch rule:

1. From the menu, select Tools > Zero Touch Console.
The Zero Touch Configuration dialog box appears.

Figure 3-126. Zero Touch Configuration Dialog Box

2. In the Jobs Table, click New Rule .

The Create New Rule wizard appears.

Figure 3-127. Defining a Rule - Wizard

The table below highlights the wizard steps and provides reference to additional
information and instructions.

3-100 Using the RADview GUI RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Table 3-42. Work Flow of Creating a Rule

Step Name Task

General Parameters Assign a name to the rule and define a subnet and an IP address
range

NER Population Define the target loction in the network element repositry (NER)
and a naming convention for nodes found

Provisioning Actions Define configuration tasks such as software and/or configuration

uploads, scripts to be executed and define how the system should
respond if a unit is replaced

Network Scan Configuation Specify criteria according to which the network is scanned, such as
scan interval, SNMP parameters, user credentials for access etc.

Maintenance Windows
RADview enables users to define maintenance windows that interrupt the
sampling by RADview-Performance Manager during maintenance tasks such as
software uploads, downloads etc in order to avoid statistic errors and failure
reports due to scheduled down times.

 To define a maintenance window:

• From the Main menu, select Tools > Maintenance Windows .

The Maintenance Windows dialog box appears.

Figure 3-128. Maintenance Windows Dialog Box

 To define and schedule a maintenance window:

• In the Maintenance Windows dialog box, click New .

The New Maintenance Window wizard appears.

Figure 3-129. New Maintenance Window - Wizard

RADview Using the RADview GUI 3-101

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Table 3-43. Work Flow of Defining a Maintenance Window

Step Name Task

General Parameters Define the maintenance parameters for the maintenance window
and the resources that it applies to

Scheduling Define the schedule for the maintenance window

Service Catalogs and Services

RADview-SM provides E-line services, which require defining Ethernet service
catalogs. The service catalogs are defined and/or edited using a wizard that
consists of three steps. For additional information, refer to the RADview-Service
Manager manual section.

3.3 Working with Utilities

Some utilities come with their own GUI, which is introduced in the relevant
section. This section lists available utilities, their task and provides reference to
the respective manual sections covering them. All utilities listed below are
available from the Tools menu of the RADview Network Manager.

Table 3-44. Utilities – Listed in the Tools Menu

Name Icon Task Manual Section

System Console Enabling/disabling functionalities Using RADview Settings and

Utilities

Admin Console Provides log administration, fault services, Configuring the Network
security services, and changes attibutes Element Repository
for the network element repository (NER)

Provisioning Cleanup

Zero Touch Console Automatically adds and configures Adding and Configuring
network elements according to pre- Network Elements
defined rules Automatically

Log Viewer Customizes the list of logs displayed Viewing RADview Events in
the Log Viewer

Net Inventory Displays network entities and their Net Inventory

attributes

Maintenance Windows Defines or re-defines downtimes for Maintenance Windows

specific maintenance tasks on pre-defined
resources such as ports, links, devices,
services etc.

License Manager Adds and maintains the licenses Managing and Modifying
Licenses

3-102 Working with Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Name Icon Task Manual Section

SNMPv3 Manager Modifies the SNMPv3 profile of SNMPv3- Configuring SNMPv3 Settings
enabled network entities using the SNMPv3 Manager

Event Browser Lists events, allows adding notes, sound Working with the Event
profiles etc Browser

SecFlow Invokes the SecFlow iSIM system SecFlow iSIM User Manual

Version Browser Displays the RADview package contents Viewing the RADview Package
Contents

SNMP Spy Displays SNMP requests exchanged Monitoring SNMP Messages

between the NMS and SNMP agents.

3.4 Accessing Devices for Configuration

A device can be accessed for configuration by double-clicking the device on the
map or on the Network Element Repository (refer to Connecting to RAD Devices).
One of the following then opens, depending on what is supported by/configured
for the device:
• Shelf view – Refer to Using the Shelf View
• Web browser – Refer to Using the Web Browser
• Telnet/PuTTY window – Refer to Using Telnet/PuTTY.

Using the Shelf View

The shelf view displays a dynamic graphical representation of the device panel(s).
The view includes port and/or card interfaces and their operational and
communication status. This section provides a general overview of shelf views.
For information on the shelf view of a specific agent, refer to the RADview agent
(device/module) user's manual (bundled with this system user manual).
Some agents can be configured only when online and connected to RADview.
Other agents provide configuration(s) in RADview (referred to as Edit
configuration) and configuration in the agent (referred to as Agent
configuration). Edit configurations can be downloaded from RADview to the
agent and agent configurations can be uploaded from the agent to RADview. You
can configure the Edit configuration regardless of whether the agent is
connected to RADview.

Note The examples below are provided for Windows 7, but apply to all supported
Windows platforms.

RADview Accessing Devices for Configuration 3-103

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

• See Figure 3-130 for an example of a standalone unit that can be configured
only when connected to RADview. As the ports and LEDs are all on the front
panel, only the front panel is displayed in the shelf view.
• See Figure 3-131 for another example of a standalone unit that can be
configured only when connected to RADview. This unit has LEDs on the front
panel and ports on the rear panel therefore both panels are displayed.
• See Figure 3-132 for an example of a standalone unit with Edit and Agent
configurations
• See Figure 3-133 for an example of a chassis containing cards (modules),
with Edit and Agent configurations.

Figure 3-130. Shelf View of Standalone Unit, Front Panel Only

Figure 3-131. Shelf View of Standalone Unit, Front and Rear Panels

3-104 Accessing Devices for Configuration RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Figure 3-132. Shelf View of Standalone Unit, with Edit and Agent Views

RADview Accessing Devices for Configuration 3-105

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Figure 3-133. Shelf View of Chassis, with Edit and Agent Views

Notes • If there is a shelf view already open for the device when you try to open the
shelf view, you are given the choice of opening the shelf view in read-only
mode or in read-write mode, or of canceling the open, since only one user at
a time can have the shelf view open in read-write mode (see Figure 3-134).
• If you choose to open the shelf view in read-write mode, the user that has it
already open receives a warning message that you have taken read-write
access. The other user now has read-only access (see Figure 3-135).

Figure 3-134. Agent Application Already Open

3-106 Accessing Devices for Configuration RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Figure 3-135. Warning That Other User Has Taken Read-Write Access

You can configure at the device level, card level (if applicable), and port level,
depending on what is selected in the shelf view. If there is an Edit and Agent
view, there may be multiple Edit configurations available.
In the case of the Megaplex and Kilomux devices, all parameters are soft
programmable for up to ten configurations for the Megaplex and two
configurations for the Kilomux (database). Alarm status and system configuration
are available through the Management System at all times

Note For especially complex configurations using certain modules and heavy payloads,
the Megaplex-2200, Megaplex-2100/4 storage capacity is limited to five
configurations.

The shelf view window contains:

• A title bar that displays the device name, and whether the device is
connected or disconnected. If there are Edit and Agent configurations, then
an indication of the currently selected view and the configuration number are
also displayed, For instance, [EDIT.1]172.17.152.27: Disconnected indicates
Edit configuration number 1 for the unit named 172.17.152.27, which is
disconnected.
• A menu bar whose contents depend on the element selected in the shelf
view
• A toolbar for quick execution of tasks. The following shows some taskbar
buttons that may be available. For specific device information, refer to the
agent manual.

Display status and configuration of the device

Perform sanity check for the current Edit configuration

Display or hide the agent (bottom) view

Poll the agent

Reset the agent

• The Edit view if applicable

• The Agent view if applicable (when the device is connected, the Agent view
can be displayed; otherwise, only the Edit Configuration view is displayed)
• View of front and rear panels, or of front panel
• Status bar that indicates the current state of the device.

RADview Accessing Devices for Configuration 3-107

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Edit and Agent Configurations

If applicable to the device, the shelf view window contains the Edit and Agent
views for accessing the Edit and Agent configurations (see Figure 3-132 and
Figure 3-133):
• Edit view (top) corresponds to a configuration that is stored in the Radview
database. In the Edit mode, you can change configuration settings.
The Edit mode is used to design configuration modifications without
interfering with ongoing device activities. An Edit configuration can be
downloaded to the device.
If the device is a chassis with modules, the Edit view displays the front panels
of the programmed cards, including the card names. Slots that have not been
programmed display empty panels. You can select all slots, including empty
ones. If the device is a standalone unit, the Edit view does not show the
status of the LEDs.
• Agent view (on the bottom) corresponds to the agent unit as a whole, and to
the current configuration of the selected agent. In the Agent mode, you can
monitor the configuration and performance of the agent, its cards, and its
ports.
In the Agent view you can access the current parameters of the agent,
including system information (hardware and software), interface information,
and card and channel configuration values. The data displayed in the Agent
view can be used for comparison and analysis when preparing a configuration
in the Edit mode.
Diagnostic operations can also be performed at the management station
from Agent mode. In addition, event and active alarm messages can be
accessed.
If the device is a chassis with modules, the Agent view displays the front
panels of installed cards, including the card names. If a slot is empty, no
panel is displayed and the slot is colored light gray. If a card that is not
supported by the agent version is installed, the slot displays a "?" indication.
If the device is a standalone unit, the Agent view shows the status of the
LEDs.

Note If the device is disconnected, only the Edit view appears (see Figure 3-136).

3-108 Accessing Devices for Configuration RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Figure 3-136. Agent Shelf View, Chassis Containing Cards, Disconnected

 To display or hide the Agent view:

• From the Window menu, select Agent View or click Agent View if
available in the toolbar.

 To select the Agent or Edit view:

• Click inside the desired view.
The selected (active) view is indicated in the shelf view title bar.
Only one view may be selected at any given time.

Device Level
To perform operations at the device level, you must select the device in the shelf
view. The default selection is the device. For specific device-level operations,
refer to the RADview agent user's manual.

 To select the device:

• Click the device inside the shelf view. Ensure that no border surrounds any of
the ports in the window. In the case of a chassis, click the gray bar above the
row of cards.
A blue border outlines the unit, indicating that the entire device is
selected. In Figure 3-130 through Figure 3-133 the device is selected.
In device level, you can perform the following for Megaplex devices:
• Display and set current Megaplex configuration information.
• Select a different preprogrammed Megaplex configuration and modify the
configuration list.
• Copy the current Edit configuration, or all existing Edit configurations, to a
specified Megaplex in the net.
• Upload the current Agent configuration into the Edit configuration view.

RADview Accessing Devices for Configuration 3-109

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

• Download configuration changes (specific Edit configuration) to the Megaplex

MCL-2ETH card.
• Map the links that are used for connection between the current Megaplex and
other Megaplexes in the net.
• Define parameters for Flip configurations and then save/read the Flip
configuration to/from the Megaplex.
• Update configurations of all Megaplexes in the net.
• View physical system information about the current Megaplex.
• View information about the Megaplex interface to the management station.
• Set the date and time of the Megaplex real-time clock.
• Select one of the Megaplex saved configurations as the default configuration.
• Delete a Megaplex configuration.
• View parameters for flipping configurations.
• Activate a Flip configuration over the net.
• Display sanity check results.
• Display and clear current Megaplex-related alarms.
• View a history log of alarms.
• Add management stations that can receive traps.

Card Level
In the case of a chassis, the Card level can be accessed for each preprogrammed
card, in the Edit or Agent views if applicable. The Card Level provides a graphical
representation of the selected card. The view includes ports and their operational
and communication status.

 To access the Card level:

• In the shelf view window, click a card.
A border outlines the card, indicating it is selected.

3-110 Accessing Devices for Configuration RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Figure 3-137. Agent Shelf View, Card Selected

The toolbar includes Card level options, depending on the device and selected
card:

Display physical information about the selected card.

Add a new card configuration to the selected empty slot

(Edit configuration).

Delete the card configuration from the selected slot (Edit

configuration).

Display a list of current card active alarms (Agent

configuration).

 To display the view of a specific card:

• Select Zoom from the Configuration menu or double-click the card.
The card view appears.

Figure 3-138. Card View

RADview Accessing Devices for Configuration 3-111

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

The Card view window contains:

• A title bar that displays an indication of the currently selected view (E for
Edit, A for Agent), the configuration (1 to 10), the device name of the
chassis, and the slot number of the selected card.
• A menu bar whose contents depend on the currently selected card
• A toolbar for quick execution of specific tasks:

Card Info - Display physical information about the selected card.

In the Card level, you can:

• Display physical information about the selected card.
• Zoom in to a more detailed view of the cards, including individual ports.
• Program (add) a new card into an empty slot in Edit mode.
• Copy a card configuration to a destination slot in the current Megaplex or to
another Megaplex in the net (for limitations, refer to the appropriate section
further on in this manual).
• Remove a card from the Edit configuration.
• View the active card and port alarms of the selected card in the Agent mode.

Port Level
The Port level includes ports and their operational and communication status. To
perform port operations, you must select a port. In the case of a chassis, the Port
level can be accessed for each preprogrammed card, in the Edit or Agent views if
applicable. For specific port-level operations, refer to the RADview agent user's
manual.

 To select a port:
• If the device is standalone:
 In the shelf view, click the port that you wish to select.
A blue border outlines the port, indicating it is selected.

Figure 3-139. Port Selected in the Shelf View

• If the device is a chassis:

 In the Card zoom view, click the port.
The selected port is surrounded by a light blue border.

3-112 Accessing Devices for Configuration RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

The Port level is displayed within the Card view. The Port level toolbar includes
the following buttons for quick execution of specific tasks:

Port Info - Display status and configuration of the selected port.

TS Assignment - Display or set time slot assignments for a specific

port (MTML and HS-4 cards).

Alarms > Display - Display a list of current port active alarms (Agent
mode).

Test - View status of diagnostic tests or start/stop diagnostic tests

(Agent mode).

In the Port level, you can perform the following for Megaplex devices:
• View and set software parameters of a port.
• Copy a port configuration to a destination port in the current Megaplex or
another Megaplex.
• Display and set time slot assignments for MTML and HS-4 card ports.
• View the active port alarms of the selected port (Agent mode).
• View, start, and stop diagnostic tests in the selected port (Agent mode).
• View statistical information for the external-1 port of an MTML card.

Using the Web Browser

The Web browser login window appears for the device as shown below. For more
information about configuring a particular device via Web browser, refer to the
device Installation and Operation manual.

Notes • The pop-up blocker should be turned off when working with devices via Web
browser
• If the web access is via HTTPS, you might receive a security warning. In this
case, choose the option to continue.

RADview Accessing Devices for Configuration 3-113

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

Figure 3-140. Web Browser Connection to Device

Web Browser Connection to Device – HTTPS

3-114 Accessing Devices for Configuration RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Using Telnet/PuTTY
The Telnet or PuTTY login window appears for the device as in Figure 3-141 and
Figure 3-142. For more information about configuring a particular device via
Telnet/PuTTY, refer to the device Installation and Operation manual.

Note If the access is via PuTTY, you might receive a security alert. In this case, click
<Yes> to open the PuTTY window.

Figure 3-141. PuTTY Connection to Device

Figure 3-142. Telnet Connection to Device

RADview Accessing Devices for Configuration 3-115

Chapter 3 Operation User’s Manual

3-116 Accessing Devices for Configuration RADview

 Chapter 4
Configuration
Management
This chapter covers the following configuration activities:
• Working with RADview Settings and Utilities
• Configuring the Network
• Performing Additional Tasks

4.1 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities

The system console allows you to control and monitor a mixed set of EMS server
process and services, which include the ones listed below.
Each service or management has a unique configuration. Some are read-only (e.g.
CORBA Event Service) and others can be configured (e.g. EMS Polling Service).
Examples are shown in Figure 4-7.
• Viewing EMS Server Process Information
• Starting/Stopping/Managing Service
• Setting Server SMTP and Security Parameters
• Viewing the Java Name and Directory Service
• Configuring the Data Source
• Viewing the CORBA Name Service
• Viewing the CORBA Event Service
• Viewing the EMS Network Element Repository Service
• Specifying a License Server Location from the System Console
• Configuring the EMS Trap Listener Service
• Configuring EMS Polling
• Viewing the EMS Configuration Management Service
• Configuring EMS Discovery
• Configuring EMS OSS Heartbeat
• Configuring EMS Maintenance
• Configuring Service Center Parameters
• Configuring EMS Snapshot Service

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-1

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

• Setting Job Management Service Parameters

In addition, this section covers the following:
• Adding and Configuring Network Elements Automatically
• Configuring the Network Element Repository
• Configuring SNMPv3
The system console is password protected by default. If you did not change the
password, it is the default RADview system password, which is root.
You can change the password in the Advanced tab of the EMS server parameters
(refer to Setting Server SMTP and Security Parameters).

 To open the System Console:

1. From the RADview Network Manager menu, select Tools > System Console.
The password prompt is displayed.

Figure 4-1. System Console Password Prompt

2. Enter the password, and click <OK>.

The System Console opening window is displayed showing the NMS
station name.
3. Click the +icon to show the process manager and processes, then click the +
icon next to Process 1 to show the services.
The list of services is displayed.

4-2 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-2. System Console Opening Window, Services Expanded

You can view the following elements in the System Console window:
 Servers on stations with EMS
 EMS server process information
 Services that can be monitored
 Services that can be configured
 Status of services (see Table 4-1).

Table 4-1. Status of Service

Color Status

Green Service is enabled

Yellow Service is disabled

Note: In this case, the icons of Process 1 and the associated server
icon are yellow as well.

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-3

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Viewing EMS Server Process Information

You can view and refresh the following information for the EMS server process:
• Memory information
• Resolved host/IP address pairs (used for trap forwarding).
The EMS server can be distributed to several processes on deployment. However,
in a standard setup there is only one EMS server process, named Process 1.

 To view and refresh the EMS server process memory information:

1. In the System Console, select Process 1 (or the name of your EMS server
process) in the left pane and click the General tab.
The EMS server process memory information is displayed as shown in
Figure 4-3. See Table 4-2 for parameter details.
2. Click <Poll> next to any of the memory fields to refresh the information.
The <Poll> button appears pressed, and the memory status is polled
every few seconds and refreshed in the memory field, until you click
<Poll> again to stop the polling.

Note It is recommended to not run the polling indefinitely, as it increases the load on
the EMS server process.

Figure 4-3. EMS Server Process General Tab

4-4 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Table 4-2. EMS Server Process Parameters – General Tab

Parameter Description

Info

Description The name of the EMS server process

Maximum memory Displays maximum amount of memory that is available to be allocated to the
EMS server process

Total memory Displays amount of memory that has been allocated to the EMS server
process

Free memory Displays amount of free memory available, from of the total memory
allocated to the EMS server process

 To view the EMS server process Host/IP address pairs:

1. In the System Console, select Process 1 (or the name of your EMS server
process) in the left pane and click the Advanced tab.
The Advanced tab is displayed as shown in Figure 4-4.
2. Click <Get> to fill the information in the Hosts/IPs field with the resolved
host/IP addresses that have been used in trap forwarding.
3. Click <Update> to update the cache, for example if the IP address of a
workstation used in trap forwarding has changed.

Figure 4-4. EMS Server Process Advanced Tab

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-5

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Starting/Stopping/Managing Services
Unless noted otherwise, every service available in the system console can be
started or stopped by right-clicking the relevant service.

 To start/stop a service:
• In the System Console, right-click the desired service or management item
and select Start or Stop from the shortcut menu (see Figure 4-5).
The service you selected starts or stops respectively.

Figure 4-5. Service Start/Stop Dialog Box

 To manage all services:

• In the System Console, right-click Process Manager and select one of the
following options from the shortcut menu(see Figure 4-6):
 Up – to activate the Process Manager
 Down – to deactivate the Process Manager
 Reboot – to reboot the system
 Shutdown – to shut down the system, including the server
 Restart – to restart the system.

4-6 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-6. Process Manager – for ALL Services

Setting Server SMTP and Security Parameters

You can configure SMTP and security parameters for the EMS server
(NMS station). If you wish to forward events to an email address, you must
provide the SMTP information, as well as configure event forwarding in event
policies (refer to Chapter 7 for details on event policies).

 To set server SMTP and security parameters:

1. In the System Console, select a server name that appears below the Servers
root and then click the Advanced tab.

Note Refer to Chapter 7 for information on the SNMP Spy parameters in the General
tab.

The server SMTP and security parameters are displayed (see Figure 4-7).
2. Enter information for any of the parameters (see Table 4-3).
3. Click <Set>.

Note To retrieve the current value, click <Get>.

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-7

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-7. EMS Server Configuration Dialog Box – Advanced Tab

Table 4-3. EMS Server Parameters – Advanced Tab

Parameter Description

RMI

Host RMI Host on IP Address of Server

Read-only

Port Port for RMI communications default value

Read-only

JAVA Naming and Directory

Service Access

Initial Context Factory Accesses the real context implementation--the Context instance created by
the initial context factory class environment property. This factory class
implements the InitialContextFactory interface.
Read-only

4-8 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Parameter Description

Provider URI The unique identifier for each service provider configured in a domain. Service
provider URIs are useful in that they allow a domain to distinguish between
two service providers that may share the same implementation (but not
configuration).
Read-only

SMTP Consult your system administrator for the values for these parameters

Mail Domain Mail server that sends email for event forwarding
Host Host name or IP address of mail server
Port Port for SMTP communications
User Name of user that sends event forwarding email
Password User password for mail
Security Connection (SSL) Secure Sockets Layer, when enabled (selected), ensures the security of data
sent via the Internet by using encryption.

Localization

First business day of the Specifies the first business day of the week. Can be set to any day of the
week week.
Default: Monday

Security

Internal Password This password protects access to the System Console itself. By default it is
set to the default RADview system password, root.
If you upgrade RADview from a version that did not have a default password
for the system console, after the upgrade the system console password is
set as follows:
• If the system console password was not defined before the upgrade, then
after the upgrade it is set to root
• If the system console password was defined before the upgrade, then
after the upgrade it remains the same.
Note: This password is not related to the Internal user listed in the EMS
Security Administrator.

Viewing the Java Name and Directory Service

The Java Name and Directory Service is a read-only service where only the
description and version of the service are available for viewing.

Table 4-4. Java Name and Directory Service Parameters

Parameter Description

Description Describes the current service selected in the system console

Read-only
Version The version of the service
Read-only

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-9

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Configuring the Data Source

The data source dialog box lists the location and name of the database server
and database.

 To enter new information:

1. Select the Datasource Repository service in the tree.
2. In the Datasource Repository dialog box, enter information for any of the
parameters.
3. Click <Set>.

Note To retrieve the current value, click <Get>.

Table 4-4. Datasource Repository Configuration Parameters

Parameter Description

Description Describes the current service selected in the system console

Read-only

Version The version of the present service selected

Read-only

EMS Datasource (Oracle)

User The name of the EMS Datasource Oracle Database server user

Password The user’s password used to gain access to the EMS Datasource

Viewing the CORBA Name Service

The CORBA Name Service allows server applications to advertise object references
using logical names.

Note This service is always active and there is no option to stop it.

Table 4-5. CORBA Name Service Parameters

Parameter Description

Description Describes the current service selected in the system console

Read-only
Version The version of the service
Read-only

4-10 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Viewing the CORBA Event Service

The CORBA Event Service allows the application to send an event that is received
by any number of objects.

Table 4-6. CORBA Event Service Parameters

Parameter Description

Description Describes the current service selected in the system console

Read-only
Version The version of the service
Read-only

Event Service Settings

Event Channels Event channel files containing the event service settings

Configuring the EMS Log Service

RADview has a log service that records all the events that occurred in the server.
The EMS Log Service can be configured as explained in Table 4-7.
In addition, RADview uses the Syslog protocol (RFC 5674, RFC 3164) to generate
and transport event notifications to up to two Syslog servers. You use the EMS
Log services to map the severity of RADview events to the Syslog severity
definitions.
Since RADview uses other severity values, Syslog severity levels are converted to
RADview severity levels according to a predefined table, which can be customized
using the System console as explained and outlined in Table 4-8.
For further information on enabling and defining Syslog servers, refer to
Configuring the Log Properties.
Table 4-7. EMS Log Service – General

Parameter Description

Description Describes the current service selected in the system console

Read-only

Version The version of the present service selected

Read-only

Log Service Configuration

Start Status Check Delay (min) The delay time (in minutes) until the status check is started
Read-only

Status Check Interval (min) The amount of idle time (in minutes) from the time the log service
stops until the time it will have to start again.

No. of Storage Threads The number of separately stored data to retain

The Batch Size to use in DB The size of the batch specified for DB operations, e.g. – 50
Operations

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-11

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Parameter Description

Log Browsing Performance

No. of Records Retrieved The number of records that can be retrieved for every request, e.g. –
per Request 1000

Table 4-8. EMS Log Service – Syslog Severity Map

RADview Message Severity Syslog Message Severity (Default)

Unknown Notice

Normal Notice

Warning Warning

Minor Error

Major Critical

Critical Alert (immediate action required)

Additional Syslog severities are Emergency (system unusable)

available for mapping: Notice
Informational
Debug

<Get> Click <Get> to revert to the last-saved severity

<Set> Select the new severity and click <Set> to save the setting

Viewing the EMS Network Element Repository Service

The EMS Network Element Repository is a collection of common elements that
can be shared and reused in different installation projects.

Table 4-9. EMS Network Element Repository Parameters

Parameter Description

Info

Description Describes the current service selected in the system console

Read-only
Version The version of the service
Read-only

4-12 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Specifying a License Server Location from the System Console

You can also specify the EMS License Service on a different RADview server
station via the System Console as explained below.

 To specify the License Server location:

1. From the Start menu, select
All Programs > Network Manager > RADview > System Console.
You are asked for your password.
2. Enter the password that you used to log on to RADview, usually root.
The System Console appears.

3. Expand the Servers tree, the <server name> tree and then the
Process1 tree.
All System Console options are available.
4. Select EMS License Service.
The EMS License Service parameters are displayed.
5. Enter the location of the new license server and the License Provider port
used to communicate with this server as explained in Table 4-10.
6. Click <Set>.
The settings take effect.

Note To retrieve the current value, click <Get>.

Table 4-10. EMS License Service Configuration Parameters

Parameter Description

Info
Description Describes the current service selected in the system console
Read-only
Version The version of the service
Read-only

License Service settings

License Provider Host Host address of the license provider

License Provider Port The port number for the license provider’s internal server
Note: The License Provider Port is referred to as INS Port within
the License Service Manager.

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-13

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Configuring the EMS Trap Listener Service

The EMS trap listener service handles forwarding traps.
There are two types of trap forwarding:
• Static trap forwarding – You can configure a list of destinations to which to
forward traps. This option is enabled by default.
• Dynamic trap forwarding – Used for trap forwarding to RAD legacy
applications. This option is enabled by default.

Table 4-11. EMS Trap Listener Parameters, General Tab

Parameter Description

Info

Description Describes the current service selected in the system console

Read-only
Version The version of the service
Read-only

SNMP Adapter Settings

Adapter Java type used to get traps

Com.rad.ems.svc.tI.SnmpTIAdapter – RADview is installed as an
SNMP trap listener

Table 4-12. EMS Trap Listener Parameters, Advanced Tab

Parameter Description

Static Trap Forwarding Clients

Enabled Specifies whether static trap forwarding is enabled.

Checked – Static trap forwarding is enabled
Cleared – Static trap forwarding is disabled
After changing this parameter, click <Set> to apply the change. To
refresh the parameter, click <Get>.
Clients Displays a list of trap forwarding destinations, in the form
<IP address>:<port number>
Add client To add a trap forwarding destination, type
<IP address>:<port number> in the text box. You can type just the
IP address if you want the traps to be forwarded to the standard
SNMP trap port 162.
Click <Add> to add the destination to the Clients list. After adding
the destination, verify that Enabled is selected, then click <Set> to
apply the change.
Remove client To remove a destination from the Clients list, type the destination
in the text box and click <Remove>. Click <Set> to apply the
change

4-14 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Parameter Description

Dynamic Trap Forwarding Clients.

Enabled Specifies whether dynamic trap forwarding is enabled.

Checked – Dynamic trap forwarding is enabled
Cleared – Dynamic trap forwarding is disabled
After changing this parameter, click <Set> to apply the change. To
refresh the parameter, click <Get>.
Clients Displays a list of trap forwarding destinations, in the form
<IP address>:<port number>
You cannot add destinations to this list. If a RADview application
exists in the network that requires this type of trap forwarding, it
automatically appears in the list.

Configuring the EMS Fault Management (Back End)

The Fault Management back-end server performs server-side fault management
tasks. It identifies the process where the existence and nature of network faults
are detected and the fault identification problems are explored.
Event Log settings can be configured from the General tab in
EMS Fault Management (Back End).
Trap synchronization settings can be configured from the Traps Synchronization
tab in EMS Fault Management (Back End).

Table 4-13. EMS Fault Management (Back End) Parameters – General Tab

Parameter Description

Info

Description Describes the current service selected in the system console

Read-only
Version The version of the service
Read-only

Fault Management Back End Service

settings

Log Full Alarm Timeout (sec) The amount of time before the log is selected to see if it has reached
the maximum size

Fault Status Propagation Enables/disables auto checking of the status of each element in
the NER tree (internal database)

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-15

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Parameter Description

Traps Buffering and Retransmission Traps defined as forwarded with retransmission are buffered (see the
forwarding policy configuration in the Admin Console.) Add the
destination of the forwarding to the OSS heartbeat service in order to
check if it is reachable using ping. If the destination becomes
unreachable for some period, then becomes reachable again, the
traps buffered during that period are retransmitted in groups.

Max Size of Traps Cache Size of traps cache in RAM (in traps). When cache size exceeds this
value, the oldest traps are removed from the RAM cache and stored
in the database.

Max Size of Traps Database Size of database storage for buffered traps (in traps). When database
size exceeds this value, the oldest traps are deleted.

Clear Database Delete all buffered traps, that are stored in database

Retransmission Group Size Number of traps sent without delay during retransmission

Retransmission Delay (ms) Between Delay after every retransmitted group

Groups

Inform Timeout (sec) Amount of time to wait for confirmation response to SNMP inform
traps

 To configure the EMS Fault Management (Back End) trap synchronization

parameters:

• In the system console ( ) select EMS Fault Management (Back End), then
select the Traps Synchronization tab.
The Traps Synchronization tab of the EMS Fault Management (Back End)
window appears, displaying the trap synchronization parameters. Refer to
Table 4-14 for information on the parameters.

Note • Enabling the trap synchronization spy worsens system performance. It should
be enabled only when necessary, and then disabled when no longer needed.
• Trap synchronization is not supported for non-Ethernet Access devices.

Table 4-14. EMS Fault Management (Back End) Parameters – Traps Synchronization Tab

Parameter Description

General

Database Data Store Period Aount of time to store data

Number of Threads for Resync Number of process threads to use for resynchronization

Algorithm

Trap Waiting Timeout (ms) Timeout for waiting for trap

Trap Minimum Waiting Time (ms) Minimum amount of time to wait for trap

First Delay Before Resync (ms) Delay before resynchronization

Waiting Time for Hard Resync Start Amount of time to wait before starting hard resynchronization
(ms)

4-16 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Parameter Description

Fault Management Delivery

Max Size of Fault Management Queue Maximum size of fault management queue

Interval for Checking Ignored Agents Interval for checking ignored agents (When the fault management
(ms) queue is full, certain agents are ignored.)

Fill Threshold to Resync Ignored When the queue usage drops below this threshold, ignored agents
Agents (%) are resynchronized.

Spy

Enable Enable or disable trap synchronization spy.

Local Port Port number for trap synchronization spy

Remote Host Remote host for trap synchronization spy

Remote Port Remote port for trap synchronization spy

Simulator Mode Simulate trap synchronization (for internal usage only)

Viewing the EMS Fault Management (Front End)

The EMS Fault Management (Front End) service is a read-only service where only
the description and version of the service are available for viewing.
Table 4-15. EMS Fault Management (Front End) Parameters

Parameter Description

Description Describes the current service selected in the system console

Read-only

Version The version of the service

Read-only

Configuring EMS Polling

You can set the EMS Polling Service parameters as explained in the table below.

Table 4-16. EMS Polling Service Parameters

Parameter Description

Description Describes the current service selected in the system console

Read-only
Version The version of the service
Read-only

Polling Service Settings

Polling Enabled Checked – Yes

Cleared – No

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-17

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Parameter Description

Polling Threads Count Number of threads performing polling at once. This only affects
the polling duration.
NER Context Name of NER tree node level to be polled
Note: The name must contain at least one nonblank character
after the slash, for autodiscovery to function properly.
SNMPv3 Engine ID Polling Settings

SNMPv3 Engine ID Polling Threads Count Number of threads performing SNMPv3 polling at once. This
only affects the polling duration.
SNMPv3 Engine ID Polling Interval (hours) Interval for SNMPv3 polling

Viewing the EMS Configuration Management Service

The EMS Configuration Management allows modifying the times and max number
of requests for adding, editing, deleting, provisioning, activating and de-activating
services as specified below.
Modifying these parameters may be important to make sure that the server can
meet high demand on creating and editing services without queries to time out

Table 4-17. EMS Configuration Management Parameters

Parameter Description

Info

Description Describes the current service selected in the system console

Read-only
Version The version of the service
Read-only

Store Command Settings

Timeout (msec) Time to wait before the Store command is executed

Max Requests Maximum number of requests to force the Store command
Locking Timeout (msec) Timeout of locking in case a lock is otherwise not released.

Viewing NMS Security

NMS Security Service displays the folders in which security profiles are stored and
audits are written to.

4-18 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Configuring EMS Discovery

When the EMS Discovery Service is enabled, the RADview server listens to
coldStart and warmStart standard SNMP traps.
When traps are received, a new node is automatically added to the NER under a
preconfigured tree node if the following conditions are met:
• The node is a RAD node
• The node does not exist in the NER.
Table 4-18. EMS Discovery Service Parameters

Parameter Description

Info

Description Describes the current service selected in the system console

Read-only

Version The version of the service

Read-only

Discovery settings

Discovery Enabled Checked – Yes

Cleared – No

Ner Context Name of NER tree node level where discovered nodes will be
added

Read Community One or more communities to use when accessing the device
via SNMP in this service
Note: When entering multiple communities, separate them
using a semicolon (;)
Timeout (msec) SNMP timeout when accessing the device via SNMP in this
service

Retries SNMP retries when accessing the device via SNMP in this
service

Configuring EMS OSS Heartbeat

When the EMS OSS Heartbeat Service is enabled, the RADview EMS server
periodically checks connectivity (using TCP/IP Ping) with the configured OSS
station IP addresses/host names. When disconnectivity is detected, the service
monitors the connection until connectivity returns and then sends an SNMP trap
to the OSS with details on the period of disconnectivity.

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-19

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Table 4-19. EMS OSS Heartbeat Service Parameters

Parameter Description

Info

Description Describes the current service selected in the system console

Read-only

Version The version of the service

Read-only

OSS Heartbeat Settings

OSS Heartbeat Enabled Checked – OSS connectivity is checked with periodic ping
Cleared – OSS connectivity is not checked
OSSes IP Addresses IP address or host name of all OSS stations for which heartbeat
check should be performed
Notes:
• If the OSS station is listening for SNMP traps on a port other
than 162, you must enter the port after the
IP address/hostname, separated by a colon
• When entering multiple IP addresses/host names, separate
them with a semicolon.
Timer Interval (sec) Interval between periodic pings
Note: This should be a value greater than 0.
OSS Heartbeat Timeout (sec) Amount of time to wait for ping acknowledge, after which OSS
is considered to be disconnected
Note: This should be a value greater than 0.
Trap Community SNMP community for traps

Configuring EMS Maintenance

This functionality is reserved for future implementation.

Table 4-20. EMS Maintenance

Parameter Description

Info

Description Describes the current service selected in the system console

Read-only

Version The version of the service

Read-only

4-20 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Configuring Service Center Parameters

You can set various Service Center parameters.

Table 4-21. Service Center – General Parameters

Parameter Description

Info

Description Describes the current service selected in the system console

Read-only

Version The version of the service

Read-only

MTSC FE Service

MTSC Gates Displays MultiTechnology Service Center Gates – Specifies how

clients can connect to Service Center server
MTOSI WS Gate – Standard interface MTOSI with WebService
(WS)

Memory Usage

In Use Displays amount of RV-EMS server memory being used by

Service Center

Min. Free Memory Threshold (%) Amount of memory that must be available for Service Center
requests to be processed
Default: 10

Table 4-22. Service Center – Monitor Parameters

Parameter Description

Current

Requests in Queue Displays current number of queued requests

Requests in Progress Displays current number of requests in progress

Rejected Requests Displays current number of rejected requests

Statistics

Maximum Requests in Progress Displays maximum number of requests in progress

Table 4-23. Service Center – Configuration Parameters

Parameter Description

Timeout

Client-Server Timeout (msec) Specifies timeout for client-server requests

Default: 160000

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-21

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Configuring EMS Performance Management Service

The Performance Management (PM) service requires the Apache web server
accessible to the RADview server. You can view and edit the location of the
Apache web server and the OAM data for display on the System Console.
Additional parameters and the appearance of the GUI can be configured in the
respective XML files. For additional information and instructions, refer to Chapter
3 of the RADview-Performance Manager manual section.

Table 4-24. EMS Performance Management Parameters – General Parameters

Parameter Description

Description The active service

Version Version number, currently 2.50

Apache Server Host Click <Get> to retrieve the location of the Apache web server,
responsible for collecting the data displayed in the PM portal.
To specify a different location, enter the server name or IP
address and then click <Set>.
Default: The location of the RADview server

Table 4-25. EMS Performance Management Parameters – OAM Parameters

Parameter Description

Aggregated Hours To retrieve the current value, click <Get>.

To set a new value, enter the desired value and click <Set>.
Default: 2232
Aggregated Days To retrieve the current value, click <Get>.
To set a new value, enter the desired value and click <Set>.
Default: 183
Aggregated Weeks To retrieve the current value, click <Get>.
To set a new value, enter the desired value and click <Set>.
Default: 104
Aggregated Months To retrieve the current value, click <Get>.
To set a new value, enter the desired value and click <Set>.
Default: 60

Handle Only SMS Services To retrieve the status, click <Get>.

To select, check or clear as desired and click <Set>.
Default: Cleared

Service Identifier Structure Only OAM services, not provisioned via SMS
Default: $[MD]-$[MA] $[Vlan].$[Pbit]

SMS Service Identifier Structure Only OAM services provisioned via SMS
Default: $[SMS Service]-$[SMS CoS]

4-22 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Configuring EMS Snapshot Service

This service maintains a snapshot of agent configurations in the RADview server
database. The service reads agent configurations and stores them in the RADview
server database, and also responds to other application queries to retrieve stored
data from the database.

Note This service is always active and there is no option to stop it.

Table 4-26. EMS Snapshot Service Parameters

Parameter Description

Info

Description Describes the current service selected in the system console

Read-only

Version The version of the service

Read-only

Snapshot Settings

Maximum number of concurrent SNMP Maximum number of SNMP sessions for parallel reading of agent
sessions configurations
Maximum number of concurrent Maximum number of sessions for parallel processing of
database sessions application queries

Enabling the Zero Touch Application Service

You use the System Console to start or stop the EMS Zero Touch Service. The
general tab displays information regarding this service.

Table 4-27. EMS Configuration Management Parameters

Parameter Description

Info

Description Describes the current service selected in the system console

Read-only
Version The version of the service
Read-only

Setting Job Management Service Parameters

You can view and configure job management service parameters from the system
console. Refer to Working with RADview Settings and Utilities for more
information on the system console and EMS services.

Configuring the EMS Jobs Management (Back End)

This section explains how to configure the allowed number of concurrent tasks
and SFTP/TFTP settings for tasks (jobs) that involve upload or download

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-23

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

operations to/from the NE. You have to configure three sets of parameters as
instructed in the sections below:
• General – Sets the number of concurrent NE tasks in the system (back-end
server).
• SFTP –Settings for the home directory, server host and port, user, and
password, as well as whether SFTP is the default file transfer protocol
• TFTP (default) –Settings for the home directory and server host.

 To configure the EMS Jobs Management (Back End) general parameters:

• In the system console ( ) select EMS Jobs Management (Back End).

The EMS Jobs Management (Back End) window appears, displaying the
General tab. Refer to Table 4-28 for information on the parameters.
Table 4-28. EMS Jobs Management (Back End) – General Parameters

Parameter Description

Info
Description Describes the current service selected in the system console
Read-only
Version The version of the service
Read-only

General settings

Maximum number of concurrent NE Defines number of NE tasks that can be processed

tasks simultaneously in the entire system. One task is usually a single
SNMP, xFTP, or Telnet session between the NMS and a device.
Generally, this number is limited by back-end computer
resources.
For example, if there are eight jobs, each one applying to 25 NEs,
there are 200 total NE tasks to execute. If you set this parameter
to 10, only 10 NE tasks can be executed simultaneously no
matter which job they belong to.
Note: The total number of simultaneous NE tasks per job can be
set in the Advanced Job Parameters dialog box.

 To configure the EMS Jobs Management (Back End) SFTP parameters:

• In the system console ( ) select EMS Jobs Management (Back End) and
then click the SFTP tab.
The EMS Jobs Management (Back End) window appears, displaying the
SFTP tab. Refer to Table 4-29 for information on the parameters.

4-24 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Table 4-29. EMS Jobs Management (Back End) – SFTP Parameters

Parameter Description

SFTP Settings

Home Directory SFTP root directory path

This should be set to the SFTP root directory that is configured in
the SFTP server that you are using
Server Host Host name or IP address of the SFTP server. Do not use the local
host address 127.0.0.1, as the devices cannot use it to locate the
SFTP server.
Port SFTP port (by default 22)
User User name string for access to SFTP server
Password Password string for access to SFTP server
Use SFTP as default protocol If selected, file transfer operations use SFTP if file transfer
protocol type was not explicitly specified

 To configure the EMS Jobs Management (Back End) TFTP parameters:

• In the system console ( ) select EMS Jobs Management (Back End) and
then click the TFTP tab.
The EMS Jobs Management (Back End) window appears, displaying the
TFTP tab. Refer to Table 4-30 for information on the parameters.

Table 4-30. EMS Jobs Management (Back End) – TFTP Parameters

Parameter Description

TFTP Settings

Home Directory TFTP root directory path

This should be set to the TFTP root directory that is configured in
the TFTP server that you are using
Server Host Host name or IP address of the TFTP server. Do not use the local
host address 127.0.0.1, as the devices cannot use it to locate the
TFTP server.

Configuring the EMS Jobs Management (Front End)

This section explains how to configure parameters related to statistics and data
storage monitoring. You configure the following three parameter sets:
• General
• Archive Statistics – Contains file usage data
• Data Storage Monitoring – Contains data storage monitoring parameters.

 To configure the EMS Jobs Management (Front End) general parameters:

• In the system console ( ) select EMS Jobs Management (Front End).

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-25

 Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

The EMS Jobs Management (Front End) window appears, displaying the
General tab. Refer to Table 4-31 for information on the parameters.

Table 4-31. EMS Jobs Management (Front End) – General Parameters

Parameter Description

Info

Description Describes the current service selected in the system console

Read-only
Version The version of the service
Read-only

File System Settings

File Repository Home Directory Path of directory used as home root for EMS Jobs & Archive
management to store files (SW, configuration, user, script and log
files). See Table 4-32 for details on the structure of the file
repository.
(default location is
<EMS_installation_dir>\ems\udcm\fe_repository\, where
<EMS_installation_dir>= EMS installation directory, e.g. C:\RV32)
Notes:
• You should not add, remove, or change subdirectories and files
in the home root manually. Any manual alteration of the home
root content leads to data integrity loss and malfunction of the
whole EMS Jobs & Archive management.
• You should include the content of this directory as extra files in
the backup/restore procedure, and always back it up and
restore it synchronously with the database files.
Temporary Home Directory Path of directory used as a temporary storage root for EMS Jobs &
Archive management to store temporary files
(default location is <EMS_installation_ dir>\ems\udcm\temp\,
where <EMS_installation_dir>= EMS installation directory, e.g.
C:\RV32)
Notes:
• You should not add, remove, or change subdirectories and files
in the home root manually. Any manual alteration of the home
root content leads to data integrity loss and malfunction of the
whole EMS Jobs & Archive management.
• You should not include the content of this directory in the
backup/restore procedure.

Table 4-32. File Repository Structure

File Type Relative Path File Name Pattern

Software \sw\<NE-Type>\ <NE-Type>_v<SW-Ver>_<YYYYMMDD_HHMM>_<DB-ID>.sw

Example: LA-210_v3.50_20120112_1031_28.sw

4-26 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

File Type Relative Path File Name Pattern

Configuration \cfg\<NE-Name>\ <NE-Name>_<YYYYMMDD_HHMM>_<DB-ID>.cfg

Example: 172.17.152.233_20120112_1045_64.cfg

User \usr\<NE-Name>\ <NE-Name>_<YYYYMMDD_HHMM>_<DB-ID>.usr

Example: 172.17.152.233_20120111_1435_55.usr

CLI Script \script\ job_<YYYYMMDD_HHMM>_<DB-ID>.scp

Example: job_20120112_1200_115.scp

Job log \job_log\ job<Job-ID>_<YYYYMMDD_HHMM>_<DB-ID>.log

Example: job4_20120112_1031_112.log

Data Reports \data-report\ <Report-Name>_<YYYYMMDD_HHMM>_<DB-ID>.csv

(CSV) Example: Jobs Inventory_20120102_1031_165.csv

Statistics \pm\<Report-format>\ JobId_<Job-ID>_<Report-title>_<Distribution>_<Month_Year>_<DB-ID>.pdf

Reports (PDF) JobId_<Job-ID>\<Month_Year>\ Example: JobId_6_SLA_Report_Pid_1_SG_Gold_December_2011_118.pdf
<Report-format> - According <Report-title> - Report title specified in report parameters
to format selected in report
<Distribution> - Based on the selected report parameters for the job that
parameters:
created the Statistics Report). It is composed as follows:
detailed
summary • If customer hierarchy distribution was selected, Pid_<parent-level>
appears in the name
<Month_Year> - Refers to the
month/year for which the • If service grade distribution was selected, SG_<service-grade> appears in
report was generated; the the name
month is spelled out. • If customer ranking distribution was selected, Ranking_<ranking>
Example: appears in the name.
\pm\ detailed\JobId_6\
December_2011\

Note: Refer to Chapter 5 for details on the statistics report parameters.

Statistics files Not saved Not applicable

(stat)

Note
The <DB-ID> in the table is the file database ID, which is used by the database to
identify the file.

 To configure the EMS Jobs Management (Front End) Archive Statistic parameters:

• In the system console ( ) select EMS Jobs Management (Front End) and
then click the Archive Statistics tab.
The EMS Jobs Management (Front End) window appears, displaying the
Archive Statistics tab. Refer to Table 4-33 for information on the
parameters.

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-27

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Table 4-33. EMS Jobs Management (Front End) – Archive Statistic Parameters

Parameter Description

Summary

Files stored Number of files stored in EMS Jobs & Archive management file
repository
Space used Disk space (in kB) occupied by files stored in EMS Jobs & Archive
management file repository

SW Files

Files stored Number of SW files stored in EMS Jobs & Archive management file
repository
Space used Disk space (in kB) occupied by SW files stored in EMS Jobs &
Archive management file repository

Configuration Files

Files stored Number of configuration files stored in EMS Jobs & Archive
management file repository
Space used Disk space (in kB) occupied by configuration files stored in EMS
Jobs & Archive management file repository

User Files

Files stored Number of user files stored in EMS Jobs & Archive management file
repository
Space used Disk space (in kB) occupied by user files stored in EMS Jobs &
Archive management file repository

Script Files

Files stored Number of script files stored in EMS Jobs & Archive management
file repository
Space used Disk space (in kB) occupied by script files stored in EMS Jobs &
Archive management file repository

Log Files

Files stored Number of log files stored in EMS Jobs & Archive management file
repository
Space used Disk space (in kB) occupied by log files stored in EMS Jobs &
Archive management file repository

Data Report Files

Files stored Number of data report files stored in EMS Jobs & Archive
management file repository
Space used Disk space (in kB) occupied by data report files stored in EMS Jobs
& Archive management file repository

 To configure the EMS Jobs Management (Front End) Data Storage Monitoring
parameters:

• In the system console ( ) select EMS Jobs Management (Front End) and
then click the Data Storage Monitoring tab.

4-28 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

The EMS Jobs Management (Front End) window appears, displaying the
Data Storage Monitoring tab. Refer to Table 4-34 for information on the
parameters.

Table 4-34. EMS Jobs Management (Front End) – Data Storage Monitoring Parameters

Parameter Description

General Settings

Monitoring Interval (min) Time interval (in minutes) between space allocation monitoring (by
default 15 minutes)

Archive Settings

Automatically delete archive when Enable automatic archive deletion if archive size reaches limit
reached maximum allowed space
Currently used space (MB) Current disk space used for EMS Jobs & Archive management file
repository. Events are generated when the used space reaches
thresholds as specified by Warning Alert, Minor Alert, and
Major Alert
These events appear in the event browser (see Chapter 7).
Maximum allowed space (MB) Maximum disk space allocated for EMS Jobs & Archive management
file repository
Keep files marked as baseline If selected, files marked as baseline are kept during archive
compacting
Recent files to keep (per NE) Number of most recent files to keep (per single NE) during archive
compacting. Remaining older files are deleted
Warning Alert (%) When used space reaches the specified percentage of Maximum
allowed space (MB), RADview generates a warning event
Minor Alert (%) When used space reaches the specified percentage of Maximum
allowed space (MB), RADview generates a minor event
Major Alert (%) When used space reaches the specified percentage of Maximum
allowed space (MB), RADview generates a major event

Report Settings

Automatically delete reports when Enable automatic report deletion if number of reports reaches limit
reached Maximum No. of Reports
Current No. of Reports Current number of job reports
Maximum No. of Reports Maximum number of job reports
Old reports to remove (%) Percentage of reports to remove during report compacting

Adding and Configuring Network Elements Automatically

To add and configure network elements automatically, use the Zero Touch
functionality.
Zero Touch stands for automatic provision ‘without touching’. This functionally
allows you to automatically add and configure network elements for the network
according to a pre-defined schedule. The tasks listed below are supported by

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-29

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

RADview while the availability of tasks depends on whether the specific network
element supports it:
• Discovering new units in pre-defined subnets and adding them to the map
• Automatically uploading software and configurations to newly discovered
units
• Uploading predefined CLI scripts, such as RADIUS, TACACS+, SYSLOG, etc to
newly discovered units.
• Adding a pre-defined RADview server’s IP address to the manager list of the
units added to the map.
• Discovering units on the map that have been replaced and handling the
replacement procedure according to a pre-defined rule.

Notes • Before you can configure and use the Zero Touch service, you may have to
start it as explained under Enabling and Viewing the Zero Touch Application
Service.
• Zero Touch is based on the Jobs. Devices that do not support certain Job
options do not support the respective task in Zero Touch as well.
• CLI commands are not supported for units whose Telnet/SSH/Terminal
interface is menu-driven.
• Sublevels can accommodate max 200 devices.

 To configure search and add criteria for units:

1. From the RADview Network Manager menu bar, select
Tools > Zero Touch Console… .
The Zero-Touch Configuration dialog box appears.

4-30 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-8. Zero-Touch Configuration Dialog Box – No Rule Added

2. To configure the search and add criteria, use the Action menu or the toolbar
to select the desired option as outlined in Table 4-35.

Table 4-35. Zero-Touch Configuration

Option Task Remarks

Adding a new search and add rule for devices on the network For additional instructions,
refer to Adding and
Modifying Search and Add
Rules.

Modifying an existing search and add rule For additional instructions,

refer to Adding and
Modifying Search and Add
Rules

Removing an existing search and add rule For additional instructions,

refer to Removing a Search
and Add Rule

Enabling a search and add rule (after it has been disabled) Unavailable if the selected
rule(s) is (are) enabled

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-31

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Option Task Remarks

Disabling a search and add rule (after it has been enabled) Unavailable if the selected
rule(s) is (are) disabled

Moving selected search and add rules down in the list Unavailable if the selected
rules are already a the
bottom of the list

Moving selected search and add rules up in the list Unavailable if the selected
rules are already a the top
of the list

Updating the list.

Now scanning for devices that comply with the search and add
rules in the list

Closing the Zero Touch Configuration dialog box

Adding and Modifying Search and Add Rules

The search you run complies with a combination of search criteria you define in
the first step, for example:
You define a criterion that defines devices that belong to a specific subnet and
another criterion that defines ETX-202A units, only ETX-202A units that belong to
the specified subnet will be located and added.
When a scan starts, only the first rule applying to a specific unit takes effect, for
example:
• The first rule (Rule 1) includes the unit with the IP address 172.17.152.219
and calls for authentication via TACACS+.
• The second rule in the list (Rule 2) includes the same unit, but calls for
authentication via RADIUS.
• In this scenario, the relevant unit tries to authenticate via TACACS+.

 To add a search and add rule:

1. From the menu, select Action > Add or, at the toolbar, click Add .
The Create New Rule wizard appears (Figure 4-9).
2. Assign a name to the rule and add a short description in the respective fields.
3. Define the criteria that the new rule has to comply with as explained in
Table 4-36.
4. Once you completed defining a criterion, click <Add Criterion>.
The new criterion is added to the list.

4-32 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-9. Adding a Criterion

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-33

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Table 4-36. Adding a Criterion - Parameters

And/Or Criterion Condition Value

IP Subnet Enter an IP address and the subnet in 1.1.1.1/0..32 –

the CIDR format 255.255.255.255/0 – 32
<IP address>/<subnet bits> as follows:
Equals. The IP address and subnet
entered under Value is defined in the
rule
And. Criterion applies Starts With. The rule defines a range
together with the of IP addresses in a range of subnets
next one in the list. starting with the one displayed under
Value.
Or. Criterion applies
together with the Ends With. The rule defines a range of
next one in the list IP addresses in a range of subnets
ending with the one displayed under
Value.

NE Type Equals. Only the device you choose is Click <…> to view a list of
part of the rule supported devices and
Contains. The device you choose is select the desired one from
also part of the rule. the list.

5. To continue, click <Next>.

You are asked to name the rule and specify the level where to add
devices that have been found (Figure 4-10).
6. Specify the name of the rule and the level to add devices located according to
that rule as explained in Table 4-37.

4-34 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-10. Specifying the Name of the Rule and the Level for the Devices to be Added

Table 4-37. Specifying the Name of the Rule and the Level for the Devices to be Added

Parameter Description

Target NER Location Path The level to which the devices are added, for example /ZT.
To add a new level, refer to Working with Levels in Chapter 3 for instructions.

Node Name

Prefix The prefix of the rule name

Hostname Check if you want the hostname to be displayed as part of the rule name

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-35

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Parameter Description

IP Check if you want the IP address you entered in the pevious step displayed
as part of the rule name.

Suffix The suffix of the rule name

Preview Preview of the name accoding to the settings you choose (generic)

7. To continue, click <Next>.

You are asked to define provisioning tasks as part of the rule you are
defining (Figure 4-11). Provisioning tasks include upload of software files.

Figure 4-11. Specifying Provisioning Tasks

4-36 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Table 4-38. Specifying Provisioning Tasks

Parameter Description

First Time SW Upload Check to enable first time software upload to the unit as part of the search
and add rule.
Note: The availability of this option depends on your access rights and on
whether the unit supports it.

Software Version Select the desired software version from the list.

Target File within NE File name inside the network element

Reboot after Upload Check to reboot the unit once the new software has been donloaded.

First Time CFG Upload Check to enable upload a configuration file to the unit as part of the search
and add rule.
Note: The availability of this option depends on your access rights and on
whether the unit supports it.

File For New Device Click <…> and navigate to the relevant configuration file’s lcation and select
it.

Reboot after Upload Check to reboot the unit once the new configuration has been donloaded.

CLI Upload Check to enable uploading script elements to the unit as part of the rule.

Select Predefined Script Select the desired script elements from the list one by one. The following
script elements are available:
TACACS+, RADIUS, SNTP Server, Date, SysLog, Save Configuration
To enter the desired script element to be execute, click <Append>. The
scripts appears under Enter Script to Execute.

To preview a CLI script element, click .

Note: Devices that do not support CLI return an error when trying to
excecute a CLI command.

Enter Script to execute To enter a script, do one of the following:

• Select predefined script elements by selecting them as explained above.
• Manually enter the desired script elements.
• Click <…> to browse for a script file.

Add EMS to Manager List Check to add the EMS server to the manager lis of the unit.

EMS IP Address Enter the IP address of the station that hosts the RADview server.

Unit Replacement Handling

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-37

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Parameter Description

Handling Action Enter the desired option to the rule as a response to replacing a unit.
• No Action.
• As in First Time. The unit is handled like a newly added unit.
• Last Configuration and Matching SW. The unit is added and updated with
the last backed-up IP configuration file and the matching software version
(SW) file.
• Baseline Configuration and Matching SW. The unit is added and updated
with the baseline configuration file and the matching software version
(SW) file.

8. To continue, click <Next>.

You are asked to specify parameters according to which the network is
scanned (Figure 4-12).
 To customize network protocol ports, under Advanced Configuration, click
<…> and refer to Table 4-40 for further information.

4-38 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-12. Specifying Network Scanning Options

Table 4-39. Specifying Network Scanning Options

Parameter Description

Network Scanning Check this option to enable scanning according to the search and add rule

Scan Interval (Hours) Select one of the following intervals (hours): 6, 12, 24, 48

Discover non-RAD Devices Check this option to enable third-part (non-RAD) devices to be found,

Advanced Configuration Click <…> for additional parameters and refer to Table 4-40 for further
information and instructions.

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-39

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Parameter Description

SNMP

SNMP Version Version 1, Version 3

Timeout Specify the SNMP timeout for the network element, in milliseconds

Retries Specify the SNMP number of retries for the unit(s)

SNMP V1 Parameters

Read Community Choose one of the following: public, private

Write Community Choose one of the following: public, private

SNMP V3 Parameters

User Name SNMPv3 user name

Authentication Protocol Choose one of the following: MD5, SHA

Authentication Password Enter the authentiction password

Privacy Protocol Choose one of the following: No Priv, DES

Privacy Enter the privacy password

CLI/SSH Parameters

User Name Enter the user name for Telnet/SSH access, for example su

Password Enter the password for Telnet/SSH access, for example 1234.

Figure 4-13. Specifying Network Scanning Options – Advanced Configuration

(Custom Network Ports)

4-40 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Table 4-40. Specifying Network Scanning Options – Advanced Configuration

Parameter Description

Custom SNMP Port Check to enable defining a different port

Default: 161
Note: This port refers to the the operational port. The trap listener port
(port 162) cannot be customized.

Custom HTTP Port Check to enable defining a different port

Default: 80

Custom Telnet Port Check to enable defining a different port

Default: 23

Custom SSH Port Check to enable defining a different port

Default: 22

9. Click <Finish>.
The rule is added to the list in the Zero Touch Configuration dialog box.

Figure 4-14. Zero-Touch Configuration Dialog Box – Rule Added

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-41

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

 To edit an existing search and add rule:

1. Select the desired rule in the list.

2. From the menu, select Action > Change or, at the toolbar, click Change .
The Edit Rule wizard appears.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions in the wizard, which is identical to the
Create New Rule wizard (Figure 4-9).
Once the rule takes effect and scans were run accordingly, the map
displays the devices found as illustrated in Figure 4-16:

 To scan now for units according to an existing rule.

1. Select a rule from the Zero-Touch Configuration dialog box.
The toolbar becomes available.

2. At the toolbar, click Scan .

A warning appears indicating that the first rule that includes a specific
unit applies with respect to executing CLI scripts, downloading software,
configurations etc.

Figure 4-15. Zero-Touch Configuration Dialog Box – Starting a Network Scan

3. Click <OK> to start the search.

The units are added to the map.

4-42 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-16. Part of RADview Map and NER - Devices Added According to Zero Touch Rule

Removing a Search and Add Rule

 To remove a search and add rule:

1. Select the desired rule in the list.

2. From the menu, select Action > Delete or, at the toolbar, click Delete .
You are asked to confirm your request (Figure 4-17).

Figure 4-17. Removing a Search and Add Rule

3. Click <OK> to confirm your request.

The search and add rule is removed from the Zero-Touch Configuration
list.

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-43

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Configuring the Network Element Repository

The Network Element Repository (NER) is a hierarchical tree storage of the
network elements and their set of attributes. NER supports inheritance of
attributes. All lower-layer elements take the attributes of the higher-level
elements (if the attribute is not overridden).

Note The NER explorer is used mainly for debugging purposes.

The NER explorer allows you to:

• Create, edit, and remove nodes in NER
• Create, edit, and remove the attributes of NER nodes
• View changes in node attributes that result from polling.

 To open the NER Explorer:

1. From the RADview Network Manager menu bar select Tools > Admin Console.
The EMS Admin Console is displayed showing the NMS station name.
2. Click the + icon to expand the Admin Console, and select NER Explorer in the
list of consoles.
The NER Explorer is displayed showing the list of nodes and links.

Figure 4-18. NER Explorer Opening Window after Expanding Submap

You can view an object’s attributes by selecting it (see Figure 4-19).

4-44 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-19. NER Explorer – with Attributes

The NER Explorer window is a split pane.

The tree of NER objects is displayed in the left pane, and the right pane presents
a table of selected object’s attributes. The tree represents the hierarchy of NER
objects. Objects that have subordinates are represented with a folder icon, and
objects that do not have subordinates (leaf objects) are displayed with a leaf
icon.
The Attributes table on the far right has two columns:

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-45

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

• Name – Indicates the attribute name

• Value – Indicates the attribute value.
Attributes inherited from a parent are displayed in blue color. Other attributes are
displayed in black color.
The NER Explorer Edit menu allows you to modify entries of the network
elements, and their attributes.

Figure 4-20. NER Explorer– Edit Menu

Adding an Entry
This operation is enabled when you select an entry in the hierarchy tree. The
selected node is the parent of the new entry.

 To add an entry in the NER Explorer:

1. In the NER Explorer toolbar, select Edit > Add Entry.
The Add Entry dialog box is displayed (see Figure 4-21).
2. Enter the entry name.
3. Click <Apply>.
The new entry is created with same set of attributes as its parent (i.e. –
inherited attributes). The attributes are displayed in blue.

Figure 4-21. Add Entry Dialog Box

Renaming an Entry

 To rename an entry:
1. In the NER Explorer, select an object in the hierarchy tree (network element in
the middle pane).
2. In the NER Explorer toolbar, select Edit > Rename Entry.

4-46 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

The Rename Entry dialog box is displayed (see Figure 4-22).

3. Enter the new entry name.
4. Click <Apply>.

Figure 4-22. Rename Entry Dialog Box

Removing an Entry

 To remove an entry:
1. In the NER Explorer, select an object in the hierarchy tree (network element in
the middle pane).
2. In the NER Explorer toolbar, select Edit > Remove Entry.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

Figure 4-23. Remove Entry Confirmation

3. Confirm the removal of the selected entry.

The selected object together with all its subordinates (if any) is removed
from the NER Explorer.

Adding an Attribute

 To add an attribute:
1. In the NER Explorer, select a node in the hierarchy tree (network element in
the middle pane).
2. In the NER Explorer toolbar, select Edit > Add Attribute.
The Add Attribute dialog box is displayed.

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-47

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-24. NER Explorer – Add Attribute Dialog Box

Table 4-41. Add Attribute Parameters

Parameter Function

Attribute Name Net Address, Poller Name, Read Community, Write

Community, Trap Community, Timeout, Retries, Custom
Note: If this field is set to Custom, the Custom Attribute
Name field is enabled.

Custom Attribute Name Enabled if Attribute Name is set to Custom

Attribute Value Freeform text or number

Figure 4-25. NER Explorer – Add Attribute (Custom Attribute) Dialog Box

Modifying an Attribute

 To modify an attribute:
1. In the NER Explorer, select a black row in the Attributes table (if the
respective row is blue, i.e., derived from the parent, you can modify it only
via Add Attribute).
2. In the NER Explorer toolbar, select Edit > Modify Attribute.
The Modify Attribute dialog box is displayed (see Figure 4-26).
3. Enter the new Attribute Value.
4. Click <Set>.

4-48 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-26. NER Explorer – Modify Attribute Dialog Box

Removing an Attribute

 To remove an Attribute:
1. In the NER Explorer, select a black row in the Attributes table (if the
respective row is colored in blue, i.e., attribute derived from the parent
object, it cannot be removed).
2. In the NER Explorer toolbar, select Edit > Remove Attribute.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

Figure 4-27. Remove Attribute Confirmation

3. Confirm the removal of the attribute.

The attribute is removed from the object.

Viewing Applied Changes

Figure 4-28. NER Explorer – View Menu

Refresh updates a subtree in the tree view starting with a selected node (e.g., a
selected node with all its subordinates). If no node is selected, refresh is
performed for the parent node.

Configuring SNMPv3 Settings

Native SNMPv3 forms are mapped from the MIB data structure, as defined by RFC
3413, RFC 3414, RFC 3415, and RFC 3584.
The basic SNMPv3 configuration includes a standard user named initial with no
encryption and at the lowest security level (no authentication and no privacy).

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-49

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

If you intend to create users, you have to first create users associated with the
required encryption method at the desired security level via Telnet/SSH or the
terminal application. The SNMPv3 Manager creates additional users based on
existing users only.
Any new user is created with the same encryption method and at the same
security level or lower as the user on which he is based.

Preparing the Devices for SNMPv3 Management

Before starting the user administration via SNMPv3 Manager, verify that:
• The desired devices have been added to the map or the Network Element
Repository (NER) database.
• SNMPv3 management has been enabled for the desired devices via
Telnet/SSH or a terminal application. Refer to the user manual of the
respective devices for additional information and instructions.
• Authentication and privacy settings of the initial user accounts are configured
to the desired encryption methods and security levels.
• SNMPv3 properties on the RADview level match the settings of the relevant
devices.

Notes • By default, SNMPv3 management is enabled for ETX-203-AX/AM, ETX-205A

and ETX-220A of version 4.0 and higher. For all other devices with SNMPv3
support, SNMPv1 management-is enabled by default.
• If the SNMP/SNMPv3 properties on the RADview level do not match the actual
SNMP configuration of the device, the relevant device appears ‘red’ on
the map.

You can configure SNMPv3 defaults on the RADview map per device or per level
and then you can start modifying SNMPv3 settings for single or multiple devices.

Defining SNMPv3 Defaults

SNMPv3 defaults can be configured for specific devices or the entire level on the
RADview map using the Device Properties dialog.

 To define the SNMPv3 defaults for a specific device:

1. On the map or in the NER, right-click the relevant device and then select
Properties from the shortcut menu.
The Properties dialog box is displayed.
2. Refer to Configuring Existing Network Elements in Chapter 3.

 To define the SNMPv3 defaults for an existing level and its sublevels:
1. Right-click the desired level of the NER or on the desired tab of the
respective level of the map and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
The Level Properties dialog box appears.
2. To modify the SNMP parameters, refer to Configuring Level Properties in
Chapter 3.

4-50 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Managing SNMPv3 Settings

The management of SNMPv3 consists of the following tasks:
• Creating/editing user accounts
• Creating/editing communities
• Creating/editing notifications
• Saving changes to the persistent storage
• Updating/refreshing agents.
The SNMPv3 management tasks can be performed via:
• Jobs Utility - Executing the required script, available for devices with CLI
interface. For information and instructions on the relevant CLI scripts, refer to
the associated user manual. For information and instructions on using the
Jobs utility, refer to Working with Jobs.
• SNMPv3 Manager - Using a GUI-based administration. The SNMPv3 Manager
allows performing tasks via a wizard or directly via editable SNMPv3 tables.
For additional information and instructions, refer to the sections below.

The SNMPv3 Manager GUI

The SNMPv3 Manager application is part of RADview and has been installed
together with the other utilities comprising the package.
Figure 4-29 illustrates its main window and identifies elements and menus.

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-51

 Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-29. Main Window

The RADview map functionality is fully supported. The utility responds to and
reflects all relevant map events. The SNMPv3 Manager stores map/agent
information in its database. When initiated with no map, the application retrieves
the information from the database.

Menu Bar
The menu bar provides access to the menus used for administrator account
configuration, initiating wizards, performing discovery, etc. The following table
lists the menu items and their functions.

Table 4-42. Menu Functions

Menu Item Submenu Items Description

Configures attributes of a user for administration

Settings
Configuration
Exit Exits the application

Wizard Initiates a wizard for user creation

Create User

4-52 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Menu Item Submenu Items Description

Initiates a wizard for community creation

Create Community

Initiates a wizard for notification creation

Create Notification

Starts the discovery process

Discovery

View Refreshes agent status (performs discovery and update)

Refresh

Enables or disables the Output Viewer

Output

Persist All Save changes to all agents that support persistency

Persistency
Save changes to selected agents
Persist Selected

User’s Manual Displays the user’s manual

Help About SNMPv3 Manager Displays the application version and Java Virtual Machine
version

Tool Bar
The toolbar provides easy access to the main functionalities of the application
that are otherwise available from the menus.

Table 4-43. Tool Bar

Button Function

Settings

Create User wizard

Create Community wizard

Create Notification wizard

Refresh

Discovery

Persist selected

Persist all

Displays user’s manual

Agent Tree Panel

The agent tree panel displays all agents supporting SNMPv3 found during the
discovery process. The color of the buttons next to the agents indicates whether
the optional persistency feature is supported, and whether errors occurred in
applying configuration changes, as follows:

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-53

 Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

No errors have occurred on applying configuration changes

No errors have occurred on applying configuration changes.

The agent supports persitency

Errors have occurred on applying configuration changes.

Errors have occurred on applying configuration changes.

The agent supports persitency

Configuration change in progress on the agent

SNMPv3 Tables
The SNMPv3 tables can be used for adding, editing, and deleting user accounts,
their authorizations, and notifications. The tables are mapped directly from the
SNMPv3 MIB definitions (RFC 3413, RFC 3414, RFC 3415 and RFC 3584).
The tables are divided into three tabs:
• Users
• Authorization
• Notifications.

Output Viewer
The output viewer displays results of the administrative operations performed on
the SNMPv3 agents. You can enable or disable the Output Viewer via the Output
option in the View menu.

Starting the SNMPv3 Application

Note Before starting the SNMPv3 Manager, you must open RADview, to ensure that all
the SNMPv3 Manager functionalities are available.

 To start the SNMPv3 Manager application:

• From the Start menu select All Programs > Network Manager> General >
SNMPv3 Manager.

Note You can also open the SNMPv3 Manager application by selecting from the
RADview Network Manager menu bar Tools > SNMPv3 Manager.

The SNMPv3 manager application appears (see Figure 4-29).

Locating SNMPv3 Agents

When started, the SNMPv3 Manager automatically discovers SNMPv3-enabled
devices according to the RFC 3414 requirements and displays them in the left
pane (see Figure 4-29). In addition, you can run the discovery manually.
Any configuration change in the application that has not been saved in the
agents is lost once the discovery process is executed.

4-54 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

 To locate SNMPv3 agents manually:

1. At the toolbar, click Discovery or select Discovery from the View

menu.
The agent discovery process starts.

Note If there are configuration changes that will be lost by executing the discovery,
one of the following a messages appears:
• Configuration changes weren’t applied and will be lost if
discovery is executed
• Configuration changes weren’t saved to persistent storage.
To start the discovery and discard the changes, click <Ignore>.
To cancel starting the discovery, click <Cancel>.

2. Click <Continue in Background> to close the Discovery window and run the
discovery process in the background, or wait until the agent discovery is
completed, and then click <Close> to end the process.

Figure 4-30. Agent Discovery Completed

The Agent Tree in the left pane of the main window (see Figure 4-29) is
updated with the located SNMPv3-enabled devices.

Defining a Master User Account

The SNMPv3 Manager application accesses an agent via one of the existing user
accounts as outlined under Preparing the Devices for SNMPv3 Management.
To access the desired devices, you can use one of the existing user accounts
already defined or configure a master account for all devices via the Settings
dialog explained below.

 To select devices and open the Settings dialog box:

3. From the Agent Tree panel, select one or more agents that you intend to
configure.
 To select a range of agents, press and hold the <Shift> key and drag the
mouse over the desired range of devices.
 To select specific devices, press and hold the <Ctrl> key and click the
desired devices.

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-55

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

4. At the toolbar, click Settings or select Settings from the

Configuration menu.
The Settings dialog box is displayed (see Figure 4-31).

 To use an existing account:

• In the Settings Dialog box, clear Override Map Settings and click <OK>.
The parameters in the Settings dialog box become unavailable and the
SNMPv3 Manager imports the default user account attributes from the
RADview NER database.
For more information on defining SNMP defaults, refer to Defining SNMPv3
Defaults.

 To define a master account for all devices:

1. In the Settings dialog box, select Override Map Settings.
The parameters in the Settings dialog box become available.
2. In the Settings dialog box, define the access parameters as required. Refer to
Table 4-44 for a list of and additional information on the parameters.
3. Click <OK>.
The master account is added to all devices and is used by SNMPv3
Manager to access them.

Figure 4-31. Settings Dialog Box - Master User Configured

4-56 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Table 4-44. Settings Parameters

Name Description Possible Values

Override Map Defines if the SNMPv3 Manager retrieves access Selected – The SNMPv3 Manager
Settings attributes from the map, or overrides them. overrides the map settings
Note: If the option to override the map settings is Cleared – The SNMPv3 Manager
selected, the rest of the parameters are not uses the map settings
available. Default: Cleared

Sec. Model Global access security model for the user account. USM – User-based Security Model
When the USM (User-based Security Model) is (SNMPv3)
selected, you have to define its authentication and SNMPv2 – SNMP version 2
privacy protocols and passwords.
SNMPv1 – SNMP version 1
Note: Parameters that are irrelevant for the selected
Default: USM
SNMP option are unavailable.

Context String that identifies the SNMPv3 information Up to 32 alphanumeric characters

Name User account name Up to 32 alphanumeric characters

Auth. Protocol Authentication protocol for the USM security model SHA – Secure Hash Algorithm
authentication
MD5 – MD5 authentication
No Auth. – User authentication is
disabled
Default: MD5

Auth. Authentication protocol password Up to 32 alphanumeric characters

Password

Priv. Protocol Privacy protocol for data encryption in the USM DES –DES privacy protocol
security model No Priv. – Data encryption is
disabled
Default: DES

Priv. Password Privacy protocol password Up to 32 alphanumeric characters

Timeout (sec.) The maximum amount of time to wait for a response

from the agent (in the context of one request)

Retry The number of times to try sending request to the

agent when timeout is detected

Read Read community name for the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 Up to 32 alphanumeric characters
Community security models

Write Write community name for the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 Up to 32 alphanumeric characters
Community security models

You are now ready to create users, profiles etc as outlined under Managing
SNMPv3 Settings. The SNMPv3 Manager offers two ways of configuring an agent
for SNMPv3 Management:
• Wizard – Via a user-friendly step-by-step procedure providing all necessary
steps
• Native –By filling out standard SNMPv3 tables.

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-57

 Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

In addition, the standard SNMPv3 tables allow you to edit or delete user
accounts.

Managing the User Accounts

To create a user for selected devices, follow the instructions in this section.

Creating a User Account via the Wizard

When creating a new user account using the Create User wizard, perform the
following tasks:
1. Create a user account profile.
2. Assign the new user to a group.
3. Define view permissions for the user.

 To create a user account:

1. From the Agent Tree panel, select one or more agents for which you intend
to add the new user account.

2. At the toolbar, click Create User or select Create User

from the Wizard menu.
The Create User dialog box is displayed (see Figure 4-32).

Figure 4-32. Creating a New User Account (Create User Wizard)

3. Create a user account profile by defining the following:

4-58 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

 User Name
 Authentication protocol and password
 Privacy protocol and password.
User name and passwords can consist of up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
For additional information on authentication and privacy protocols, refer to
Table 4-44.

Note • For a single agent, the available authentication and privacy protocol values are
the settings of the master user account or lower (No Auth/No Priv).
• For multiple agents, the available authentication and privacy protocol values
are the settings of the master user accounts (if they are the same), and lower
(No Auth/No Priv). If the authentication and privacy protocol definitions in the
selected agents are different (for example MD5 and SHA authentication or DES
and No Priv privacy), the only available options are No Auth and No Priv.

4. Click <Next>.
The Assign Group dialog box is displayed.
5. Assign the new user to a group by choosing an existing group or create a new
user group by selecting Create Group and entering the desired name for it.
6. Click <Next>.
The Assign View dialog box is displayed.

Figure 4-33. Assigning a View to a Group (Create User Wizard)

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-59

 Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

7. Select an existing view, or click Create View to create one (refer to

Table 4-45). By defining a view you allow users to view, or restrict them from
viewing different parts of the MIB subtree.

Table 4-45. View Parameters

Name Description Possible Values

Context SNMP context configured for the device Existing SNMP context

View Name Name of the new view Up to 32 alphanumeric characters

Subtree OID of the MIB subtree Default: blank

Type Type of view action Included – The subtree is included

in the group view
Excluded – The subtree is excluded
from the group view
Default: Included

Mask A bit mask defining a family of view subtrees. If the 00–FF

mask length is configured to zero, the view is Default: blank
uniquely identified by the corresponding subtree
without a ‘wild card’, as specified by RFC 3415.

<Add> Adds a new subtree row with default values.

<Remove> Removes a selected subtree row.

8. Click <Finish> to complete creating the user.

Adding a User Account via the Standard SNMPv3 Tables

The SNMPv3 Manager application allows adding, editing, and removing user
accounts via the standard SNMPv3 tables, as defined in RFC 3413, RFC 3414,
RFC 3415, and RFC 3584.
Adding a user account requires configuring the following SNMPv3 tables:
• usmUser (Users tab) – to add a new user account and define its
authentication and privacy protocols, and passwords
• vacmGroup (Authorization tab) – to assign the user account to a group
• vacm Access (Authorization tab) – to assign the group to a view
• vacmViewTreeFamily (Authorization tab) – to define the view permissions.

4-60 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

 To add a user account via the standard SNMPv3 tables:

1. In the SNMPv3 Manager, in the SNMP Tables section, select the Users or
Authorization tab.
2. Select the necessary SNMPv3 table by clicking on it.
The respective SNMP table is displayed.
3. Add a new row by clicking <Add>.
4. Enter the required parameters introduced under Creating a User Account via
the Wizard.
5. Click <Apply> to apply the changes.

 To remove a user account, group, or view via the standard SNMPv3 tables:
1. Display the necessary SNMPv3 table.

2. Select the desired table row by clicking the row number on the left side
of the table row.
3. Click <Remove> to delete the selected entry.

Creating a New Community

SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 communities can still be used in the SNMPv3 environment
for authenticating the SNMPv1/v2 manager before allowing access to the SNMPv3
agent. To ensure coexistence between different SNMP versions, you must
configure the SNMPv1/v2 credentials to be used to access the network devices.

Creating a Community via a Wizard

When creating a new community using the Create Community wizard, perform the
following tasks:
1. Create a new community account.
2. Assign the new community to a group.
3. Define view permissions for the community.

 To create a community via the wizard:

1. From the Agent Tree panel, select one or more agents to be configured to
allow access from the SNMPv1/v2 managers.

2. At the toolbar, click Create Community or select Create

Community from the Configuration menu.
The Create Community dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter the required parameters as outlined in Table 4-46.
4. Click <Next> to proceed to the next step.

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-61

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-34. Creating a New Community Account (Create Community Wizard)

Table 4-46. Create Community Parameters

Name Description Possible Values

Agent Currently selected device agent.

Note: This field is not displayed when multiple
agents are selected.

Community Community name Up to 32 alphanumeric characters

User Name Name of the user account to use the new Up to 32 alphanumeric characters
community name.

Context SNMP context configured for the device Existing SNMP context

5. Assign the community to an existing group or create a new group by selecting

Create Group and assigning a name to it.

4-62 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-35. Assigning a Community to a Group (Create Community Wizard)

6. Click <Next>.
The Assign View dialog box is displayed.

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-63

 Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-36. Assigning a Group to a View (Create Community Wizard)

7. Select an existing view or create a new view by selecting Create View and
assigning a name to it, which may consist of up to 32 alphanumeric
characters.
8. Click <Finish>.
The view permissions are created.

Adding a Community via the Standard SNMPv3 Tables

The SNMPv3 Manager application allows adding, editing, and removing SNMPv1/v2
communities via the standard SNMPv3 tables, as defined in RFC 3413, RFC 3414,
RFC 3415, and RFC 3584.

4-64 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Adding a new community requires configuration of the following SNMPv3 tables:

• snmpCommunity (Users tab) – to add a new community and connect it to a
user account
• vacmGroup (Authorization tab) – to assign the community to a group
• vacm Access (Authorization tab) – to assign the group to a view
• vacmViewTreeFamily (Authorization tab) – to define the view permissions.

 To add a new community via the standard SNMPv3 tables:

1. In the SNMPv3 Manager, in the SNMP Tables section, select the Users or
Authorization tab.
2. Select the necessary SNMPv3 table by clicking on it.
The respective SNMP table is displayed.
3. Add a new row by clicking <Add>.
4. Enter the required parameters introduced under Creating a Community via a
Wizard.
5. Click <Apply> to apply the changes.

Creating Notifications
The SNMPv3 Manager maintains a database of events that are mapped to the
traps sent by an agent to the NMS. You can select the events, specify their
destinations, and define the transmission methods.

Creating a Notification via the Wizard

When creating a new notification using the Create Notification wizard, perform
the following tasks:
1. Select existing event(s) or create a new one(s).
2. Select or define a target.
3. Define the target parameters.

 To create a notification via the wizard:

1. From the Agent Tree panel, select either one or more agents for which you
intend to add notifications.

2. Click Create Notification or select Create Notification from the

Wizard menu.
The Define Event Set dialog box is displayed (see Figure 4-37).

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-65

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-37. Defining an Event Set (Notification Wizard)

3. From the left-hand event list, select one or several events and click to
move them to the right-hand list.
4. If you intend to create a new event, select Create Events, and then click
<Add>.
A new row is added to the event table.

4-66 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-38. Creating an Event (Notification Wizard)

5. Create a new notification by providing the following information:

 Event Name - Make sure the name is the same as in the agent database
that maps events to traps.
 Tag - An event label. You can assign multiple tags to a single event, or a
single tag to a number of events.
 Type - Type of event: trap or information.
6. Click <Next> to configure the event destinations.
The Select Notification Target dialog box is displayed.

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-67

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-39. Selecting an Existing Target (Notification Wizard)

7. Choose an existing target or select Create Target to add a new destination.

The target parameters become available.

Figure 4-40. Creating a New Target (Notification Wizard)

4-68 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

8. Enter the following:

 Target Name - up to 32 alphanumeric characters
 Address:<port number> - Destination IP address and the TCP port number
 Parameters Name - Name of the transmission property set. The set is
saved by the SNMPv3 Manager and can be applied to another target.
9. Click <Next> to define the transmission parameters.
The Target Transmission dialog box is displayed.

Figure 4-41. Configuring Transmission Parameters (Notification Wizard)

10. Enter the following:

 MP Model - Message processing model, SNMPv1, SNMPv2, or SNMPv3
 Sec. Model - Security model, SNMPv1, SNMPv2, or USM
 Sec. Level - Security level, the following options are available:
 No Auth. No Priv.
 Auth. No Priv.
 Auth. Priv.
 Sec. Name - Name of user account, up to 32 alphanumerical characters
11. Click <Finish> to complete creating Notification.

Adding a Notification via Standard SNMPv3 Tables

The SNMPv3 Manager application allows adding, editing, and removing SNMP
notifications via the standard SNMPv3 tables, as defined in RFC 3413, RFC 3414,
RFC 3415, and RFC 3584.

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-69

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Adding a new notification requires configuration of the following SNMPv3 tables

in the Notifications tab:
• snmpNotify – to display a list of existing events and to add a new event if
needed
• snmpTargetAddr – to configure a destination
• snmpTargetParams – to configure transmission parameters.

 To add a new notification via standard SNMPv3 tables:

1. In the SNMPv3 Manager, in the SNMP Tables section, select the Notification
tab.
2. Select the necessary SNMPv3 table by clicking on it.
The respective SNMP table is displayed.
3. Add a new row by clicking <Add>.
4. Enter the required parameters introduced under Creating a Notification via
the Wizard.
5. Click <Apply> to apply the changes.

Saving Changes to Persistent Storage

For agents that support persistent storage, the application saves the
configuration changes and sends them to the agents when required. You can
execute this for selected agents or all agents in the agent tree that support
persistency.

 To save changes to persistent storage:

• Depending on whether you want to save changes to persistent storage of
selected agents or all the supported agents, do one of the following:

 In the Agent tree, select the desired agent(s), and then click Persist
Configuration on Selected Nodes or select Persist Selected from the
Persistency menu.

 Click Persist Configuration on All Nodes or select Persist All

from the Persistency menu.
The SNMPv3 Manager sends the configuration changes to the relevant
agent(s).

Note Only agents with the blue line around their status LED support persistent
storage. For unsupported agents the Persist options are unavailable.

Refreshing the Agents

This process runs an agent discovery and updates their configurations. All
operations for adding, modifying, or removing user accounts are suspended for
the selected agents until the refresh is completed.

Note If agents are refreshed before configuration changes are applied, the SNMPv3
Manager requires confirmation of the refresh procedure.

4-70 Working with RADview Settings and Utilities RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

 To refresh the agents:

1. From the Agent Tree panel, select the desired agent(s).

2. At the toolbar, click Refresh or select Refresh from the View

menu.
The SNMPv3 Manager refreshes the selected agent(s).

Exiting the Application

 To exit the SNMPv3 Manager:

• From the Configuration menu, select Exit.

Note If configuration changes have not been applied or saved, one or more of the
following messages appear:
• Configuration changes weren’t applied and will be lost if
application is closed
• Configuration changes weren't saved to persistent storage
• There are procedures running and will be terminated if
application is closed.
To close the application, click <Exit>.
To return to the application, click <Cancel>.

RADview Working with RADview Settings and Utilities 4-71

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

4.2 Configuring the Network

This section explains how to configure and set up network elements. This may
include the upload or download of software, configurations, scripts etc. Most of
these tasks are performed using the Jobs Utility.
• Preparing for Uploading and Downloading Files
• Working with Jobs
• Working with the Configuration Archive
• System Backup and Restore
• Net Inventory
• Licensing

Preparing for Uploading and Downloading Files

Many tasks include the upload or download of files such as software,
configurations, statistics etc and require TFTP or SFTP servers. Follow the
instructions below to prepare your system accordingly for upload and download
operations. If you are sure that all parameters are properly set, refer to
Working with Jobs.

 To prepare your system with TFTP and SFTP servers:

Note If you are planning to collect statistics for the RADview Performance Portal, you
must install a TFTP server as collecting statistics does not support SFTP.

• Install a TFTP or SFTP server on the same station as the RADview server.
• Select a TFTP or SFTP server that supports a large number of concurrent
sessions. For additional TFTP/SFTP server requirements, refer to Software
Requirements in Chapter 1.
• Verify that the file transfer directory defined in the TFTP/SFTP server settings
is the same as the directory defined in the system console. For additional
information, refer to Configuring the EMS Jobs Management (Back End).
• Verify that the max number of concurrent sessions allowed by the TFTP/SFTP
server is compatible with the following:
 The maximum number of concurrent NE tasks in the RADview system,
defined in the system console.
 The maximum number of concurrent NE tasks per job, defined in the
Advanced Job Parameters dialog box.

Working with Jobs

You create jobs by following a wizard. For a list of available jobs for specific
network elements and a wizard overview, refer to Chapter 3.

4-72 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

For instructions on setting the max number of allowed jobs, TFTP ad SFTP settings
for uploads and downloads, refer to Setting Job Management Service Parameters.

Creating Jobs
You can start the process of creating a job as follows:
• With prior selection of NEs - To go fast, select one or more NEs and/or
groups by right-clicking them and then define the job starting the wizard with
defining the task (Step ).
• Without prior selection of NEs - To build a complex job library, start the
wizard without prior selecting the desired NE(s). The wizard starts with
selecting the desired NEs (Step ).
For an overview over the Jobs wizard, refer to Working with Wizards in Chapter 3.

 To start creating a job for pre-selected NEs/levels/user groups:

1. In the work space selection area, click Jobs .

2. In the Navigation Pane, select NEs using one of the following options:

 One NE by right-clicking it in the Network Element Repository

 Specific NEs in the NER by right-clicking each NE separately
 All NEs on a specific level and the associated sublevels by right-clicking
the level
 All NEs belonging to a specific user group by right-clicking the relevant
group in the Groups tree.

3. Select New Job .

The Job wizard opens to Select Action (Step ). For additional

information, refer to Selecting Tasks.

 To start creating a job without prior selection of a level/NE/group:

1. In the Jobs Table Active tab, right-click and then select New Job from the
shortcut menu.

The job wizard opens to NE Selection Method (Step ).

2. Choose the method of selecting NEs. You have the following options:
 Selecting NEs directly
 Selecting the NEs that belong to one or more specified user groups
 Selecting NEs according that match pre-defined criteria
 Selecting NEs according that have been assigned to selected customers
as resources.

You are now able to select the NEs according to your choice (Step )
3. Select NE(s) according to the desired method (refer to Table 4-47).

RADview Configuring the Network 4-73

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

The Job wizard opens to Select Action (Step ). For additional

information, refer to Selecting Tasks.
For detailed information on selecting NEs according to various criteria and
continuing defining the job, refer to the sections below.

 To continue creating the wizard:

1. Select the task (refer to Selecting Tasks)
2. Validate the task (refer to Validating Tasks)
3. Select job parameters (refer to Setting Job Parameters)
4. Validate the parameters (refer to Completing Adding the Job)
5. Schedule the task (refer to Scheduling Jobs).

Selecting NEs
This section explains how to select the NEs that apply to the desired job.

Note The examples of the dialogs below are provided for Windows 7, but apply to
Windows 2008 Server, Linux and Unix as well.

 To start the wizard and specify the Job Selection method:

1. In the Jobs table, click New Job or start the wizard without prior selection
of NEs as explained above.
The Create New Job wizard appears with the NE Selection Method dialog
box (Step ).
2. Select the NE Selection Method and then click <Next>.
The Selection dialog box relevant to the selected method appears
(Step ).

4-74 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-42. Job Wizard – NE Selection Method

3. Select the desired NEs according to one of the methods listed and explained
in Table 4-47
 To discard the selection you made and choose different NEs or a
different selection method, click <Back> and repeat this procedure.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-75

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Table 4-47. Selecting NEs

Method Instructions

Explicit • To select NE(s), check the desired NE or

the entire level . The selected NEs
appear under Selected.
If all NEs of a level are selected, the
level appears as . If only some NEs
are selected, it appears as .
• To locate a selected NE in the tree,
right-click the NE under Selected and
select <Locate> from the shortcut
menu.

NE Group • Select a group associated with the

desired NEs from the Groups tree.
Note: Any update of the group’s content is
reflected in the selected NEs. The group
content is verified when executing the job.

By Criteria 1. Under Criterion, select the desired

criteria, for example IP Address (same
as for dynamic groups).
2. Select And or Or to specify whether to
apply the logical and or the logical or .
3. Under Condition, select the desired
condition, for example Starts With for
the starting IP address.
4. Click <Add> to add your selection to the
list of criteria.
5. To remove a criterion, select the
criterion in the list and click <Remove>.

By Customer • To select NEs associated with (a)

specific customer(s) from the tree,
select Explicitely and check the
desired customer(s).
• To select NEs associated with all
customers of a specific ranking (such as
Gold, Silver etc), select By Customer
Ranking and then check the desired
ranking on the list.

4. After selecting the desired NEs, click <Next> to start selecting the job itself.

A list of jobs appears (Step ) as illustrated in Figure 4-43.

4-76 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

5. Refer to Selecting Tasks for further information and instructions.

Selecting Tasks
In Step , you select the tasks. Tasks are usually referred to as ‘actions’ in the
user interface and the wizard. For some tasks, you may have to select additional
options at this step.

 To select a task:

1. In Step (Figure 4-43), under Select an Action, select the desired task.
For some tasks, additional settings appear from which you have to
choose the ones required for the task.
2. Refer to Table 4-48 for additional information and instructions on these
additional settings.
3. To continue, click <Next>.

The wizard moves to Step .

Note • In case of Upload Software or Upload Software to Backup, all NEs must be of
the same type. If NEs were selected by selecting a dynamic group or via
criteria, there must be only one criterion for a single NE type and the
condition must be set to Equals.
• Step is skipped unless at least one selected NE does not support the
selected task or you are not authorized to perform this task on them. For
additional information on Step , refer to Validating Tasks.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-77

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-43. Job Wizard – List of Tasks (For a Group of NEs)

4-78 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-44. Job Wizard –Upload Configuration Selected (For a Group of NEs)

RADview Configuring the Network 4-79

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-45. Job Wizard – Task List (For LA-210)

Table 4-48. Selecting Tasks – Additional Options

Parameters Available Settings Remarks

Allow only actions • Checked. Tasks that are unsupported by at least one If you selected a
supported by all of the selected NEs are listed, but grayed out and dynamic user group, this
selected NEs unavailable for selection. option does not appear
• Cleared. Tasks that are unsupported by at least one of and all the listed tasks
the selected NEs are listed and selectable. When can be selected.
moving on, the system returns a list of NEs that do
not support the task (step ). For further
information, refer to Validating Tasks

Select an Action Listed tasks according to the above-mentioned criteria

4-80 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Parameters Available Settings Remarks

Activate congfig file • Checked. Acivates the configuration upon upload. Appears if Upload
upload • Cleared. Does not activate the configuration. Configuration is checked
as illustrated in
Default: Cleared
Figure 4-44

Install Software • Checked. Installs the software and resets the NE. Appears if Upload
• Cleared. Only uploads the software. Software is checked.

Default: Cleared
Note: Some NEs automatically reset after uploading
software, regardless of whether Install Software is
checked or not.

Reboot after Swap • Checked. Reboot the NE after swapping the main and Appears as selectable
backup software files. swap option when Swap
• Cleared. No reboot after swapping main and backup Main and Backup
software files. The swap takes effect only after Software is checked.
manually rebooting the NE.
Default: Cleared

RADview Configuring the Network 4-81

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-46. Job Wizard – Select Upload License Action (For LA-210)

Validating Tasks
Step is a validation step that the system passes if the current user is not
authorized to perform the task on at least one NE or if at least one NE does not
support the task defined in Step as outlined below.

Authorization The user is not authorized to perform the action

for the NE

Activate operation is not The Activate config upload option was selected
supported but the operation is not supported by the NE

Operation is not supported The operation is not supported by the NE

NEs must be of the same The selected operation is Upload Software or

type Upload Software to Backup and the selected NEs
do not have the same NE Type

4-82 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

For an illustration on Step , refer to Figure 4-47.

 To correct the NE selection:

1. Click <Back> twice to return to Step and then modify the NE selection.

2. Repeat Step and Step .

If all NEs are supported and none of the conditions above apply, Step
is skipped and the wizard moves straight to Step .

Figure 4-47. Job Wizard – Action Validation (For a Group of NEs)

 To continue defining the task:

• Click <Next> to advance to Step (Setting Job Parameters).

The unsupported/unauthorized NE(s) is (are) not included in the
selection.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-83

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Setting Job Parameters

In Step , the parameters, the workflow and the content of the dialog box(es)
depend on the selected job, the selected NE(s) and the selected task.

 To set Job parameters:

1. In Step , edit the name for the task if desired and add a description in the
optional Description field.
By default, the Description field is empty and the name is comprised of the
task name from the ‘Select an Action’ list and the following, dpending on the
number of NEs and whether they are of the same type:
 1-2 NEs: <Task name><Name of NE>, <Name of NE>, for example
Execute Script – 172.17.151.209, 172.17.155.17
 3 or more NEs of different types: <Task name> - <#> NEs, for example
Execute Script – 3 NEs
 3 or more NEs of the same type: <Task name> - <NE type>, for example
Execute Script – LA-210
2. Select the various parameters according to the task you select. These tasks
are explained and illustrated in the sections outlined below.

Note If the job action is Generate Statistics Report, the dialog box Report Parameters
appears before Completing Adding the Job or Scheduling Jobs. Refer to Chapter 5
for details.

The sections below explain selecting and setting task parameters for every job.
Follow the respective link to get to the desired job.
• Collect Statistics
• Download Auxiliary File
• Download Configuration
• Download Log
• Download Software
• Download Software from Backup
• Download User File
• Execute Script
• Execute SNMP Script
• Generate Data Report
• Install Software
• Reboot
• Save Configuration
• Swap Main and Backup Software
• Upload Configuration
• Upload License

4-84 Configuring the Network RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

• Upload Software
• Upload Software to Backup
• Upload User File

Collect Statistics

For this task, Step sets the system to collect statistical data and store them
in the NMS database for a set period of time. The default is 90 days. For
scheduling options, refer to Scheduling Jobs.
This task is required to display statistical data in RADview-Performance Manager.

Note Before creating and activating this job, verify that your hard drive has sufficient
space to store the statistics data.

Figure 4-48. Collect Statistics

RADview Configuring the Network 4-85

 Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Download Auxiliary File

In step , you choose to download the MAC table or any other specified file
from the NE(s) to to a specified location on your work station as illustrated
below. The File Name within NE list box displays mac-table as the only available
option.
You specify the download location on your work station beforehand using the
TFTP or SFTP server you installed.

Figure 4-49. Download Auxiliary File

4-86 Configuring the Network RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Download Configuration

In step , you choose to download the configuration to a specified location on

your work station.
You specify the download location on your work station beforehand using the
TFTP or SFTP server you installed.
Depending on the NE, you can download up to four different configuration files
that you can select under Source File Name within NE.

Table 4-49. Download Configuration

Source File Name within NE Remarks

startup-config Configuration file that resembles the state at the start of the device

user-default Default configuration for a specific user

rollback-config Configuration to fall back to if the current configuration is deleted

factory-default The state at which the device leaves the factory

Notes
• If some of the selected NEs do not support several configuration files, the
value selected in Source file name within NE is valid only for the NEs
supporting multiple configuration files.
• For the NEs that support a single configuration file, the configuration file that
resides in the NE is downloaded.
• If none of the selected NEs supports file name within NE, or a dynamic group
was not selected for the job, the parameter does not appear.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-87

 Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-50. Download Configuration

Download Log

In step , you choose to download the log file according to the label under
Source File Name within NE to a specified location on your work station.
You specify the download location on your work station beforehand using the
TFTP or SFTP server you installed. The example below is set to download the
alarm history.

4-88 Configuring the Network RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-51. Download Log

Download Software

In step , you choose to download the software file to a specified location on

your work station.
You specify the download location on your work station beforehand using the
TFTP or SFTP server you installed.
The Source File within NE list box shows, if multiple software versions reside on
the relevant NE from which you select the desired one.

Note • If the parameter Source File Name within NE does not appear, the active
software is downloaded.
• If the Main software file is downloaded, the version attribute in the
configuration archive is obtained from the MIB parameter sysDescr.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-89

 Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-52. Download Software

Download Software from Backup

In step , you choose to download the software file from the backup to a
specified location on your work station. You specify the download location on
your work station beforehand using the TFTP or SFTP server you installed.
The Source File within NE list box shows, if multiple software versions reside in
the backup of the relevant NE from which you select the desired one.

Download User File

In step , you choose to download the user MAC address table to a specified
location on your work station. You specify the download location on your work
station beforehand using the TFTP or SFTP server you installed.
Under Source File within NE, the user file name (for example user.dat) is
displayed.

4-90 Configuring the Network RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-53. Download User File

Execute Script

In step , you choose to execute scripts entered via the following three ways to
one or several NEs:
• Selecting built-in and pre-define scripts
• Importing scripts that are saved as text files (*.txt)
• Manually entering CLI commands.
The latter two options allow for running CLI command that are not supported by
a job, for example uploading a license file to a device that does not support the
Upload License job.
For more information on CLI commands, refer to the user manual associated with
the desired device.

Note Menu driven devices do not support the Execute Script job.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-91

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

 To select a pre-defined script:

1. Under Select pre-defined script, select one of the readily available scripts
listed below and then click <Append>.
The generic CLI syntax of the selected script appears under Enter script to
execute, which can be modified to apply to your needs.

Alarm Sync SNMP V1 Synchronize alarms with SNMPv1

Alarm Sync SNMP V3 Synchronize alarms with SNMPv3

Configuration Change Forwards traps of configuration

Notification changes in NEs to the RADview server

Date Set the sytem time and date

ETX-1/2x/203AM/5 Prepare for Creates and configures a new Q-

Service Config Group for the NET ports of ETX-1,
ETX-2 family, ETX-203AM, ETX-5
Notes:
• Executing these scrips are a
precondition to creating services.
• The syntax differs for the various
devices

ETX-5 Card Definition Defines a new card for ETX-5

RADIUS Initial configuration of RADIUS

Save Configuration Save configuration

SNTP Server Initial configuration of SNTP

Syslog Initial configuration of Syslog

TACACS+ Initial configuration of TACACS+

2. If required, edit the syntax to enter correct parameters (for example keys or
number of retries under TACAS+). These changes are preserved and take
effect for all selected NEs that support the respective feature when
completing the wizard.

4-92 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

 To view the syntax and a short explanation of the script:

• Next to Select Pre-defined Script, click .

A short explanation and the generic syntax appear (as illustrated for
ETX-203AM Prepare for Service Config in Figure 4-54). This includes
instructions to replace a generic syntax with specific parameters in
sections labeled P-L-E-A-S-E E-D-I-T T-H-E S-C-R-I-P-T .

Figure 4-54. Script Preview for ‘ETX-203AM Prepare for Service Config’

 To import a script:
1. Click <Browse>.
The Select File dialog box appears.
2. Navigate to the desired file and then click <OK>.
The entire content of the text file appears under Select pre-defined script
and the Select File dialog box closes.

 To enter CLI scripts manually:

• Enter the desired CLI command or string of CLI commands into the Select pre-
defined script field.
The <Next> button becomes available and you can continue the wizard.
The syntax is preserved for this particular job once you complete the
wizard.

 To verify the execution of CLI commands:

1. In the Execute Script: Job Parameters dialog box (Step ), click <Advanced>.
The Advanced Job Parameters dialog box becomes available as illustrated
under Setting Advanced Job Parameters.
2. In the Advanced Job Parameters dialog box, select Log all job tasks.
3. Once you completed the wizard, in the Jobs Report, click <More details> to
view the result of the script execution (see Viewing Report Details).

RADview Configuring the Network 4-93

 Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-55. Execute Script

Generate Statistics Report

In steps and , you choose to generate SLA reports and export them to a
file. For additional information on SLA reports, refer to the RADview-Performance
Manager Manual section. For information on parameters to be set in Step ,
refer to the table below.

4-94 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-56. Generate Statistics Report – Step 5

RADview Configuring the Network 4-95

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-57. Generate Statistics Report – Step 6

Table 4-50. Generating Statistics Report – Step 6

Source File Name within NE Remarks

Title Name of the job

Type ETH Service, ETH OAM, Daily Raw Data

Format The available report and file formats depend on the report type you select.

Period Available time periods covered in the report depend on the type you select

CoS Select the service grades you want to include in the report.
Note: Available for ETH OAM only

Distribution

4-96 Configuring the Network RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Source File Name within NE Remarks

Per Select to compile the service report per:

• Customer Hierarchy, check this option and select the highest
customer’s parent level that you wish to include in the report
• Customer Ranking, check this option to include all customer rankings in
the report
Note: Unavailable for Daily Raw Data

Per CoS Select to compile the service report per servicegrade (CoS)
Note: Unavailable for Daily Raw Data

Number of Months to keep Select the desired number of months from the list.
reports To keep them forever, select All.

Execute SNMP Script

In step , you choose to execute the scripts listed below for MP-2100/2104.
For instructions on verifying the execution of the commands, refer to Execute
Script.

Set Net Date and Time for MP- Synchronize the time and the date of
2100/2104 all selected MP-2100/2104 with the
network’s time and date.

Clear Net Alarms for MP-2100/2104 Clearing all current alarms for all
selected MP-2100/2104 devices.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-97

 Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-58. Execute SNMP Script

Generate Data Report

In step , you choose to generate data reports for RADview-Service Center

(previously RV-SC/TDM) devices. For additional information, refer to the current
RADview-Service Center user manual (Version 5.20 and up).
This job is relevant for RADview-Service Center, which does not support the Linux
platform.

Install Software

In step , you choose to install software that has already been uploaded to the
NE and stored there.
If the selected NE(s) support(s) multiple software files, you can activate a specific
software pack listed under Target File Name within NE.

4-98 Configuring the Network RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Note Installing a previous software version may not be compatible with the device and
cause it to fail operating properly. Therefore, you have to verify that the desired
software version is compatible with your current hardware.

Figure 4-59. Install Software

Reboot

In step , you choose to restart all the selected NE(s).

RADview Configuring the Network 4-99

 Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-60. Reboot

Save Configuration

In step , you choose to save the current configuration.

If your NE supports it, you can copy running-config to startup-config in the NE in
order to save its current configuration.

4-100 Configuring the Network RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-61. Save Configuration

Swap Main and Backup Software

In step , you choose to swap main and backup software files in the NE.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-101

 Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-62. Swap Main and Backup Software

Upload Configuration

In step , you choose to upload the configuration to a single or to multiple NEs.

In addition, you can upload the configuration from the archive or from the local
file system.

 To upload a configuration from the archive to a single NE:

Note These instructions apply if you selected a single NE.

1. Under Load From:, select Archive.

Configuration files appear listed in the Archive list.
2. Select the desired configuration file from the Archive list as illustrated in
Figure 4-63.
3. Select the target option under Target file within NE.

4-102 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-63. Upload Configuration - From Archive to Single NE

 To upload a configuration from the archive to multiple NEs:

Note These instructions apply if you selected multiple NEs.

1. Under Load From:, select Archive.

A list of available configuration file groups appears in the Archive list.
2. Select the desired configuration file group as illustrated in Figure 4-64. The
following configuration file types are available:

Last-startup The last startup configuration file that was archived by a

download job. If such was not found, nothing is uploaded.
For NEs that do not support the startup configuration file,
the latest configuration file saved in the configuration
archive is loaded.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-103

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Last running Use last running configuration file that was archived by a
download job. If such was not found, nothing is uploaded.
For NEs that do not support running configuration file, the
latest configuration file saved in the configuration archive is
loaded.

Baseline Use last file marked as baseline (refer to Marking as Baseline

for more information).

By Date Use file with the specified date. If such was not found, the
file with the closest earlier date is loaded. If the job action is
Upload Configuration, then for NEs that support running and
startup configuration files, if both running and startup files
have the same date, the file with the latest time is loaded.

3. Select the desired option from the list.

Note If the selected task is Upload User File, By Date is the only available upload
option.

4-104 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-64. Upload Configuration - From Archive to Multiple NEs

 To upload a configuration from the local file system to a single NE:

Note These instructions apply if you selected a single NE.

1. Under Load From, select Local File System.

The Single File option is selected and the Multiple Files option is
unavailable.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-105

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-65. Upload Configuration File from Local File System to Single NE

2. Click <Browse>.
The Select Path dialog box appears.
3. Navigate to the desired file and click <OK>.
4. Under Target File Name within NE, select the target file name and type.

 To upload a configuration file from the local files system to multiple NEs:

Note These instructions apply if you selected multiple NEs of the same type
specifically, for example multiple LA-210 devices.

1. Under Load From:, select Local File System.

The Multiple Files option is selected and the Single File option is
unavailable.

4-106 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-66. Upload Configuration - From Local File System to Multiple NEs

2. Click <Browse>.
The Select Path dialog box appears.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-107

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-67. Select Path Dialog Box – Multiple Configuration Files

3. Navigate to the location of the startup config file.

4. Check Match Prefix and Match Suffix and enter startup and config for the
prefix and the suffix respectively and then click <OK>.
Under Multiple Files, the location of the startup config file, the prefix and
suffix are displayed.

Note The files are not displayed and the white field in the Select Path dialog box
remains empty.

4-108 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-68. Upload Configuration - From Local File System to Multiple NEs, Path Specified

The configuration file names are composed as follows:

<Prefix><NE Name>.<Suffix>.
This translates into something like the examples below under the assumption
that you selected three LA-210 units to upload the startup configuration to each
of them:
startupLA-210-A.config
startupLA-210-B.config
startupLA-210-C.config

RADview Configuring the Network 4-109

 Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Notes • If a file is not found for a particular NE, nothing is uploaded to it.
• For all Upload Configuration options, if at least one of the selected NEs
supports the target file name within NE or a dynamic group was selected for
the job, the Target file name within NE parameter is displayed in the dialog
box, with only the startup-config option available.
• In the case of Upload User file, the Target file name within NE parameter is
displayed in the dialog box as a text box that you can fill in.

Upload License

In step , you choose to upload a license file to a single or to multiple NEs. In

addition, you can upload the configuration from the archive or from the local file
system.

Note The Upload License job is currently supported by LA-210 units only.

 To upload a license file from the local file system to a single NE:

Note These instructions apply if you selected a single NE.

1. Under Load From:, select Local File System.

The Single File option is selected and the Multiple Files option is
unavailable.

4-110 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-69. Upload License File from Local File System to Single NE

2. Click <Browse>.
The Select Path dialog box appears.
3. Navigate to the desired file and click <OK>.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-111

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-70. Upload License File from Local File System to Single NE – License File Selected

The license file names must include the MAC address of the device to which
the respective file is going to be uploaded. They are composed as follows:
LIC_<MAC address of the relevant LA-210 unit>.txt
If the MAC address is for example 00-20-D2-2A-60-37, the associated license
file name is LIC_0020D22A6037.txt

Note To identify the MAC address of the relevant device, open its shelf view and then
go to System Info or Device Info as explained in the respective RADview agent
manual.

4-112 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

 To upload a license file from the local file system to multiple NEs:

Note License files are dedicated to specific devices and are identified by the MAC
address of the respective device as part of their file names. The file names are
composed as explained above.

1. Verify that all license files are stored in the same folder and match the
number and MAC addresses of the LA-210 you selected.
2. Under Load From:, select Local File System.
The Multiple Files option is selected and the Single File option is
unavailable.

Figure 4-71. Upload License Files - From Local File System to Multiple NEs

3. Click <Browse>.
The Select Path dialog box appears.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-113

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-72. Select Path Dialog Box – Multiple License Files

4. Navigate to the location of the startup config file.

5. Check Match Prefix and Match Suffix and enter LIC and txt for the prefix and
the suffix respectively and then click <OK>.
Under Multiple Files, the location of the license files, the prefix and suffix
are displayed.

Note The files are not displayed and the white field in the Select Path dialog box
remains empty.

4-114 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-73. Upload Licenses - From Local File System to Multiple NEs, Path Specified

 To upload license files from the archive:

Note You can upload single and multiple license files from the archive.

1. Under Load From:, select Archive.

A list of available license file groups appears in the Archive list as
illustrated in Figure 4-74.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-115

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-74. Upload Multiple License Files via Archive – Selecting the File Option

2. Select the desired license file group. The following license file options are
available:

Last License Upload the previously active license as illustrated in

Figure 4-75.
By Date Upload a license issued on the specified date. When
selecting this option, a field is displayed fromvwhere you can
select the date as illustrated in Figure 4-76

Note
If you select By Date and the file issued at the specified date is not found, the
file issued at the nearest date is uploaded instead.

4-116 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-75. Upload Multiple Licenses License – Last License

RADview Configuring the Network 4-117

 Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-76. Upload Multiple Licenses License - By Date

Upload Software

In step , you choose to upload a software version to a single NE or to multiple

NEs.

 To upload software files to one or more NEs:

Note If you select multiple NEs, all NEs must be of the same type, for example
ETX-203AX.

• Select the desired software version from the Software Version list as
illustrated in Figure 4-77 and Figure 4-78.

4-118 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Note • If the desired software version does not appear, it is not listed in the RADview
Software File Management Table and must first be imported. For instructions
on importing the software version, refer to the instructions on importing a
software version below. For additional information on the Software File
Management Table, refer to Managing Software File Versions.
• If you upload the software file to multiple NEs and the NEs support multiple
software files, the dropdown list Target file name within NE appears, enabling
you to specify the SW pack as which you want to upload the software file.
• For NEs that support multiple software files, in order to activate the SW pack
you have to create a task to install software. For additional information, refer
to Generate Data Report.
• If multiple software files are not supported by an NE, the software file is
uploaded to the main software.

Figure 4-77. Upload Software - To Explicitly Selected NE(s)

RADview Configuring the Network 4-119

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-78. Upload Software - To NEs Selected By Criteria

 To import a software version:

1. Click <Import>.
The Import SW dialog box appears.

4-120 Configuring the Network RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-79. Upload Software – Import SW Version

2. Click <Browse> to navigate to the location and the desired software file.
3. Under SW Version, enter the software version, for example 4.3.
4. Under Comments, add a comment if desired.
5. Click <OK>.
The software is imported and appears listed. It also appears in the
RADview Software File Management Table (explained under Managing
Software File Versions).

Upload Software to Backup

In step , you choose to upload a software version associated with a single NE

or multiple NEs to the backup location of one NE or multiple NEs of the same
type.
To upload a software file to the backup, follow the instructions and refer to
information provided for the Upload Software job in the section above.

Upload User File

In step , you choose to upload any file to the selected NEs.

Setting Advanced Job Parameters

Before you continue to the next step in the wizard, you can select and specify
notification and logging options for the job you are creating.

 To set advanced job parameters and complete this step of the wizard:

1. In the relevant Step dialog, click <Advanced>.

The Advanced Job Parameters dialog box appears.
2. Set the parameters as explained in Table 4-51 and then click <OK>.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-121

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

3. Click <Next>.
You are moved to the next stop of the wizard.

Figure 4-80. Job Wizard – Advanced Job Parameters

Table 4-51. Advanced Job Parameters

Parameter Description

Send report to: When this is selected, a text box is available where you can enter one
or more email addresses, separated by semicolons (“;”), to which the
job report should be sent
By default, the text box contains the email address(es) entered in
previous job creations
If Send report to: is selected, you can select which type of report to
send – Summarized or Detailed (default), as well as to send email
only if job was unsuccessful

4-122 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Parameter Description

Send report only if job fails When this is selected, job report is emailed only if job execution
completes with status not equal to OK
Note: Relevant only if Send report to: is selected

Maximum number of concurrent Specifies how many NE tasks (such as SNMP, xFTP, or Telnet session
NE Tasks for this job between NMS and an NE) can be opened for the specific job. For
Note: Does not appear for action example, if the job applies to 25 NEs, there are 25 NE tasks to
Generate Statistics Report. execute. If this parameter is set to 5, a maximum of five NE tasks can
be executed simultaneity. When one of the five NE tasks finishes, the
next task starts, and so on.
This parameter should be set to equal to or less than the value set in
the system console for the number of concurrent sessions allowed in
the entire system (refer to Configuring the EMS Jobs Management
(Back End)).
Values: 1–200 (default 100)

Report Logging Specifies logging options:

• Do not log job tasks – Do not log any tasks
• Log job tasks only if errors occur – Log tasks if errors occur
• Log all job tasks – Log all tasks (this option is useful for action
Execute Script to see why job completed but script failed).
You can view logged task details in the job report (Log Details
column) after the job completes execution (refer to Viewing Report
Details)

Security Domain A dropdown list is provided for domain name. By default it is

empty.You can add a domain name during job creation or when
editing a job, to control access to the job (the domain must be
defined in the user security profile with relevant permissions). When
security domain is set for a job, some users may not be able to
access the job.

Set as default If selected, all future new jobs have the security domain of the
current job. Clear this option to cancel setting the security domain
for new jobs.

Clear Click to delete the list of previously defined security domain names
from the dropdown list (this applies to all jobs). This is useful if the
autocompletion feature prevents you from entering the desired
domain name.

Configuration Error Policy Determines the device behavior if an error occurs while NE is loading
Note: Appears only for action configuration file:
Configuration Upload for RAD-OS • Ignore errors and continue loading the file
devices. • Stop loading the configuration file if an error occurs
• Reject the file, reboot, and load the next configuration file in the
following sequence: startup, rollback, user default, or factory
default

RADview Configuring the Network 4-123

 Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Completing Adding the Job

Once you configured the job parameters, you are asked to schedule the job. In
case that one or more NEs do not support task parameters you set, you are
notified and asked to validate the job parameters.

 To complete adding the job:

• When the job parameters are set, click <Next>.

You are moved to step or , depending on whether job parameters

are supported by all NEs.

Step lists the NEs that do not support at least one parameter you set as
explained under Validating Job Parameters.

The scheduling options in step vary with the selected job. Refer to
Scheduling Jobs to locate the parameters and complete setting up the task.

Note The Generate Statistics Report job uses two wizard steps to set parameters,
therefore the validation of job parameters and scheduling are performed in steps
and respectively.

Validating Job Parameters

Step appears for example as a result of the following:

• If the selected task is Upload Configuration or Upload User File to multiple
NEs, and there are NEs for which no file was found.
• If the selected task is Download Configuration with a configuration type that
is not supported by all the NEs.
• The dialog box displays a list of NEs for which the job actions cannot be
performed.

4-124 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-81. Job Wizard – Job Parameter Validation

 To correct the problem:

• Click <Back> twice to go back to the selection step and remove the NEs for
which the job cannot be executed.

 To complete defining the task:

• Click <Next> to advance to step .

Job scheduling options appear in step as illustrated below. For further

information, refer to Scheduling Jobs.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-125

 Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Note • Unsupported/unauthorized NEs for the selected job and its parameters are not
included in the selection.
• The Job Scheduling dialog varies with available scheduling options, which
depend on the respective job. For additional information, refer to the next
page.
• f a group from the private group tree was selected for the job, only the option
Now appears
• The option Recurring appears only for the job actions Download Configuration,
Download Software, Download User File, Collect Statistics, and Generate
Statistics Report
• For job action Collect Statistics, only the option Recurring appears.
• For job action Generate Statistics Report, only the options Now and Once
appear if the report period is not the previous month; only the option
Recurring appears if the report period is the previous month
• For job action Generate Data Report, only the options Now and Once appear.

Scheduling Jobs
Depending on the specific task, up to three scheduling options are available:
• Running the job now
• Running the job once at a scheduled time.
• Running the job periodically according to a specified recurrence pattern.

 To run the job now:

• Select Now and click <Finish>.
The job starts running.

 To run the job once at a scheduled time:

1. Select Once.
Scheduling options become available.

Figure 4-82. Job Scheduling – Date & Time

2. Enter the desired time and date and click <Finish>.

The job runs at the scheduled date and time.

Note Make sure that all selected NEs are connected and online at the time when the
task is scheduled to be executed.

 To run the job periodically:

1. Select Recurring.
Scheduling options to specify a recurrence pattern become available.

4-126 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-83. Job Scheduling – Time Frequency for Collect Statistics and Generate Data Report

Figure 4-84. Job Scheduling – Recurring Pattern for all other Jobs

2. Define the recurrence pattern as outlined below.

 Every. In case of Collect Statistics and Generate Data Report, the
following options are available: 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour,
1.5 hours, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, 6 hours, 7 hours, 8 hours,
9 hours, 10 hours, 11 hours, 12 hours. The default is 15 minutes
 Recurrence Pattern. If the task is not Collect Statistics or Generate Data
Report, define the recurrence pattern as outlined in Table 4-52.
3. Define the period of time during which the task recurs as outlined in
Table 4-53.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-127

 Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

4. Click <Finish> to complete creating the task (job).

The job to the Active tab of the Jobs Table.

Table 4-52. Scheduling the Recurrence Pattern

Pattern Description Pattern Options

Daily The job can be executed every

Note: This does <x> days (default is 1)
not appear for
job action
Generate
Statistics Report.

Weekly The job can be executed every

Note: This does <x> weeks (default is 1), on
not appear for days that you select (default is
job action Monday).
Generate
Statistics Report.

Monthly You can select either of the

following options:
• The job can be executed on
a particular day of the
month (default is 1), every
<x> months (default is 1).
If you enter 31 as the day,
the job is executed on the
first day of the next month
for months that have less
than 31 days
• The job can be executed on
a selected occurrence
(default is First) of a day
(default is Monday), every
<x> months (default is 1).

Yearly You can select either of the

Note: This does following options:
not appear for • The job can be executed on
job action a particular day (default is
Generate 1) of a particular month
Statistics Report. (default is January)
• The job can be executed on
a selected occurrence
(default is First) of a day
(default is Monday) in a
particular month (default is
January).

4-128 Configuring the Network RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Table 4-53. Scheduling the Range of Recurrence

Parameter Description

Start Specifies the date when the job starts running, according to the recurrence
pattern. A combo-box is available where you can select the date, and a text
box is available where you can enter the time.

Select one of the following:

No end date The job runs periodically forever

End after A text box is available where you can enter the number of recurrences
Default: 10

End by (default) A combo-box is available where you can select the date until when the job
runs
Default: one year later

<Recurence Options>

If a recurring job session is executing, and the next job session is about to
start, the default behavior is to skip the next session.
To stop the current session instead, select Stop current session in the
Recurrence Options dialog box.

Editing Jobs
You can edit jobs that are not running.

 To edit a job:

• Select the job, then click Edit Job on the toolbar or right-click and select
Edit Job .

The job wizard opens at step . You can edit the job attributes as
desired, except for the job action, which cannot be changed.

Copying Jobs
You can create a new job with the same parameters as an existing job, except the
copied job has a new job ID.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-129

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

 To copy a job:

• Select the job, then click Copy Job on the toolbar or right-click and select
Copy Job .

The job wizard opens at step . For additional information, refer to

Selecting NEs.

Viewing and Configuring Job Properties and Security

You can display general job properties and configure job security.

 To display general job properties:

• Select the job, then click Properties on the toolbar or right-click and
select Properties .
The Properties dialog box appears, displaying the General tab parameters,
which reflects the task you select and the schedule as explained under
Setting Job Parameters.

Figure 4-85. Job Properties

4-130 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

 To configure the job security:

• In the Job Properties dialog box, click the Security tab.
The Security tab parameters appear. Configure them according to the
following table.

Table 4-54. Job Security Parameters

Parameter Description

Job Owner Each job has an owner, whose security profile is used for the job.
The default owner is the user that created the job. If you are viewing
properties for a job that you do not own, the job owner is displayed
as a dropdown list that contains the current owner of the job and
the current user. You can select your user name to become the job
owner if you have the relevant permission.
Refer to Job Security for more details.

Security Domain A dropdown list is provided for domain name. By default it is empty,
therefore all users can obtain this job. If you wish to control the
access to the job, you can add a domain name (the domain must be
defined in the user security profile with relevant permissions).
Refer to Job Security for more details.

Set as default If selected, all future new jobs have the security domain of the
current job. Clear this option to cancel setting the security domain
for new jobs.

Clear Click to delete the list of previously defined security domain names
from the dropdown list (this applies to all jobs). This is useful if the
autocompletion feature prevents you from entering the desired
domain name.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-131

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-86. Job Security

Running a Job
This operation is enabled only for a job with status Active, that is not currently
running.

 To run a job:

• Select the job, then click Run Job on the toolbar or right-click it and select
Run Job .
The job runs immediately. The progress bar in the Status column is
updated accordingly.

Viewing Progress of Running Jobs

When a job is running, you can view its progress by performing either of the
following:
• Double-click the job in the Jobs Table

• Select the job in the Jobs table, then click Show Progress on the toolbar,
Performing either of the above actions for a running job opens the job status
dialog box that shows the progress of the job for each NE associated with the

4-132 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

job. The information in the dialog box automatically updates as the job continues
to run.

Figure 4-87. Job Status Dialog Box

The dialog box contains a progress bar for the whole job. Next to the progress
bar is the percentage of completion (70% in Figure 4-87), and the information
for how many NEs the job has completed and total number of NEs the job has to
process (four NEs have completed out of 10 total NEs in Figure 4-87). If the job
completes while the dialog box is open, Completed is displayed next to the
progress bar.
Additionally, the dialog box contains a table showing the status of each NE, with
the following parameters:
• NE Name
• IP Address
• Progression – Processing or Completed
• Status – Indicates the current status of the job (see Table 4-55)
• Error – Indicates error if applicable (see Table 4-55).
The following table shows the possible error and status messages.

Table 4-55. Job Status/Error Messages

No. Status/Error Message Event/Cause

[1] Unknown NE Type Unknown sysObjectID

[2] NE does not exist NE does not exist in NER

[3] NE is disconnected Status of the NE is disconnected

RADview Configuring the Network 4-133

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

No. Status/Error Message Event/Cause

[4] Operation is not supported NE does not support TFTP/SFTP

[5] Connecting tftpStatus = connecting(3)

[6] Transferring data tftpStatus = transferringData(4)

[7] Timeout – TFTP Server does not respond tftpStatus = endedTimeOut(5)

[8] File successfully transferred tftpStatus = endedOK(6)

[9] Swap successfully performed Got response OK for Swap operation

[10] File is not transferred – no change since last Configuration or Software file has not been
transfer modified since last backup (upload)

[11] Rebooting... After SET systemReset = on(3)

[12] Device successfully upgraded Got coldStartTrap

or:
Device Rebooted (in case action was Reboot)

[13] Server overflow tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x0001

[14] No available UDP port tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x0002

[15] No available resources tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x0003

[16] Illegal file mode tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x0004

[17] Illegal PDU size tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x0007

[18] TFTP/SFTP server does not exist tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x0008

[19] Incorrect File tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x0009

This is sent by the device in all cases where the
file downloaded is incorrect, e.g. for SW
download a file that belongs to another device
was received.

[20] Wrong license format tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x000A

[21] License ID already used. tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x000B

[22] Erroneous parameters tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x000C

[23] TCP and/or SSH connection tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x000D

[24] File access error tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x000E

[25] Other Error tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x000F

[26] File not found tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x0100

[27] Access violation tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x0200

[28] Disk full or allocation exceeded tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x0300

[29] Illegal TFTP/SFTP operation tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x0400

[30] Unknown transfer ID tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x0500

[31] File already exists tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x0600

4-134 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

No. Status/Error Message Event/Cause

[32] No such user tftpStatus = error(7), tftpError = 0x0700

[33] Timeout SNMP Timeout

[34] NE is not responding after reboot timer NE is not responding after reboot time
expiration expiration

[35] NE does not support SSH SSH is not supported by the NE

[36] Sanity check after upload failed For FCD-155 and FCD-155E:
sanityCheckTrap received with attached
sysSSanityCheckStatus = fail(2)
For MP-2100/2104:
sanityTrap received with attached
agnSSanityCheckStatus = fail(2)

[37] NE is busy with another TFTP/SFTP session Upon initiating a TFTP/SFTP Operation,
tftpStatus=3 or 4

[38] SNMP request failed SNMP Request Response was received and is
NOT OK (reject, Bad Value, No Such etc) This will
happen usually due to Agent Bug

[39] Reserved

[40] Unknown error Unknown error

[41] No file received or empty file received Timeout. In case of Download, where status =
ok, but no file received, or file is empty

[42] TFTP/SFTP operation failed tftpStatusChangeTrap is not received and

tftpStatus = connecting or transferring

[43] Unknown TFTP/SFTP status tftpStatus returns an unknown value

[44] Unknown TFTP/SFTP error code tftpError returns an unknown value

[45] Reserved

[46] TFTP/SFTP root does not exist TFTP/SFTP Root does not exist (applicable only
for UNIX)

[47] Startup configuration file is corrupted fileChangeStatus: startupConfigError = 1

[48] Cannot open SSH session SSH session could not be established
agnSshAccess = disable (2)

[49] Cannot open Telnet session Telnet session could not be established
agnTelnetAccess = disable (2)

[50] Startup configuration file does not exist fileChangeStatus: startupConfigError = 1 and no
entry for startup-config in fileSystemTable

[51] Startup configuration file is not supported by On Upload operation

the NE

[52] Running configuration file is not supported by On Upload operation

the NE

RADview Configuring the Network 4-135

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

No. Status/Error Message Event/Cause

[53] Startup configuration file was not found in On Upload operation

Archive for the NE

[54] Running configuration file was not found in On Upload operation

Archive for the NE

[55] Baseline configuration file was not found in On Upload operation

Archive for the NE

[56] No file with the specified date (or earlier) was On Upload operation
found for the NE

[57] No file with the specified Suffix and/or Prefix On Upload operation
was found for the NE

[58] File format is not supported On Upload operation

[59] Software file was not found in Archive for the On Upload operation
NE

[60] User file was not found in Archive for NE On Upload operation

Stopping Jobs
You can stop a job that is running, if it does not contain tasks that have started
processing. Tasks that have started processing cannot be aborted, but pending
tasks can be aborted.

 To stop a job:
1. Select the job, then click Stop Job on the toolbar or right-click and select
Stop Job .
You are prompted for confirmation.
2. Click <OK>.
The job is stopped.

Cancelling Jobs
If a job is active and you want to prevent it from executing according to its
schedule, you can cancel it.

 To cancel a job:

1. Select the job, then click Cancel Job on the toolbar or right-click and
select Cancel Job .
You are prompted for confirmation.
2. Click <OK>.
The job is moved from the Active tab to the History tab.

Deleting Jobs
You can completely remove a job that is not running, along with all its reports.

4-136 Configuring the Network RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

 To delete a job:

1. Select the job, then click Delete Job on the toolbar or right-click the
desired job and select Delete Job .
You are prompted for confirmation.
2. Click <OK>.
The job and its reports are deleted.

Working with Job Reports

Reports are generated and saved for each job that has ended (completed or
stopped). For scheduled jobs, a report is generated each time the job is run. You
can see job reports and view job report details via the Reports pane.
In the job report, only the final job state is displayed. Intermediate states are not
saved. However, you can specify saving a log file for each NE operation (see
Setting Advanced Job Parameters).
By default, the Reports pane contains a tab named “Latest <X>” that displays the
last X job reports. The default value of X is 10. You can change the value 10 via
the Show Latest editable field on the Reports tool bar.
You can display the reports for a job by doing any of the following:
• Double-click the job in the Jobs Table when it is not running

• Select the job in the Jobs Table and click View Reports on the toolbar
button

• Select the job in the Jobs Table, then right-click and select View Reports .
The above actions open a tab in the Reports pane displaying a list of reports for
the job. The tab is named according to the job ID: “Job <ID>”.
By default the table rows are displayed sorted by time, from newer to older. You
can click column headings to sort by the columns.

Table 4-56. Report Table

Parameter Description
Status Indicates the job status:
Interrupted – Job ended unexpectedly, e.g. EMS server failed
Skipped – Job was skipped because a recurrent job session is running
at the time that the job should have started or it applies to a group that
currently has no members
Fail –Job was not successful for at least one of the NEs. Check the
report details to see if the job succeeded for any of the NEs.
Warning – Job ended successfully, but there was some other error,
e.g. CLI script was successfully sent to agent, but the script contained
errors
Stopped – Job was stopped
OK – Job ended successfully

RADview Configuring the Network 4-137

 Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Parameter Description
Job ID Job ID
Note: Appears only in Latest tab.
Job Name Job name
Note: Appears only in Latest tab.
Executed at Starting date and time, in the format: YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS
Number of Entities Total number of NEs for which job was executed
Succeeded Entities Number of NEs for which operation succeeded
Note: Not visible by default.
Failed Entities Number of NEs for which operation failed
Duration Total time of job execution, in the format: HH:MM:SS
Report ID A number that is used to uniquely identify the report, set by the
Note: Not visible by default. management system at report creation

Report Operations
You can perform report operations via the toolbar, or via right-click menu in any
of the tabs.

Table 4-57. Report Toolbar Operations

Icon Action Description

Open Report Displays report details (refer to Viewing Report Details)

Note: You can also double-click a row to view the report details.

Save Report Saves the report to a file in the local file system. You can select
which parts of the report to save, and select the type of file
(Comma Separated Values, HTML, or PDF)

Delete Report Deletes the report

Properties Displays a dialog box showing the contents of the report columns

[Not Show Latest Determines the number of displayed report summaries in the
applicable] Note: Appears only Latest tab. To change the value, enter the desired value and then
click <Enter>.
in Latest tab.

4-138 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-88. Report Right-click Menu

Viewing Report Details

 To view job report details:

• Select a report and then do one of the following to view the details:
 Double-click the report.

 Click Open Report on the Reports toolbar

 Right-click and select Open Report .

The report details are displayed, containing a row for each NE, with the
following parameters, for jobs other than Generate Statistics Report or
Generate Data Report.
 Status – (OK / Fail / Warning / Stopped / Interrupted)
 NE Name
 NE Type
 IP Address
 Started at <HH:MM:SS> on <YYYY-MM-DD>
 Ended at <HH:MM:SS> on <YYYY-MM-DD>
 Error – Indicates error if applicable (see Table 4-55)
 Log Details – Log details for the jobs are created according to the
selection in the advanced job parameters dialog box (see Setting
Advanced Job Parameters).If there are additional log details, click
<More details> to display them. You can remove log details by
selecting the row(s), then clicking <Remove Log>.
For the job actions Generate Statistics Report or Generate Data Report,
the report details contain a row for each report generated, with the
following parameters:
 Status – (OK / Fail / Warning / Stopped / Interrupted)
 Name – Name of report

RADview Configuring the Network 4-139

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

 File type – csv for job action Generate Data Report, or pdf for job
action Generate Statistics Report
 Error – Indicates error if applicable: Empty if no error occurred,
otherwise indicates failed to generate csv/pdf file
 Result – Provides link to the report file if no error occurred, otherwise
provides link to log file if logging of all actions or logging of errors
was selected in the job parameters.

Note You can save (as CSV (Comma separated values)) or print the job report by
clicking <Save Report> or <Print Report>, respectively.

Figure 4-89. Report Details

Figure 4-90. Report Log Details

4-140 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-91. Report Details – Generate Data Report

Creating a Job from Report Details

You can create a new job from the NEs that appear in the report details.

 To create a new job:

1. In the detailed report click <New Job>.
You are prompted to confirm the new job creation. You can choose
whether to create the job from the failed NEs, the successful NEs, or
both failed and successful.

Figure 4-92. New Job Confirmation

2. Select the desired options, and click <Create>.

The job wizard opens at the Select Action step (see Selecting), with NEs
preselected for which status Failed/OK occurred, according to your option
selection.

Job Security
Security profiles contain permission tags that control permission for particular
functions, specifying access as read, write, or not available. A security profile can
also contain permissions for access to particular NEs. Domains with subsets of
permissions can be created in security profiles. For detailed information on

RADview Configuring the Network 4-141

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

security profiles and an example of creating job security profiles, refer to

Chapter 6.
The user security profile controls the actions permitted when working with jobs.
The security profile of the job owner is used as the security profile of the job. By
default the job owner is the job creator, however other users can take ownership
(if they have the authorization to do so).

Job Actions
Upon job creation the user security profile is checked as follows:
• Job action – Check if user has permission to perform the particular job action
(download, upload, etc.)
• NE access – Check if user has permission to perform this job action for each
NE.
If job action authorization fails, the job is not created. If NE authorization failed,
the job is created but when it runs, the actions are not performed for the failed
NEs.

Job Security Domain

By default all job contexts are at the system level. Therefore a user can obtain all
jobs in the system, whether they were created by the user or created by other
users. In order to prevent some users from obtaining some jobs, the security
domain job attribute can be used, to set the job context for specific users only.
Each job has a security domain that is empty by default. A domain name can be
added to control access to the job. The security domain must be defined in the
user security profile. If a security domain is defined for the job, the domain
permissions are used to control access.
The following are verified when creating a job, after <Finish> is clicked in the job
wizard:
• You can create a job with empty security domain if your user security profile
job_create tag has write permission
• You can create a job with any security domain if the domain job_create tag
has write permission. This includes:
 Security domain defined in your user security profile with job_create tag
that has write permission
 Security domain not defined in your user security profile, but your user
security profile job_create tag has write permission.
• In the above cases, if job_accessible tag does not have read or write
permission a warning message is displayed:
Using current security domain may cause this job to be
inaccessible. Continue?
• You cannot create a job with a security domain that is not defined in the user
security profile if the user security profile job_create tag has read permission.
A message is displayed:
Access Denied. Check security domain.

4-142 Configuring the Network RADview

 User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

The following apply when editing a job in the Job Properties dialog box and job
wizard:
• You can edit a job that has a security domain if the domain job_modify tag
has write permission
• You can edit a job that has no security domain if your user security profile
job_modify tag has write permission.
• You can change the job security domain according to the relevant
permissions, as shown in table Table 4-58.
• In the above cases if job_accessible tag does not have read or write
permission, a warning message is displayed:
Using current security domain may cause this job to be
inaccessible. Continue?
• If the new security domain is not defined in the user security profile and
job_modify tag has read permission, a message is displayed:
Access Denied. Check security domain.

Table 4-58. Permissions for Job Domain Change

Current Security Domain First Permission Checked New Security Domain Second Permission Checked

None OK only if user security profile None or not defined OK only if user security profile
job_modify tag has write job_modify tag has write
permission. permission.

Defined Ok only if new security domain

job_modify tag has write
permission.

Defined OK only if current job_modify None or Not Defined OK only if user security profile
tag has write permission. job_modify tag has write
permission.

Defined Ok only if new security domain

job_modify tag has write
permission.

Not Defined OK only if user security profile None or Not Defined OK only if user security profile
job_modify tag has write job_modify tag has write
permission. permission.

Defined OKonly if new security domain

job_modify tag has write
permission.

Note
If a job security domain is set to a domain _with job_accessible tag that has no
permission, the user has no more access to the job. Only the administrator or the
user with the new domain can change back the security domain of the job.

Refer to Chapter 6 for detailed examples of working with job security profiles.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-143

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Job NEs
Some NEs may be invisible to the user who created the job, according to the
relevant permissions. If a job includes NEs that are invisible to the creator, all NEs
are still displayed in the job wizard and in the job reports. Therefore you should
avoid this situation, and create only jobs that contain NEs visible to the user.
• New Job - User can’t use these NEs or groups, therefore can’t create a new
job with them
• Edit Job - Job that contains invisible NEs (for this user) can be edited by the
user. The NEs are visible to the user but can’t be removed from the job. In
the wizard step selecting NEs, the NEs are displayed on the selected list as
disabled and are not selectable. In the wizard step action validation, the
validation messages are displayed.
The following figure shows an example where the user profile does not allow
access to the subtree /ETX-203A.

Figure 4-93. User Profile

In the Job Wizard step where NEs are selected, the sublevel is not visible.

4-144 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-94. Job Wizard – Sublevel Not Visible

Job Groups
If a job is created with a public or shared groups, all users can see this group, and
hence edit this job.
If a job is created with a private group, only the user who created the private
group can see it. If other users, including the administrator, attempt to edit the
job, the message Access Denied is displayed. If a job is created with a private
group, only the Now option is visible in the job wizard schedule step.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-145

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Job Execution
When a job executes, the following is checked, according to the user security
profile of the job owner:
• Job action – Check if job has permission to perform the particular job action
• NE authorization – Check if job has permission to perform this job action for
each NE (e.g.: U ser security profile may have only permission to download
from NE 1, and only permission to upload from NE 2.

Working with the Configuration Archive

You can view the configuration status and archived configurations in the
Configuration work space. This enables you to track device configurations. Files
uploaded/downloaded to/from devices via the Jobs utility are saved and can be
uploaded to the devices when necessary. The configuration files can be tracked
by date and time.

Notes • ‘Download’ refers to file transfers from network elements to the NMS
• ‘Upload’ refers to file transfers from the NMS to network elements.

 To navigate to the Configuration work space:

• In the work space selection area, click Configuration .

The Configuration work space appears.
The Configuration work space is divided into panes that contain the following
components:
• Network Element Repository in the top left pane – Shows a tree of levels
(submaps) and nodes (network elements) in the EMS network
• Groups in the bottom left pane – Provides a tree of user-defined groups of
network elements (refer to Chapter 3 for more information)
• Configuration Status in the top right pane – Shows device configuration
information, for NEs selected from the Network Element Repository or the
Groups tree
• Archive Files in the bottom right pane – Displays information on archived
configuration files.

4-146 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-95. Network Element Manager – Configuration Work space

Working with Configuration Status

The Configuration Status table shows configuration information for NEs, selected
from the Network Element Repository or Groups tree (see Table 4-59 for a
description of the configuration information).
You can view configuration information for selected NEs in the following ways:
• In the Network Element Repository double-click the desired level or NE
• In the Network Element Repository right-click the desired level or NE, and
select View Configuration Status
• In the Groups tree double-click the desired group or NE
• In the Groups tree right-click the desired group or NE, and select
Configuration Status.
After any of the above actions, the Configuration Status table displays a row of
configuration information for each selected NE.
The Configuration Status table is a customizable table, meaning the following
main features:
• You can select which columns are visible. By default, all columns are visible.
• You can change the order of the table’s columns.
• You can sort the table according to the columns
• You can filter the table according to the columns.
Refer to Chapter 3 for more information on customizable tables.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-147

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Table 4-59. Configuration Status

Column Description

NE Name NE Name, as it appear in the tree/map

NE Type NE type, according to the MIB parameter sysObjectID

IP Address NE IP address

HW Ver Main HW version, according to the MIB parameter sysDescr

SW Ver Main SW version, according to the MIB parameter sysDescr

Last Startup Changed Date and time when the NE configuration was last changed. The time
displayed is the time normalized to RADview time (refer to Normalizing
Date and Time).

Last Config Backup Date and time when the NE configuration was last backed up. If the NE
device maintains several configuration files, this applies to the
startup-config file.

Last Boot Time Date and time when the device last rebooted. The time displayed is the
time normalized to RADview time (refer to Normalizing Date and Time).

Normalizing Date and Time

The displayed date and time are normalized to RADview time as described in the
following.

Normalizing File Last Update Date and Time

RADview performs the following:
1. RADview reads the MIB parameter fileSystemLastUpdateTime.
2. If the value is not all zeros, then RADview displays it. (The value in
fileSystemLastUpdateTime is expected to be UTC format. The agent must set
the value correctly or set it to all zeros if UTC is not known to the agent.)
Else – If the value is all zeros, RADview uses the Boot and Time signature MIB
variables, fileSystemLastUpdateBootSignature, and
fileSystemLastUpdateTimeSignature as follows:
 If the value read from MIB parameter fileSystemLastUpdateBootSignature
is not equal to snmpEngineBoots, the date and time is displayed as ‘--‘.
Else RADview subtracts the value read from MIB parameter
fileSystemLastUpdateTimeSignature from the value read from MIB
parameter snmpEngineTime. Then RADview subtracts the result of the
preceding calculation from the NMS time recorded when snmpEngineTime
was read, and displays the final result.

Normalizing NE Last Boot Date and Time

RADview reads the MIB parameter snmpEngineTime, and subtracts the NMS time
recorded when snmpEngineTime was read, then the result is displayed.

Note The above apply to NEs that support fileSytemTable. For NEs that do not support
it, RADview displays ‘--‘.

4-148 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Configuration Status Operations

You can perform Configuration Status operations via the toolbar, or via right-click
menu.

Table 4-60. Configuration Status Toolbar Operations

Icon Action Description Availability

Poll Poll the network element Any row(s) selected

SNMP Ping Test SNMP connectivity of a network Single row selected

element

Shelf View Connect to network element via Single row selected

shelf view

Web Browser Connect to network element via Single row selected

web browser

Telnet/SSH Connect to network element via Single row selected

Telnet, unsecure or secured (SSH)

Ping (selected Test connectivity of network Single row selected

from submenu) element by sending ping

Trace Route Trace route to network element Single row selected

(selected from
submenu)

View Files Opens a tab in Archive Files pane Single row selected
Note: You can also displaying archive file information, if
double-click the any is available
row.

Properties Displays properties of the NE Single row selected

RADview Configuring the Network 4-149

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-96. Configuration Status Right-click Menu

Working with Archive Files

The Archive Files pane displays an archive file list per NE selected in the
Configuration Status table. Each line in this list represents a file that was
uploaded to the NE or downloaded from the NE.

Note Files downloaded from the NE to the EMS server are stored in the file repository.
For information on the location and structure of the file repository, refer to
Table 4-31.

You can display archive file information for a particular NE, by doing any of the
following:
• Double-click the NE in the Configuration Status Table

• Select the NE in the Configuration Status Table and click on the toolbar
button
• Select the NE in the Configuration Status Table, then right-click and select
View Files.
The above actions cause a list of archive files for the selected NE to be displayed
in the Archive Files pane. The NE Name is displayed in the pane title.

Note If no files have been uploaded to or downloaded from the NE, the list does not
contain any entries.

The Archive Files table is a customizable table, meaning the following main
features:

4-150 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

• You can select which columns are visible. By default, the following columns
are visible:
 Status
 Executed at
 Number of NEs
 Scheduling
 Active
 Status.
• You can change the order of the table’s columns.
• You can sort the table according to the columns
• You can filter the table according to the columns.
Refer to Chapter 3 for more information on customizable tables.

Table 4-61. Archive Files

Column Description

Baseline This column is applicable only for configuration files. When a

file is marked as baseline, the icon is displayed in the
column. otherwise the column is empty. Only one baseline is
possible for each NE.

File Type Type of file:

• configuration – For NEs that do not support startup-config
and running-config
• startup-config – For NEs that support startup-config
• running-config – For NEs that support running-config
• software
• software (backup) – For SW file that was loaded from NE
backup storage
• user
• script.

Action Indicates if the file source is the NE:

• Upload – The displayed file was uploaded to the NE
• Download – The displayed file was downloaded from the
NE.

SW Version This field is relevant if File Type = software, and the file is the
main software file. If the file was loaded from backup, ( ) is
displayed before the SW version number to indicate that it was
user-defined, and can be edited via the Software File
Management dialog box (see Managing Software File Versions).
In all other cases ‘--‘ is displayed.

Date & Time Date and time when file was saved in archive, in format
YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS

RADview Configuring the Network 4-151

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Column Description

User Name User name of the user that owns the job that loaded the file
from/to the NE

Job ID ID of the job that uploaded/downloaded the file to/from the

NE

Size Size of file (in kB)

Archive File Operations

You can perform operations via the toolbar, or via right-click menu in any of the
tabs.

Table 4-62. Archive File Toolbar Operations

Icon Action Description Availability

View File Opens a text viewer. Applicable only for the following types of Single row selected
files:
• User text file
• Startup configuration
• Running configuration
• CLI script.

Save File Save file to file system Single row selected

Delete File Delete file from Archive Any row(s) selected

Properties Opens file properties dialog box Single row selected

Figure 4-97. Archive File Right-click Menu

Uploading Archived Files

You can upload files from the archive, by selecting a row in the Archive File pane,
then right-clicking and selecting Upload.

4-152 Configuring the Network RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

This opens the job wizard (refer to Figure 4-42) at the Select Action step. The
parameters in the steps are preselected as follows:
• NE Selection Method step (see Selecting NEs):
 Explicit option is selected.
• NE Selection step (see Table 4-47):
 NE from the Archive File table row is selected. You can add any other NEs
to the list.
• Select Action step (see Selecting Tasks):
 Only the following actions are available in the action list, and only if the
NE supports these actions:
 If SW file was selected – Upload SW and Upload SW to Backup.
 If configuration file was selected - Upload Configuration
 If user file was selected – Upload User File.
• Job Parameters step (see Setting Job Parameters):
 If SW file was selected, the Software Version field in the Job Parameters
dialog box displays only the version of the selected file.
 If configuration file or user file was selected, Load from Archive is
selected in the Job Parameters dialog box, and the file that was selected
to upload is selected on the list. If more NEs were added in the NE
Selection step, you cannot select the file requested to upload.

Marking as Baseline
This action is applicable only for configuration files. You can mark a configuration
file as baseline, by selecting the row in the Archive File pane, then right-clicking
and selecting Mark as Baseline.

Note Marking as baseline is not available in the Latest tab.

When the file is marked as baseline, the icon is displayed in the Baseline
column.
If a file is already marked as baseline, you can unmark it by selecting the row,
then right-clicking and selecting Unmark as Baseline.

Note If there are multiple occurrences of the same file, the file is marked as baseline in
only one of its occurrences. The file is identified according to its index (per NE) in
the file system by RADview.

RADview Configuring the Network 4-153

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

4.3 Performing Additional Tasks

You can perform the following additional tasks:
• Adding External Tools
• Managing Software File Versions
• Viewing the RADview Package Contents

Adding External Tools

You can customize the level and network element menus to add external tools
that can be executed for network elements. By default, ping and trace route are
defined as external tools.
The external tools are defined in the file ntools.xml (located in C:\rv32\ems\conf
). Figure 4-98 shows an example of ntools.xml, with definitions for ping and trace
route.
In ntools.xml, each external tool is defined within a section identified by a section
tag. For example, the section tag for the ping tool is ping. The section for the
ping tool starts with a line containing <ping> and ends with a line containing
</ping>. Section tags must be unique.

Figure 4-98. Ntools File

The section for an external tool contains lines defining the following attributes:

Note A line for an attribute starts with <attribute> and ends with </attribute>.

• name – Specifies the name used for the external tool in the menus and
External Tools tab in the dialog boxes
• cmd – Specifies the beginning part of the external tool command line,
identifying application or shell command to execute

4-154 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

• param – Specifies the parameters required by the particular application or

shell command. You can use the following dynamic parameter placeholders,
which are then replaced by actual values, retrieved from the NER object:
 ${netAddress} – Replaced by NER object network address
 ${name} – Replaced by NER object full path name (not relevant for
third-party applications or shell commands)
 ${shortName} – Replaced by NER object name (not relevant for third
party applications or shell commands).

Notes • If the tool has no parameters, you can leave out the <param> line or define it
as empty: <param></param>
• The <param> attribute can be customized for a particular network element in
Command Parameters: in the External Tools tab of the Node Properties dialog
box (see Configuring Existing Network Elements). If this is done, the <param>
attribute is stored in the EMS database associated with the object for which
customization was done, and is used for command line generation for the
object rather than the original value defined in ntools.xml.

• icon – Specifies the icon to use for the external tool menu entry. The icon
should be in PNG/GIF/JPG format, 16x16 pixels with a transparent background.
It should be placed in c:\rv32\ems\images\ntm\tools.

Note The icon attribute is optional. If you do not specify it, a default tools icon is
used.

• securityTag – Specifies the external tool security tag label string (optional),
which can be configured later in security profile(s) to meet specific security
policies.

 To add an external tool:

1. Open ntools.xml.
2. Add a section for the external tool, as explained above.
3. Close and save ntools.xml.
The change takes effect the next time the RADview Network Manager is
opened. If the RADview Network Manager is already open, close and re-
open it.
The new external tool appears in the Menu Options dropdown list in the
External Tools tab in the following dialog boxes:
 New Level
 New NE
 New NEs
 Level Properties
 Node Properties.
For examples, refer to Adding New Levels and Adding Network Elements
in Chapter 3.

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-155

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

The new external tool appears in the External Tools submenu that is
displayed when you right-click a network in the navigation tree and select
External Tools.

Managing Software File Versions

RADview maintains a list of corresponding software file versions and NE types.
Entries can be added to the list in the following ways:
• Via Import SW Version dialog box:
 Opened from Software File Management dialog box
 Opened from job wizard, when the action selected is Upload Software or
Upload Software to Backup (refer to Upload Software and Upload
Software to Backup respectively)

Opening Software File Management

 To open the Software File Management dialog box:

• Select File > SW File from the Network Manager main toolbar.

Figure 4-99. Software File Management Dialog Box

The Software File Management is a customizable table, meaning the following

main features:
• You can select which columns are visible. By default, all columns are visible
except File ID.
• You can change the order of the table’s columns.
• You can sort the table according to the columns

4-156 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

• You can filter the table according to the columns.

Refer to Chapter 3 for more information on customizable tables.

Table 4-63. Software File Management

Column Description

File ID Unique ID of the SW file. This column is not displayed by

default. It can be added via View > Customize Columns.

NE Type Type of NE

SW Version Software file version number

If the file was loaded from backup, is displayed before the
SW file version number

Date Set according to the following:

• SW file was transferred from NE – Date and time when job
was executed
• SW file version was inserted via the Import SW Version dialog
box – Date and time when the file was saved by RADview.

Size Size of software file (in kB)

Status Obsolete or Valid

Source Set according to the following:

• SW file was transferred from NE – Job ID of the job
performed the transfer
• SW file version was inserted via the Import SW Version dialog
box – User name of the user that inserted the file

Software File Operations

The following operations can be performed via menu/toolbar/right-click menu:

Menu Icon Right-click Description Availability

Menu

File-> Import Import Opens a dialog box to introduce a new SW file (see Always
Adding Software Files)

File> Export Export Opens a standard dialog box to save a selected SW Single row
file to client’s file system selected

File > Export Export Table Opens a dialog box to export the table to a format Always
Table such as CSV (Comma Separated Values), PDF, or
HTML

File > Print Print Table Opens a standard dialog box to print table Always
Table

File > Properties Opens a dialog box to display file properties (also Single row
Properties via double-click) selected

File > Close Closes the Software File Management dialog box Always

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-157

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Menu Icon Right-click Description Availability

Menu

Edit > Delete Delete Deletes SW file version Any row(s)

selected

Edit > Mark as Mark as Marks the selected file(s) as obsolete. If a file is Any row(s)
Obsolete Obsolete marked as Obsolete, it is not displayed in the Job selected
Parameters dialog box (see Setting Job Parameters).

Edit > Mark as Mark as Valid Marks the selected file(s) as valid Any row(s)
Valid selected

Adding Software Files

You can add software files to the list by importing them from your hard drive.

Note Verify that the file being imported is a valid software file for the particular device
before you import it.

 To add a software file version:

1. Do one of the following:

 Click on the toolbar.

 From the main toolbar select File > Import.
 Right-click in the Software File Management dialog box and select Import.

The Import SW Version dialog box appears. You can click the next to
SW Version to display an explanation of the SW version format.

Figure 4-100. Import SW Version Dialog Box

4-158 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-101. SW Version Format

Note The following figure shows the previous SW Version format, which is still
supported.

Figure 4-102. Previous SW Version Format

2. Fill in the fields (refer to Table 4-64).

3. Click <OK> to import the version.
A new row appears in the Software File Management dialog box
containing the new software version information, with the Source column
set to the user name who performed the import.

Table 4-64. Import SW Version Parameters

Parameter Description

File Software image file. You can enter the full path (including file name) or
click <Browse> to select the file from the local file system

NE Type You select the NE type, from the alphabetically ordered list of NE types
that are installed in RADview. You can type the initial letter(s) for
convenient navigation.

SW Version
SW version. Click to display a description of the SW version format

Comments Description of image file (up to 255 characters)

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-159

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Viewing and Configuring Software File Properties

You can view the software file properties, and edit the status and comments.

 To open the software file properties dialog box:

1. Select the software file entry, then click on the toolbar or from the main
toolbar select Properties.
The Properties dialog box appears. Refer to Table 4-63 for a description
of the parameters.
2. If desired, edit the following parameters:
 Status
 Comments
 SW Version (editable only if SW file was downloaded from backup).
3. Click <OK> to save your changes.

Figure 4-103. Software File Properties

Deleting Software Files

You can delete software files from the list, optionally deleting its references in
the configuration archive.

 To delete a software file entry:

1. Select the software file entry, then click on the toolbar or from the main
toolbar select Delete.
You are prompted for confirmation.

4-160 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-104. Delete SW File Dialog Box

2. You can select the option Also delete all references in the Archive, if you
want to delete references to the software file from the configuration archive.

Note If you select the option to delete references in the archive, the archive file is not
deleted; only the reference to the SW file is deleted.

3. Click <OK> to delete the software file.

The software file entry is removed, along with the archive references
according to whether you selected that option.
The following figure illustrates how the Archive Files entry for
SW version 1.26 is displayed in light gray italic font after SW version 1.26
was deleted, with the option to delete archive references selected.

Figure 4-105. Archive Files– SW File Reference Deleted

Viewing the RADview Package Contents

The version browser allows you to view a tree that contains the contents of the
RADview package(s) installed on the current computer. This includes the details
of both the system and agent components.

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-161

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

 To view the contents of the currently installed RADview package(s):

1. From the RADview Network Manager menu bar select Tools >
Version Browser.
The Version Browser window appears and displays the RADview contents
tree.

Figure 4-106. Version Browser

2. To view the RADview package contents, expand RADview EMS and EMS
Products.

Note If a patch is installed, a separate patch indication appears in the list.

Figure 4-107. Version Browser – Expanded

4-162 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

3. To view jar files and their versions associated with a specific product, expand
the relevant product tree as illustrated below.

Figure 4-108. Version Browser – Product Tree Expanded to Display Jar Files

Notes • If the product name cannot be ‘expanded’, the associated device does not
have a RADview shelf view and therefore no jar files to display.
• If a product is indicated as Legacy, it has a legacy non-RADview shelf view. For
some of these legacy devices, the shelf view is supported only if the EMS
client station has direct SNMP connection to the device. For a complete list
refer to the RADview release note.
• If a product is indicated as RvLite, it can be accessed via Web and Telnet. The
web-based application is supported on Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008
only if you install Mozilla Firefox as your default web browser.

 To filter the table data according to a particular text string:

• Enter the search string in the textbox.

The display is filtered to contain only the entries with the search string.
You may need to expand the entries to view all the data.

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-163

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-109. Version Browser – Filtered by Search, Expanded

• To return to the unfiltered display, clear the textbox.

 To save the table data:

1. Click Export Table .

The Save To File dialog box appears.

Figure 4-110. Save to File

4-164 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

2. Choose the desired options for saving and then click <OK>.
3. Browse to the location in which to save the file and then click <Save>.
The table data is saved in the format Comma Separated Values (CSV),
which can be viewed in Microsoft Excel or any other compatible viewer.

 To print the displayed table:

1. Click Print Table .

Figure 4-111. Print

2. Choose the desired options for printing and then click <OK>.
3. Select the desired printer and then click <OK>.
The table data is sent to the selected printer.

Note When saving or printing:

• If the table is filtered by search, only the filtered data is saved/printed
• Entries are saved/printed only if the corresponding group has been expanded
to show them, if applicable.

System Backup and Restore

RADview system components are backed up and restored by the Backup/Restore
tool. This includes:
• Database backup – Backs up the RADview database and EMS security profiles
• RV backup – Backs up the RADview configuration files

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-165

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

• EMS backup – Backs up the RADview (EMS) system files and PM (RADview-
Performance Manager) image files.
• License backup – Backs up the existing RADview license files.

Note There is no backup and restore support for Jobs and Configuration files. If you
would like to back up these types of files, refer to Defining Backup/Restore for
Additional Files.

You can perform both the backup and restore operations from the same
computer or from different computers.

Backup and Restore Requirements

• Both the source and destination require the same RADview installations
(packages and products) and the same Oracle installations (home directory).

Note Do not use the Backup and Restore tool with a RADview (EMS) station and a
non-RADview station.

• The source and destination stations require the same structure of the
RADview system with respect to clients and servers.
• The same version of the Backup/Restore tools should be used in the process
(the Restore script verifies this requirement)
• When backing up/restoring the database, the same database version should
be installed on the source and destination stations
• The same version, the same installation, and the same installation directory
should be used if Backup/Restore includes data from third-party products
used by RADview (e.g. Oracle).

Backup and Restore Across Operating Systems

For upgrades and migration, it is possible to back up RADview configurations
created on older operating systems and restore them to RADview installations on
computers with updated operating systems. For additional information and a list
of supported backup & restore combinations, refer to Upgrade in Chapter 2.

Note RADview configurations with Master/Slave server configurations cannot be backed

up and restored across operating systems and to updated RADview versions.

4-166 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Configuring Backup and Restore Files

Before backing up or restoring files, the parameters in the backup configuration
files must be configured. The backup and restore files to be configured are
located in the <RVPATH>\BackupRestore directory (<RVPATH> stands for the
directory in which the RADview package is installed, e.g. C:\RV32). The files are:
• mng164_backup.xml – This file includes:
 Information about backup/restore version
 Configuration parameters for the backup and restore process
 Parts of the RADview system to be backed up/restored
 Backup destination directory in which to create the backup files
 Restore source directory from which to take the backup files.
• mng164_backup_extra.ini – This file lists additional files to be backed up in
addition to default files.
The following sections explain how to configure parameters in the
mng164_backup.xml file.

Defining the Database Type

The type of database to be backed up/restored is pre-defined automatically,
although you should verify that it is set correctly according to the following table:

Parameter Value

<dbtype_oracle> true
<dbtype_informix> false

Defining Full or Partial Backup/Restore

The backup/restore operation is performed separately for the database, RV, EMS,
license, map and PM. Accordingly, you can choose to backup/restore selected
system components, or perform a full backup/restore operation.

Note Full backup is highly recommended to ensure system integrity.

 To define a full backup/restore:

1. Open the mng164_backup.xml file.
2. Set the <full_backup>/<full_restore> value to true.

 To define a partial backup/restore:

1. Open the mng164_backup.xml file.
2. Set the <full_backup>/<full_restore> value to false.
3. Set the values of the parts you want to backup/restore to true and the values
of the unwanted parts to false.

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-167

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Defining the Backup Location

By default, the directory containing the backed-up files is placed in
<RVPATH>\BackupRestore. You can change the location of the directory by
changing the <backup_destination> value in the mng164_backup.xml file.

Defining the Backup Mode

There are two modes for backup:
• Simple backup
• DateTime backup – based on date and time.
In Simple mode, during the backup process a new directory named WORKING is
created in the <RVPATH>\BackupRestore folder). Once the backup is completed
successfully, WORKING is renamed to CURRENT, in accordance with the following
conditions:
• If CURRENT directory already exists, the old one is first renamed to PREVIOUS.
• If any errors occurred during the backup process, the WORKING directory is
renamed to PARTIAL. If there already was a directory named PARTIAL, it is
removed.

 To define the backup mode as simple:

• Set the relevant values in the backup_mode section of mng164_backup.xml
as shown below.
<backup_mode>
<simple>true</simple>
<dateTime>false</dateTime>
</backup_mode>
In DateTime mode, each backup creates a new directory in the
<RVPATH>\BackupRestore folder with a unique name according to the current
time and date, for example 20091026_1651, which stands for 26/10/2009 at
16:51. In this mode, the PARTIAL directory is not created if an error occurs.

 To define the backup mode as dateTime:

• Set the relevant values in the backup_mode section of mng164_backup.xml
as shown below.
<backup_mode>
<simple>false</simple>
<dateTime>true</dateTime>
</backup_mode>

Defining Backup/Restore for Additional Files

You can use the backup/restore tools to back up and restore additional files that
do not belong to the RADview application and are not backed up by default. The
additional backed-up files are compressed into the mng164_backup_extra.zip file.

4-168 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

 To enable backup/restore of additional files:

1. Set the value of the <extra_restore> parameter to true.
2. Configure the mng164_backup_extra.ini file, as explained in the following
paragraphs.
To add additional files/directories to be backed up/restored, you must define
them in the mng164_backup_extra.ini file, located in the
<RVPATH>\BackupRestore directory. To back up Jobs and Configuration files, add
the job file repository home directory to the list of additional files in
mng164_backup_extra. You can find the location of the file repository home
directory in the EMS Jobs Management parameters in the System Console. Refer
to Setting Job Management Service Parameters for more information on the job
management service parameters.
The mng164_backup_extra.ini file has a Windows Configuration Settings
structure. Each section defines a source directory for backup. Entries are file
patterns (or exact names) to be backed up. The Recursive flag specifies whether
all files matching the pattern in all subdirectories are to be backed up (true), or
only files under the main directory.
See the following examples:
Example #1:
[C:\Documents and Settings]
Recursive=true
TFTP=*.prop
Results in backup of all files with name pattern “*.prop” from the
C:\Documents and Settings directory and all its subdirectories.
Example #2:
[C:\WINDOWS]
Recursive=false
TFTP=*164*.*
Results in backup of all files with the name pattern “*164*.*” from the
C:\WINDOWS directory only.
Example #3:
[C:\RV32\ems\udcm\fe_repository]
Recursive=true
TFTP=*.*
Results in backup of all files with the name pattern “*.*” from the
C:\RV32\ems\udcm\fe_repository directory and all its subdirectories.

Note You can back up files from hard drives other than the RADview installation drive,
but they are restored to the RADview installation drive; they are not restored to
the hard drive from which they were backed up.

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-169

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Backing up System Components

You can run the backup via the Windows Start menu, or you can set up scheduled
backups via Windows Scheduled Tasks.

Note If you schedule backups to be performed regularly, you have to closely monitor
the available space on your hard disk You may need to periodically delete older
backups.

After any backup operation finishes, these files are located in the relevant
directory according to the backup mode:
• Compressed file mng164_backup.zip containing backed-up data
• Compressed file mng164_backup_extra.zip containing additional backed-up
data if mng164_backup_extra.ini specified additional data to back up
• Backup log file (mng164_backup.log).
Read mng164_backup.log carefully to verify that there were no warnings/errors
during the backup process.
If the backup was successful, the WORKING directory is renamed to CURRENT.

Note The backup can be performed when RADview is online.

Restoring System Components

Note Before running the restore tool, read the backup log file from the backup that
you intend to use for the restore, to verify that all the parts you want to restore
were backed up successfully. Otherwise, the tool exits with an error message.

The indicators appear for restore purposes. The last two rows are displayed once
the backup completed successfully.
informix_backup = false
oracle_backup = true
map_backup = false
security_backup = true
ems_backup = true
license_backup = true
BACKUP_REQUIRED_SPACE = 85104 Kbytes
2014/03/05 12:32:09 Archive file is created: mng164_backup.tar
Backup file is compressed
Backup completed 2014/03/05 12:32:10
WORKING directory renamed to CURRENT

 To run the restore:

1. If you are restoring a backup from another computer, you need to copy the
backup file(s) mng164_backup.zip (and mng164_backup_extra.zip if
applicable) to the computer where you intend to perform the restore. You
may need to create the directory that should contain the files. For example,
create the directory CURRENT in <RVPATH>\BackupRestore.
2. Verify that the restore_source parameter in mng164_backup.xml is set to the
full path of this directory.

4-170 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

3. Close the RADview Network Manager (File > Exit).

4. Stop the RADview server if it is currently running: From Start > Control Panel
> Administrative Tools > Services, select RADview EMS Server and stop the
service.
5. Stop any existing Service-Center server if it is running on the station.
6. From the Start menu, select All Programs > Network Manager > General >
Backup & Restore> Restore.
The following confirmation message appears:
Do you want to start a restore process y/n?
7. Type y to continue.
An additional confirmation message appears:
Restore will overwrite your current data. Do you
want to continue y/n ?
8. Type y to continue.

Caution • If the restore process failed due to active RADview processes, you have to
close them and repeat the restore procedure. If you cannot close them, open
the Task Manager and end all mng164 processes manually.
• The restore process may take a few minutes. Let the process run until it
completes. Stopping the restore process while it is running may cause
database corruption and other problems

9. After the restore operation is completed, the restore log file

(mng164_restore.log) is placed in the restore source directory. Read
mng164_restore.log carefully to check that all the selected parts were
successfully restored.
Note
License restore can be performed only on the same station where the backup
process was performed.

10. If RADview Server is installed on your station, you have to start it after the
restore process ends. You can do so by one of the following:
 Reboot the system,
- or -
 From Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services, select
RADview EMS Server and start the service.

Automatic Backup and Restore

Note Automatic Backup Restore is supported by Windows 2008 R2 Server and Windows
2012 R2 Server only.

You can use scripts located in the <RVPATH>\BackupRestore folder to implement

automated transfer of data between two Windows workstations. The scripts
allow you to schedule automated backups on the source station, transmit the
backed-up data via FTP to the destination station, and then perform scheduled
restore of the backed-up data on the destination station.

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-171

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Verify the following before proceeding with automatic backup/restore:

• Both workstations run Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows Server 2012 R2
• Both Windows workstations have the same version of RADview installed.
<RVPATH> refers to the folder where the RADview installation resides. By default,
it is C:\RV32.

Setup
Follow the procedure below at both the source and destination workstations, to
set up the autobackup/restore mechanism. If the FTP site does not exist yet on
the relevant station, you have to run a script provided by RAD to create it as
explained below.
• At the destination workstation, specify the following autobackup/restore
parameters in the file mng164_autobackup.xml in <RVPATH>\BackupRestore:
 Enter the IP address of the destination workstation for the XML tag
<ftp_destination_ip>.
 Enter the destination folder with the entire path on the destination
workstation for the XML tag <ftp_destination_path>.
 Set the XML tag <keep_ems_running_after_restore> to
true for the source station and to false for the destination station
The content of mng164_autobackup.xml is illustrated in Figure 112. The FTP site
is set up, and the Backup and Restore configured using the command prompt at
the respective workstation.

Note • In order to configure Backup and Restore, you must be logged on as a user
with full Administrator rights.
• Do not use <RVPATH>\BackupRestore as destination folder. This folder is
reserved for the Backup and Restore script files. The default folder to use as
destination folder is C:\users\RV32\BackupRestore.

4-172 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>

<configuration>
<auto_backup_restore_version>1.00</auto_backup_restore_version>
<!-- info of backup station, required for main station autobackup and
backup station config -->
<ftp_destination_ip>172.18.159.58</ftp_destination_ip>

<!-- info of backup station, required for autorestore and backup station
config -->
<ftp_destination_path>C:\users\rv32\BackupRestore</ftp_destination_path>

<!-- required for autorestore -->

<source_confirmation_needed>false</source_confirmation_needed>
<keep_ems_running_after_restore>true</keep_ems_running_after_restore>
<history>
<manage_backup_history>true</manage_backup_history>
<backup_history_num_of_days>7</backup_history_num_of_days>
</history>
</configuration>
Figure 112. Configuring mng164_autobackup.xml - Destination

 To access the command prompt as Administrator:

• At the respective workstation, run the command prompt as Administrator. To
do so, right-click Command Prompt in the Start menu and then select Run as
administrator as illustrated below.

Figure 113. Running the Command Prompt as Administrator

 To create the FTP site:

• At the command prompt, navigate to the RADview Backup/Restore folder
(<RVPATH>\BackupRestore), locate and run RvCreateFtpSiteRunner.bat.
The Windows work station gains full FTP connectivity.
An FTP site called rv164 is created to host the backup/restore files and
the user rv164 is added. The FTP site is fully accessible to the user rv164.

Note By default, <RVPATH> stands for C:\RV32, unless you selected a different drive
and/or folder name when installing RADview.

 To verify the correct settings:

1. On the relevant station, open the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager
(inetmgr). To do so, go to Start > Administrative Tools > Internet Information
Services (IlS) Manager.
The Start page of Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager appears
with the Start page.

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-173

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

2. In the Navigation pane, under Sites , locate and select rv164 as

illustrated in Figure 114.
The rv164 FTP site parameters appear.

Figure 114. Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager

3. Double-click FTP Authentication .

FTP Authentications appear.

Figure 115. FTP Authentication

4. Verify that Basic Authentication is enabled and Anonymous Authentication

disabled.
5. Click Back to return to the rv164 parameters.

4-174 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

6. Double-click FTP Authorization .

FTP authorization rules appear.

Figure 116. FTP Authorization

7. Verify that rv164 has read/write permissions.

8. Return to the rv164 parameters and double-click FTP SSL Settings .

FTP SSL settings appear.

Figure 117. FTP SSL Settings

9. Verify that SSL connections are allowed, but not required.

If all these parameters are in place and set, you can test the backup/restore
mechanism and then continue to schedule the autobackup/autorestore.

 To manually run the backup for testing:

Note By default, <RVPATH> stands for C:\RV32, unless you selected a different drive
and/or folder name when installing RADview.

1. At the source station, run the command prompt as Administrator

(Figure 113).
2. Run the backup manually by typing:
<RVPATH>\BackupRestore\RvAutoBackupRunner.bat >
<ftp_destination_path>\autobackup.log

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-175

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

3. Verify that the autobackup completed successfully:

4. Read autobackup.log in <ftp_destination_path>.
2014-01-23-15.12.14 AutoBackup 1.00 started...
2014-01-23-15.12.14 Backup started...
2014-01-23-15.12.45 Backup completed
2014-01-23-15.12.45 FTP started...
2014-01-23-15.12.46 FTP completed
2014-01-23-15.12.46 FTP HISTORY started...
2014-01-23-15.12.46 FTP HISTORY completed
2014-01-23-15.12.46 AutoBackup 1.00 finished
Figure 118. Example of autobackup.log

5. Read mng_164.log in <ftp_destination_path>\CURRENT.

STATUS:SUCCESS:RV backup completed.
2014-01-23-13.36.34 Performing EMS backup...
EMS Poller Name is nina-g-hp-w7
pollername =nina-g-hp-w7
STATUS:SUCCESS:EMS backup completed.
2014-01-23-13.36.34 Performing License backup...
STATUS:SUCCESS:License backup completed.
2014-01-23-13.36.34 Performing Map backup ...
BKP_INFO:database_backup =True
BKP_INFO:rv_backup =True
BKP_INFO:ems_backup =True
BKP_INFO:license_backup =True
BKP_INFO:map_backup =True
FINAL_STATUS:SUCCESS:Backup completed.
2014-01-23-13.36.34 Performing backup file compression...
BACKUP_REQUIRED_SPACE = 91980

C:\users\RV32\BackupRestore\WORKING>c:\RV32\BackupRestore\zip.exe -r -u -q
C:\users\RV32\BackupRestore\WORKING\mng164_backup.zip *.*
=====================================
Backup finished 2014-01-23-13.36.36
WORKING directory will be renamed to CURRENT.WORKING directory renamed to
CURRENT
Figure 119. Example of mng164_backup.log (after Autobackup)

 To manually run the restore for testing:

1. At the destination station, run the command prompt as Administrator
(Figure 113)
2. Verify that mng164_backup.zip from the source workstation is located in
<ftp_destination_path>\CURRENT.
3. Run autorestore manually by typing:
<RVPATH>\BackupRestore\RvAutoRestoreRunner.bat >
<ftp_destination_path>\autorestore.log

4-176 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

4. Verify that the autorestore completed successfully:

 At the destination workstation read autorestore.log in
<ftp_destination_path>
2014-01-23-15.58.21 AutoRestore 1.00 started...
2014-01-23-15.58.21 EMS Server stop
2014-01-23-15.58.34 Restore started...
2014-01-23-15.59.52 Restore completed
2014-01-23-15.59.52 EMS Server start
2014-01-23-15.59.54 AutoRestore finished
Figure 120. Example of autorestore.log

 Read mng164_restore.log in <ftp_destination_path>\CURRENT.

About to enable constraints...
Import terminated successfully without warnings.
Restoring Oracle database done.
2014-01-23-15.59.51 Performing RV restore...
TFTP restore skipped - does not exist.
Elaborated tables files restore skipped - do not exist.
SNMPv3 files restore skipped - does not exist.
STATUS:SUCCESS:RV restore completed.
2014-01-23-15.59.51 Performing EMS restore...
STATUS:SUCCESS:EMS restore completed.
2014-01-23-15.59.51 Performing License restore...
STATUS:SUCCESS:License restore completed.
STATUS:SUCCESS:STAND ALONE restore completed.
===============================================
Restore process is completed on 2014-01-23-15.59.52
Figure 121. Example of mng164_restore.log

Scheduling Autobackup/Restore

 To schedule the autobackup at the source workstation:

1. Go to Start > Administrative Tools > Task Scheduler.
The Task Scheduler appears.

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-177

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 122. Task Scheduler

2. From the Action menu, select Create Task,,,

The Create Task dialog box appears with the General tab open.
3. Enter the task name (for example RV32 Autobackup), a description and select
Run whether user is logged on or not, as illustrated below.

Figure 123. Task Scheduler – General Tab

4. To define the trigger that causes the task to run, open the Triggers tab.
The Triggers tab appears.

4-178 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 124. Task Scheduler – Triggers Tab

5. To start a new task, click <New…>.

The New Trigger dialog box appears.
6. Select Daily and define the desired start date and time as illustrated below,
for example the current date and 1:00h as start time.

Figure 125. Task Scheduler – Defining a Trigger

7. Click <OK> when done.

You are returned to the Task Scheduler.
8. Select the Actions tab.

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-179

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

The New Action tab appears.

9. Specify parameters as follows:
 Program/script. Add C:\RV32\BackupRestore\RvAutoBackupRunner.bat
 Add arguments (optional). Enter
>C:\Users\rv32\BackupRestore\autorestore.log.
 Start in (optional). Enter C:\RV32\BackupRestore.

Figure 126. Task Scheduler – Defining a new Action

10. Click <OK> when done.

You are returned to the Task Scheduler.
11. Open the Conditions tab and then the Settings tab to verify that the settings
comply with the settings illustrated below.

4-180 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 127. Task Scheduler – Conditions

Figure 128. Task Scheduler – Additional Settings

12. Click <OK> when done.

You are asked for the user credentials for the user as which you are
logged on to define this task.

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-181

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 129. User Credentials required

13. Enter the user credentials and click <OK>.

The task is now defined and scheduled.

Figure 130. Task Listed and Scheduled

 To schedule the autorestore at the destination workstation:

1. Use the Task Scheduler and follow the instructions for scheduling the
autobackup procedure with the following variations:
 Create Task – General Tab. Name this task RV32 Autorestore.
 Create Task – Trigger Tab > New Trigger. Schedule the autorestore to
start an hour after the autobackup. Following the example used, set it to
2:00h on the same start date (versus 1:00h on that date for the
autobackup).
 Create Task – Actions Tab > New Action. Under Program/script, enter
C:\RV32\BackupRestore\RvAutoRestoreRunner.bat.
Under Add arguments, enter
C:\users\RV32\BackupRestore\autorestore.log.

4-182 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Under Start in (optional), enter C:\RV32\BackupRestore.

 Create Task – Settings Tab. No need to enable Stop the task after it runs
longer than:, unless the backup restore is scheduled to run more than
twice a day.
All settings that were not mentioned should stay as for scheduling the
autobackup.

Net Inventory
The Net Inventory application allows you to display an inventory table
(see Figure 4-131) for all products that support the Entity MIB.

Note Refer to the list of supported products in Chapter 1 for information on which
products support the net inventory application.

When you start the Net Inventory application, it reads information from all nodes
representing agents on the map that support Entity MIB. The first time you start
the Net Inventory application, you may be prompted to confirm the data refresh,
as it is a potentially time-consuming operation.
The data refresh synchronizes the Net Inventory with the RADview map, and adds
all nodes on the map that support Entity MIB to the Net Inventory table. This
synchronization is not done automatically when nodes are added to the RADview
map. Therefore it is recommended to periodically synchronize via Refresh->
Synchronize All. To ensure that the Net Inventory table is updated when nodes
are added to the RADview map, use Refresh-> Add New Nodes From Map.

Note Any user other than root must have the legacy role function in the user profile in
order to have permission to open the Net Inventory application (refer to
Chapter 6 for details on user profiles).

Opening the Application

 To open the Net Inventory application:

1. From the Start menu, select
All Programs > Network Manager > General > Inventory, or from the EMS
Network Manager menu bar, select Tools > Net Inventory.
2. If you are prompted to confirm the data refresh, click <OK> to continue.
The Inventory Table window appears (see Figure 4-131). The Inventory
Table parameters are listed in Table 4-65.

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-183

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-131. Net Inventory Opening Window

The table is a hierarchical system. When you click the icon to the left of an entity,
the tree expands to display all entities that have the selected component ID in
their entPhysicalContainedIn MIB parameter. You can sort each column if the
left-hand tree is at the node level.

Note In order to save/print the entire display, verify that no rows are selected
(click <Ctrl> and the left mouse button to deselect any selected rows).

Table 4-65. Inventory Table Parameters

Parameter Function
Entity Unique value that identifies the physical entity
Desc. Description of the entity
Class Class of the entity
Possible values: Modem, Chassis, Back–Plane, Slot, PS, Sensor, Card,
Fan, Port, CPU, Stack (Stack of chassis (real or virtual) intended to be
grouped together as multiple chassis entities)
Note: A chassis that is connected to one or more remote chassis
returns a virtual stack as its “parent”. This virtual stack is the “parent”
of all remote chassis connected to the same “parent”.
Managed Remote chassis is not taken into account, and is not part of
the virtual stack.
HW ver. Hardware revision of the entity
SW ver. Software revision of the entity
FW ver. Firmware revision of the entity
FW usually applies to ASIC
Name Name of entity
Serial No. Read/Write field containing the entity serial number (read from the
entity hardware)
Alias Read/Write field containing the alias name for the entity

4-184 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Parameter Function

FRU Indicates whether entity is Field Replaceable Unit

True – this entity can be replaced in the field
False – this entity cannot be replaced in the field

Asset ID Identification information added to the entity. It can be used to

indicate the Configuration Status Letter (CSL) of the unit component.

<Filter…> Opens a dialog box to filter the entity

<Edit…> Opens a dialog box to edit the parameters of the selected row

<Close> Closes the application

<Print…> Prints all selected rows

<Save to File…> Saves all selected rows

<Expand All> Expands all entities to display all subordinates down to the lowest
level

<Collapse All> Closes all tree entries to display node level only

<Help> Displays Help file

<About> Displays info about the program, such as version and licensing
information

<Refresh> Opens the following submenu:

Synchronize All Refreshes information for all displayed entities

Refresh Selected Refreshes information for selected entities

Remove Selected Removes selected entities from net inventory

table.
Add New Nodes Adds new entities to inventory table, containing
from Map data of nodes that were added to map
Last Refresh NMS time when the last refresh was performed

Filtering the Display

You can display only nodes that you wish to view.

 To filter the display:

1. In the Inventory Table, select Filter> Filter.
The Inventory List Filter dialog box appears (see Figure 4-132).
2. Select whether you want to filter on:
 All Map Nodes
 Displayed Nodes Only.

Note Only one selection can be made at a time.

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-185

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

3. Click any parameters that you want to use as a filter, and enter the filter
criteria.
4. Click <OK>.
Only those Nodes that have entities matching all the filter criteria are
displayed.

Note • Filtering is not case-sensitive.

• The only wild character that can be used in the Edit boxes is *.

Figure 4-132. Inventory List Filter Dialog Box

Table 4-66. Inventory List Filter Parameters

Parameter Function

Filter on all map nodes Perform filtering on all map nodes

Filter on displayed nodes only Perform filtering on displayed nodes

Node If selected, enter node name value for filtering

Desc If selected, enter description value for filtering

Class If selected, choose value from dropdown list for filtering: Modem,
Chassis, Back-Plane, Slot, PS, FAN, Sensor, Card, Port, Stack, CPU

HW ver. If selected, enter hardware revision value for filtering

SW ver. If selected, enter software revision value for filtering

FW ver. If selected, enter firmware revision value for filtering

Name If selected, enter name value for filtering

Serial No. If selected, enter serial number value for filtering

4-186 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Parameter Function

Alias If selected, enter alias value for filtering

FRU If selected, choose Yes or No from dropdown list to filter for field
replaceable units or non-field replaceable units

Asset ID If selected, enter asset ID value for filtering

Editing an Entity

 To edit an entity:
1. In the Inventory Table, select an entity (row) and click <Edit>.
The Edit dialog box appears (see Figure 4-133).
2. Modify the desired parameters.
3. Click <Set>.

Figure 4-133. Edit Dialog Box

Expanding/Collapsing Sublevels

 To expand/collapse sublevels of an entity:

• In the Inventory Table, double-click an entity.

 To expand all sublevels of all entities in a tree:

• In the Inventory Table, click <Expand All>.
All tree entries are displayed to the lowest level (see Figure 4-134).

 To collapse all sublevels of all entities in a tree:

• In the Inventory Table, click <Collapse All>.
All tree entries are displayed at the node level (see Figure 4-131).

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-187

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-134. Inventory Table Dialog Box – Expand All

Maintenance Windows
In order to avoid error results on RADview-PM during scheduled down times of a
specific resource, RADview allows scheduling maintenance windows during which
RADview-PM does not receive data from the respective resource.
You can schedule maintenance windows as explained in the instructions below.
The interface to define maintenance windows is available from RADview Network
Manager.

Note Once a maintenance window is invoked, RADview-Performance Manager does not

collect data from the specified resource during the specified time window.

 To access the Maintenance Window utility:

• From the Main menu, select Tools > Maintenance Windows .

The Maintenance Windows dialog box appears.

4-188 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-135. Maintenance Windows Dialog Box

 To define and schedule a maintenance window:

1. In the Maintenance Windows dialog box, click New .

The New Maintenance Window wizard appears.

Figure 4-136. Defining New Maintenance Window – Step 1

2. Assign a name and add a short description (optional).

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-189

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

3. Select the maintenance type from the list. The maintenance type is for
information only and does not have any effect on the maintenance window.
4. Click <Add>.
You are asked to link the maintenance window with the required resource
as illustrated below.

Figure 4-137. Defining New Maintenance Window – Specifying Name and Linking Resources

5. Select the resource to which the maintenance window applies as follows:

 Device: Click Device… and select the device or a topological link from the
NER.
 Resource: Click Resource… and select a specific port associated with the
desired device from the NER.
 Service: Click Service… to select a service from the list.
6. Click <Next>.
Scheduling options appear.

4-190 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Figure 4-138. Defining New Maintenance Window – Scheduling

7. Select and configure scheduling options as follows:

 Once: To configure a maintenance window for a single time slot, select a
start time and date and then select the duration.
 Recurring: Select the frequency in which the maintenance window recurs
and then the duration of the maintenance window and the period range
during which the maintenance window recurs.
8. Click <Finish>.
The new maintenance window appears in the list of the Maintenance
Windows dialog box and the schedule is activated.
9. To view the schedule for the next 20 recurrences, select the desired
maintenance window.
The schedule and the affected entities appear listed to the right.

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-191

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-139. Maintenance Windows Dialog Box – New Maintenance Window Added

 To edit an existing maintenance window:

1. In the Maintenance Windows dialog box, select the desired maintenance

window from the list and click Edit .

The Edit Maintenance Window wizard appears.
2. Follow the instructions for adding a new maintenance window to modify the
desired settings.
The maintenance window is modified and the schedule is activated.

 To deactivate the schedule of a maintenance window

• In the Maintenance Windows dialog box, select the desired maintenance
window from the list and click De-activate .
The maintenance window is de-activated and the schedule displayed to
the right is removed.

Note When adding or editing a maintenance window, the schedule is automatically

activated. You can de-activate and re-activate the schedule

 To reactivate the schedule of a maintenance window:

• In the Maintenance Windows dialog box, select the desired maintenance

window from the list and click Activate .

The maintenance window is reactivated and the schedule reappears to
the right.

 To stop a maintenance window after it is invoked:

• In the Maintenance Windows dialog box, select the respective maintenance
window from the list and click Stop.
The maintenance window is stopped.

 To delete a maintenance window:

• In the Maintenance Windows dialog box, select the desired maintenance
window from the list and click Delete .
The maintenance window is deleted from the list.

4-192 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Licensing
The RADview licensing mechanism protects the system by restricting its
installation to the specific host for which the license was generated.
Product-specific licenses can be ordered in incremental license point sizes, to
allow optimal correlation between the types of managed devices and size of the
network, and the price of the management system.

Available Licenses
This section lists and explains the available licenses. There are two types of
licenses:
• ENW (Equivalent Node Weight) license – Entitles you to a certain amount of
license points that should be high enough to allow for the size and the type
of managed network elements, as well as the number of nodes in the
network. For additional information on license points for specific devices,
refer to your local distributor.
• Licenses for additional resources and modules – Some resources require a
separate license to be installed before you can activate and use them:
 EMS-MAP – You must install a license for the RADview Network Manager
before you can log into it
 EMS-Clients – If you want to have more than five users logged into
RADview simultaneously, you must install a license for multiple RADview
clients.
 RV-LIC/SERVICE-MANAGEMENT – To use RADview-Service Manager (SM)
and/or RADview-Service Center (SC), you must have the Service-Manager
license installed. If you try to use these modules without this license, an
error message appears.
 RV-LIC/PERFORMANCE-MANAGEMENT – To follow the performance using
the Performance Monitor (PM), you must have the Performance-
Monitoring license installed. If you try to access the Performance Monitor
without the proper license, an error message appears.
 DXC-100 –A license must be installed before you can activate the DXC-
100 shelf view.
For an illustration of the licenses listed in the License Service Manager, refer to
Figure 4-140

Note • To follow up on the number of users simultaneously logged in to the system,

go to the Active Login table in the EMS Security Administrator. For additional
information and instructions, refer to Viewing Active Users in Chapter 6.
• For information and instructions on installing licenses, refer to Installing
Licenses in Chapter 2.

Working with the License Service Manager

The License Service Manager is the interface that displays the licenses, their value
and their status. You use this interface to add, remove and modify licenses. This
section explains how to start the License Service Manager from inside RADview

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-193

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

and introduces its components. The License Service Manager has the following
two tabs:
• Genaral tab – Lists all the licenses and displays their status. For additional
information, refer to Table 4-67.
• Managed Element List tab – Lists all the devices that are managed by
RADview. For additional information, refer to Table 4-68.

 To start the License Service Manager:

• From the RADview Network Manager menu, select Tools > License
Manager.
The License Service Manager dialog box appears with the General tab
open as illustrated in Figure 4-140.
For information to what is listed in the General tab of the License Service
Manager, refer to Table 4-67.

Figure 4-140. License Service Manager – General Tab (Windows Client Connected to a Windows RV
Server)

Note If a temporary license has expired, it is displayed as a red line in the table.

Table 4-67. License Service Manager – General Tab

Parameter Function

Equivalent Node Weight Status (ENW)

Total installed license points Total License Points to which the user is entitled (for all
valid licenses that have not expired)

4-194 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Parameter Function

Consumed license points License Points that the user has already used (for
RADview managed elements)
This parameter allows uses to follow up on the growth
of their system.
For information on calculating license points required
for various devices, refer to Calculating License Points.

ID Unique identifier given by RAD to a certain existing

license file
Features/License Points Lists the licenses according to the license type. For
license types and associated information, refer to the
beginning of this section:
Exp. Date Expiration date of a temporary license. If the license is
permanent, it is indicated as Permanent.
Note: If a temporary license has expired, it is displayed
as a red line.
Host Identifier For Windows – MAC Address, IP Address, or Any Host
For UNIX – HOST ID, MAC Address, or Any Host
Platform Platform for which the license was generated (Windows
or UNIX)

 To view the Managed Element List:

• In the License Service Manager dialog box, click the Managed Element List tab.
The managed network elements appear listed as explained in Table 4-68.

 To sort the display according to your needs:

• Click the desired column name.
The order in the list is re-arranged according to the column name you
clicked.
• To reverse the order from ascending to descending or vice versa, click the
respective column name again.

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-195

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Figure 4-141. License Service Manager – Managed Element List Tab

Table 4-68. License Service Manager – Managed Element List Tab

Parameter Function

IP Address IP Address of managed element

Name Selection Name of managed element
Type Type of managed element
ENW Equivalent Node Weight of a specific managed element
Last Host IP IP Address of the last host management station that used
a specific managed element
Last Time Used Last Date and Time that a specific managed element was
used

Note • You can manage one agent from different RADview maps at the same station
without requiring an additional license. The RADview license service makes
sure that different logical representations of single network elements do not
require duplicate licenses.
• A managed element is deleted from the list when it is deleted from the map of
the client. If you delete it while this application is open, the change is not
reflected in the Managed Element List until you refresh the entry (File >
Refresh).
• By default, the list is ordered by IP address. You can sort the list by clicking on
any column and toggle between ascending and descending order.

4-196 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

 To start the License Server:

1. From the menu, select Action > Service Console.
2. In the Service Action field, select Start, and click <Set>.
Once the current polling cycle is completed or upon selecting
File > Refresh, the license server is stopped and the title bar of the
License Service Manager displays the following:
License Service Manager (Connected).

 To stop the License Server:

1. In the License Service Manager, select Action > Service Console.
2. In the Service Action field, select Stop, and click <Set>.
A message appears indicating that the license server operation is
stopped.
3. Click <OK> to confirm.
Once the current polling cycle is completed or upon selecting
File > Refresh, the license server is stopped and the title bar of the
License Service Manager displays the following:
License Service Manager (Disconnected).

Figure 4-142. Service Console Dialog Box

Note • When the License Server is stopped and you try to log on, an error message
appears indicating that you do not have a sufficient license installed.
• If you are already logged on and you try to access and configure a network
element, an error message appears indicating that no valid license is available.
RADview logs off automatically after a several minutes.

 To display details about the License Service Manager:

• In the License Manager window, select Help > About License Service Manager
Application.
Details about the application such as the current version are displayed.

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-197

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

Equivalent Node Weights (ENW)

Each RAD manageable device (product) is assigned an Equivalent Node Weight
(ENW). Different devices are assigned different ENW values according to their
level of complexity, starting from the lowest value of 1. The more complex the
device, the higher the ENW. Managing a device with a higher ENW requires a
higher number of license points. For device ENW values, please contact your local
distributor.
Modules within a chassis, or non-SNMP devices that are managed by a central
RAD SNMP-based unit, are not subject to a license. For example, modules within
an ACE-3400 chassis do not require a license. Only the ACE-3400 node itself
requires and consumes a RADview license. Standalone units such as ACE-3220 are
subject to a license.

Note A RAD node whose type cannot be identified by the License Server (such as when
the device is disconnected, or if the NMS does not have the correct community
name) is assigned a default value of 500.

Bundled License Points

Every RADview package includes free-of-charge bundled license points that allow
you to manage a small-to-medium-sized network (depending on the actual
devices managed by the system). A larger network requires you to purchase and
install additional license points, as the network expands.
Table 4–69 lists the RADview packages and their bundled license points.

Table 4–69. Bundled License Points

Platform Bundled License Points

(Free of Charge)

RADview (Windows option) 300

RADview (Unix option) 400

Calculating License Points

To determine the number of license points required to manage a given network,
perform the following calculations:
• Number of license points (for each type) = (Product type ENW) x (Number of
elements of this type).
• When your network consists of different product types, total the number of
license points for all product types.
Since a particular number of license points is bundled within every RADview
package, the actual number of license points required can be calculated as
follows:

4-198 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 4 Configuration Management

Required license points = Total Number of License points (for all types) −
RADview package bundled license points
The following is an example of calculating license points for a network to be
managed by RADview, with the following elements:
• Four Egate-100 units
• Eight ETX-202 units
• Ten FCD-E1E units
• Five FOMi-E3/T3 units.
Referring to the RADview License Calculator, we find that:
• Egate-100 = 130 ENW
• ETX-202 = 15 ENW
• FCD-E1E = 15 ENW
• FOMi-E3/T3 = 30 ENW.
Considering the bundled license points table (see Table 4–69), we find that:
• The RADview package includes a 300-point free-of-charge bundled license.
Thus, the license you need to order =
[(4x130) + (8x15) + (10x15) + (5x30)] – (300) = 640.
Explanation: since the actual license size that is needed to manage the given
network is 940, and 300 points are bundled free-of-charge within the RADview
package, you need to order only 640 license points.

Licensing for RV-SC Applications

The RADview licensing mechanism for products does not restrict or limit
simultaneous usage by different users in Client-Server applications (RADview,
RADview-SC/TDMoIP, or RADview-Service Center), or in UNIX-based systems that
are accessed simultaneously by several users via X-terminals, except in the case
of multiple RADview Network Manager clients as mentioned above.
For full licensing terms, see the RADview license agreement included in the
respective RADview package. If you need a RADview license for your RADview
package, you can activate it at the RAD value point website (via MyRAD or the
Customer Information link.)

RADview Performing Additional Tasks 4-199

Chapter 4 Configuration Management User’s Manual

4-200 Performing Additional Tasks RADview

 Chapter 5
Performance Management
This chapter describes:
• Viewing the Device Status
• Viewing Resources
• Monitoring SNMP Messages
• Synchroniz

5.1 Viewing the Device Status

The RADview network manager automatically polls the network elements
(devices) at specified intervals for connectivity status and the presence of alarms,
and changes the icon appearance based on the results of the poll.
Each level and node icon in the navigation tree and the map area has a status
icon that indicates the most severe alarm, as specified in the following table.

Table 5-1. Network Element Repository Status Icons

Icon Color Status

Green Normal

Blue Warning

Dark yellow Minor

Orange Major

Red Critical

Red Disconnected

Gray Administrative status is set to down

Gray Unknown node type (see

Troubleshooting in Chapter 7 )

5.2 Viewing Resources of Legacy Products

The resources work space contains a list of the devices defined in RADview, along
with alarms associated to the devices and their components. You can filter the
resource table, and view the device alarms. When you add a device to the

RADview Ver. Viewing Resources of Legacy Products 5-1

Chapter 5 Performance Management Installation and Operation Manual

RADview map, it is automatically added to the Resources workspace. In addition,

you can customize the Resources view as explained under Changing Resource
Information.

Interface Components

You can navigate to the Resources workspace by selecting Resources in

the work space selection area.
The Resources workspace is divided into panes that contain the following
components:
• Resources – Shows devices that have been defined in the RADview Topology
workspace (refer to Working with Resources Table).
• Details and Alarms – Displays details, active alarms, and past alarms of the
respective devices (refer to Viewing Resource Details and Viewing Resource
Alarms respectively)
• Filters – Contains filters for changing the displayed data (refer to Filtering
SNMP Requests and Traps).

Supported Devices
Some RADview legacy devices do not support all the Resource features. The
following devices support all Resource features:
• ETX 203A version 3.0 and up
• ETX 203AM version 4.0 and up
• ETX 203AX version 4.0 and up
• ETX 204A version 3.0 and up
• ETX 204AW version 3.0 and up
• ETX 205A version 4.0 and up
• ETX 220A version 4.0 and up

Working with Resources Table

The Resources table shows devices that have been defined in the RADview map.
The default view is in tree mode, where some devices are parent nodes of a tree
that you can open by clicking the expansion icon, to display the child nodes
representing the components of the device (e.g. CPU, power supply, etc.). Parent
devices are shown in bold font. This expansion is possible only for supported
devices (refer to Supported Devices). Filtered views of the Resources table are
shown in tree mode if descendant (child) nodes need to be shown, otherwise
they are shown in non-tree mode.
The Resources table is a customizable table, meaning you can customize the
columns and select which columns are visible. By default, the following columns
are visible:

5-2 Viewing Resources of Legacy Products RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management

• Resource
• Alarm Severity
• Resource ID
• IP Address
• Class
• Description
• NER Level
• Admin. Status
• Oper. Status
• HW Ver.
• SW Ver.
• Alias
• Sys Location
• Link to Node
• Customer.
Refer to Chapter 3 for more information on customizable table functions.

Figure 5-1. Resources Workspace

RADview Viewing Resources of Legacy Products 5-3

Chapter 5 Performance Management Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 5-2. Resources, Right Side

Table 5-2. Resources Parameters

Parameter Description
NE Name Name of device
Resource NE name if device or chassis, otherwise component name, e.g.:
CPU
Power Supply <n>
Fan <n>
Temperature Sensor
MNG-ETH
STATION-CLK
NET-ETH 1
NET/USER-ETH 2
USER-ETH <n>
Alarm Severity Indicates the highest severity level of any active alarm(s) for the resource:
– Normal (no alarm)
– Warning.
– Minor
– Major
– Critical
– Device unreachable
– Unknown alarm severity
For legacy devices, this parameter is displayed only for classes Device, Chassis,
PS, and Fan. For fully supported devices (see Supported Devices), this parameter
is displayed for all classes.
Resource ID Identification number assigned by system
IP address IP address of the entity
Class Class of the entity
Possible values: Device, Chassis, CPU, Card, Fan, Port, PS, Sensor, Slot

5-4 Viewing Resources of Legacy Products RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management

Parameter Description
Contained In Name of parent node, if the parent node Class is Device or Chassis, otherwise
blank
Description Description of the resource, , according to the description in the device
information
NER level Level of entity in map
Admin. status Administrative status of resource:
Up –Administratively enabled
Down –Administratively disabled
Testing – Test is running (applicable to class Port only)
Note: This is displayed only for fully supported devices (see Supported Devices), if
the class is Port or Card.
Oper. status Operational status of resource:
Up –Administratively enabled
Down –Administratively disabled
Not Present – Entity is not present in device
Testing – Test is running (applicable to class Port only)
Note: This is displayed only for fully supported devices (see Supported Devices), if
the class is Port or Card.
HW Ver. Hardware revision of the resource
SW Ver. Software revision of the resource
Alias Alias name for resource
Sys Location Location of resource, if Class is Device, according to the location in the device
information
Link to Node NE Name of device to which resource is connected on map, if Class is Port
Customer Customer associated with resource,if Class is Device, Chassis, or Port
To change the customer, click the browse button to display a list of customers,
then select the customer to which to assign the resource, and click <Select>.
FW Ver. Firmware revision of the resource
FRU Indicates whether entity is Field Replaceable Unit
True – This entity can be replaced in the field
False – This entity cannot be replaced in the field
Serial Number Resource serial number (usually read from the hardware)
Note: The serial number is unique for each device. It should be initialized only
once and not changed after that, because if the serial number is changed while
the device is connected to RADview EMS,then RADview EMS considers the device
to be a different device.
Asset ID Identification information added to the resource. It can be used to indicate the
Configuration Status Letter (CSL) of the unit component.

Viewing Resource Details

When you select a resource in the Resources pane, you can select the Details tab
in the lower pane to display the resource details (the fields are described in
Table 5-2).

RADview Viewing Resources of Legacy Products 5-5

Chapter 5 Performance Management Installation and Operation Manual

Viewing Resource Alarms

When you select a resource in the Resources pane, in the lower pane you can
select the following to view the resource alarms:
• Active Alarms tab to display the active alarms of the resource, in the same
format as the Event Browser, via a filter (refer to Chapter 7 for details on
viewing device events)
• History Events tab to display the past alarms of the resource, in the same
format as the Event Browser, via a filter (refer to Chapter 7 for details on
viewing device events).

Figure 5-3. Active Alarms

Figure 5-4. History Events

Changing Resource Information

You can change the following for a resource:
• Alias
• Asset ID
• Customer (only for supported devices)
• Link to Node (only if Class is Port)
• Serial Number (should be set only once and then not changed).

5-6 Viewing Resources of Legacy Products RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management

 To edit a resource:
1. In the Resources workspace, select the resource that you wish to change,
then right-click and select Edit Resource.
The Edit Resource dialog box is displayed (see Figure 5-5).
2. Change the editable fields as necessary (refer to Table 5-2).
3. Click <Set>.
The changes to the resource are performed.

Figure 5-5. Edit Resource Dialog Box

Figure 5-6. Select Customer to Assign to Resource

RADview Viewing Resources of Legacy Products 5-7

Chapter 5 Performance Management Installation and Operation Manual

5.3 Monitoring SNMP Messages

The SNMP Spy tool enables you to see SNMP requests exchanged between the
NMS and the SNMP agent devices.

 To use SNMP Spy (RADview-EMS Spy):

1. Verify that the SNMP Spy is enabled as described in Configuring the Server
SNMP Spy Parameters.
2. From the RADview Network Manager menu bar select Tools> SNMP Spy.
The SNMP Spy window is displayed (see Figure 5-7).
3. Select Online to view messages as they arrive, otherwise you just see the
number of messages (top left corner in Figure 5-7), until you click <Refresh>.
4. Select Freeze to stop displaying new messages.

Figure 5-7. SNMP Spy Window

5-8 Monitoring SNMP Messages RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management

Filtering SNMP Requests and Traps

Description Filter

 To set a filter by description:

• In the SNMP Spy Window, type in a string that you want to use as a filter.

Options Filter

 To set filters by options:

• In the SNMP Spy Window, click <Options>.
The Options dialog box is displayed, with two tabs: General (see
Figure 5-8) and Filter (see Figure 5-9). Filter selects agents for which
SNMP requests/responses are displayed.

Figure 5-8. Options General Tab

RADview Monitoring SNMP Messages 5-9

Chapter 5 Performance Management Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 5-9. Options Filter Tab

Table 5-3. Options Filter Parameters

Parameter Description

Host Address Address of EMS Server

Port Port for Spy communication. It is recommended to leave
this as the default value.
Maximum Rows Maximum rows in SNMP Spy display
SNMP Agent IP Address of SNMP Agent

<Add> Add IP Address to list

<Update> Modify the selected IP Address
<Remove> Remove the selected IP Address

Reconnecting
Click <Reconnect> to restart the SNMP Spy process according to the new settings.

Configuring the Server SNMP Spy Parameters

The SNMP Spy parameters can be configured in the system console for any of the
servers (NMS stations). Refer to Chapter 4 for more information on the system
console.

Note Enabling the SNMP spy worsens system performance. It should be enabled only
when necessary, and then disabled when no longer needed.

5-10 Monitoring SNMP Messages RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management

 To configure SNMP Spy:

1. In the system console ( ) select a server name appearing below the

Servers root and then click the General tab.
The server SNMP Spy parameters are displayed (see Figure 5-10).
2. Enter information for any of the parameters (see Table 5-4).
3. Click <Set>.

Note To retrieve the current value, click <Get>.

Figure 5-10. Server Tracing Configuration Dialog Box – General Tab

Table 5-4. Server Tracing Configuration Parameters – General Tab

Parameter Description

Info

System Name The name of the server (root)

RADview Monitoring SNMP Messages 5-11

Chapter 5 Performance Management Installation and Operation Manual

Tracing

Global Level Level of message that appears in the main server tracing window

Debug Action Enables Technical Support personnel to insert debugging commands in the
EMS server; for use only by Technical Support

SNMP SPY Monitors all SNMP connections

SNMP Spy Enabled When this option is selected, it enables monitoring of SNMP Spy messages

SNMP Spy Hosts Host on which to run SNMP Spy communications

5.4 Synchronizing Traps

Trap synchronization is used to ensure that traps sent by devices to SNMPv3
network managers are not lost. The SNMPv3 managers are assigned to trap
synchronization groups. The devices must be configured with the corresponding
trap synchronization group identifications.
By default, trap synchronization is enabled and the RADview server is assigned to
trap synchronization group ID 1. If the default settings are suitable for your
application, you do not need to configure the EMS server trap synchronization.

Note • Refer to Chapter 3 for details on how to configure trap synchronization in

devices.
• In case that the TrapSync mechanism cannot synchronize the alarms between
the NMS and a specific device in a specified range (SoftSync), it requests all
active alarms from the device (HardSync).
• The TrapSync mechanism is supported for devices that support RADOS.

 To configure trap synchronization for the RADview server:

1. From the RADview Network Manager menu, select Tools > Admin Console to
open the EMS Admin Console.
The EMS Admin Console is displayed showing the NMS station name.
2. Click the + to expand the Admin Console, and then select Fault Service in the
list of consoles.
The EMS Fault Administrator is displayed.
3. Select Configuration > Traps Synchronization.
The Traps Synchronization dialog box is displayed.

5-12 Synchronizing Traps RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Performance Management

Figure 5-11. Traps Synchronization Dialog Box

4. Edit the parameters as needed, then click <Set> to save your changes.

RADview Synchronizing Traps 5-13

Chapter 5 Performance Management Installation and Operation Manual

5-14 Synchronizing Traps RADview

 Chapter 6
Security Management
This chapter describes the following:
• Managing Users
• Administering Permissions
• Configuring the EMS Security Service.

6.1 Managing Users

You can manage users on two levels as follows:
• Changing your own RADview Password - Change your own EMS password on
the RADview Network Manager level
• Editing the User Profile Using the Security Administrator – Add, edit or
remove users. In addition, you can view and log out active users via the Active
Login table in the EMS Security Administrator.

Notes • To add, edit and remove users, it is required to be logged on as a user with
Administrator rights.
• For security reasons, it is recommended to change the initial password that
has been set upon installing the RADview application.

Changing your own RADview Password

This section explains how to change the password from the RADview login level.
All other operations in this chapter require the Security Administrator.

 To change the RADview password:

1. In the Login dialog box click <Change Password>.
The Replace Password dialog box appears.

RADview Managing Users 6-1

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Figure 6-1. Replace Password Dialog Box

2. Enter the Username and the Old Password (current password) of the user
whose password you are changing.
3. Enter the user’s new password in the New Password and Verify fields.
4. Click <OK>.
The new password takes effect immediately.

Notes • The password must be between four and eight characters.

• Only letters and numbers are valid characters. At least two characters must be
letters and at least two characters must be numbers.
• Password restrictions can be modified using the Admin Console. For additional
information, refer to Setting Password Policies.

Editing the User Profile Using the Security Administrator

Adding, deleting, changing users or changing other users’ passwords requires
opening the EMS Security Administrator as explained below.

Note Only users with Administrator rights can make and apply changes to settings in
the EMS Security Administrator.

 To open the Security Administrator:

1. From the RADview Manager menu, select Tools > Admin Console.
The Admin Console appears.
2. In the Admin Console’s navigation pane, select Security Service.
The Profiles tree appears with existing security profiles and users.
The Security Administrator displays the following:
• Profiles Tree: Lists all available security profiles as follows:
- Profile with one or more users assigned to it

- Profile with at least one profile based on it as illustrated below. In the

example below, Group6-Admin and Group7-Admin are based on
Administrator.

6-2 Managing Users RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Figure 6-2. User Profile with Two Profiles Based on it

• Users of ‘<selected profile’s name>: Lists the users associated with the
selected user profile, for example root under Administrator.
• User(s): Lists all users in the system and states the profile that each user is
associated with.

Figure 6-3. Admin Console: EMS Security Administrator – With Default Profiles

Adding Users
This section explains how to add a new user and base it on an existing security
profile.

Note Only users with Administrator rights can make and apply changes to settings in
the EMS Security Administrator.

 To add a user:
1. From the EMS Security Administrator window, select User > Add...
The Add User dialog box is displayed (see Figure 6-4).
2. Under User Name and Description, enter the desired user name and a
description (optional) respectively.
3. To base the new user on a security profile, select Profile and select the
desired user profile.
4. Under Password, enter the desired password.

RADview Managing Users 6-3

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

5. Under Confirm Password, re-enter password again to Confirm Password.

6. To define the new user as a temporary user, under Temporary Login, check
Enabled and specify the expiry date and time.
7. Click <Set>.
The new user is added.

Note If the Temporary Login option was enabled, the new user becomes invalid at the
specified expiry date and becomes. This might be useful for team members in the
lab who stay for a limited period of time.

Figure 6-4. Add User Dialog Box

Editing Users
This section explains how to change properties of existing users. For instructions
on changing the user’s password, refer to Changing User Passwords.

Note • You cannot edit your own User properties.

• Do not edit the user Internal.

 To edit a user:
1. Under User(s), select the desired user.
2. From the menu, select User > Edit…
The Edit User dialog box is displayed (see Figure 6-5).
3. Make the desired changes to User Name, Description, Profile and/or Lock.

6-4 Managing Users RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

4. Click <Set>.
The changes are applied.

Figure 6-5. Edit User Dialog Box

Note • This entry is enabled only when an entry in the Users Table is selected.
• When Admin Lock is selected, the user cannot use the system until the
Administrator clears Admin Lock.

Changing User Passwords

This section explains how to change user passwords from the EMS Security
Administrator level.

 To change a user password:

1. Under User(s), select the desired user.
2. From the menu, select User > Edit…
The Edit User dialog box is displayed (see Figure 6-5).
3. Click <Change Password>.
The Change Password dialog box is displayed (Figure 6-6).
4. Enter the new Password.
5. Enter the new password again to Confirm Password.

RADview Managing Users 6-5

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

6. Click <Set>.
The new password is set and applies when logging with this user the next
time.

Figure 6-6. Change Password Dialog Box

Removing Users

 To remove a user:
1. Under User(s), select the desired user.
2. From the menu, select User > Remove.
The Confirm User Removal dialog box is displayed (see Figure 6-7).
3. Click <OK>.
The selected user is removed.

Figure 6-7. Confirm User Removal Confirmation Dialog Box

Administering Login Names

This section explains how to view and log out active users.

Viewing Active Users

The list of all users who are currently logged in can be viewed by displaying the
Active Login table.

 To view all users who are currently logged in:

• From the EMS Security Administrator window, select
Login > Active Login Table.
The Active Login Table Dialog Box is displayed.

6-6 Managing Users RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Figure 6-8. Active Login Table Dialog Box

Table 6-1. Active Login Table

Parameter Possible Values / Remarks

User User name

Login ID User Login ID

Login Date Date and time of User login

Host User Host IP Address

Terminal User Terminal

Logging Active Users Out

The Administrator can log out an active user listed in the Active Login table
(Figure 6-8).

 To log out an active user:

1. Select a user in the table.
2. Click <Logout>.
The selected user is logged out and removed from the Active Login table.

Note Only the Administrator can log out a user from this menu.

6.2 Managing Permissions

RADview allows granting permissions and imposing restrictions to specific users
as follows:
• Managing Security Profiles – Allows creating a profile with permissions and
restrictions that affect all NEs and is specific to a user based on this profile.
• Configuring Security Domains – Allows creating a profile that allows viewing
specific NEs that are part of a pre-defined shared group. It also allows
applying permissions and restrictions to the associated NEs.
• Restricting Job Permissions – Allows applying a profile with permissions and
restrictions on running certain jobs.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-7

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

• Configuring Security Options – Allows defining password, account and audit.

Managing Security Profiles

RADview uses security profiles that are comprised of permissions for every
operation. Security profiles are managed via the EMS Security Administrator
explained under Editing the User Profile Using the Security Administrator.
This section lists and explains permissions and how they are listed in the Profile
view. In addition, it explains how to create or edit security profiles that define
permissions and restrictions to all NEs as follows:
• Overview – Lists available permission tags and explains the associated
permissions.
• Working with Permissions – Lists and explains the permission tags
• Basic Permissions – Introduces the structure of the base permissions in the
EMS Security Administrator. Base permissions are built-in permissions
associated with a built-in profile.
• Manually Loading Security Profiles – Base profiles are saved as XML files. This
section explains how to manually load them.
• Adding Profiles – Explains how to add new profiles based on base profiles.
• Editing Profiles – Explains how to edit profiles that have been added.
• Removing Profiles – Explains how to remove profiles.
For information on profiles that allow viewing selected NEs and part of the
network, refer to Configuring Security Domains.

Overview
A security profile is a set of permission tags organized in a hierarchical tree as
illustrated in Figure 6-9. Permission tags may represent single permissions or
group permissions that consist of a set of single permissions. Single permissions
represent one operation in one of the EMS applications or in one of the shelf
view applications. For an overview of permission tags and available permissions,
refer to Table 6-2.
Table 6-2. Permission Tags – Types and Permission Levels

Icon Permission

Single Permission - Write

Single Permission Read

Single Permission - No Access

Group Permission - Write

Note: If you change the attribute of a group permission, all the individual
permissions in the group change.

6-8 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Icon Permission

Group Permission (Base Profile) – Write

Note: You cannot directly change a Group Permission that is derived from a
Base Profile. To change it, you must drag the icon from the right pane to
the left pane so that the icon is removed, then you can click the icon to
modify it.

Note The RADview server automatically loads all permission files after
installation/upgrade. Therefore you do not need to load permission files before
assigning permissions to a profile.

Figure 6-9 shows the available permissions that have been uploaded from the
permission file in the right pane and the individual permissions that have been
assigned to a profile in the left pane.
The types of profiles are:
• Mandatory – Built-in profiles: Administrator, Operator, Monitor, Technician
• User-defined – Based on an existing profile or created “from scratch”.

Notes • A user is always assigned to one security profile.

• One security profile can be assigned to multiple users.
• You cannot delete or edit any of the mandatory profiles.
• It is recommended that you reserve user root for administrative tasks only.
The first administrative task should be to create new profiles and users for all
other tasks.

Permission tags can be included in a profile in the following ways:

• As a single permission tag

• As a group permission by inserting a base profile. Base profiles are the

profiles that new profiles are based on.

• Through the All permission tag that functions as a group and includes all

groups and single permissions. The All function is a special permission –

any operation has the right for this level of permission. This includes
subordinates. All can be overridden if the permissions are explicitly set below
or on the subordinate sublevel.

Notes • The benefit of including group permissions is that if you load an updated
permission file in the future, all existing profiles that are included in this group
are updated automatically.
• Single labels that were included without their group label are not updated.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-9

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

The hierarchical permissions tree in Figure 6-9 shows the following:

• Available base permissions that have been loaded (in the right pane)
• Group permissions
• Individual permissions that have been assigned (and can be modified) for the
new profile (in the left pane)
• Permissions that have been modified for a range of IP addresses (in the left
pane)
• Permissions that have been modified for a specific slot or port instance (in
the left pane).

Figure 6-9. Permission Hierarchy

Working with Permissions

The access rights of permissions are:

• Write

• Read

• No Access .

6-10 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

You can change the access rights by double-clicking the permission icon. This

toggles from Write  Read  No Access  Write .

 To prevent an Administrator user profile from making changes:

1. Make sure to be logged on as root.
2. Open the EMS Security Administrator as explained under Editing the User
Profile Using the Security Administrator.
3. Under Profiles Tree, select the desired Administrator user, for example
Group6-Admin as illustrated below.

Figure 6-10. EMS Security Administrator – Profiles Tree

4. From the menu, select Profile > Edit.,,
The Edit Group6-Admin Profile dialog boxappears.

5. Under Basic Permissions, navigate to admin and select tools_perm.

The associated single permissions appear at the bottom under
‘tools_perm’Permissions.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-11

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Figure 6-11. Basic Permissions, Selecting ‘TOOLS_AdminConsole’

6. Select Tools_AdminConsole and drag it to the left side under Profile.

7. Under Profile, set Tools_AdminConsole to No Access .

The respective Administration user, in this example Group6-Admin, is
unable to access the Admin Console. If he attempts to open the Admin
Console, an Access Denied message appears.
You can add domains or IP address ranges in the profile if you wish to define
permissions differently for a part of the network. Refer to the following sections
for details.

 To add a permission to a new profile:

1. Open the Edit Profile view for the desired profile.
2. Under Profile, double-click the desired folder item to view the permissions
defined for the profile.
The current permissions for this profile appear in the Profile tree. Each
permission indicates the access rights as listed and explained in
Table 6-2.

6-12 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

3. Under Basic Permissions, select a group permission or, under Permissions,

select a single permission and drag the selected item to an empty space
in the profile tree.
The permission is added to the correct place together with the folder
item that it belongs to.

Note If you drag a permission to an incorrect place, a message appears indicating that
the selected place is inconsistent.

 To add all permissions to a folder:

1. Open the Edit Profile view for the desired profile.
2. In the left pane, right-click the desired folder item and select Add All from
the shortcut menu.
All permissions associated with this folder item are added.
3. Click <Set>.
Te setting takes effect and the Edit Profile dialog box closes.

 To add a range of IP address permissions in a folder:

1. In the left pane, right-click the desired folder item, for example config and
select Add IP Range… from the shortcut menu.
The Select IP Range dialog box appears.
2. Type the IP addresses or click <…> to select the range of IP Addresses within
which the added permissions associated with the respective folder should
apply.
3. Click <Set>.
The range of addresses appears under the selected folder item in the
left pane as illustrated in Figure 6-12.

Figure 6-12. Range of IP Addresses

4. Drag the desired permissions from the right pane to the range of addresses
in the left pane.
5. If necessary, right-click the range of IP addresses and select one of the
following:
 Add All – Add an All permission with Write access rights ( ) to the
range
 Add Instance – Add an instance of the nodes in the range
 Move Up – Move the range up
 Move Down – Move the range down.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-13

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

 To add domain permissions in a folder:

1. Right-click the selected folder item and choose Add Domain to select
permissions for a domain.
The Select Domain dialog box appears.
2. Click the browse button to select the domain source.
3. Select the domain, then type * after the selection in Source IP, to ensure that
the domain includes everything.
4. Click <Set> in the Select Source dialog box.
The Select Source dialog box closes.
5. Click <Set> again in the Select Domain dialog box.
The domain appears in the left pane.

Figure 6-13. Domain

6. Drag available permissions from the right pane to the domain in the left
pane.
7. If necessary, right-click the domain and select one of the following:
 Add All – Add an All permission with Write access rights ( ) to the
domain
 Add Instance – Add an instance of the nodes in the domain
 Move Up – Move the domain up
 Move Down – Move the domain down.

 To delete a permission:
1. In the Profile view, select a permission or a folder item.

2. Click Delete.
The selected item is deleted.

Note You cannot delete permissions from a base profile.

Basic Permissions
Figure 6-14 shows the basic permissions displayed in the right pane of the
Security Administrator:
• audit_perm – Group of labels for audit functions
• global_perm – Group of labels for global functions

6-14 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

• admin – Tree of labels for Admin Console functions, including jobs and
configuration management, log, maintenance management, ner and pm
(RADview Performance Portal as illustrated in Figure 6-15).
• business_entity – Tree of labels for Business Entities workspace
• catalog – Tree of labels for the catalog functions, such as catalog creation,
catalog CoS view etc.
• config – Tree of labels for general configuration functions including SC-TDM
and device-specific functions. Each device tree contains labels for
device-specific functions, grouped for technician, monitor, and operator
profiles.
• fault – Tree of labels for Event Browser functions (see Figure 6-15)
• launchdesk – Labels for LaunchDesk/Network Element Manager functions
(see Figure 6-15)
• legacy_roles – Group of labels to allow access to legacy applications and
devices (see Figure 6-15)
• resources – Tree of labels for Resources workspaces
• service –Tree of labels for service creation, updating, provisioning,
unprovisioning, activation, deactivation
• topology – Tree of labels for Topology Entities workspace
• transport – Tree of labels for Transport workspace.
For further information on permission tags, refer to Table 6-3.

Note You can create permission files containing permission tags to provide security for
third-party applications such as external tools added to the RADview Network
Manager, by creating a file in C:\RV32\ems\admin\security (in the same format as
the existing files in the folder), and loading it as specified in Manually Loading
Security Profiles.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-15

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Figure 6-14. Edit Profile View with Profile and Basic Permissions

6-16 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Figure 6-15. Basic Permissions – Expanded

Permission Tags
The following table shows the functionality granted by the various permission
tags in the permission groups.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-17

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Table 6-3. Root Folder - Security Profile Permission Tags

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

Group: audit_perm Audit permissions

Audit Currently unused

AUDIT_operations Auditing for any Set operations

Group: global_perm General permissions

ADMIN_GrabRWMode Grabbing read-write mode when launching a device shelf view

application. When two or more users try to work with the same
device, only one user can have read-write access. Additional
users have read-only access. When the second user launches
the shelf view application, he gets an indication that another
user has already launched the shelf view application for this
device and currently has read-write access. The second user has
the option to grab the read-write access from the first user, if
the setting of this permission tag is Write.

ElaborateTable_SaveCommonSettings Pressing the SaveCommonSettings in table dialogs where

applicable.

ElaborateTable_RemoveCommonSettings Pressing the RemoveCommonSettings in table dialogs where

applicable.

ElaborateTable_RemoveDialogSettings Pressing the RemoveDialogSettings in table dialogs where

applicable.

ElaborateTable_RemoveAllSettings Pressing the RemoveAllSettings in table dialogs where

applicable.

Table 6-4. admin Folder – Administration Profile Permission Tags

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

Group: ADMINperm Admin Console permissions

ADMIN_security Access to Security Administration Console.

ADMIN_fault Access to Fault Service console

ADMIN_ner Access to Ner Explorer console

ADMIN_log Access to Log Admin console

ADMIN_monitoring Access to monitoring

Group: tools_perm Application permissions

TOOLS_SystemConsole Opening the System Console

TOOLS_AdminConsole Opening the Admin Console

TOOLS_ZTConsole Opening the Zero Touch application

TOOLS_LogViewer Opening the Log Viewer

TOOLS_Inventory Opening the Net Inventory application

TOOLS_EventBrowser Opening the Event Browser

6-18 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

TOOLS_VersionBrowser Opening the Version Browser

TOOLS_SnmpSpy Opening the Snmp Spy

TOOLS_LicenseManager Opening the License Manager

TOOLS_SNMPv3Manager Opening the SNMPv3 Manager

Group: tools_perm_admin Application permissions

TOOLS_RADiflowIServer Opening the RADiflow iServer application (if SIS products are
installed)

Group: tools_perm_operator Application permissions

TOOLS_RADiflowISIM Opening the RADiflow iSIM application (if SIS products are
installed)

Table 6-5. admin/jobs Folder – Jobs Profile Permission Tags

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

Group: Jobs_action_perm Admin job permissions

download_configuration Download configuration

download_software Download software

download_software_from_backup Download software from backup

download_user_file Download user file

collect_statistics Collect statistics

upload_configuration Upload configuration file

upload_software Upload software

upload_software_to_backup Upload software from backup

upload_user_file Upload user file

execute_script Execute CLI script

swap_main_and_backup_software Swap main and backup software

reboot Reboot device

activate Activate configuration file

reboot_after_action Reboot device after action

download_log Download log file

install_sw Install software

rollback_sw Rollback software

rollback_config Rollback configuration file

save_config Save configuration

statistics_report Generate statistics report

RADview Managing Permissions 6-19

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

customizable_report Generate customizable report

download_auxiliary_file Download MAC table or other specified file

execute_snmp_script Execute scripts for MP-2100/2104

upload_license Upload a license file

Group: Jobs_files_perm Admin job permissions for file operations

archive_files_delete Delete archived configuration file

archive_files_view View, print, or save archived configuration file

archive_files_operate Mark as baseline or unmark as baseline

sw_file_create Import software file version

sw_file_modify Modify properties of software file version

sw_file_delete Delete software file version

sw_file_view View properties of software file version, export software file

version

sw_file_operate Mark software file version as obsolete or valid

Group: Jobs_perm Admin job operation permissions

job_accessible Type of access allowed to job

job_create Create or copy job

job_modify Modify job

job_delete Delete job

job_operate Run, stop, activate, deactivate, or cancel job

job_view View job parameters or progress

report_view View, print, or save job report

report_ delete Delete job report

Table 6-6. admin/log Folder – Log Permission Tags

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

Group: Log_perm Log permissions

LOG_delete Delete a log entry

Table 6-7. admin/maintenance Folder – Maintenance Permission Tags

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

Group: Maintenance_perm Maintenance permissions

maintenance_accessible

maintenance_create

6-20 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

maintenance_modify

maintenance_delete

maintenance_operate

maintenance_view

instances_view

instances_delete

Note
This section refers to EMS Maintenance, a functionality to be implemented in the
future.

Table 6-8. admin/ner Folder – NER Permission Tags

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

Group: Ner_perm NER Explorer permissions

ENTRY_accessible Entry in the NER Explorer is accessible

ENTRY_create Create/add an entry in the NER Explorer

ENTRY_rename Rename an entry in the NER Explorer

ENTRY_remove Remove an entry in the NER explorer

ATTRIBUTE_create Create an attribute in the NER explorer

ATTRIBUTE_modify Modify an attribute in the NER explorer

ATTRIBUTE_remove Remove an attribute in the NER explorer

Table 6-9. admin/pm Folder – Performance Monitor Permission Tags

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

Group: pm_perm Performance management permissions

pm_accessible Allow access

pm_create Add new policy

pm_modify Modify policy data/settings

pm_delete Delete policy

pm_view View policy

Group: web_pm_portal Web-based RADview performance portal permissions

portal_accessible Allow login to RADview performance portal

dashboards_view View policy dashboard window

eth_reports_view View Eth Reports window

charts_view View graphs

ner_view View NER tab

RADview Managing Permissions 6-21

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

customers_view View customer tab

policies_view View policies tab

Table 6-10. business-entity Folder – Business Entity Permission Tags

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

Group: Business_entity_perm Business Entities workspace permissions

BUSINESS_ENTITY_options_set Modify business entity options

Table 6-11. business-entity/customer Folder – Customer Permission Tags

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

Group: Customers_perm Customer permissions (Business Entities workspace)

CUSTOMER_view View customer data

CUSTOMER_create Create new customer

CUSTOMER_update Modify customer data

CUSTOMER_delete Delete customer

Table 6-12. business-entity/provider Folder – Provider Permission Tags

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

Group: Customers_perm Customer permissions (Business Entities workspace)

PROVIDER_view View provider data

PROVIDER _create Create new provider

PROVIDER _update Modify provider data

PROVIDER _delete Delete provider

Table 6-13. catalog Folder – Catalog Permission Tags

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

Group: Catalog_perm Catalog permissions

CATALOG_view View catalog

CATALOG_cos_view View CoS catalog entries

CATALOG_create Create catalog

CATALOG_update Update catalog

CATALOG_delete Delete catalog

Table 6-14. config Folder – Permission For Configuring Devices using Shelf View

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

6-22 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

Group: config_perm Configuration permissions

Zoom Launching device shelf view application

All_Print Pressing <Print> in applications

All_SaveToFile Pressing <SaveToFile> in applications

Group: SCTDM_perm SC-TDM permissions

PM_PathConfig Node access permission [i.e. Read, Write, Disable] configuration

for Service Center TDM.

Note
This table lists and explains general shelf view permission tags. In addition, this
folder contains all permission tags for configuring the agents. These tags are self-
explaining and therefore not listed here.

Table 6-15. fault Folder – Permission For Configuring Devices using Shelf View

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

Group: Fault_perm Event Browser permissions

EVENT_clearEvents Clear events in the Event Browser

EVENT_remove Remove events in the Event Browser

EVENT_acknowledge Acknowledge an event in the Event Browser

EVENT_unacknowledge Unacknowledge an event in the Event Browser

EVENT_clear Clear an event in the Event Browser (operation no longer

supported in Event Browser)

EVENT_unclear Unclear an event in the Event Browser (operation no longer

supported in Event Browser)

EVENT_noteCreate Create an event note in the Event Browser

EVENT_noteModify Modify an event note in the Event Browser

EVENT_noteRemove Remove an event note in the Event Browser

Table 6-16. launchdesk Folder – Permission For Configuring Devices using Shelf View

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

Group: ld_perm LaunchDesk / Network Element Manager permissions

NODE_sync Performing Sync

NODE_import Importing nodes

NODE_telnet Connecting to nodes via Telnet

NODE_webconfig Connecting to nodes via Web browser

NODE_ping Sending ping to nodes

NODE_traceroute Performing traceroute for nodes

RADview Managing Permissions 6-23

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

NODE_poll Polling nodes

NODE_add Adding nodes

NODE_change Changing node properties

NODE_remove Removing nodes

NER_context Accessing node NER context

GROUP_PUBLIC_add Creating new public static or dynamic group

Creating new level in public group tree
Pasting public group

GROUP_PUBLIC_change Viewing and changing public group properties

GROUP_PUBLIC_remove Deleting or cutting public group

GROUP_SHARED_add Creating new shared static or dynamic group

Creating new level in shared group tree
Pasting shared group

GROUP_SHARED_change Viewing and changing shared group properties

GROUP_SHARED_remove Deleting or cutting shared group

GROUP_SHARED_accessibility Accessing shared group

GROUP_PRIVATE_add Creating new private static or dynamic group

Creating new level in private group tree
Pasting private group

GROUP_PRIVATE_change Viewing and changing private group properties

GROUP_PRIVATE_remove Deleting or cutting private group

SYSTEM_config The Master server address or name cannot be changed

Table 6-17. legacy_roles Folder – Permissions For Different User Levels

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

legacy_roles_perm_monitor Access permissions for Monitor users

Monitor Allowing access for user with Monitor-based profile to legacy

applications such as Net Inventory and to legacy network
elements (refer to list of legacy devices in the RADview release
note)

legacy_roles_perm_operator Access permissions for Operator users

Operator Allowing access for user with Operator-based profile to legacy

applications such as Net Inventory and to legacy network
elements (refer to list of legacy devices in the RADview release
note)

legacy_roles_perm_technician Access permissions for Technician users

6-24 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

Technician Allowing access for user with Technician-based profile to legacy

applications such as Net Inventory and to legacy network
network elements (refer to list of legacy devices in the RADview
release note)

Table 6-18. resources Folder – Permissions For Resources

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

Group: Resource_perm Resources workspace permissions

RESOURCE_view View resources

RESOURCE_update Change resources

RESOURCE_createInbandManagement Use the resource for inband management

RESOURCE_removeInbandManagement Remove inband management from the resource

Table 6-19. service Folder – Permissions For Services

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

Group: Service_perm Service workspace permissions

SERVICE_view View a service

SERVICE_design Complete the service wizard with designing the service

SERVICE_update Update/edit a service

SERVICE_delete Delete a service

SERVICE_provision Complete the service wizard with designing and provisioning the
service

SERVICE_unprovision Unprovision a service

SERVICE_activate Complete the service wizard with dsigning provisioning and

activating the service

SERVICE_deactivate Deactivate a service

SERVICE_discovery Discover a service

SERVICE_y1564_test Test a service according to Y.1564

Table 6-20. topology Folder – Permissions For Links

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

Group: Topology_perm Topology workspace permissions

LINK_create Create new link in the Topology workspace

LINK_update Make changes in the Topology workspace

LINK_delete Delete entity in the Topology workspace

LINK_view View link properties in the Topology workspace

RADview Managing Permissions 6-25

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Table 6-21. transport Folder – Permissions For Rings and Tunnels

Permission Tag Functionality Controlled

Group: Transport_ring_perm Topology workspace permissions

ETH_RING_discover Discover existing Ethernet ring

ETH_RING_create Add a ring to the Ethernet Rings list

ETH_RING_update Update an existing Ethernet ring

ETH_RING_delete Delete an Ethernet ring from the Ethernet Rings list

ETH_RING_view View an Ethernet ring

Group: Transport_tunnel_perm Topology workspace permissions

TUNNEL_create Create a tunnel

TUNNEL_update Update an existing tunnel

TUNNEL_delete Delete a tunnel

TUNNEL_view View a tunnel

Action Security Permissions

The following tables show the security tag and permission level required for the
corresponding applications and actions.

Table 6-22. Network Element Repository

Action Security Tag Permission level

Shelf view config/config_perm/Zoom READ

Poll launchdesk/ld_perm/NODE_poll WRITE

Web Browser launchdesk/ld_perm/NODE_webconfig READ

Telnet/SSH launchdesk/ld_perm/NODE_telnet READ

Ping launchdesk/NODE_ping READ

Trace Route launchdesk/ld_perm/NODE_traceroute READ

New Level, New NE, New NEs launchdesk/ld_perm/NODE_add WRITE

Cut, Copy, Paste, Properties, Trap launchdesk/ld_perm/NODE_change WRITE

Sync Groups

Delete launchdesk/ld_perm/NODE_remove WRITE

Node accessibility admin/ner/Ner_perm/ENTRY_accessible READ

Active Alarms, Refresh, Locate on -- --

Map

6-26 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Table 6-23. Public Group Tree

Action Security Tag Permission level

New Static Group launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_PUBLIC_add WRITE

New Dynamic Group launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_PUBLIC_add WRITE

New Level launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_PUBLIC_add WRITE

Remove launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_PUBLIC_remove WRITE

Paste launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_PUBLIC_add WRITE

Cut launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_PUBLIC_remove WRITE

Properties launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_PUBLIC_change WRITE

Table 6-24. Shared Group Tree

Action Security Tag Permission level

New Static Group launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_SHARED_add WRITE

New Dynamic Group launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_SHARED_add WRITE

New Level launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_SHARED_add WRITE

Remove launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_SHARED_remove WRITE

Paste launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_SHARED_add WRITE

Cut launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_SHARED_remove WRITE

Properties launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_SHARED_change WRITE

Table 6-25. Private Group Tree

Action Security Tag Permission level

New Static Group launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_PRIVATE_add WRITE

New Dynamic Group launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_PRIVATE_add WRITE

New Level launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_PRIVATE_add WRITE

Remove launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_PRIVATE_remove WRITE

Paste launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_PRIVATE_add WRITE

Cut launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_PRIVATE_remove WRITE

Properties launchdesk/ld_perm/GROUP_PRIVATE_change WRITE

RADview Managing Permissions 6-27

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Table 6-26. All Group Trees

Action Security Tag Permission level

Shelf view config/config_perm/Zoom READ

Poll launchdesk/ld_perm/NODE_poll WRITE

Web Browser launchdesk/ld_perm/NODE_webconfig READ

Telnet/SSH launchdesk/ld_perm/NODE_telnet READ

Ping launchdesk/ld_perm/NODE_ping READ

Trace Route launchdesk/ld_perm/NODE_traceroute READ

Trap Sync Groups launchdesk/ld_perm/NODE_change WRITE

Nodes accessibility admin/ner/Ner_perm/ENTRY_accessible READ

Active Alarms, Refresh, Locate -- --

on Map

Table 6-27. Software File Management

Action Security Tag Permission level

Import admin/jobs/Jobs_files_perm/sw_file_create WRITE

Export, Properties (view only) admin/jobs/Jobs_files_perm/sw_file_view READ

Properties admin/jobs/Jobs_files_perm/sw_file_modify WRITE

Close -- --

Delete admin/jobs/Jobs_files_perm/sw_file_delete WRITE

Mark as Obsolete, Mark as Valid admin/jobs/Jobs_files_perm/sw_file_operate WRITE

Table 6-28. Jobs

Action Security Tag Permission level

1
New, Copy admin/jobs/Jobs_perm/job_create READ
2
New, Copy admin/jobs/Jobs_perm/job_create WRITE
3
Edit admin/jobs/Jobs_perm/job_modify READ

Edit, Set Properties admin/jobs/Jobs_perm/job_modify WRITE

Delete admin/jobs/Jobs_perm/job_delete WRITE

Run, Stop, Activate, Deactivate, admin/jobs/Jobs_perm/job_operate WRITE

Cancel

Show Progress admin/jobs/Jobs_perm/job_view READ

View Reports admin/jobs/Jobs_perm/report_view READ

6-28 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Action Security Tag Permission level

Job accessibility admin/jobs/Jobs_perm/job_accessible READ

Job report accessibility
Job archive file accessibility

• With read permission user can open the wizard to define a job, but can’t
create it. Pressing <Finish> is allowed only with write permission.
• Security is checked only upon pressing <Finish> in job wizard.
• With read permission user can open the wizard to view the job, but can’t
modify it. Pressing <Finish> is allowed only with write permission.

Table 6-29. Job Creation Wizard

Action Security Tag Permission level

Job Action admin/jobs/Jobs_action_perm/download_configuration WRITE

admin/jobs/Jobs_action_perm/download_software WRITE

Notes admin/jobs/Jobs_action_perm/download_software_from_backup WRITE

admin/jobs/Jobs_action_perm/download_user_file WRITE

admin/jobs/Jobs_action_perm/upload_configuration WRITE

admin/jobs/Jobs_action_perm/upload_software WRITE

admin/jobs/Jobs_action_perm/upload_software_to_backup WRITE

admin/jobs/Jobs_action_perm/upload_user_file WRITE

admin/jobs/Jobs_action_perm/execute_script WRITE

admin/jobs/Jobs_action_perm/swap_main_and_backup_software WRITE

admin/jobs/Jobs_action_perm/reboot WRITE

admin/jobs/Jobs_action_perm/activate WRITE

admin/jobs/Jobs_action_perm/reboot_after_action WRITE

Table 6-30. Reports

Action Security Tag Permission level

Open, Save, Print admin/jobs/Jobs_perm/report_view READ

Delete admin/jobs/Jobs_perm/report_delete WRITE

Properties -- --

RADview Managing Permissions 6-29

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Table 6-31. Configuration Archive

Application Action Security Tag Permission

Component level

Configuration View Files admin/jobs/Jobs_files_perm/archive_files_view READ

Status
Properties --

Archive Files View, Save, Print admin/jobs/Jobs_files_perm/archive_files_view READ

Delete admin/jobs/Jobs_files_perm/archive_files_delete WRITE

Upload admin/jobs/Jobs_perm/job_create WRITE

Properties -- --

Mark as baseline, admin/jobs/Jobs_files_perm/archive_files_operate WRITE

Unmark as baseline

Table 6-32. Performance Management

Application Action Security Tag Permission level

Component

Policy Settings Add new policy admin/pm/pm_perm/pm_create WRITE

dialog box
Change policy admin/pm/pm_perm/pm_modify WRITE
Policies dialog settings
box
Change policy
Policies
Policies assignment
Assignment to
OAM Services Delete policy admin/pm/pm_perm/pm_delete WRITE
dialog box

PM Portal Login to the PM admin/pm/web_pm_portal/portal_accessible WRITE

Portal

View the dashboard admin/pm/web_pm_portal/dashboards_view READ

panel

View the ETH reports admin/pm/web_pm_portal/eth_reports_view READ

panel

View statistics data admin/pm/web_pm_portal/charts_view READ

graphs

View NER tab admin/pm/web_pm_portal/ner_view READ

View Customers tab admin/pm/web_pm_portal/customers_view READ

View Policies tab admin/pm/web_pm_portal/policies_view READ

View Policy admin/pm/pm_perm/pm_view READ

6-30 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Manually Loading Security Profiles

The EMS server automatically loads security profiles after performing a setup or
upgrade. However, if you need to manually load a security profile, follow the
instructions below.

 To manually load a basic security profile (permissions):

1. In the EMS Security Administrator window (see Figure 6-3), select Profile >
Load...
The Load Basic Profile dialog box opens (see Figure 6-16).
2. Select the permission file(s) that you want to load. If you want to choose
more than one file, press and hold the <Ctrl> key and select the required
files. Each of the files contain all the security labels of the category
represented by its name. For a list of security types, refer to Basic
Permissions for a list of the security types.
3. Click <Load>.

Figure 6-16. Load Basic Profile Dialog Box

Note All permission files must be loaded before you perform the first Add/Edit Profile
or Add/Edit User.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-31

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Adding Profiles
You can add new security profiles based on existing security profiles and then
modify them. You can also add security profiles and assign permissions ‘from
scratch’.
In addition to a new profile, you have to add a new user based on the new
profile. This way, you may create a user group that has limited access based on
the permission granted to the new profile.

Notes • Never delete the root user.

• Although you can add new profiles ‘from scratch’, it is recommended to create
profiles based on existing (base) profiles.

 To add a new profile based on an exiting profile (base profile):

1. In the EMS Security Administrator window (see Figure 6-3), select Profile >
Add...
The Add Profile dialog box appears.

Figure 6-17. Add Profile Dialog Box

2. Under Profile Name, assign a name to the new profile.
3. Under Profile Description, enter a description (optional).
4. Under Base Profile, select the profile on which you wish to base the new
profile.
In this example, the new profile is based on Operator. Profiles can be based
on one of the built-in or previously added profiles.
5. Click <Continue>.
The Add <New Profile Name> Profile dialog box appears (see
Figure 6-18).

6-32 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Figure 6-18. Add <New Profile Name> Profile Dialog Box – Base Profile Operator

 To verify that the permissions from the base profile were adapted:
1. In the Add <New Profile Name> Profile dialog box, click launchdesk in the left
side column (Profile) and the right side column (Basic Permission).
The permissions displayed for the base profile and the new profile are
displayed and matching (see Figure 6-19).

RADview Managing Permissions 6-33

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Figure 6-19. Add <New Profile Name> Profile Dialog Box – Base Permissions

2. Change permissions as desired for the new profile on the left side as
explained under Working with Permissions.
3. Click <Set>.
The new profile is added under the associated base profile (in this case
Operator).

6-34 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Figure 6-20. New Profile Added Based on Operator

Table 6-33. Add Profile Parameters

Parameter Possible Values / Remarks

Profile Name Profile name

Description Description of new profile

Base Profile Profiles can be used as a base for the new one. The list below shows and
explains the built-in (legacy) profiles:
• Administrator – Has unlimited access to all operations including User
Administration
• Operator – Has full Write mode and access to the Network Manager and
System Console. The Admin Console allows for editing only
• Technician – Has limited access to configuration operations, and
Read-only mode for Event Browser
• Monitor – Read-only mode for configuration operations, and no access to
other applications
• None
Note: Any existing profile can be used as a base for a new profile. You can
also select None to create a completely new profile.

<Continue…> Opens the Add <New Profile Name> Profile dialog box (see Figure 6-18)

 To create a new profile not based on an existing profile:

1. Follow the instructions provided for adding users based on an existing profile.
The Add Profile dialog box appears.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-35

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Figure 6-21. Add Profile Dialog Box (No Base Profile)

2. Under Base Profile, select None and then click <Continue>.
The Add Profile dialog box appears with the left (Profile) column empty
(see Figure 6-22). You have to assign permissions to this user from
scratch.

Figure 6-22. Profile, not based on existing Profile – Profile Column Empty

6-36 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

3. Build the desired profile of permissions as explained under Working with

Permissions.
4. Click <Set>.
The new profile is added in the root directory of the Profile Tree.

Figure 6-23. New Profile Added (No Base Profile)

Editing Profiles

 To edit a profile:
1. From the EMS Security Administrator toolbar, select Profile > Edit.
The Edit Profile dialog box is displayed (see Figure 6-24).
2. Make the desired changes as explained under Working with Permissions.
3. Click <Set>.
The profile is updated.

Notes • If you are logged on as a user without Administrator rights, <Set> is

unavailable and the profile cannot be saved.
• You cannot edit your own profile properties.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-37

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Figure 6-24. Edit Profile Dialog Box

Removing Profiles

Note Profiles can only be removed if a profile is selected in the profiles tree, if the
profile is not mandatory, and if the profile does not have any users attached.

 To remove a profile:
1. In the EMS Security Administrator window, select Profile > Remove.
The Confirm Profile Removal dialog box is displayed (see Figure 6-25).
2. Click <OK>.

Figure 6-25. Confirm Profile Removal Dialog Box

Configuring Security Domains

You can create and define user groups (domains) to set up profiles that allow the
associated users to view only pre-defined NEs as outlined below.

6-38 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Example
Domains such as Group1, Group2 and Group3 can be set up and only certain
units are made visible to them according to pre-defined criteria. The names
Group# could stand for the names of companies who receive services from a
provider. The people from Group1, Group2 and Group 3 are able to see ‘their
parts’ of the network only. In addition, specific restrictions can be applied and
permissions granted for the Group1 and Group2 profiles respectively.
To set up a profile, you have to follow the checklist below compiled for Group3 as
example.
• Create a dynamic group called Group3 under Shared in the Groups tree and
specify the NEs that can be viewed.
• Create a new profile to view the NEs of Group3 only.
• Create a user based on Group3.

Note In order to identify a group of NEs, it is recommended to assign names to the

relevant NEs with a mutual section, for example Group3 in
Group3_172.17.152.91, Group3_ETX-26 or ETX-26_Group3.

Creating a New Dynamic Group

You first have to add a dynamic group. This example adds Group3 to the already-
existing Group1 and Group2 under Shared.
Once the group is created, Group3 includes all devices across the levels of which
Group3 is part of the name.

Figure 6-26. Map with Group1 and Group2

RADview Managing Permissions 6-39

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

 To add Group3 as dynamic user group under Shared:

1. On the map, rename the desired NEs to Group3-<Name>, for example
Group3-<IP address as used in this example>.

2. Right-click Shared and select New Dynamic Group from the shortcut menu
that appears.
You are asked to define criteria for the new group (see Figure 6-28).

Figure 6-27. Adding a New Dynamic Group

3. For this example, define the following:
 Under Group Name, enter Group3.
 Under Criterion, select NE Name and select And.
 Under Condition, select Starts With or Contains.
 Under Value, select Group3.

Note • You cannot use wildcats and place holders such as the star (‘*’). To look for
NEs with a mutual section in the name, you have to always use Contain if the
mutual section is anywhere in the name or Start With if the mutual section
marks the beginning of the name.
• Names are case sensitive. Therefore, the relevant parts of the names must be
case sensitive when defining the criteria.
• Spaces and special characters are not allowed in names.

4. Click <Add> to apply the criterion for this group.

The criterion is now listed as illustrated in Figure 6-28.

6-40 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Figure 6-28. Specifying Criteria for the New Group – Group3

5. Click <Set> to add the new group.
The Properties dialog box with the criterion closes and the relevant NEs
are listed under Group3 as illustrated in Figure 6-29.

Figure 6-29. Devices Listed in the Dynamic Group – Group3 in this Example

Creating a New Security Profile

Once the group is defined, you now create a security profile and set it up so that
only this group is visible.

Note In this section, dialogs are illustrated for Windows, but they are identical to the
ones for Linux and Unix except for the frame around them.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-41

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

 To create a security profile:

1. From the RADview Manager menu, select Tools > Admin Console .
The Admin Console appears.
2. In the Admin Console’s navigation pane, select Security Service.
The Profiles tree appears with existing security profiles listed as
illustrated in Figure 6-30.

Figure 6-30. EMS Admin Console: EMS Security Administrator – With Already Added Profiles
3. From the menu, select Profile > Add.
The Add Profile dialog box appears.
4. In the Add Profile dialog box, enter the following:
 Under Profile Name, assign a name to your profile,
for example OnlyGroup3-Monitor.
 Enter a description (optional).
 Under Base Profile, select Monitor from the drop-down list to base the
new profile on the default Monitor profile.

Note This specific example bases the new profile on Monitor. You can base new
profiles on any built-in default profile or previously added profiles.

6-42 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Figure 6-31. Adding a Profile

5. Click <Continue>.
The Profile view appears and you can now edit the permissions.

Figure 6-32. Adding a Profile – Permission Profile

RADview Managing Permissions 6-43

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

 To edit the permission profile to hide everything except for Group3:

1. On the left side, under Profile, expand admin and launchdesk.
2. In the expanded admin folder, expand ner and scroll down to see both the
expanded ner and the expanded launchdesk groups.
The dialog box looks as illustrated in Figure 6-33.

Note
The base profile is Monitor, therefore all permissions are set to Read

Figure 6-33. Adding a Profile – Permission Profile – launchdesk, admin, and ner Folders Expanded

6-44 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

3. To hide non-Group3 NEs in the Network Elements Repository (NER),

under ner, set ENTRY_accessible to No Access .
4. To hide the unrelated shared groups, under, set GROUP_SHARED_acessibility
to No Access .

Figure 6-34. Adding a Profile – ENTRY_accessible and GROUP_SHARED_acessibility set to No Access

5. To associate Group3 NEs with Group3 and enable access to them, create a
share domain in the launchdesk group. To do so, right-click launchdesk
and select Add Domain… from the shortcut menu as illustrated in Figure 6-
35.
The Select Domain dialog box appears (Figure 6-36).

RADview Managing Permissions 6-45

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Figure 6-35. Adding a Profile – Adding a Domain

6-46 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Figure 6-36. Adding a Profile – Select Domain Dialog Box

6. In the Select Domain dialog box, under Domain, enter /Shared/Group3 and
then click <Set>.
The Select Domain dialog box closes. The new domain is now listed in the
Profile tree under launchdesk as illustrated in Figure 6-37 and you can
add access permissions.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-47

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Figure 6-37. Adding a Profile –Domain Added

 To add access permissions to the share domain for Group3:

1. In the Edit Profile dialog, under Basic Permissions on the right side, expand
launchdesk.

The Id_perm group permission appears.

6-48 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

2. Select Id_perm.

Permissions associated with Id_perm appear under

‘Id_perm’Permissions.
3. From ‘Id_perm’Permissions, drag GROUP_SHARED_accessibility to the domain
/Shared/Group3 as illustrated below.
Access permission has been granted to the Group3 NEs.

Figure 6-38. Adding a Profile –Dragging GROUP_SHARED_acessibility to the Domain

RADview Managing Permissions 6-49

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Figure 6-39. Adding a Profile – GROUP_SHARED_acessibility Added to the Domain

After granting access permissions to the Group3 NEs, you have to add domains
to the ner group to display them in Group3 under Shared and in their respective
levels in the NER and assign access permission to each one of them as well.

6-50 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

 To add a domain and permissions to display the associated NEs in Group3:

1. Under Profile on the left side, navigate to admin/ ner.
2. Right-click ner and select Add NEs Domain… from the shortcut menu.
The Select Domain dialog box appears.
3. In the Select Domain dialog box, enter *Group3* as illustrated in Figure 6-40.

Figure 6-40. Adding *Group3* Domain

4. Click <Set>.
The domain is added under ner. You have to add the required
permissions now.
5. Under Basic Permissions on the right side, under admin/ ner, select the
group permission Ner_perm.

Permissions (single labels) that belong to Ner_perm appear under

‘Ner_perm’Permissions.

6. From ‘Ner_perm’Permissions, drag ENTRY_accessible to *Group3*.

Figure 6-41 illustrates how the profile has to look now.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-51

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Figure 6-41. Adding a Profile – ENTRY_acessibility Added to the Domain

To display the NEs associated with Group3 in the NER as well, you have to add a
domain for every level in which a Group3 NE resides and allow access.
In this example, Group3 NEs reside in the levels 172.17.152.1 and 172.17.152.1.
If you are not sure where they reside in your installation, run a search to locate
them as explained under Searching in Topology Panes in Chapter 3.

Note It is recommended to use systematic level names, such as names or locations of

units or part of the IP address range as illustrated for the example used in this
section.

6-52 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

 To add domains for levels that hold Group-3 NEs in the NER:
1. Under Profile on the left side, navigate to admin/ ner.
2. Right-click ner and select Add NEs Domain… from the shortcut menu.
The Select Domain dialog box appears.
3. In the Select Domain dialog box, click <…>.
The Select Source dialog box appears listing all the levels in the NER.
In the Select Source Domain dialog box, select 172.17.152.1. The level appears
listed under Source IP as illustrated in Figure 6-42.

Figure 6-42. Adding a Source for the Domain

4. Click <Set>.
You are returned to the Add Profile dialog box.
5. Click <Set> again.
The /172.17.152.1 domain is added.
6. Repeat this procedure for 172.17.155.1.
The /172.17.155.1 domain is added.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-53

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

7. Under Basic Permissions on the right side, under admin/ ner, select the
group permission Ner_perm.

Permissions that belong to Ner_perm appear under

‘Ner_perm’Permissions.

8. From ‘Ner_perm’Permissions, drag ENTRY_accessible to 172.17.152.1.

and then to 172.17.152.1.
The profile looks now as illustrated in Figure 6-43. The new domains and
the added permissions are highlighted yellow.

Figure 6-43. Group3 Profile

6-54 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

9. Click <Set>.
The profile dialog closes and the new profile is now listed in the Profiles
Tree of the EMS Security Administrator as illustrated in Figure 6-44.

Figure 6-44. Group3 Profile Added to the Profiles Tree

Group3 is now the only dynamic user group displayed and only the levels with
Group3 NEs appear in the NER when logging on as a user associated with this
profile (OnlyGroup3-Monitor).
In the next step, you have to define a user that is associated with
OnlyGroup3-Monitor.

Creating a User Based on the New Profile

This section explains how to add a user based on OnlyGroup3-Monitor, the new
profile added according to the example above. This user can view the NEs under
Group3 and has the access rights you may define.

 To add a user based on OnlyGroup3-Monitor:

1. In the EMS Security Administrator, from the menu, select User > Add…
The Add User dialog box appears.
2. Specify the following:
 User Name –Enter for example Group3-Monitor. The example above uses
Group3, which is based on a Monitor profile.
 Description – Add a short note associated with this user.
 Profile – Select the profile from the drop-down list on which the new user
is based. In this example it is OnlyGroup3-Monitor.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-55

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

 Password – Assign a password.

 Confirm Password – Confirm the selected password.
 Temporary Login – Check this option to enable this option and then
under Expired At, select the expiry date for this user. This option may be
useful to grant a temporary team member access for one month for
example.
If disabled, the user does not expire and must be manually removed, if no
longer wanted.
3. Click <Set>.
The new user is added.

Figure 6-45. Adding a User – Based on the OnlyGroup3-Monitor Profile

 To verify the new profile by logging on as the just-created user ‘Group3-Monitor’:

1. In the RADview Network Manager, from the menu, select Logout.

You are logged off the RADview Network Manager.
2. Log in again as Group3-Monitor.
The RADview Network Manager appears with only the Group3 Shared
Group and the associated NEs showing in the NER as illustrated in
Figure 6-46. The relevant sections are highlighted yellow.

6-56 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Figure 6-46. EMS Network Manager – Topology View for Group3 Profile and User ‘Group3-Monitor’

Restricting Job Permissions

You can set up profiles that allow specific tasks (job actions) for all NEs, as well
as profiles that allow specific tasks for specific NEs.

Restricting Job Permissions to All NEs

This procedure explains how to block tasks for users logged on as users based on
a specific previously added security profile. The tasks to be excluded are the
following ones:
• Downloading configuration
• Deleting a job
• Any task on software version files.

 To create a profile:
1. Log in as root
2. Open the EMS Admin Console and create a new profile called WD_Operator.
 Under Description, enter WD profile for this example. For instructions on
opening the EMS Admin Console and starting to create a profile, refer to
Creating a New Security Profile.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-57

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

3. Once you assigned the name and entered a description, click <Continue>.
The Add WD_Operator Profile dialog box appears.
4. If the job group permission tags (highlighted yellow in the example below) are
not in the Profile pane, drag them to it from the Basic Permissions pane:

Figure 6-47. Add <Profile Name> Dialog Box – Basic Permissions

The admin/ jobs tree with the respective single labels appears in
the Profile pane.
5. Change the access for the single labels as follows:

 Double-click job_delete tag to change its permission to Read.

 Double-click download_configuration tag to change its permission to
Read.
 Double-click all sw_file tags twice to change their permissions to
No Access.
The final result is illustrated in Figure 6-48.
6. Click <Set> to save the profile.

6-58 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Figure 6-48. Security Profile ‘WD_Operator’

 To verify the profile:

1. Create a user based on the WD_Operator profile and name him WD_Operator.
For instructions on creating a user based on a profile, refer to the
instructions under Creating a User Based on the New Profile.
The user WD_Operator is added.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-59

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Figure 6-49. Security Profile ‘WD_Operator’ and User Callled ‘WD_Operator’

2. Log in as WD_Operator.

3. In the work space selection area, select Jobs.

The Job Table appears.

4. Click New Job…

The Job wizard appears.
5. Select an NE that supports downloading a configuration and click <Next>.
You are asked to select the task.
For detailed instructions on selecting NEs and selecting the task, refer to
Creating Jobs in Chapter 4.
6. Select Download Configuration as task and click <Next>.
The status bar of the job wizard displays Download Configuration:
Action is not authorized as illustrated in Figure 6-50.

6-60 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Figure 6-50. Download Configuration Not Authorized

7. Cancel the wizard and try to delete a job from the Job Table.
Access Denied is displayed as illustrated in Figure 6-51.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-61

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Figure 6-51. Deleting Job – Access Denied

8. Try to add a software version file.
Access Denied is displayed as illustrated in Figure 6-52.

6-62 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Figure 6-52. Upload Software – Access Denied

Restricting Job Permissions to Specific NEs

This example assumes that the RADview Network Manager has the following
sublevels defined:
• ETX-204A - contains an NE named 172.18.159.121
• ETX-203A – contains two NEs named 172.18.159.129 and 172.18.159.130.
The following restrictions should apply:
• No permission to download software for the NE named 172.18.159.121 in
the ETX-204A sublevel
• No permission to upload a configuration to the NEs in the ETX-203A sublevel.

 To edit the profile to implement the restrictions defined above:

1. Log in as root.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-63

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

2. In the EMS Security Administrator window (see Figure 6-3), right-click the
profile called WD_Profile you just created, and then select Edit to open the
Edit WD_Profile Profile dialog box.
3. Add a domain for the NE named 172.18.159.121:
a. In the Profile pane right-click the jobs folder and select Add Domain to
open the Select Domain dialog box.
b. In the Select Domain dialog box, click <...> and select the NE named
172.18.159.121 from the Select Source dialog box.
c. In the Select Source dialog box, click <Set> and in the Select Domain
dialog box, click again <Set> to create the domain.
d. In the Basic Permissions pane, select the group permission
Jobs_action_perm to display the list of its associated single
permissions in the ‘Jobs_action_perm’ Permissions pane.
e. From the ‘Jobs_action_perm’ Permissions pane, drag the
download_software permission tag to the /ETX-204A/172.18.159.121
domain.
f. Double-click the download_software tag in the domain to change its
permission to Read.
4. Add a domain for the /ETX-203A sublevel:
a. In the Profile pane right-click the jobs folder and select Add Domain to
open the Select Domain dialog box.
b. Click the browse button and in the Select Source dialog box, select the
/ETX-203A sublevel, then edit the Source IP field so that it contains
/ETX-203A/*.
c. Click <Set> in the Select Source dialog box and in the Select Domain
dialog box to create the domain.
d. In the Basic Permissions pane, click Jobs_action_perm so that a list of its
associated permissions appears.
e. From the ‘Jobs_action_perm’ Permissions pane, drag the
upload_configuration tag to the /ETX-203A/* domain.
f. Double-click the upload_configuration tag in the domain to change its
permission to Read.
The domains and the edited profile appears as illustrated in Figure 6-53.
5. Click <Set> to save the profile.

6-64 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Figure 6-53. Security Profile with Domains to Control NE Job Access

 To verify the profile:

1. Log in as the user based on the profile you just edited.
2. Create a new job.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-65

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

3. In the step where you select NEs, select the /ETX-204A/172.18.159.121 and
the sublevel /ETX-203A.
If you select Download Software as task, the task validation step
(Step ) indicates that the task is not authorized
for NE 172.18.159.121.

Figure 6-54. Download Software Not Authorized for 172.18.159.121

If you select Upload Configuration as task, the task validation step
(Step ) indicates that the task is not authorized
for the NEs in the /ETX-203A sublevel.

Figure 6-55. Upload Configuration Not Authorized for NEs in /ETX-203A

Working with Job Domains

This section illustrates creating user security profiles such that users can
create/see/modify only jobs that are defined with the security domains
corresponding to the users.
Table 6-34 shows the users and their security profile definitions. Global refers to
permissions defined in the security profile under the jobs folder, not in a domain.
Figure 6-58 illustrates the job security permissions for user A1.

Table 6-34. Users and Security Profile Domains

User User Security Security Tags and Remarks

Profile Domain Permissions

A Global job_create – Write Permission to create, modify,

job_modify – Write and see all jobs

job_accessible – Read
Other job permissions –
see Figure 6-56

6-66 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

User User Security Security Tags and Remarks

Profile Domain Permissions

A1 Global See Figure 6-57

A_Team1 job_create – Write Permission to create and see

job_modify – Read only jobs with this domain

job_accessible – Read

B Global job_create – Read No permissions

job_modify – Read
job_accessible – No Access
Other job permissions –
see Figure 6-56

B1 Global See Figure 6-57

B_Team1 job_create – Write Permission to create, modify,

job_modify – Write and see only jobs with this
domain
job_accessible – Read

B2 Global See Figure 6-57

B_Team2 job_create – Read Permission to see only jobs

job_modify – Read with this domain

job_accessible – Read

B3 Global See Figure 6-57

B_Team3 job_create – Write Permission to create and

job_modify – Write modify only jobs with this
domain; no permission to see
job_accessible – No Access
jobs

C Global job_create – No Access No permissions

job_modify – Read
job_accessible – No Access
Other job permissions –
see Figure 6-56

C1 Global See Figure 6-57

C_Team1 job_create – Read Permission to modify and see

job_modify – Write only jobs with this domain

job_accessible – Read

RADview Managing Permissions 6-67

 Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Figure 6-56. Job Security Permissions for Users With No Figure 6-57. Global Job Security Permissions for Users
Domains With Domains

Figure 6-58. Job Permissions for User A1

The administrator creates the jobs shown in the following table.

Table 6-35. Jobs and Security Domains

Job ID Job Security Domain Remarks

1 None

2 A_Team1

3 B_Team1

6-68 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Job ID Job Security Domain Remarks

4 B_Team2

5 B_Team3

6 B_Team7 Nonexistent domain for testing purpose

7 C_Team1 s

The following table shows which of the jobs in Table 6-35 the users in Table 6-34
can see (e.g. in the Jobs Table).

Table 6-36. Job Viewing

User Job ID/

Domain

1/None 2/A_Team1 3/B_Team1 4/B_Team2 5/B_Team3 6/B_Team7 7/C_Team1

A       

A1   × × × × ×

B  × × × × × ×

B1  ×  × × × ×

B2  × ×  × × ×

B3  × × × × × ×

C  × × × × × ×

C1  × × × × × 

The following table shows which of the jobs in Table 6-35 the users in Table 6-34
would be able to create.

Table 6-37. Job Creation

User Job ID/

Domain

1/None 2/A_Team1 3/B_Team1 4/B_Team2 5/B_Team3 6/B_Team7 7/C_Team1

A       
1 2 2 2 2 2
A1 ×  × × × × ×
1 2 2 2 2 2 2
B × × × × × × ×
1 2 2 2 2 2
B1 × ×  × × × ×
1 2 2 2 2 2 2
B2 × × × × × × ×
1 2 2 2 4 2 2
B3 × × × ×  × ×
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
C × × × × × × ×
1 2 2 2 2 2 2
C1 × × × × × × ×

RADview Managing Permissions 6-69

 Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Note 1 – Job Wizard opens, but message box Access Denied is displayed when
<Finish> is clicked in last step, and status bar displays Access Denied.
Note 2 – Job Wizard opens, but message box Access Denied is displayed and
status bar displays Access Denied. Check Security Domain.
Note 3 – Job Wizard does not open; message box Access Denied is displayed if
user attempts to create job.
Note 4 –Job can be created but when <Finish> is clicked in last step, message box
Using current security domain may cause this job to be
inaccessible. Continue? is displayed. After the job is created, it is not visible
to the user in the Jobs Table.
The following table shows which of the jobs in Table 6-35 the users in Table 6-34
can modify (e.g. via Edit Job).

Table 6-38. Job Modifying

User Job ID/

Domain

1/None 2/A_Team1 3/B_Team1 4/B_Team2 5/B_Team3 6/B_Team7 7/C_Team1

A       
1 2
A1 × × Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
3
B × Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
1 4
B1 × Not applicable  Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
1 2
B2 × Not applicable Not applicable × Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
1
B3 × Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
3
C × Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
1 4
C1 × Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable 

Note 1 –Message box Access Denied is displayed if user attempts to edit job.
Note 2 – Job wizard opens (e.g. via Edit Job) but message box Access Denied is
displayed when <Finish> is clicked in last step, and status bar displays Access
Denied. Check Security Domain.
Note 3 – Job wizard opens (e.g. via Edit Job) but message box Access Denied is
displayed when <Finish> is clicked in last step, and status bar displays Access
Denied.
Note 4 –The job can be modified, with the exception of the security domain. If
the domain is changed in the Advanced Job Parameters, then Note 2 applies.

6-70 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Configuring Security Options

There are three tabs in the Configuration dialog box, accessible via
Options > Configuration:
• Password
• Account
• Audit.

Setting Password Policies

The Administrator can define the following characteristics of a password:
• Combination of letters, numerals, spaces, and symbols that are allowed
• Maximum or minimum length of the password
• Whether the password is case-sensitive, i.e., users must type the same
capitalization as defined by the Administrator when they enter the password
• Enhanced security by requiring expiration for passwords and ensuring that old
passwords are not reused.

 To configure password policies:

1. Open he EMS Security Administrator as explained under Editing the User
Profile Using the Security Administrator.
2. From the menu, select Options > Configuration.
The Configuration dialog box appears.
3. Select the Password tab.
Password parameters appear (see Figure 6-59).
4. Set the parameters as explained in Table 6-39.
5. Click <Set>.
The settings take effect.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-71

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Figure 6-59. Configuration – Password Tab

Table 6-39. Configuration – Password Parameters

Parameter Possible Values / Remarks

Length Policy

Length Policy Checked - Length Policy is on

Minimum Length 2–30

Note: Enabled only when Length Policy is checked.

Maximum Length 4–30

Note: Enabled only when Length Policy is checked.

Case Sensitive Checked – the password is case sensitive

Alphanumeric Policy

Alphanumeric Policy Checked – alphanumeric policy is on

Minimum No. of Letters 1–30

Note: This field is enabled only when Alphanumeric Policy is checked.

Minimum No. of Digits 1–30

Note: This field is enabled only when Alphanumeric Policy is checked.

Expiration Policy

Expiration Policy Checked – expiration policy is on

Expires In (days) 1–100

Note: This field is enabled only when Expiration Policy is checked.

6-72 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Parameter Possible Values / Remarks

History Policy

History Policy Checked – history policy is on

No. of Remembered Past 0–100

Passwords Note: This field is enabled only when History Policy is checked.

Password Storage

Encryption Policy Checked – the password is encrypted

Encryption Algorithm Encryption types: Open, SHA1, MD5

Note: This field is enabled only when Encryption Policy is checked.

Setting Account Policies

The Administrator can configure whether a user is automatically logged out of the
system if the user does not enter the correct password, and if the user is logged
off after a period of non-activity.

 To configure Account policies:

1. Open he EMS Security Administrator as explained under Editing the User
Profile Using the Security Administrator
2. From the menu, select Options > Configuration.
The Configuration dialog box appears.
3. Click the Account tab.
Account parameters appear as illustrated in Figure 6-60.
4. Set the account parameters as explained in Table 6-40.
5. Click <Set>.
The settings take effect.

RADview Managing Permissions 6-73

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Figure 6-60. Configuration – Account Tab

Table 6-40. Configuration – Account Parameters

Parameter Possible Values / Remarks

Auto Lockout Policy

Auto Lockout Policy Checked – Users are barred from logging on again after a specified number of
failed logon attempts for a specified period of time.
Cleared – Users are not barred from logging on again after failed logo
attempts.

No. of Failed Logon 1–15

Attempts Before Lockout Note: Enabled only when Auto Lockout Policy is checked.

Lockout Duration 0 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours,

3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, 6 hours, 7 hours, 8 hours, 9 hours, 10 hours, 11
hours, 0.5 days, 1 day, 2 day
Note: Enabled only when Auto Lockout Policy is checked.

Auto Logout Policy

Auto Logout Policy Selected – automatic logout policy is on

Auto Logout After 3–60

(minutes) Note: Enabled only when Auto Logout Policy is checked.

Restrictions

Allow multiple logins per Checked – Users can log on multiple times.
user Cleared – Users can log on once only..

6-74 Managing Permissions RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Setting Audit Policies

The Administrator can configure for a user whether the system tracks successful
and/or failed logons and logoffs.

 To configure a user’s audit policies:

1. Open he EMS Security Administrator as explained under Editing the User
Profile Using the Security Administrator
2. From the menu, select Options > Configuration.
The Configuration dialog box appears.
3. Click the Audit tab.
Audit parameters appear as illustrated in Figure 6-60.
4. Set the audit parameters as explained in Table 6-41.
5. Click <Set>.
The settings take effect.

Note The Audit file is located in:

<RADview installation directory> > EMS > Conf> Sec> Audit.

Figure 6-61. Configuration – Audit Tab

RADview Managing Permissions 6-75

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

Table 6-41. Configuration – Audit Parameters

Parameter Possible Values / Remarks

Audit Policy Checked – Audit Policy is active

Logon and Logoff Success Checked – Successful logon and logoff is recorded in the log file
Note: Enabled only when Audit Policy is selected.

Logon and Logoff Failure Checked – Failure logon and logoff is recorded in the log file
Note: Enabled only when Audit Policy is selected.

6.3 Configuring the EMS Security Service

You can display the location where profiles and audit information are stored, and
select whether profiles are stored in the NMS station file system or the RADview
database. Refer to Chapter 4 for more information on the system console and
EMS services.

 To configure the EMS Security Service parameters:

1. In the system console ( ) select EMS Security Service.

The EMS Security Service information is displayed (see Figure 6-62).
2. Enter information for the desired parameters (see Table 6-42).
3. Click <Set>.

Note To retrieve the current value, click <Get>.

6-76 Configuring the EMS Security Service RADview

User’s Manual Chapter 6 Security Management

Figure 6-62. EMS Security Service

Table 6-42. EMS Security Service Parameters

Parameter Description

Info

Description Describes the current service selected in the system console

Read-only

Version The version of the service

Read-only

Sec Service Configuration

Profiles Storage Directory The location of the directory where profiles are stored

Directory to Write Audits The location of the directory where audits can be written

Use file system for profile storage Enables/disables using the file system to store profiles. If
selected, the profiles are stored as a file in the Profiles Storage
Directory. If not selected, the profiles are stored in the RADview
database.

RADview Configuring the EMS Security Service 6-77

Chapter 6 Security Management User’s Manual

6-78 Configuring the EMS Security Service RADview

 Chapter 7
Fault Management
This chapter describes:
• Configuring the Fault Management Service – You can configure the Fault
Management service parameters.
• Handling RADview Device Events – SNMP traps received from the network
devices are converted by RADview to events that you can view with the Event
Browser (refer to Working with the Event Browser). You can use the Fault
Administrator to configure the Event Browser (refer to Working with the Fault
Administrator).
• Handling RADview System Events –Events received from the RADview system
are recorded by the EMS Log Server. You can use the Log Viewer to view
these events (refer to Viewing RADview Events). You can use the Log
Administrator to configure log properties (refer to Configuring the Log).

Note In this chapter, dialogs are illustrated for Windows platforms. These dialogs are
identical to the ones on Unix and Linux platforms except for the frame around
them.

7.1 Configuring the Fault Management Service

You can view and configure fault management service parameters from the
system console. Refer to Chapter 4 for more information on the system console
and EMS services. The relevant sections are:
• EMS Log Services
• Configuring the EMS Fault Management (Back End)
• Viewing the EMS Fault Management (Front End)

7.2 Detecting Problems

There are three ways to detect possible problems in the RADview system as
outlined below:
• Alarms
• Events
• Error messages.
The three ways are explained in the following sections.

RADview Detecting Problems 7-1

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Alarms
Alarms are divided into 5 levels that reflect their severity. Each alarm level is
categorized by a color. For additional information, refer to Chapter 3 on network
element icon colors.

Events
Events are displayed in the Event Browser in the Auxiliary section of the Network
Topology workspace. These events are categorized by the alarm color according
to the severity of the alarm that the respective event triggers.

Error Messages
Error messages pop up if certain tasks cannot be completed
Indications on the icons – color, symbol, Reference to Ch. 3 where icon colors
and links are covered.

7.3 Handling RADview Device Events

SNMP traps received from the network devices are converted by RADview to
events that you can view with the Event Browser. An event is a general name for
all alarms and traps.

Working with the Event Browser

The main functions of the Event Browser are:
• Displaying a list of events
• Filtering the displayed events (according to various attributes)
• Managing events (acknowledging, clearing, removing, etc.)
• Printing and saving the list of events
• Providing all the above functions to any NMS (of any vendor).

Note You can open several Event Browser windows simultaneously. Each opened
window represents a list of events with a selected filter applied to it.

By default the Event Browser is displayed in the bottom pane, but you can open
multiple windows as mentioned above.

 To open the Event Browser:

• From the RADview Network Manager menu select
Tools > Event Browser.
The Event Browser window is displayed (see Figure 7-1).

7-2 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Figure 7-1. Event Browser Window

Note There are some cases where several events are combined into one event. In
these cases, an entry does not necessarily indicate one event.

The Event Browser can display up to 1000 events. If you click Page Up, another
1000 events are retrieved from the RADview database.
The bottom row displays the following for the current event filter:
• Total number of events, followed by the number of unacknowledged events
in parentheses.
• For each severity level, the total number of events followed by the number of
unacknowledged events in parentheses.

 To change the format of the Event Browser log:

• Move a column to a different place in the column order by dragging and
dropping the column’s header-bar.
Table 7-1. Event Browser Parameters

Parameter Possible Values / Remarks

Severity Severity of event: Critical, Major, Minor, Warning, Normal

Time The Date and Time of the last arrival of the event to the Server
YYYY-MM-DD- hh:mm:ss

Type The type of agent

Source IP address, text

The NE that initiated the event. Can appear in one of the
following formats:
• IP Address (of the NE)
• Text (the NE’s Name)
• “Server” (regarding the log state)

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-3

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Parameter Possible Values / Remarks

Instance The object in the Source where the event was initiated. This is
specific to the individual agent (see the specific product manual).

Description The Description of the event.

Cleared Clear status of event. If a cleared icon is present, the event

was automatically cleared according to the clearing policy (refer
to Clearing Events for details).

Acked Acknowledge status of event. If a check icon is present, the

event was acknowledged.

Notes Indicates if notes exist for event. If a note icon is present,

then notes exist. When an event is acknowledged or
unacknowledged, a note is automatically added.

Toolbar Icons
The toolbar icons provide easy access to the main functions of the Event
Browser.

Table 7-2. Toolbar Icons

Button Function

Save As

Print

Remove All

Acknowledge

Add Note

Notes

Enable/disable sound profile

configured for the server

Locate on Map
Note: Appears only if Event
Browser is not opened
separately from Network
Manager

Shelf View
Note: Appears only if Event
Browser is not opened
separately from Network
Manager

Stop Refresh

Refresh

Pause

7-4 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Button Function

Resume

Open Filter

Edit Current Filter

Filter List

Export Filter

Import Filter

Scroll To Home

Scroll To End

Display User Manual

About – Display version

information
Note: Appears only if Event
Browser is opened
separately from Network
Manager.

Filtering Events
Filters allow you to view only the events that fit specified criteria. You can create
custom filters, or use the default filters.
The following default filters are available in the event browser:
• History Events – Displays all events from the current day, with severity
Critical, Major, Minor, Warning, or Normal
• Active Alarms – Displays all events from the current day that have not been
cleared or acknowledged, with severity Critical, Major, Minor, or Warning.

 To open a filter:

• In the Event Browser window, click Open Filter and select the desired
filter from the list of filters
Or
Click Show List in the bottom right corner and select the desired filter
from the list of filters
Or
If the name of the filter appears on one of the tabs at the bottom of the
Event Browser, click the tab
The filtered events are displayed in a new tabbed window, and the filter
name is shown as selected in the tab on the bottom of the window.

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-5

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Notes • You can create and open a filter named Active <device-name> to show the
active alarms for a particular device, by selecting the device on the map or
network element tree, and right-clicking Active Alarms
• You can create and open a filter named History <device-name> to show the
past alarms for a particular device, by selecting the device on the map or
network element tree, and right-clicking History Events.

You can add, change, or remove filters from the Filter List dialog box (see
Figure 7-2), which appears when you click Filter List in the toolbar.

Figure 7-2. Filter List Dialog Box

 To add a filter:
1. In the Filter List dialog box, click <Add>.
The Add Filter dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-3 to filter by General
criteria, Figure 7-4 to filter by Sources, Figure 7-5 to filter by Event
Classes, and Figure 7-6 to filter Advanced).
2. Complete the fields according to Table 7-3.
3. Click <Set>.

7-6 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Figure 7-3. Add Filter Dialog Box – General Tab

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-7

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 7-4. Add Filter Dialog Box – Sources Tab

7-8 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Figure 7-5. Add Filter Dialog Box – Event Classes Tab

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-9

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 7-6. Add Filter Dialog Box – Advanced Tab

Table 7-3. Add Filter Parameters / Change Filter Parameters

Parameters Possible Values / Remarks

Filter Name Name of filter

Alarms

Alarms Only If this is selected, display events that are cleared by a different event, e.g.
Link Down is cleared by Link Up

Severity

Severity Display events with one or more selected severity levels

Critical, Major, Minor, Warning, Indeterminate, Normal

7-10 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Parameters Possible Values / Remarks

Time Interval

Today Display only events received on the current day

Last, Days, Hours, Minutes Display only events received in the time period specified by the edit boxes

Interval, From, To Display only events received in the specified interval. The values are available
in ‘YYYY-MM-DD’ and ‘hh:mm:ss’ format and can be specified through the
dropdown boxes.

Cleared Events

All Display all events

Cleared Display only events that are marked as ‘Cleared’.

Not Cleared Display only events that are marked as ‘Not Cleared’.

Acknowledged Events

All Display all events

Acknowledged Display only events that are marked as ‘Acknowledged’

Not Acknowledged Display only events that are marked as ‘Not Acknowledged’

Sources

Source Selected Network Element

Note: An empty Source list means that this field is not relevant (i.e. – the
filter won’t refer to this field as a part of its conditions).

Instance Display only events of a specific Instance

Event Classes

Event Class Display only events of a specific event class

Description Display only events according to a specific string in the event description field

Advanced

Show short node names Display names only as short node names
only

 To change a filter:
1. In the Filter List dialog box, click <Change>.
The Change Filter dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-7).

Note To change the current filter, you can click Edit Current Filter in the toolbar to
open the Change Filter dialog box.

2. Complete the fields according to Table 7-3.

3. Click <Set>.

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-11

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 7-7. Change Filter Dialog Box – General Tab

 To remove a filter:
1. In the Filter List dialog box, click <Remove>.
2. The Remove Filter confirmation dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-8).

Figure 7-8. Remove Filter Confirmation

7-12 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

 To export a filter definition:

• In the Event Browser window, click Export Filter and select the filter from
the dropdown list.
A Save dialog box is displayed in which you can specify the location where
to save the filter definition.

Figure 7-9. Save Filter Definition

 To import a filter definition:

• In the Event Browser window, click Import Filter.

An Open dialog box is displayed in which you can specify the location of
the filter definition.

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-13

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 7-10. Open Filter Definition

Refreshing Event Display

You can view new events that have occurred and events that have been modified.

 To refresh the event display:

• In the toolbar, click Refresh.

• To stop the refresh, click Stop Refresh.

Acknowledging Events
• Ack = Acknowledge (an event) – When you acknowledge an event, you mark
it as noticed.

 To acknowledge events:
1. In the Event Browser window, select the event(s) to acknowledge.

2. Right-click and select Acknowledge, or on the toolbar click Acknowledge.

In the line of the relevant event, a checkmark is added under Acked
and a note Notes is added reading Event acknowledged.

7-14 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Figure 7-11. Event Acknowledged

 To un-acknowledge events:
1. In the Event Browser window, select the event(s) to be unacknowledged.

2. Right-click and select UnAcknowledge.

The checkmark icon in the line of the selected event disappears, and
a note is added to the event containing Event unacknowledged.
For instructions to view the notes, refer to Entering Event Notes.

Removing Events
You can remove selected events, all events, or all events before a certain
date/time.

 To remove selected events:

1. In the Event Browser window, select the event(s) to be removed.
2. Right-click and select Remove.
The Remove Event confirmation dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-12).

Figure 7-12. Remove Event – Confirmation Dialog Box

 To remove all events or all events before a certain date/time:

1. On the toolbar click Remove All.

The Remove All confirmation dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-13).
2. Leave the option All selected, or select Before and then set the date/time
before which events should be removed.
3. Click <Set> to remove the events.

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-15

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 7-13. Remove All Events – Confirmation Dialog Box

Viewing Event Details

 To view the details of an event:

1. In the Event Browser window, select an event.

2. Right-click and then select Details.

The Details dialog box (see Figure 7-14) is displayed. If you defined
probable cause and corrective actions in the EMS Fault Administrator for
the event, they are displayed. Refer to Defining Fault Clearance
Procedures for details on how to define probable cause and corrective
actions for events.

Figure 7-14. Details Dialog Box

7-16 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Entering Event Notes

You can add descriptive notes for events, change notes, and view the notes for
an event. You can add a note to a single event or to multiple events.

 To view notes for an event:

1. In the Event Browser window, select an event.

2. Right-click and select Notes, or on the toolbar click Notes.

The Event Notes dialog box is displayed, showing any notes that exist for
the event.

Figure 7-15. Event Notes Dialog Box

 To add a note for the event:

1. In the Event Notes dialog box, click <Add>.
The Add Note dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-16).
2. Enter the text of the note as desired.
3. Click <Set> in the Add Note dialog box.
The Add Note dialog box closes, and the note is shown in the Event
Notes dialog box. In the Event Browser line where the event is shown, the
Notes parameter is selected, to indicate that a note exists for the event.

 To change an event note:

1. In the Event Notes dialog box, select the note that you wish to change, and
click <Change>.
The Change Note dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-17).
2. Change the text of the note as desired.
3. Click <Set> in the Change Note dialog box.
The Change Note dialog box closes, and the changed note is shown in the
Event Notes dialog box.

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-17

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

 To remove an event note:

1. In the Event Notes dialog box, select the note that you wish to remove, and
click <Remove>.
The Remove Note confirmation dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-18).
2. Click <OK> to confirm the removal.
The Remove Note dialog box closes, and the note no longer appears in
the Event Notes dialog box. If the event no longer has any notes, then in
the Event Browser line where the event is shown, the Notes parameter is
cleared.

Figure 7-16. Add Note Dialog Box

Figure 7-17. Change Note Dialog Box

7-18 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Figure 7-18. Remove Event Note – Confirmation Dialog Box

 To add a note to one or more events:

1. In the Event Browser window, select one or more events.

2. Right-click and select Add Note, or on the toolbar click Add Note.
The Add Note dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-16).
3. Enter the text of the note.
4. Click <Set>.
The note is added to the selected events, and the Add Note dialog box
closes. In the Event Browser line where the events are shown, the Notes
parameter is selected, to indicate that a note exists for the events.

Enabling/Disabling a Sound Profile

Sound profiles are configured on the RADview server level. Every client that
operates opposite this server can enable or disable these sound profiles and
change the melody as desired. For additional information on configuring sound
profiles, refer to Defining Sounds.

 To enable or disable sound profiles:

1. On the Event Browser toolbar click (Options).

Sound Profile options are displayed (see Figure 7-19).

Figure 7-19. Sound Profile Options

2. Under Enable, check or clear the relevant check box to enable or disable the
respective sound profile for this RADview client.

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-19

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

 To change the sound for the existing sound profile:

1. Under Melody File, click .
The Select Audio File dialog box appears.
2. Navigate to your audio file folder and select the desired audio file.
The sound melody for the respective sound profile is updated.

 To define the waiting time between issuing the event and playing he sound:
1. Under Time Window, select the currently set time window and enter the
desired new one.
The new value appears in blue and Italic as illustrated below.

Figure 7-20. Sound Profile options – Entering a New Time Window

2. Click <Apply>.
The value is set and the parameter setting’s formatting is adjusted to the
default.

 To test the melody:

• In the desired row, click <Test>.
The sound is played.

Viewing Event Browser Information

You can view the user manual of the application, as well as details about the
application if it was opened separately from the Network Manager.

 To access the user manual:

• On the Event Browser toolbar click User Manual.

The user manual is displayed.

 To display details about the application:

• On the Event Browser toolbar click About.

Details about the application are displayed.

Working with the Fault Administrator

You can configure the following for the Event Browser, via the EMS Fault
Administrator:
• Event Browser log parameters (refer to Setting Parameters for the Event
Browser Log)
• SNMP trap forwarding destinations (refer to Defining SNMP Trap Forwarding
Destinations)
• Fault clearance (refer to Defining Fault Clearance Procedures)

7-20 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

• Event Policies to manage the display and handling of events in the Event
Browser (refer to Setting Event Policies). Default event policies are
predefined for generic and device event classes.

 To open the EMS Fault Administrator:

1. From the RADview Network Manager menu, select Tools and then
Admin Console.
The EMS Admin Console is displayed showing the NMS station name.
2. Click the + to expand the list of EMS consoles, and select Fault Service from
the list of consoles.
The EMS Fault Administrator displays a table of event groups that
correspond to RADview devices, as well as a generic group that applies to
all devices. The groups can be expanded to show the associated event
policies that describe how to handle events.

Figure 7-21. EMS Fault Administrator

Figure 7-22. EMS Fault Administrator with Expanded Group

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-21

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

 To filter the table data according to a particular text string:

1. Enter the search string in the textbox and then click

.
Search options appear as illustrated in Figure 7-23.
2. Select the desired search options as explained in Table 7-4.
The display is filtered to contain only the event policies with the search
string according to the search options you set. You need to expand the
groups to view the event policies.

Note From the Search Options dialog, you can select one option at the time. To select
additional options, you have to click again and select the next option.
Repeat this procedure until all desired options are selected.

Figure 7-23. EMS Fault Administrator - Search Options

7-22 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Table 7-4. EMS Fault Administrator - Search Options

Parameters Possible Values / Remarks

All All policies are displayed for the search you entered.
For example, if you enter ETX as search term, all classes, policies etc are
displayed for ETX .

Event Class Display polices linked to specified event classes only. Refer to Table 7-5 for
additional information.

Description Display policies with descriptions added to them only. Refer to Table 7-5 for
additional information.

Source Display policies linked to a specific source only. Refer to Table 7-5 for
additional information.

Instance Display policies linked to a specific instance where an event occurred

(e.g. Slot 2, Port 3). Refer to Table 7-5 for additional information.

Mask Policy Display policies linked to masked events. Refer to Masking an Event for
additional information.

Severity Policy Display policies linked to a specified severity. Refer to Setting the Severity for
additional information.

Duplication Policy Display policies linked to duplicated events. Refer to Duplicating Events for
additional information.

Forwarding Policy Display policies linked to forwarding events. Refer to Forwarding Events for
additional information.

Threshold Policy Display policies linked to threshold events. Refer to Setting the Threshold for
additional information.

Clearing Policy Display policies linked to clearing events. Refer to Clearing Events for
additional information.

Formatting Policy Display policies linked to formatting events. Refer to Formatting Events for
additional information.

Sound Policy Display policies with sounds defined to them. Refer to Defining Sounds for
additional information.

Case sensitive Only display items that match upper/lower case of the search item.

Case insensitive Ignore the case of the search item.

Use wild cards Display all policies that match the definition specified with wild cards.

Use regular expression Don’t use wild cards

Match from start Display all policies that match the beginning of the search item.

Match exactly Display all policies that match the search item exactly.

Match anywhere Display all policies that match anywhere in the search item.

Keep parent row if any of Display the upper level if a least one of the lower levels match.
the children match

Keep the children if any of Display all lower level entries if the upper level entry matches.

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-23

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Parameters Possible Values / Remarks

the ancestors match

Figure 7-24. EMS Fault Administrator – Filtered by Search

Figure 7-25. EMS Fault Administrator – Filtered by Search, Expanded

• To return to the unfiltered display, clear the textbox and

reset the search options to the default as illustrated in Figure 7-23.

7-24 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

 To save the table data:

1. Click the Export Table.

Figure 7-26. Save to File

2. Choose the desired options for saving, then click <OK>.

3. Browse to the location in which to save the file, then click <Save>.
The table data is saved in the format Comma Separated Values (CSV),
which can be viewed in Microsoft Excel or any other compatible viewer.

 To print the displayed table:

1. Click Print Table.

Figure 7-27. Print

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-25

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

2. Choose the desired options for printing and then click <OK>.
3. Select the desired printer and then click <OK>.
The table data is sent to the selected printer.

Note When saving or printing:

• If the table is filtered by search, only the filtered data is saved/printed
• The event policies under a group are saved/printed only if the group has been
expanded to show them.

Setting Event Policies

You can define event policies to manage the way events are displayed in the
Event Browser, and manage the behavior of the system upon receiving specific
events and traps

Adding an Event Policy

 To add an event policy:

Note Policies with old (prior version) event classes are not replaced. You must define
new policies using the new event classes.

1. In the Fault Administrator dialog box, from the menu, select

Event Policy > Add.
The Add Event Policy dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-28).
2. For Event Class, Source, and Instance, you can use the default value of Any to
mean that the policy applies to all sources, all Instances, or all event classes,
respectively. If you want to use Any for event class, skip to step 3. The
following steps explain the procedure for selecting a specific event class:
a. In the Add Event Policy dialog box click Browse […] next to Event Class, to
display a list of event classes that correspond to RADview devices, as well
as generic and system event classes.
The Select Event dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-29).
b. In the Select Event dialog box double-click the desired event class group
to expand it, then select the desired event class and click <Set>.
The selected event class appears in the Add Event Policy dialog box (see
Figure 7-32).
3. If you want to use Any for source, skip to step 4. The following steps explain
the procedure for selecting a specific source:
a. In the Add Event Policy dialog box click Browse […] next to Source.
The Select Node dialog box is displayed showing the nodes and links.
b. Select the desired node/link, then click <OK>.
The node/link appears in the Add Event Policy dialog box.

7-26 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

4. In the Add Event Policy dialog box click <Continue>.

The Add Event Policy dialog box with policy tabs is displayed (see
Figure 7-34). You can specify the following policies for the event:
 Mask (see Masking an Event)
 Severity (see Setting the Severity)
 Duplication (see Duplicating Events)
 Forwarding (see Forwarding Events)
 Threshold (see Setting the Threshold)
 Clearing (see Clearing Events)
 Formatting (see Formatting Events).
 Sound (see Defining Sounds)

Figure 7-28. Add Event Policy Dialog Box

Table 7-5. Add Event Policy Parameters

Parameter Description

Event Class Browse button <…> – opens a list to select the

event class.

Description Description of the selected event (read-only)

Source Browse button <…> – opens a list to select a specific

source

Instance Instance of the device where the event occurred

(e.g. Slot 2, Port 3). Possible values vary according
to the device that generated the event. For values
other than ANY, refer to the Installation and
Operation Manual of the specific device.

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-27

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 7-29. Select Event Dialog Box

Figure 7-30. Select Event Dialog Box – Expanded Figure 7-31. Select Event Dialog Box – Event Class
Tree Selected

7-28 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Figure 7-32. Add Event Policy Dialog Box after Event Class Selected

Figure 7-33. Select Node Dialog Box

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-29

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 7-34. Add Event Policy Dialog Box (Cont.)

Masking an Event

 To mask an event:
1. Click the Mask tab.
2. Select Mask.
3. Enter the Description of the Mask (only enabled when Mask is selected).
4. Select one of the following to specify when the event should be masked:
 Always
 Every Day –Specify the time and duration of the masking
 On Date – Specify the date, time, and duration of the masking.
5. Click <Apply>.

7-30 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Figure 7-35. Add Event Policy Dialog Box – Mask Tab

Setting the Severity

 To set the event's severity:

1. Click the Severity tab (see Figure 7-36).
2. Select Severity Policy if you want to specify severity of the event.
3. Perform the following steps only if Severity Policy is selected.
 Enter the Description of the severity.
 In Set Severity, select the level of severity from the list.
4. Click <Apply>.

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-31

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 7-36. Add Event Policy – Severity Tab Parameters

Duplicating Events
Duplication refers to multiple appearances of the same event in a specific interval
of time. You can configure the option of only one appearance in the database
and in the Browser when the interval between two identical events is shorter
than a defined interval of time.

 To configure duplication:
1. Click the Duplication tab (see Figure 7-37).
2. If you want to configure duplication of the event, select Duplication Policy.
3. Perform the following steps only if Duplication Policy is selected.
 Enter the Description of the duplication.
 Move the slider to select interval of time.
4. Click <Apply>.
The event is recorded and displayed only once if duplicate events occur
within the specified interval.

7-32 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Figure 7-37. Add Event Policy – Duplication Tab Parameters

Forwarding Events
The Forwarding tab allows you to specify where to send notification of an event
when it occurs.

 To set forwarding:
1. Click the Forwarding tab (see Figure 7-38).
2. Select Forwarding Policy and perform the following:
 In the Description box, enter a description for the forwarding (only
enabled when Forwarding Policy is selected).
 Perform one or more of the following:
 Select E-Mail and enter one or more email addresses (separated by
semicolons)

Note To forward events to an email address, you must modify the EMS Server
parameters to provide SMTP information (refer to Chapter 4 for details).

 Select Event Channel and enter one or more Event Channel

destinations separated by commas (any CORBA application listening to
the specified event channels receives the events).
 Select Generate SNMP Trap to create SNMP traps when receiving a
certain event or trap. These traps/events are displayed in the
SNMPc/HPOV maps when generated. Refer to Configuring Generated
SNMP Traps for details on configuring the generated SNMP traps.

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-33

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

 Select Forward SNMP Trap to send the SNMP traps to another station.
Refer to Configuring Forwarding SNMP Traps for details on configuring
the forwarding of SNMP traps.

Note Before using the Forward SNMP Trap option, you must configure the SNMP trap
forwarding destinations as described in Defining SNMP Trap Forwarding
Destinations.

3. Click <Apply>.

Figure 7-38. Add Event Policy – Forwarding Tab Parameters

Configuring Generated SNMP Traps

 To add traps in the list of generated SNMP traps:

1. Verify that Generate SNMP Trap is selected, and click <Change…>.
The SNMP Traps dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-39).
2. Fill in the following in the Trap Header group:
 Description –Text description of the trap
 Object ID – ID of the trap (the Object ID should be known and unmasked)
 Community – Community for which to send the trap
 SNMP version – Select V1, V2c, or V2c-inform
 Host –IP address or host name of the station to which to send the traps
 Port – Leave the default value.
3. Click <Add Trap> if you do not need to specify a variable for the trap.
The trap is displayed at the top of the dialog box.

7-34 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

4. If you want the trap to include variables:

a. Enter the required Object ID and Value of the variable you want the trap
to include (according to the MIB). For Value, you can type in a value or
select one of the following:
 Device name – The host name of the device is used as the value
 Device IP address – The IP address of the device is used as the value.
b. Click <Add Variable>.
The variable is shown in the Trap Variables table.
c. Repeat this procedure for each variable that you want to add to the Trap
Variables table (see Figure 7-40).
d. Click <Add Trap>
The trap is displayed at the top of the dialog box.
5. When you have completed specifying traps and variables, click <Set>.
The SNMP Traps dialog box closes and your changes are applied.

 To edit traps in the list of generated SNMP traps:

1. Click <Edit> next to Generate SNMP Trap.
The SNMP Traps dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-39).
2. At the top of the dialog box, select the trap that you wish to edit.
The Trap Header fields and Trap Variables table for the trap are displayed.
3. Edit the fields in the Trap Header if desired.
4. If you want to edit the trap variables:
 To add a new variable, enter the Object ID and Value of the variable and
click <Add Variable>.
 To remove a variable, highlight the variable and click <Remove Variable>.
 To update a variable, highlight it and enter your changes, then click
<Update Variable>.
5. When you have completed the changes for the trap, click <Update Trap>.
6. When you have completed editing traps and variables, click <Set>.
The SNMP Traps dialog box closes and your changes are applied.

 To remove a trap from the list of generated SNMP traps:

1. Click <Edit> next to Generate SNMP Trap.
The SNMP Traps dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-39).
2. At the top of the dialog box, select the trap that you wish to remove.
3. Click <Remove Trap>.
The trap is removed from the list.
4. Click <Set>.
The SNMP Traps dialog box closes and your changes are applied.

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-35

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 7-39. SNMP Traps Dialog Box

Figure 7-40. SNMP Traps Dialog Box – Adding Variables

7-36 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Configuring Forwarding SNMP Traps

 To specify forwarding SNMP traps:

1. Verify that Forward SNMP Trap is selected, and click <Edit>.
The SNMP Trap Forwarding dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-41).
2. Click <Add> to display a dropdown list (see Figure 7-42) of the configured
SNMP trap forwarding destinations, and select a destination.

Note Refer to Defining SNMP Trap Forwarding Destinations for a description of how to
define the SNMP trap forwarding destinations.

The selected forwarding destination is shown in the SNMP Trap

Forwarding dialog box (see Figure 7-43).
3. When you have completed specifying destinations, click <Set> in the SNMP
Trap Forwarding dialog box to close it.

Figure 7-41. SNMP Trap Forwarding Dialog Box

Figure 7-42. SNMP Trap Forwarding Dialog Box – Select Destination

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-37

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 7-43. SNMP Trap Forwarding Dialog Box –Destination Selected

Setting the Threshold

The threshold defines a different event to be generated if the event occurs more
than a specified number of times in a specified time interval.

 To set the threshold:

1. Click the Threshold tab (see Figure 7-44).
2. If you want to specify a threshold for the event, select Threshold Policy.
3. Perform the following steps only if Threshold Policy is selected:
 Enter Description of the Threshold.
 Use the slider to select the number of seconds in Interval.
 Use the slider to select the number of times an event can occur in an
Interval (Events per Interval ).
 To select an event to be generated when the threshold is exceeded:
a. Click <Browse> next to Event Type to display the Select Event dialog box
(see Figure 7-29).
b. In the Select Event dialog box double-click the desired event class group
to expand it, then select the desired event class from the expanded event
class group (see Figure 7-30).
The event class appears at the bottom of the Select Event dialog box (see
Figure 7-31).
c. In the Select Event dialog box click <Set>.
The Select Event dialog box closes, and the selected event class appears
in the Event Type parameter.
4. Click <Apply>.

7-38 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Figure 7-44. Add Event Policy – Threshold Tab Parameters

Clearing Events
You can set the clearing policy for clearing events. Clearing the event means
setting the event as cleared in the Event Browser (in the Cleared column), it does
not mean removing the event from the event log. This clearing procedure can be
useful for example to clear the Link Down event if the Link Up event arrives.

Note The event policies are automatically assigned clearing policies:

• Default clearing policy for the generic event LinkUp is that it clears the generic
event LinkDown
• Default clearing policy for the generic event nodeConnected is that it clears
the generic event nodeDisconnected
• Default clearing policy for device events is that every <xxx>_OFF event clears
the corresponding <xxx>_ON event. For example, n the ACE-201 event class
group, the event VC ContinuityLoss_OFF i is cleared by VC ContinuityLoss_ON.

 To clear an event when it arrives:

1. Click the Clearing tab (see Figure 7-45).
2. Select Clearing Policy.
3. Perform the following steps only if Clearing Policy is selected.
a. Enter Description of the clearing.
b. Click <Browse> next to Event to Clear to display the Select Event dialog
box (see Figure 7-29).
c. In the Select Event dialog box double-click the desired event class group
to expand it, then select the desired event class from the expanded event
class group (see Figure 7-30).

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-39

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

The event class appears at the bottom of the Select Event dialog box (see
Figure 7-31).
d. In the Select Event dialog box click <Set>.
The Select Event dialog box closes, and the selected event class appears
in the Event to Clear parameter.
4. Click <Apply>.

Figure 7-45. Add Event Policy – Clearing Tab Parameters

Formatting Events
Formatting determines the string to be displayed in the Event Browser for the
event.

 To set the format of the trap/event:

1. Click the Formatting tab (see Figure 7-46).
2. If you want to specify formatting for the event, select Formatting Policy.
3. Perform the following steps only if Formatting Policy is selected.
a. Enter the Description of the Format.
b. Enter the string under Event Format to display in the Event Browser if this
event occurs.
4. Click <Apply>.

7-40 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Figure 7-46. Add Event Policy Dialog Box – Formatting Tab

 To complete configuration for the Add Event Policy dialog box:

• Click <Set> after you have configured all the policy tabs.
The event policy appears in the Fault Administrator window.

 To edit an existing event policy:

1. In the Fault Administrator window select the event policy to be edited (in the
upper right area of the window).
2. Edit the Policy tabs (Mask, Severity, Duplication, Forwarding, etc.).
3. Click <Apply>.

Defining Sounds
You can assign sounds to specific events or group of events that are played once
these events occur.

Note Sound profiles are defined on the server level. Therefore, every client that
connects to the relevant serve hears these soun

 To assign sounds to events:

1. Click the Sound tab (see Figure 7-47).
2. If you want to define a sound for the event, select Sound.
3. Perform the following steps only if Sound is selected:
 Check Sound Policy.
 Under Description, enter a description to the sound profile.

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-41

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

 Under Sound Profile, select a sound profile from the list.

4. Click <Apply>.
The sound profile is assigned to the specified event or group of events.

Figure 7-47. Add Event Policy Dialog Box – Sounds

Removing an Event Policy

 To remove an event policy

1. In the Fault Administrator window select the event policy to be removed from
the list of policies.
2. Select Event Policy > Remove.
The Remove Event confirmation dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-48).
3. Click <OK>.
The event policy is removed from the Event Class table.

Figure 7-48. Remove Event Policy – Confirmation Box

7-42 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Defining SNMP Trap Forwarding Destinations

You must define the destinations for SNMP trap forwarding if you want to specify
SNMP trap forwarding in an event policy.

 To define SNMP trap forwarding destinations:

1. In the Fault Administrator window, select Configuration >
Forwarding Destinations.
The Forwarding Destinations dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-49).
2. Click <Add>.
The Add Destination dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-50).
3. Fill in the following:
 Name –Name of the station to which to forward the traps
 Host –IP address or host name of the station to which to forward the
traps
 Port – Leave the default value
 SNMP version – Select V1, V2c, or V2c-inform
 Source Address Variable – Object ID for source address
 Source Community Variable – Object ID for source community
 Retransmit – If selected, the trap is retransmitted. If you select this
option, verify that you have enabled EMS OSS Heartbeat Service in the
system console with the relevant parameters, including the IP
address/host name.

Note If you select Retransmit and OSS Heartbeat service is enabled in the system
console (refer to the description of EMS services in Chapter 4), then when the
OSS server is down, RADview saves the event and resends to the OSS server
when it becomes available.
If OSS Heartbeat service is not being used, there is no need for the Retransmit
option.

 Forward Mode – Select how to forward the trap:

 Original Trap – Forward the original trap sent by the agent device
 EMS Event – Forward the EMS event as a trap
 Original Trap + Severity – Forward the original trap sent by the agent
device, with severity assigned by EMS.
4. In the Add Destination dialog box, click <Set>.
The Add Destination dialog box closes, and the forwarding destination is
shown in the Forwarding Destinations dialog box (see Figure 7-49).
5. When you have completed specifying destinations, click <Close> in the
Forwarding Destinations dialog box.
The Forwarding Destinations dialog box closes. You can use the defined
destinations when configuring SNMP trap forwarding in an event policy
(refer to Forwarding Events).

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-43

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 7-49. Forwarding Destinations Dialog Box

Figure 7-50. Add Destination Dialog Box

Defining Fault Clearance Procedures

You can define the probable cause and corrective actions for events. When the
event occurs and is shown in the event browser, the defined probable cause and
corrective actions can be viewed in the details of the event.

 To configure fault clearance procedures:

1. In the Fault Administrator window, select Configuration > Fault Clearance.
The Fault Clearance Procedure dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-51).
2. Click <Add>.
The Add Fault Clearance Event dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-52).

7-44 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

3. For Event Class, Source, and Instance, you can use the default value of Any to
mean that the policy applies to all sources, all Instances, or all event classes,
respectively. If you want to use Any for event class, skip to step 4. The
following steps explain the procedure for selecting a specific event class:
a. Click […] next to Event Class to display the Select Event dialog box (see
Figure 7-29).
b. In the Select Event dialog box double-click the desired event class group
to expand it, then select the desired event class from the expanded event
class group (see Figure 7-30).
The event class appears at the bottom of the Select Event dialog box (see
Figure 7-31).
c. In the Select Event dialog box click <Set>.
The Select Event dialog box closes, and the selected event class appears
in the Add Fault Clearance Event dialog box (see Figure 7-53).
4. If you want to use Any for source, skip to step 5. The following steps explain
the procedure for selecting a specific source:
a. Click <Browse> next to Source.
The Select Node dialog box is displayed showing the nodes (see
Figure 7-33).
b. Select the desired node and click <OK> to close the Select Node dialog
box.
The node appears in the Add Fault Clearance Event dialog box (see
Figure 7-54).
5. In the Add Fault Clearance Event dialog box, click <Set>.
The Add Fault Clearance Event dialog box closes, and the Fault Clearance
Procedure dialog box displays the event, along with text boxes for the
probable cause and corrective actions (see Figure 7-55).
6. If you wish to specify a probable cause, enter text describing the probable
cause of the event in the Probable Cause text box.
7. If you wish to specify corrective measures, enter text describing corrective
actions for the event in the Corrective Measures text box.
8. Click <Apply> to complete the fault clearance specification for the event.
If you entered probable cause and/or corrective actions, the Probable
Cause and/or Correction options for the event are shown as selected (see
Figure 7-56).
9. When you have completed specifying fault clearance procedures, click
<Close> in the Fault Clearance Procedure dialog box.
The Fault Clearance Procedure dialog box closes. When an event occurs
for which you have specified a fault clearance procedure, you can see the
probable cause and corrective actions in the details of the event in the
Event Browser.

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-45

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 7-51. Fault Clearance Procedure Dialog Box, Empty

Figure 7-52. Add Fault Clearance Event Dialog Box

Figure 7-53. Add Fault Clearance Event Dialog Box – Event Class Selected

7-46 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Figure 7-54. Add Fault Clearance Event Dialog Box – Node Selected

Figure 7-55. Fault Clearance Procedure Dialog Box, after Event Added

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-47

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 7-56. Fault Clearance Procedure Dialog Box, after Events Added with Probable Causes and
Corrective Actions

Setting Parameters for the Event Browser Log

You can configure the following Event Browser log parameters:
• Maximum number of log records
• Procedure when log reaches the maximum size
• Automatic event clearing.

 To manage the log settings:

1. From the Fault Administrator window, select Configuration > Log
Management.
The Log Management dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-57). Refer to
Table 7-6 for a description of the parameters.
2. Enter the Maximum No. of Log Records that can be stored in the Event
Browser log.
3. Select Cyclic Log to define the procedure when the log reaches the maximum
size, and enter the percentage of old records to remove when the log
reaches its maximum size. If Cyclic Log is cleared, any new events are lost
once the log is full.

7-48 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

4. Select Major/Critical under Alerts and enter the percentage of major/critical

log events that trigger an event (which appears in the Event Browser).
5. Select Clear non-cleared events which are in the system for the last given
days to configure automatic event clearing, and enter the time to check and
the age of the events. The automatic event clearing procedure selects the
Cleared parameter for the event in the Event Browser, it does not remove the
event.
6. Click <Set>.

Figure 7-57. Log Management Dialog Box

Table 7-6. Log Management Parameters

Parameters Function

Current No. of Log Records Displays the current number Log Records
Read-only
Max No. of Log Records Max No. of Log Records

RADview Handling RADview Device Events 7-49

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Parameters Function

Cyclic

Cyclic Log If selected, allows you to specify what to do when the

Event Browser reaches the maximum number of log
records.
Selected – Allows you to specify the percentage of log
records to be removed when log reaches the maximum
size
Cleared – No additional events are added to the log when
it reaches the maximum size

Old Records Remove Percentage of old log records to be removed when log
reaches the maximum size

Alerts When reaching a certain percentage of the log maximum

size, an Alert can be produced by the server and sent (as
an event) to the user

Major If selected, allows you to specify the percentage of the

maximum size of the log before a Major Alert is generated

Critical If selected, allows you to specify the percentage of the

maximum size of the log before a Critical Alert is
generated

Automatic Events Clearing

Clear non-cleared events which Select to configure automatic event clearing. The
are in the system for the last automatic event clearing selects the Cleared parameter in
given days the Event Browser (see Figure 7-1) for events that meet
the criteria for automatic event clearing, as defined by the
next two parameters.

Checking time once a day Time of day when to check for events to automatically
clear, in hh:mm:ss format

Clear events older than (days) Enter the number of days that events should be older
than, to be automatically cleared.

7-50 Handling RADview Device Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

7.4 Handling RADview System Events

RADview events are recorded in the following logs by the EMS Log Service:
• Security log – Displays events from the RADview security subsystem such as
logins to EMS and audits
• System log –Displays events from the RADview system
• Application log – Displays events from the RADview management application.
Refer to Configuring the Log Properties for details on configuring the EMS Log
properties. Refer to Viewing RADview Events for details on viewing the logs.

Configuring the Log Properties

The Log Service is designed to be consistent with ITU-T X.735 & Telecom Log
service. You can configure the properties of the RADview Logs with the EMS Log
Administrator.
In addition, RADview uses the Syslog protocol (RFC 5674, RFC 3164) to generate
and transport event notifications to up to two Syslog servers.

Note Syslog servers do not install with RADview. They must be installed separately in a
location that is permanently accessible to the RADview server. For additional
information and instructions on installing a Syslog server, refer to the associated
documentation.

 To configure the EMS log properties and define up to two Syslog servers:
1. Open the Admin Console. To do so, from the RADview Manager menu, select
Tools > Admin Console.
The Admin Console appears.
2. Click the + icon to expand the Admin Console and then select Log Admin
Console in the list of consoles.
The default logs appear listed.
3. Select the log that you wish to configure.
The EMS Log Administrator is displayed. For each EMS log it shows the
status, current size, and maximum size.

RADview Handling RADview System Events 7-51

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 7-58. EMS Log Administrator

4. From the menu, select Action > Configuration.

The respective log configuration dialog box appears.

Figure 7-59. Log Admin Configuration Dialog Box

Table 7-7. Log Admin Configuration Parameters – Database Storage

Parameter Function

Admin Status

Locked Actions are not logged

7-52 Handling RADview System Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Parameter Function

Unlocked Actions are logged

Storage Full Action

Halt No more entries are logged

Wrap The oldest entries are deleted

Wrap by Severity Entries with the lowest severity are deleted (enabled
only when Wrap is selected)

Max. Size Maximum size of the log. This can be any positive
number.

Record Life Time (Days) Number of days that the entries are saved in the log.
This can be any non-negative integer. Zero means
unlimited.

Quality Of Service None – No quality is guaranteed

Efficiency (Flush) – Records that should be logged are
buffered, and eventually flushed into the log. This
gives the best performance.
Reliability – Records logged immediately. This QoS
provides the most reliable behavior, and is
recommended for Security Log.

Table 7-8. Log Admin Configuration Parameters – Save to Log Files

Parameter Function

Save to Log Files Check to save the event to the log files

Log Files Directory Enter the folder to save the log file

Log File Length (*1000 Lines) Define the max length of the log files

Table 7-9. Log Admin Configuration Parameters – Send to Syslog Server

Parameter Function

Server 1, Server 2

Enable Check to enable Server 1 and/or Server 2 respectively

Transport The transport protocol to the Syslog server

UDP, TCP

Address IP address of the Syslog server or

alias + port

Port The port through which to transmit to the Syslog

server. The default port is is 514.

Facility

RADview Handling RADview System Events 7-53

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Parameter Function

Minimum Severity Level Select the minimum severrity level of events sent to
the Syslog server.
Note: Syslog event severity levels are different and
are mapped to RADview event severity levels. To
customize the mapping, use the System Console as
explained under Configuring the EMS Log Service in
Chapter 4.

Viewing RADview Events in the Log Viewer

The Log Viewer displays events captured by the EMS Log Service.

 To access the Log Viewer:

• From the RADview-EMS Network Manager menu bar select
Tools > Log Viewer to open the Log Viewer.
The Log Viewer window is displayed.

Figure 7-60. Log Viewer Window

There are three kinds of displays. Select one of the tabs:

• Security – Displays security-related events
• System – Displays system-related events
• Application – Displays application-related events.

Note The codes in the Security log Description field can be used in case there is some
problem with system security, to allow RAD to identify the internal reason for a
problem.

7-54 Handling RADview System Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Setting the Log Display

Figure 7-61. Log Viewer Configuration Menu

 To select the EMS server for displays:

1. From the Configuration menu, select EMS Server Selection.
The EMS Server Selection dialog box is displayed, showing a list of active
servers in the system that can be master or slave servers
(see Figure 7-62).

Note If the dialog box does not display the list of EMS servers, click the EMS Servers
parameter to expand the list.

Figure 7-62. EMS Server Selection Dialog Box

2. Select the server and then click <Select>.
The selected server is used for the log service.

 To filter the type of display:

1. From the Configuration menu, select Filter.
The Filter dialog box is displayed (see Figure 7-63).
2. Select the type of filter for the display, according to Table 7-10, and click
<Set>.

RADview Handling RADview System Events 7-55

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Figure 7-63. Filter Dialog Box

Table 7-10. Log Viewer Filter Parameters

Parameter Description / Possible Values

Date Filter display by beginning and end dates

Severity Critical
Major
Minor
Warning
Normal
Unknown

Source Filter display by Source IP Address

User Filter display by User Name

Category Filter display by Category

Sub Category Filter display by Subcategory

Description Filter display by Description (can also be part of a

description with ‘*’ instead of a prefix/suffix)

Saving, Printing, or Deleting Logs

You can save, print, or delete logs.

7-56 Handling RADview System Events RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Figure 7-64. Log Viewer Action Menu

 To save a log:
1. Click a tab in the Log Viewer.
2. From the Action menu, select Save As.

 To print a log:
1. Click a tab in the Log Viewer.
2. From the Action menu, select Print.

Note Save and Print apply only to the active tab.

 To delete selected entries:

1. Click a tab in the Log Viewer.
2. Select the entries you want to delete.
3. From the Action menu, select Delete > Selected Entries.

 To delete the whole log:

1. Click a tab in the Log Viewer.
2. From the Action menu, select Delete > Log.

Note Delete Log applies only to the active tab.

7.5 Troubleshooting
This section provides some troubleshooting information.

Table 7-11. Troubleshooting Chart

RADview Troubleshooting 7-57

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Fault/Problem Probable Cause(s) Corrective Action

An error message appears indicating • A power saving scheme • Turn the power save option off. If a power
the that The RADview server is not may be active on the saver is still required for other resurces on
ready upon attempting to start relevant PC, which causes he PC, create a power plan for RADview as
RADview, although the server is started connectivity issues explained in Chapter 2 of the RADview
and appears as online and ready. between client and server system manual.
once the relevant PC • Uninstall RADview, remove the C:\RV32
went ‘to sleep’. folder and then reinstall RADview.
Note: For modified and added power plans to
persist, make sure to have the relevant PC
exempted from restrictions based on possible
company policies.

After a network element is created on • The corresponding • To check whether the product is installed,
the map, the icon is gray with a product was not selected open the Version Browser (Tools > Version
question mark when RADview was Browser) and expand the EMS Products
installed tree. If the desired product is not there,
• You do not have enough install RADview as an upgrade, keeping the
ENW license points existing database and selecting the
installed desired product.

• The product is not • To check the ENW license points, open the
supported by RADview License Manager (Tools > License
Manager), then verify that the total
• The product version is
number of installed license points is
not supported by
greater than the consumed license points
RADview
• To verify if the product is supported by
RADview, check the RADview release note
• To verify if the product version is
supported by RADview-EMS, check the
RADview release note

The RADview installation is terminated • You may have installed • Uninstall the Oracle database, restart your
because the Oracle database cannot be the Oracle database from PC and then re-install the Oracle database.
found, although it has been installed a network drive. In case of problems with uninstalling the
Oracle database, refer to the instructions
on manually uninstalling respective entry
on a procedure to manually uninstall the
Oracle database below.

Oracle server is not functioning See log files Check the following log files:
properly • C:\oracle\admin\mng164\bdump\alert_mng
164.log
• C:\oracle\ora10\network\log\listener.log

7-58 Troubleshooting RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

Fault/Problem Probable Cause(s) Corrective Action

Oracle does not uninstall. The Oracle problem Perform the following to manually uninstall
uninstallation process stops Oracle:
somewhere between 10 and 20 per • Delete all folders whose name starts with
cent. oracle, in C:\ and C:\Program Files (if the
installation drive is not C, adjust the paths
accordingly)
• In some cases, files located under
C:\oracle\ora11\BIN are locked and cannot
be deleted.
To release them for deletion, go to
Services (via Control Panel > All Control
Panel Items > Administraive Tools) and
stop Distributed Transaction Coordinator.
• Use regedit to delete the entry
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/SOFTWARE/ORACLE
from the registry and then restart the
relevant PC.
• If this folder can sill not be deleted,
rename it, restart the PC again and then
delete it.
Note: Use extreme caution when editing the
registry. It is recommended to back up the
registry before editing it.

Unable to save User account control is set to Verify that the user account control is set to
C:\windows\system32\drivers\etc\hosts notify about changes, which Never notify (refer to Chapter 2 for details). If
after changing it blocks saving the file you change the user account control settings,
you must restart your workstation for the
change to take effect.

RADview Troubleshooting 7-59

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

Fault/Problem Probable Cause(s) Corrective Action

Certain end points cannot be used to A service may be listed in the 1. On the RADview Server station, navigate
create a service between two devices database, but not be visible to C:\Temp and create a new XML file
in RADview-Service Manager called deleteServices.xml.
2. Use an editor such as Notepad++ and
enter the following XML tags into that XML
file:
<script>
<services>
<name>service-1</name>
<name> service -2</name>
<name> service -3</name>
</services>
</script>
Replace service-# with the names of the
respective services.
3. To delete the specified services, run the
following string:

C:\rv32\ems\bin\mng164_script.exe
cmd=DeleteServices
xml=C:\temp\deleteServices.xml
log_filename=
C:\temp\deleteServices.log

If you changed user name and/or

password, run the modified string below:
C:\rv32\ems\bin\mng164_script.exe
cmd=DeleteServices
xml=C:\temp\deleteServices.xml
log_filename=
C:\temp\deleteServices.log
user=username
password=user_password
4. In C:\Temp, open deleteServices.log; the
services you just deleted appear in entries
like this:
Jan. 23, 2014 08:14:41
Dur:0 System Log
Service: entry Service-1 deleted

7-60 Troubleshooting RADview

Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Fault Management

7.6 Frequently Asked Questions

Q I forgot my RADview user's password. How can I recover it? Also, is there a
default user name and password that I can use?
A The default user name and password for accessing RADview (via the
LaunchDesk or RADview Network Manager) are root for the user name and
root for the password. If the default password of the root user has changed
since the initial installation, then it is necessary to reset the password for
your specific user name.

 To reset the password:

1. Stop the RADview server: From Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools >
Services, select RADview Server and stop the service.
2. In the C:\RV32\ems\conf\sec directory, back up the file svcsec.xml (copy
svcsec.xml to svcsec_old.xml).
3. Edit the file svcsec.xml as follows: Find the <database> section in the syntax
and add/change the following line:
<admin><administrator>root</administrator></admin>
4. Restart the RADview server: From Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools
> Services, select RADview Server and start the service.
5. Log in to the server and add a new administrator user via the Security Admin
console.
6. Stop the RADview server again.
7. Access svcsec.xml and remove the previously added line:
<admin><administrator>root</administrator></admin>
The password is now reset.

Q Where can I obtain operating/monitoring instructions regarding a specific RAD

product that is installed on the network?
A This system manual is complemented by individual agent manuals for
products with shelf views, each relating to a specific RAD product that is
included in the RADview package. In addition, each shelf view application has
a built-in Help application that displays the manual in a browser window.

Q After installing RADview, how do I know for which IP address/MAC address to

obtain the license?
A You can perform the following to get the information.

Note You must have License Manager version 2.02 or higher.

1. Verify that your NIC (Network Interface Card) is connected.

RADview Frequently Asked Questions 7-61

Chapter 7 Fault Management Installation and Operation Manual

2. Verify that the C:\RV32\lic\ems\bin directory exists (substitute your RADview

installation drive if it is not C:\).
3. Verify that the following files exist in C:\RV32\lic\ems\bin:
 Start_RvLicService.bat
 hostinfo.config
 hostinfo.exe
4. Double-click hostinfo.bat.
A command prompt window appears with the IP address and the MAC
address for the license.

Figure 7-65. Result of hostinfo.exe

Q My network requires the installation of additional RAD products. How can I

find out whether my system has sufficient license points?
A Use the RADview License Calculator in the RAD Network Management
Information. For additional details refer to the Licensing section in Chapter 4.

7.7 Technical Support

Technical support for this product can be obtained from the local partner from
whom it was purchased.
RADcare Global Professional Services offers a wide variety of service, support and
training options, including expert consulting and troubleshooting assistance,
online tools, regular training programs, and various equipment coverage options.
For further information, please contact the RAD partner nearest you or one of
RAD's offices worldwide.
RAD Data Communications would like your help in improving its product
documentation. Please send us an e-mail with your comments.
Thank you for your assistance!

7-62 Technical Support RADview

 Chapter 8
Application Tutorial

8.1 Introduction
This tutorial covers the FCAPS functionalities of an application including:
• RADview Server
• RADview PC Client
• Devices
It includes the following features and functionalities in RADview as follows:
• Working with Links
• Viewing Link Status
• Resources
• Business Entities/Customers
• Performance Portal version 2 for ETX-203A and ETX-204A devices – refer to
Chapter 5.

RADview/PACK1 Product Overview

RADview/PACK1, working with Oracle database, is a modular, client-server,
scalable element management system (EMS), providing configuration, fault,
performance, and security management capabilities.
When RADview-Service Center is used, RADview/PACK1 uses an Informix
database.
You can install RADview over Windows 7 32-bit, Windows 2008 64- bit, or over
Solaris on Sun Spark.

8.2 Installing RADview

RADview Installation Process

The RADview client/server must be installed in the following sequence:
1. Pre-installation
2. Installation of database and RADview client/server
3. Installation of RADview additional PC clients

RADview EMS Installing RADview 8-1

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

4. Additional installations

Pre-Installation

RADview/PACK1 Client/Server PC
1. Verify that the PC/laptop has a unique name.
2. Allocate a static IP. If you need to use DHCP, refer to Chapter 2 for
instructions.
3. Disable TCP/IPv6.
4. Do not change the name of PC after installing Oracle.
5. Disable the Windows firewall.
6. Open the relevant ports on the network firewall. Refer to the diagram
showing all ports used by RADview in Chapter 2.
7. Enable Control Panel Item > Windows Firewall > Allowed Programs > SNMP
Trap.
8. Enable Telnet Client.

RADview/PACK1 Client/Server UNIX

1. Allocate a static IP.
2. Do not change the hostname of the UNIX station after installing Oracle
3. Open the relevant ports on the network firewall. Refer to the diagram
showing all ports used by RADview in Chapter 2.

RADview/WIN/PACK1 Client PC

 Verify the PC/laptop settings required for installing RADview/PC client:

1. Verify that the PC has a static IP.
2. Verify that the Windows firewall is Off.
3. Test the connection: send a ping from the PC to the station running RADview
server.

Installing RADview/PACK1 on a Server Station

The installation and upgrading procedure is described in detail in Chapter 2. The
tutorial covers the most important details of the procedure.
1. Install the Oracle database.
2. On the station that will act as a RADview server, install both server and client.

8-2 Installing RADview RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

3. In General Information dialog box, leave Zone Name and Area Name fields
empty. Do not change Station Name field.
4. In the Database Settings dialog box, select (check) the Create new database
option only when you are performing the installation for the first time.

Note When upgrading, do not select the option to create a new database. Make sure
this option is not selected

RADview EMS Installing RADview 8-3

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

5. The following dialog displays all product groups. Install all groups of devices
to avoid the need to upgrade in the future.

6. After the installation procedure is completed, reboot the system.

On UNIX, you can reboot by typing: init 6
7. RADview is now fully installed and ready for use.

8-4 Installing RADview RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

Installing RADview/WIN/PACK1 Client PC

The installation and upgrading procedure is described in Chapter 2. Here we are
going to pay attention to the most important details of the procedure.
1. When upgrading, do not select the option to create a new database. Make
sure this option is not selected. During the installation select Client Only
installation.

RADview EMS Installing RADview 8-5

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

2. In General Information dialog note an important field: Master Server Address.

Type the IP address of the station running RADview .

Additional Installation Procedures

Additional operations are the following:
• Installing TFTP server
• On UNIX, creating a RADview user and setting the RADview user environment
– refer to Chapter 2 for details
• On PC, installing Google Chrome – for PM Portal (on UNIX,
/usr/sfw/lib/mozilla/Mozilla is used for monitoring PM).
• Installing Acrobat Reader – for viewing User Manual and PM SLA reports
• Loading two RADview licenses: ENW and RADVIEW-PC-LIC/RADVIEW-UNIX-LIC.

Configuring TFTP server on RADView UNIX Server

The RADview/UNIX/PACK1 (standalone) package includes a built-in TFTP server
that is automatically installed during the RADview is installation.

 To check that TFTP server was configured on the UNIX station:

1. Connect to the UNIX station from your laptop using the Xmanager application
installed on your laptop.
2. For this tutorial, use UNIX user name icon and password icon1234

8-6 Installing RADview RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

3. Then type su. When prompted, type the password rad_root

4. Verify that the directory /export/home/tftp exists.
5. Files transferred by Jobs will be saved in this directory.
6. View the /etc/inetd.conf file by typing: more /etc/inetd.conf
 Search for the line starting with tftp dgram udp
 Make sure there is no # at the beginning of this line.
 Make sure udp appears in this line and not udp6.
 At the end of this line, make sure /export/home/tftp appears.
The content of /etc/indetd.conf file is shown here:

7. Type: svcs |grep tftp

8. The following is displayed:

Configuring TFTP Server on RADview PC Server

Install a reliable TFTP server application: WinAgent or SolarWinds TFTP server. Do
not work with Pumpkin or 3Daemon.

 To activate and configure the TFTP SolarWinds on the server (in an actual
application):
1. In RADview go to Tools > System Console. (Enter the password root to open
the System Console).
2. Select Process1 > End Job Management (Back End) and select the TFTP tab.

RADview EMS Installing RADview 8-7

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

3. Copy TFTP Settings > Home Directory path.

4. Run SolarWinds on the server.

5. Select File > Configure.

6. Select the General tab, and verify and/or update the TFTP Server Root
Directory path is exactly as in Tools > System Console > Process1 > End Job
Management (Back End) > TFTP tab > TFTP Settings > Home Directory path.

8-8 Installing RADview RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

Note Verify that TFTP Settings > Home Directory path is exactly the same as the path
defined in the TFTP Server Root Directory in the TFTP Server application.

TFTP Server Initialization

Before running this tutorial, the TFTP server must be running on the server.

8.3 RADview Operation

The following sections describe RADview maps and different FCAPS (Fault,
Configuration, Administration, Performance, and Security) functions.
Configure devices with the minimum parameters for remote connectivity to the
RADview (when there is IP connectivity), which is the basic requirement to begin
managing a device via an NMS application.

 To verify that you have IP connectivity to devices:

• Ping to your products (Start menu >Run > Ping -t <IP>)

Objectives
• Configuration via RADview (FCAPS)
• Installing RADview licenses
• Using the RADview network management GUI

RADview EMS RADview Operation 8-9

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

• Working with submaps

• Adding a range of network elements
• Viewing level and device Status
• Creating Groups via RADview

Configuration via RADview (FCAPS)

Now that your devices are accessible by means of the management station, you
will launch the RADview application and continue with the configuration.

 To launch the RADview application:

1. From the Start > All Programs > Network Manager > RADview menu,
click on the Network Manager icon:

The RADview Network Manager opens together with a Login window.

2. For the very first login (before any users are defined), use the default user:
Username=root, Password=root, and click <OK>.

Note When licenses are not loaded, the following Message box will appear.

RADview requires license points for each managed element and a license key to
activate the map.
Each management station requires two RADview licenses:
• MAP license - required for working with RADview Standalone map.
• ENW license - allows you to configure all RAD devices that exist on the map.
The Network Manager map opens, displaying its Network Element Repository,
Event Browser and the Topology Map pane.

8-10 RADview Operation RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

Verifying Loaded RV Licenses

After your license is loaded to the server, you can see the licenses from your
RADview/PC Client.

 To view the loaded the license files:

1. From the RADview Tools menu select License Manager…
2. In the License Service Manager you can see the licenses that were loaded.
3. All licenses are created based on the MAC address/hostid of the server
station that appears in the last column, Host Id.
4. Launch the RADview application again, as described in the next section.

Topology Map
The Topology workspace is divided into panes that contain the following
components:
• Network Element Repository – Displays a navigation tree of levels (submaps)
and nodes (network elements) in the RADview network.
• Groups – Displays a navigation tree of user-defined groups of network
elements, used for additional map viewing; also for working with
configuration and jobs.

RADview EMS RADview Operation 8-11

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

• Map in the top right pane – Provides a visual representation of levels

(submaps) and nodes (network elements) in the RADview network,
corresponding to the Network Element Repository.
• Event Browser – Shows events received from the network devices.

Working with the Map

Before adding network elements to the Map, you need to define the SNMP
parameters for each device that will be added.
You will work with a Timeout of 2000 millisecond, Polling Interval of 60 second,
and 1 Retry for all map elements.

 To set SNMP parameters for all map elements:

1. Select the root / in the Network Element Repository, and right-click.
2. Select Properties…
3. In the Properties dialog box, select the SNMP tab.
4. In the SNMP tab:
 Set Timeout to 2000.
 Set Polling Interval to 60
 Enable “Apply changes to subnodes and sublevels”
5. Press Set

8-12 RADview Operation RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

 To define sublevels and NEs on the map:

RADview enables you to create a realistic view of your network by creating levels
and network elements (NEs) in the Network Element Repository (NER).
Each sublevel created in the NER has its own submap in the Map Pane, with a
corresponding tab at the bottom of the map.
Your goal now is to create a sublevel in the NER, and then create a NE for each
device.
Your sublevels name will be Group@, where @ is the number of your group. That
is, for group number 1 you will create a new sublevel called Group1;
for group number 2 you will create a new level called Group2; and so forth.
You will then add network elements (your devices) to the newly created Group@
sublevels.

 To add a new level to the RADview Network Manager Map:

1. Select the root / in the Network Element Repository, and right-click.

2. Select New Level…

The New Level dialog box opens.
3. Type Group@ (where @ is the number of your group) for the Level Name, and
press Set.
The level is created, added to the Network Element Repository tree under the
root/, and added to the map as a level icon:

 To add a range of Network Elements to a level in NER and Map:

1. Select the level in the Network Element Repository for which you wish to add
a network element, right- click and select New NEs…
The New NEs dialog box opens.

RADview EMS RADview Operation 8-13

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

2. Enter the starting and ending IP addresses.

IP addresses appear in the Appendix. .
3. Select the SNMP tab, and check the SNMP communities.
4. Press Set.
At the end of this process, NEs are configured and appear in the navigation
tree (NER) as nodes in the selected level. New icons corresponding to the
network elements appear on the level’s submap.
You will now see a few sublevels under / in NER.

8-14 RADview Operation RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

Working with RADview Links

Starting from RADview 3.0, ETX-203A and ETX-204A version 3.0 and higher can
be connected with links. The link color indicates the link alarm severity level,
which is determined from the ports connected by the link.
For all other devices you can create only schematic links, called legacy links. Such
links are only schematic lines without any color.

 To add a link between two network elements:

1. Right-click the device on the map, and select New Link.
The New Link dialog box appears, with the selected device as the link
starting point.

2. In Link Name, enter as the link name “LinkGroup@”. It must be a unique name
that is not being used for any other link.
3. In Description, you may optionally enter a description.
4. To set the port for the link starting point, click the browse button […] for
EndPoint A.
The Select End Point dialog box opens, showing the ports available in the
Endpoint A device.

RADview EMS RADview Operation 8-15

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

5. Select NET-ETH 1 port, and click Select.

6. To set the port for the link ending point, click the browse button for
EndPoint Z.
The Select End Point dialog box opens, showing a tree of devices.

7. Expand your Group@ level, and expand the remote device to display its ports.
8. Select NET-ETH 1 port, and click Select.

8-16 RADview Operation RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

9. In the New Link dialog box, click Set to create the link.
A line is drawn between the two devices to represent the link. The line is
wider if there is more than one link between the two devices.

10. Verify that a links is not Gray. If a link is Gray, delete it and create again
following carefully the below instructions.

Viewing Level, Device and Link Status

Turn your attention to the icons of your devices. The icon’s color indicates the
device’s status.

Verifying Icon Status

Coloring icons in RADview is done as follows:
• For all nodes except ETX-A devices, coloring is done according to the periodic
polling (as done in the past)
• For ETX-A family devices, the status (and by this the color of the node) is
calculated as the highest level of active alarm in RADview for this node.
For example:
 If device has no active alarms in RADview, color is normal
 If device has many active alarms, and the most severe alarm is major,
color is orange
 If user deletes active alarm (using the event browser, for example) it will
impact the status
Since RADview now colors the node only according to alarm traps, it is highly
recommended (but not compulsory) to turn on the TrapSync feature in the device
and RADview.

RADview EMS RADview Operation 8-17

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

Note For more information about Status, refer to the section “Viewing Device Status”
in the RADview User’s Manual.

Note If you see that the icon is orange, it means there are Active Major Alarms on this
device. RADview Network Manager GUI displays the alarm that is the most severe.

A major alarm commonly occurs when some of the ports of a device are not in
use while their administrative status is Up. As a result, these ports send a Link
Down event, and are colored in magenta. When the overall status of the device is
Major, it means the severity of the Link Down is Major.

RADview Discovery Service

When the Discovery Service is enabled, the RADview server listens to coldStart
and warmStart standard SNMP traps.
• When a trap is received, a new node is automatically added to the NER under
a preconfigured tree node if the following conditions are met: The node is a
RAD node
• The node does not exist in the NER.

 To configure the Discovery Service:

1. Create a new Level named AutoDiscovery under /
2. Open Tools > System Console in RADview Network Manager window.
3. Click until you reach the Discovery Service.
4. Select the Discovery Enabled checkbox.
5. Type /AutoDiscovery in the Ner Context field.
Nodes that will be discovered will be added to AutoDiscovery level
6. Define Retries as 1.

8-18 RADview Operation RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

7. Close the System Console window.

8. Disconnect the power cable from your device, wait, and then reconnect it.
You will see a new NE added in the AutoDiscovery level.

Creating Groups
If you have many products, you can combine them into one group. You can then
run the same job on products associated with this group at the same time.
There are two kinds of groups:
• Dynamic group – Group members are defined by criteria that determine which
NEs belong to the group. NEs that meet the criteria are automatically
members of the group. When an NE is added to the map, and it matches the
specified criteria, it is automatically added to the group. When an NE is
changed, it is added or removed, according to the group criteria.
• Static group – Group members are defined by copy/paste of nodes/levels
from the tree/map. When levels are pasted to a static group, the
corresponding NEs are added to the group without the level hierarchy. You
can create levels in a static group.

 To create a new group by Type:

1. Select Topology.

RADview EMS RADview Operation 8-19

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

2. Right-click the group tree/Public group tree.

3. Select New Dynamic Group.
4. For the Group Name, type a name such as All_ETX-203AGroup@, All_ETX-
204AGroup@, or All_LA-210Group@ etc.
5. Select Criterion NE Type, and Condition Equals .
6. Click the browse button […], and select a device type; for example, All_ETX-
203A, All_ETX-204A, All_Ipmux-2L, or All_LA-210, All_Gmux, etc.
7. Click Add.
8. When you have finished specifying criteria, click Ok to create the group.
The group appears in the Groups pane. Devices that match the criterion
will automatically be added.

You will also create jobs based on the group level you created.

Note Each group should run the job only on the devices that belong to the group level.

 To create a new group by Level:

1. Right-click the group tree/Public group tree
2. Select New Dynamic Group.
3. For the Group Name, type a name such as Group@ (where @ represents the
group number).
4. Select Criterion Level, Condition Equals.
5. Click the browse button […], and select your group.
6. Click Add.
7. When you have finished specifying criteria, click Ok to create the group.

8-20 RADview Operation RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

For example:

8.4 RADview Jobs and Automation

Overview

Configuration Archive
The configuration archive contains the configuration status and archived
configurations files, enabling you to track device configurations. The
configuration archive contains files uploaded/downloaded to/from devices via the
job mechanism (see below); these files can be uploaded to the devices when
necessary. The configuration files are tracked by date and time.

Jobs and Automation

A job is a procedure that is performed on a specific group of NEs at a specific
time, usually involving TFTP/SFTP file transfers. Jobs can be scheduled to execute
periodically or once. A job can be any of the following operations:
• Execute Script – Sends CLI script to NE for execution. By default RADview
sends the CLI scripts via SSH. If a device does not support SSH, RADview can
send the CLI scripts via Telnet (after it is preconfigured via NE > Parameters).
• Download Configuration – Loads configuration file from NE.
• Upload Configuration – Loads configuration file to NE.
• Collect Statistics – Collects statistics from NE (via TFTP or for ETX version 4.0
or up also via SFTP)
• Generate Statistics Reports
• Save Configuration – Copies running-config to startup-config file of NE.
• Download Log – Loads alarms log file from NE
• Download Software – Loads software file from NE.
• Upload Software – Loads software file to NE.
• Upload Software to Backup – Loads software file to backup storage of NE.
• Download User File – Loads user file from NE.
• Upload User File – Loads user file to NE.
• Install Software – Sets a software file as active (may result in automatic
reboot of NE).
• Reboot – Reboots NE.
• Swap Main and Backup Software – Swaps the NE main software with the
backup storage software.

RADview EMS RADview Jobs and Automation 8-21

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

Note Not all devices support all these actions.

Jobs and Automation

The Jobs workspace is divided into panes containing the following components:
• Network Element Repository – Displays a navigation tree of levels (submaps)
and nodes (network elements) in the RADview network.
• Groups – Displays a navigation tree of user-defined groups of network
elements.
• Jobs Table – Displays the jobs that are defined in the system, with a row for
each job, and attributes defined in the table columns.
The Jobs Table has two tabs:
 Active – Shows all jobs that are currently running, or that are scheduled
to run (once or recurring).
 History – Shows jobs that have already run, and will not run again. This
list includes jobs that ran once, as well as jobs that recurred but have
completed their last run. All jobs in the History tab have status Completed
or Stopped.
• Reports – Displays job reports.

Software File Management

The Software File Management table gathers all software files that were imported
or uploaded/downloaded to/from different devices. It is a customizable table
which lists the information relevant to the specific software, such as the date it
was placed in storage, file size, source, etc. You can also change the status of
the software file from Valid to Obsolete.

8-22 RADview Jobs and Automation RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

 To import a software file to the Software File Management:

1. From the Network Manager main toolbar, select File > SW File…

The Software File Management table opens.

2. Select File > Import.

3. Click Browse and select SW file from your Desktop.
Ask your trainer for a specific place.
4. Ask your trainer for the SW version and insert it In SW Version field.
5. In Comments, type Released version supported by RADview.
The Software File Management table now includes the newly imported
software version.

RADview EMS RADview Jobs and Automation 8-23

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

Create a Job – Upload Software

 To upload a new software version to devices in your group

1. In the RADview toolbar, select Jobs.
Then in the Network Element Repository pane (not the Groups pane), right-
click your group level named Group@ and select Upload Software.

The Job wizard opens.

2. Select Install software (at the bottom of the screen), and click Next.

8-24 RADview Jobs and Automation RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

3. For the Name of the Job, type Upload software to Group@ (where @ is your
group number).
4. For the Description, type Upload software to all devices Group@
5. Click Import to import the software version.
Select Browse…, and go to Desktop to find the SW file.
6. Ask for your trainer for the exact file location and select the SW version file.
7. Fill SW version field with a SW version number.
Ask your trainer for the exact version number.
8. Click OK
From now on this version will be stored within the Software File
Management storage. See below for more information.

RADview EMS RADview Jobs and Automation 8-25

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

9. Click Next.
10. Select Now and click Finish.
The Job will start running.
11. When the job is finished, check the Reports pane to verify Status is OK.
12. In the Reports pane, double-click the job to see the status of the software
download job for each device. Notice a current status that might be
Rebooting, Verifying software version… etc according to a current Job status.

13. Click on More details … to view the report details (which can be either saved
and/or printed).
You will now see how to change the status of a specific software file from Valid
to Obsolete if necessary.
If new uploaded SW is the same as the existing previously, you will see a Warning
Informing that a SW was not changed.

 To change the status of the SW file from Valid to Obsolete:

1. From the Network Manager main toolbar, select File->SW File…

8-26 RADview Jobs and Automation RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

2. Right-click on the specific version you need to change, and select Mark as
Obsolete.

Note Next time you will make SW upload, this version that was just signed as Obsolete
will not appear in the wizard combo-box.

Configuration Management

Creating a Job – Download Configuration

 To download a configuration file:

1. Select Jobs in the RADview window upper pane.

2. Right click on Groups > Group@. Select New Job.

RADview EMS RADview Jobs and Automation 8-27

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

The job wizard opens.

3. In the Select an Action screen, select Download Configuration, and click Next.

4. For the Name of the Job, type Download Configuration From Device$Group@
(where instead of $ write a device type and @=your group number).
5. Type a description.

8-28 RADview Jobs and Automation RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

6. Click Advanced.
7. For Report Logging, select Log All job tasks, and click <OK>.

Note The Advanced tab also allows you to configure several advanced features, such as
forwarding the report to an email address. (Refer to the product manual for more
information.)

RADview EMS RADview Jobs and Automation 8-29

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

8. Select Next, Now and Finish. The Job will start running.
9. When the job is finished, check the Reports pane to verify Status is OK .
10. In the Reports pane, double-click the job to see the status of the
configuration download job for each device.
11. Click on More details … to view the report details (which can be either saved
and/or printed).

8-30 RADview Jobs and Automation RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

 To check a Job status:

When the job is finished you will see an update in the Status column. If there is
no Error, the Job will be finished with status OK:

In general, the status of the Job operation can be one of the following:

Interrupted – Job ended unexpectedly; e.g. server failed

Skipped – Job was skipped because a recurrent job session is running

at the time that the job should have started, or it applies to a group that
currently has no members.

Fail –Job was not successful for at least one of the NEs. Check the
report details to see if the job succeeded for any of the NEs.

Warning – Job ended successfully, but there was some other error;
e.g., the CLI script was successfully sent to the agent, but the script contained
errors.

Stopped – Job was stopped.

OK – Job ended successfully.

Configuration Archive
The configuration archive contains the configuration status and archived
configurations files, enabling you to track device configurations. The
configuration archive contains files uploaded/downloaded to/from devices via the
job mechanism; these files can be uploaded to the devices when necessary. The
configuration files are tracked by date and time.
The Configuration workspace is divided into panes that contain the following
components:
• Network Element Repository – Displays a navigation tree of levels (submaps)
and nodes (network elements) in the RADview network.
• Groups – Displays a navigation tree of user-defined groups of network
elements.
• Configuration Status – Shows device configuration information for NEs
selected from the Network Element Repository or from the Groups tree (NE

RADview EMS RADview Jobs and Automation 8-31

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

Name, NE Type, IP Address, HW Main version, SW Main version, Status ,Last

Startup Changed in Date and time, Last Config Backup Date and time & Last
Boot Time).
• Archive Files – Displays information about archived configuration files.

 To view the configuration information for selected NEs:

1. In the RADview window’s upper pane, select Configuration.

2. Double-click on one of your ETX-204A in the Network Element Repository.

The Configuration Status table in the top right pane displays a row containing
configuration information for the selected NE.

 To view the list of archive files for the selected NEs:

• Double-click on the row in the Configuration Status table.
Alternately, select the NE in the Configuration Status Table, and click the
view-files toolbar button.
A list of all Archive configuration files related to this specific device is
displayed in the bottom right pane. You can sort and filter this list by
columns.
You can now select a specific configuration file that was downloaded from the
device and upload it to the device.

8-32 RADview Jobs and Automation RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

Configuration Archive – File Types

• Startup-config – Contains saved user configuration. This configuration will be
used during device power up.
• Running-config – Contains the current configuration that is running/
configured within the device, which is different from the default
configuration. If you perform a save (via terminal), running config becomes
the same as startup config.
• Software
• User-default-config – Contains the default user configuration. This file is not
automatically created. You can create by using the copy command it in
terminal, or by using the Job application.
• Script

Baseline
This feature is applicable only for configuration files. When a file is marked as
baseline, the icon is displayed in the column. Only one baseline is possible
for each NE.

 To mark a configuration as baseline:

1. Follow the instructions in the previous page for viewing configuration
information and archive files for selected NEs.
2. Look for the configuration download startup-config file that you downloaded
in the section “Create Job – Download Configuration”.

RADview EMS RADview Jobs and Automation 8-33

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

3. Right click on the relevant configuration file, and select Mark as Baseline.
4. Repeat this procedure for other devices in your group.

Creating a Job – Upload Configuration from Archive

 To upload a configuration file from the archive to a specific NE:

1. In the RADview Network Manager window’s upper pane, select Configuration.

2. Double-click on one of your devices in the Network Element Repository.

The Configuration Status table displays a row containing configuration
information for the selected NE.
3. Double-click on the row in the Configuration Status table.
Alternately, select the NE in the Configuration Status Table, and click the
toolbar button.
A list of all Archive configuration files related to a specific deviceis
displayed in the bottom right pane. You can sort and filter this list by
columns.
4. In the startup-configuration row, right-click on the Baseline raw.
5. Select Upload.

8-34 RADview Jobs and Automation RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

The job wizard opens.

6. At the bottom of the screen, select Activate Configure file upload, and click
Next.
7. For the Name of the job, type Upload Baseline Configuration to Device
Group@) .
8. Select start-up (Baseline) from the archive, and click Next.
9. Click Advanced.
10. For Report Logging, select Log All job tasks, and click OK.

RADview EMS RADview Jobs and Automation 8-35

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

11. Click Next, select Now and Finish. The Job will start running.
12. You can verify the status of the job in the Jobs pane of the RADview window;
double-click on the specific job.
13. Click on More details … to view the report details (which can be either saved
and/or printed).
You will practice additional Job procedures, software upload and statistics
collection – in the last section of this tutorial.

Creating a Job – Execute Script

 This section is relevant only for devices supporting CLI.To send a CLI script to the
device:
1. In the Network Element Repository, right-click on the one of the devices in
your group that support CLI, and select New Job.
The job wizard opens.
2. Select Execute Script, and click Next.

3. For the Name of the Job, enter Group@ExecuteScript_deviceIP#.

4. For the Description, enter the text as in the below example.

8-36 RADview Jobs and Automation RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

5. Click Browse and select the OAM [email protected] file, which is located
in the Scripts directory on your desktop. Click OK.
The script will appear in the Enter script to execute field.
6. Click Next.
7. Select Next, Now and click Finish.
The Job will start running.
8. You can double-click on the Jobs Table to open the Jobs Status dialog box,
which shows the progress of the job for each NE associated with the job.
9. When the Job is finished you can open the report, and see the list of
commands that were executed on the device according to the script (see
below).
The information in the dialog box is automatically updated as the job continues to
run. Additionally the dialog box contains a table showing the status of each NE,
while the Error column indicates whether there is an error during the job process
that causes the job to fail. (In the event of an error, you can open a report that
details the cause of the failure).
10. Repeat the steps in this task for the second device.

8.5 RADview Performance Monitoring Portal

Objectives
The transition to next generation packet network means that service providers
must be able to guarantee Service Level Agreements (SLA).
RADview Performance Monitoring (PM) Portal provides tools for real-time and
long term monitoring of Ethernet service performance and for creating monthly
SLA reports.
In this section you will learn how to configure RADview to collect OAM statistics,
generate monthly SLA reports, and view OAM statistic reports with the RADview
PM Portal.

Overview
RADview server collects OAM statistics from RADview devices that support it.
The statistic counters, referred to as Key Performance Indicators (Y.1731 KPIs)
are: frame delay (latency), frame delay variation (jitter), frame loss, network
availability, and throughput.
This chapter describes the operations required for configuring and viewing OAM
statistic reports, when the criteria for associating policies to services is by both
service grade and customer ranking.

RADview EMS RADview Performance Monitoring Portal 8-37

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

RADview PM Portal Requirements

The Performance Monitoring portal requires the following:
• RADview 3.0 or higher
• A reliable TFTP/SFTP server application
• Google Chrome web browser
• Acrobat Reader version 9 or higher.
• Devices: ETX-203A/ETX-204A/ETX-205A version 3.0 or higher with OAM
configured.

RADview PM Configuration
After you have created a topology in the RADview map by creating sublevels and
network elements (NEs), you can begin configuration of RADview PM.

 To configure RADview PM:

1. Map p-bit to service grades.
Each Service Grade can include one or more p-bits.
2. Default service grade mapping is as follows:
 Gold – p-bits 7, 6, 5
 Silver – p-bits 4, 3, 2
 Bronze – p-bits 1, 0.

Note You can change this mapping by editing file <RADview-installation-directory>/

ems/conf/pm/pm_configuration.xml.

3. Define end-customers, in the Business Entities workspace.

4. Assign resources/devices to customers, in the Resources workspace.
5. Define thresholds for 6 KPIs based on the SLA agreement between the
service provider and the end-customer (Define Policies).
6. Associate the policies to OAM service groups.
7. Set up job(s) to collect statistics from the relevant devices.
8. Set up job(s) to generate monthly SLA reports.
9. View previously collected statistics via the web-based RADview Performance
Portal.
10. View previously created monthly SLA reports.

Configuring Business Entities (End-Customers) and Resources

 To define the end-customer, named a business entity:

1. Select the Business Entities workspace.

8-38 RADview Performance Monitoring Portal RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

2. In the Business Entities workspace, click on the toolbar or right-click and

select New Business Entity.
The New Business Entity dialog box is displayed.

3. Fill in the fields as following:

 Name: Type CustomerGroup@, where @ is your group number.
 Business Entity Parent: leave empty.
 Status: Active.
 Ranking: Normal.
 Click Set.
The business entity is created.

 To view Resources workspace:

The resources workspace contains a list of the devices defined in RADview, along
with alarms associated with the devices and their components. You can filter the
resource table, and view the device alarms. When you add a device to the
RADview map, it is automatically added to the Resources workspace.
1. Go to the Resource workspace by selecting Resources icon on the RADview
Network Manager toolbar.

The Resources workspace is divided into panes containing the following

components:

RADview EMS RADview Performance Monitoring Portal 8-39

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

 The upper pane Resources – Shows devices that have been defined in the
RADview Topology workspace.
 The bottom pane containing Details, Active Alarms and History Alarms –
Displays the resource details, active alarms, and past alarms.
2. Select a resource in the Resources pane and note the information in the
Details pane.
3. Select the Active Alarms tab to display the active alarms of the resource.
4. Select the History Events tab to display the past alarms of the resource.

Notes • For users familiar with previous versions of RADview:

Previously there was an application called Net Inventory. Resources replaces
Net-Inventory for devices (ETX-203A and ETX-204A) that support Resources.
Net Inventory still exists and is used for devices that do not support resources.
• Resource Information (Alias, Serial Number etc) can be changed. For details,
refer to Working with Resources in the RADview-Service manager section.

 To filter Resources to see only resources belonging to your sublevel:

When you select the Resources workspace, you can see all Resources in your
network.
You can filter the displayed list to view only devices belong to your sublevel.

1. Select the Filter icon next to the Sort options in the Resources toolbar.

As a result the menu changes to:

2. Click the NER Level button to open the list.

8-40 RADview Performance Monitoring Portal RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

3. Select the (All) checkbox to clear all selections, and select Group@ where @ is
the number of your group.

4. Click OK. The Resources pane now displays only the devices belonging to your
group sublevel.

 To assign Resource to the End-Customer

1. In the Resources workspace, select the device belonging to your Group, then
right-click and select Edit Resource.
The Edit Resource dialog box is displayed. Note that the Customer field is
empty.
2. Click the Browse button next to the Customer field.

3. In the Select Customer dialog box, select CustomerGroup@ (where @ is your

group number) and click Select.

4. Click <Set>.
The resource/device was updated with its end-customer name.
5. Repeat Steps 1-4 for your second device.

RADview EMS RADview Performance Monitoring Portal 8-41

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

Configuring PM Parameters
Each end-customer (group) has several defined OAM services, each of which
belongs to a different service grade.
Each end customer has a different SLA contract. This means that even if one end-
customer (e.g., CustomerGroup1) has a service based on pbit-7, exactly as
another end-customer (e.g., CustomerGroup2), they will have different SLA
contracts. Every SLA contract defines different threshold values.
For this reason, this tutorial teaches you how to configure and view OAM
statistics reports, with both service grade and customer ranking as the criteria for
associating policies to services.

 To verify Policy association criteria configured by the administrator on the server:

1. In RADview Menu select Performance > Policy Settings…

The Policy Settings dialog is displayed.

Service Grade and Customer Ranking are selected (checked).

2. Press Cancel.

 To verify the threshold values of the main KPIs:

A set of thresholds defined for the main KPIs is called a Policy.
The RADview administrator’s initial task is to create sets of thresholds that
correspond to a particular Service Level Agreement with the end-customer.
1. On the RADview Network Manager Toolbar select Performance > Policies.
The Policies dialog box is displayed.

8-42 RADview Performance Monitoring Portal RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

2. Note the pre-defined Policies. Select any Policy in the table, and press
Change.
The Policy Details dialog box is displayed.

3. Press Next.
4. The KPI Selection dialog box is displayed. Note the pre-defined Threshold
values.

RADview EMS RADview Performance Monitoring Portal 8-43

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

5. Press Cancel

Note Do not change any values, as they are shared by all RADview PC client users!

 To verify assignment of Policies (sets of Thresholds) to Services:

1. On the RADview Network Manager toolbar, select Performance > Policies
Assignment to OAM Services.
The Policies Assignment to OAM Services dialog box is displayed.

2. Click <Close>.

8-44 RADview Performance Monitoring Portal RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

Collecting Statistics
OAM statistics are the statistic counters, referred to as Key Performance
Indicators (Y.1731 KPIs).
The RADview server collects the OAM statistics.
To obtain statistics, you need to set up a job for the devices from which you
want statistics, using the function Collect Statistics.
Once the statistics have been collected, they can be viewed via the web-based
RADview Performance Portal, described later in this section.

 To Collect Statistics:
1. Select the Jobs workspace.

2. Right-click in the Jobs Table-Active pane and select New Job…

3. In Wizard Step 1 - Create New Job > NE Selection Method, select By

customer-select customer from customers tree, and click Next.

RADview EMS RADview Performance Monitoring Portal 8-45

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

4. In Wizard Step 2 - Create New Job > Select Customer, select Explicitly, and
then select CustomerGroup@, where @ is a number of your group.

8-46 RADview Performance Monitoring Portal RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

5. In Wizard Step 3 - Create New Job > Select an Action, select Collect Statistics,
and click Next.

RADview EMS RADview Performance Monitoring Portal 8-47

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

6. In Wizard Step 5 - Create New Job > Collect Statistics: Job Parameters, for the
job Name, type: CollectStatisticsGroup@, where @ is a number of your
group.
7. Click Next.

8-48 RADview Performance Monitoring Portal RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

Note
In the Job Parameters dialog box, the parameter Days to Save Statistics Data
specifies how long to keep the statistics data in the NMS database. If you want
to keep statistics for a longer period, verify that your hard drive has enough
space for the stored statistics data.

8. In Wizard Step 7 - Create New Job > Schedule, select Recurring Every 15
Minutes and No end date.
9. Click Finish.

RADview EMS RADview Performance Monitoring Portal 8-49

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

10. To start collecting the data now, click the green Play button.
The Job will start running.
11. Verify the status of the job in the Jobs pane of the RADview window; double-
click on the specific job.

Generating Monthly SLA Reports

You will learn now how to generate monthly reports that summarize the SLA
status of the selected entities. To generate SLA reports, you will set up a job with
the job action Generate Statistics Report for the relevant devices.

 To Generate Monthly SLA Reports:

1. Select the Jobs workspace.

2. Right-click on Groups > Group@. Select New Job.

8-50 RADview Performance Monitoring Portal RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

The job wizard opens

3. In Wizard Step 3 – Create New Job > Select an Action, select Generate
Statistics Report, and click Next.

4. In Wizard Step 5 – Create New Job > Generate Statistics Report: Job
Parameters, for Name, type CreateReportGroup@ (where @=your group
number), and click Next.

RADview EMS RADview Performance Monitoring Portal 8-51

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

5. In Wizard Step 6 – Create New Job > Report Parameters, for the Title, type
OAM Statistics Report Group @ (where @=your group number). This is the
title that you want to appear in the statistics report.

8-52 RADview Performance Monitoring Portal RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

6. Select all other parameters as shown in the screen below, and click Next.

RADview EMS RADview Performance Monitoring Portal 8-53

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

7. Update Schedule dialog as on below screenshot

8-54 RADview Performance Monitoring Portal RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

8. Press Finish
9. To start generating the Statistics Report now, click the green Play button.
The Job will start running.
10. After the job completes, you can view the job report details by double-clicking
the job in the Reports pane.

 To view the SLA report:

1. Click Open File in the Result column to open a PDF file containing the report.
You can save or print the job report by clicking <Save Report> or <Print
Report>, respectively. Note that your SLA Report is empty. The SLA
Report is a monthly report and no statistics were collected from your
devices in the last month.
2. Open the example of an SLA Report in the SLA Report folder on your PC
desktop.

Monitoring Services with PM Portal

 To open the RADview Performance Portal
1. Open the Google Chrome web browser.
2. Type the IP address of the RADview server in the browser address field, and
press Enter.
The RADview Performance Portal login window opens.

RADview EMS RADview Performance Monitoring Portal 8-55

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

3. Login using Username root / Password root, and click Login.

4. The RADview Performance Portal appears.
5. The RADview Performance Portal contains a navigation pane at the top,
containing links that enable navigation to the various RADview Performance
Portal windows.
6. The links are: Dashboards, Eth Reports, Logout, About, Help.

7. The bottom part of the window appears according to the link that is clicked in
the navigation pane. When the portal is opened, the Dashboards window is
displayed by default.

 To view information displayed in Dashboards:

• Each pie chart represents the SLA status (threshold crossings) of the services
associated with the corresponding policy.
• Each pie chart contains up to three segments:
 Normal (green) – No error or warning
 Warning (yellow) – Warning threshold crossed
 Error (red) – Error threshold crossed.

 To display a tooltip containing the number of services and percentage

corresponding to a segment of the pie chart:
• Hover with the mouse over the segment.

8-56 RADview Performance Monitoring Portal RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

The segment protrudes slightly from the circle, and the tooltip is
displayed.
The tooltip displays number of services corresponding to the segment.

 To display the collected statistics of the OAM services that correspond to a

segment:

Note In this tutorial we do not have real traffic; therefore all values of FLR, Frame
Delay are 0. As a result the entire pie chart is green.

1. Click the green segment.

The Eth Reports window opens, showing an SLA report of the OAM
services corresponding to the segment of the pie chart.

Note
If you see numbers in yellow, it means that the Warning Threshold was crossed. If
you see numbers in red, it means that Error threshold was crossed.

 NER – Displays the network elements for which performance data is

available (e.g. has been collected and has not been deleted), in a
navigation tree of levels and network elements from the RADview
network.
 Customers – Displays the hierarchy of business entities defined in the
RADview network manager.
 Policies – Displays the policies defined in the RADview network manager.

RADview EMS RADview Performance Monitoring Portal 8-57

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

 The right pane displays the Eth Report corresponding to the previously
selected filter in the left pane. If you selected the NER tab in the left
pane, you will see information relevant to NE. If you selected the
Customers tab, the right pane called Eth Reports will be upated
accordingly.
2. Select the Customers tab, and select CustomerGroup@, where @ is a number
of your group.

3. Change Threshold Level to All.

4. In the right pane of Eth Reports, click Update Reports.

As a result, the title of the report will be changed to Eth Reports (Filtered
by Customers) and the information displayed in the table is updated.
5. Note the different Report Filters in the Eth Reports in the right pane

Name Description

Report Type Specifies the type of the report:

Aggregation report
SLA report
Note: Aggregation report type is not available if filtering by policy.

Customer Ranking Specifies for which customer ranking(s) to show data. You can select a single value
or all customer ranking values

Service Grade Specifies for which service grade(s) to show data. You can select a single value or
all service grade values

Threshold Level Specifies for which crossed thresholds to show data. You can select a single
threshold or all thresholds.
Note: This field is enabled only if SLA Report is selected in Report Type.

8-58 RADview Performance Monitoring Portal RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

Name Description

Report Period Indicates the period of time for the report. The possible values differ according to
the report type.
The values for aggregation reports are: 1 Hour, 1 Day , 1 Week, 1 Month
The only allowed value for SLA reports is 1 Month.

Select Specific Indicates the specific period of time, according to the value selected in Report
Period Period. Click Select Specific Period to open a popup calendar to select the period of
time.
To change the date, click inside the date text box to open a calendar.
Default: Current date

Hour If 1 Hour was selected in Report Period, this field contains a list of hour values,
from which you can select the desired hour.

<Refresh Reports> / Click <Refresh Reports> to refresh the report data. If changes are made in the
<Update Reports> toolbar or tabs, the name of the button changes to Update Reports. After it is
clicked to show the report according to the filtering, the name changes back to
Refresh Reports

Last Update Time of last update

 To monitor services:
For monitoring services, this tutorial uses the following example of an SLA report
with the warning and error threshold crossings shown in yellow and red,
respectively. The large red segment in the pie charts in the Dashboards pane of
RADview Performance Portal.

RADview EMS RADview Performance Monitoring Portal 8-59

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

1. Click a red segment.

The Eth Reports of the OAM services that correspond to a pie segment
opens.

Since Error Threshold Level was selected in the Eth Reports Service Filters,
in the table you will see only services with the Error threshold level.
2. Select Normal in the Threshold Level combo-box, and press Update Reports in
Actions.
You will now see only services that have Normal status; that is, services
that do not violate the SLA contract.

3. Again, select Threshold Level Error and click Update Reports.

4. Now you see services that violate the SLA.
5. To get more information about violated KPIs, right-click a line related to a
service and select relevant Report, for example Frame Loss Ratio.
A new tab opens in the Chrome browser displaying a graph for a row of
data in an OAM statistics report.

8-60 RADview Performance Monitoring Portal RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

6. You can change the display and display one of the following: Loss or Delay
Measurements Messages: LMMs, LMRs, DMMs, DMRs, Far/Near End Tx/Rx
Frames, Far/Near End Lost Frames, Far/Near End Frame Loss Ratio, Far/Near
End Availability, Average Two Way Delay, Average Two Way Delay Var.

7. To display Frame Loss Ratio, click Select Chart, select Frame Loss Ratio, and
click Show Charts to display a graph. See the example below.

RADview EMS RADview Performance Monitoring Portal 8-61

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

8. You can export collected raw data Export to CSV file.

8.6 Fault Management via RADview (FCAPS)

Overview
RADview Fault Management allows you to view and control the SNMP traps
(events) received by the management station from the managed elements.
The Event Browser (located at the bottom of the RADview Network Manager
screen) allows you to view and control the display of SNMP traps (events)
received by the management station from the managed elements.
The Fault Administrator allows you to configure the Event Browser log
parameters, SNMP trap forwarding destinations, and fault clearance, and to
define Event Policies for managing the display and handling of events in the Event
Browser .

Working with Event Filter

The filters enable you to determine which events to display in the Event Browser
according to the rules you define.
You are now going to define a new filter that will enable you to see only the
events that are sent by NEs in your sublevel.

 To create a filter:

1. In the Event Browser toolbar, click (Filter List).

8-62 Fault Management via RADview (FCAPS) RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

2. In the Filter List dialog box, click <Add>.

The Add Filter dialog box appears.
3. Type the Group@Filter name in the Filter Name field.
4. In the Sources tab, select your Group@ sublevel, select Include, and press
Add, as shown below.

5. Press Set.
6. A new filter was created.

7. In the Event Browser toolbar, click (Open Filter) and select the new filter
from the list of filters.
Now you will see only the Event Browser events that were sent by the NEs in
your sublevel Group@.
The General Tab provides the following options:
• Select which trap Severity to display within the specific tab

RADview EMS Fault Management via RADview (FCAPS) 8-63

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

• Select the traps that were sent only in a specific time Interval
• Select to display Cleared alarms, Not Cleared alarms or All
• Select whether or not to display Acknowledged traps.

Setting Event Policies

Defining an Event Policy enables you to manage the display and handling of
events in the Event Browser. For example, you can mask events, or forward them
to another NMS.

 To begin defining an Event Policy (or see already defined policies):

1. Open the Fault Administrator.
2. From the RADview Network Manager menu, select Tools > Admin Console
The Admin Console opens.

3. In the list of consoles, select Fault Service.

The Fault Administrator is displayed.

8-64 Fault Management via RADview (FCAPS) RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

4. Select Generic and scroll down until you see the event policy
Generic_nodeConnected.
5. This policy was automatically preconfigured by the system.
6. It means that every time a Node Connected event arrives, a previously sent
Node Disconnected event is signed as “CLR” in the Event Browser.

 To see how Clearing Event Policy works:

1. On the Topology map, right-click one of your devices.
2. In the Properties dialog box, in the SNMP tab, change Read Community from
public to publicXXX.
3. Click <Set>.

4. On the Topology map, right-click your device, and select Properties > Poll.

RADview EMS Fault Management via RADview (FCAPS) 8-65

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

The Poll operation causes RADview to make an SNMP polling request.

Since Read community is incorrect, a device will not respond to this
request (RADview will receive GET RESPONSE ERROR). As a result,
RADview will conclude that a node is disconnected.
The icon on the map changes to red and Critical event Node Disconnected
appears in the Event Browser.

5. Right-click your device. Change Read Community back to public. Then perform
polling again by selecting Properties > Poll.
This time, RADview will get response from a device, and the node will be
colored in green again.
In the Event Browser you will see the Normal event Node Connected.

Note that the Critical event Node Disconnected was signed as cleared.
“CLR” now appears next to it in the Event Browser.

Creating Masking Policy for Authentication Failure Trap

Besides default event policies predefined by the system, you can define your
specific event policy.
You will now learn how to define your specific event policy.

 To define a new event policy:

1. Go to Event Policy > Add.
2. The Add Event Policy dialog box opens.

3. Press the Event Class browse button (…).

The Select Event dialog box appears.

8-66 Fault Management via RADview (FCAPS) RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

4. Double-click Generic event class group. Select Authentication Failure and

press Set.
The Add Event Policy dialog box reappears.
5. Press the browse […] button next to the Source edit box.
The Select Node dialog box appears.
6. In the Select Node dialog box, select your group@, and select one of your
devices, and click <OK>.

7. Click <Continue…>.
8. In the Add Event Policy dialog box, select the Mask tab and select Mask.

RADview EMS Fault Management via RADview (FCAPS) 8-67

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

9. Click <Set>
Once these steps are completed, the event policy is defined.
You can now see that this new policy was added in the Fault Administrator dialog
box and appears in Event Class list.

Testing Masking Authentication Failure Event

You will now generate an Authentication Failure trap.

 To generate Authentication Failure event:

1. Right-click your device’s icon in Network Element Repository, and select
Properties…
2. Select the SNMP tab.
3. Change Read community to publicXXX.
As a result of changing the Read community to an incorrect one, the
Authentication Failure trap will not be sent.
To see more examples of creating event policies, refer to chapter “Setting Event
Policies” in the user manual.

8-68 Fault Management via RADview (FCAPS) RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

Before continuing to the next step, change the SNMP Read community back to
public.

8.7 RADview Security (FCAPS)

Overview
For the very first login (before users are defined) you used the default user:
Username=root, Password=root
You will now create new users accounts and define security profiles using the
Security Administrator.

 To start the security console:

1. From the RADview Network Manager select Tools > Admin Console.
2. Double-click on the directory on the left side, and open the sub-directories to
reach the following consoles:
 Fault Service
 NER Explorer
 Log Admin
 Security Service
3. Select the Security Service.
4. The main application window has three sections:
 A tree of security profiles
 A list of all users
 A list of users that share the selected profile.

RADview EMS RADview Security (FCAPS) 8-69

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

Defining Password Policy

It is possible to define password policies: the length of the password, minimum
number of letters and digits in the password, and so on.
You can now configure your own customized Password Policy by changing the
values in the fields circled in red in the figure below.
Later, you will use your own personal password according to this Policy.

 To set your password policies:

1. From the Security Administrator window, select Options > Configuration.
2. Select the Password tab.
3. Define your own customized Password Policy.

4. Select the Account tab.

5. Select Auto Lockout Policy.
6. Set No. of Failed Logon Attempts Before Lockout to 3.
7. Change the Lockout Duration to 5 minutes.
8. Selection Auto Lockout Policy means that after 3 failed attempts, a user will
be locked out for 5 minutes.

8-70 RADview Security (FCAPS) RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

 To assign a new user to existing Profile (Administrator):

Note A user is assigned to only one role (profile); however one role (profile) may be
assigned to many users.

1. From the Security Administrator window, select User.

2. From the User menu, select Add. The Add User dialog box appears.
3. Enter a User Name: Admin@.
4. Select Administrator as Profile.
5. Enter a password for this user and enter the password again for
confirmation.
6. Press Set.

 To log in as the new user you have just created:

1. Close the Security Administrator window.
2. Go to File > Logout.
3. Go to File > Login.
4. Log in as the new user you have just created.

 To check login failure:

1. Go to File > Logout.
2. Go to File > Login.
3. Log in as the new user you have just created with wrong password.

RADview EMS RADview Security (FCAPS) 8-71

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

4. After your Login fails, you will see a message “Login denied. Account
temporarily disabled.” You will not be able to login for the time defined in
Configuration > Account Tab.

5. Login as a root user.

6. Go to File > Login as a root user.

Working with Security Profiles

A profile is a hierarchical tree that is comprised of permissions (actions). You can
define different profiles, based on any of the four default base profiles that exist
after installation (or alternatively define a new profile from scratch).
After defining one or more profiles, you will be able to associate users to any of
these permission profiles.
Base Profiles:
• Administrator –unlimited access to all operations including User
Administration (create new users).
• Operator –full Write mode and access to all operations except for
User/System Administration (Read-only).
• Technician –limited access to configuration operations, and Read-only mode
for Event Browser.
• Monitor – Read-only mode for configuration operations, and no access to
other applications.
• None – Any existing profile can be used as a base for a new Profile; the user
can also select None to create a completely new Profile (from scratch).
Each permission is related to the specific functions that the user is or is not
allowed to perform within the managed application and within the different
RADview functionalities.
The different permission rights are:

Write

Read

Not Available

8-72 RADview Security (FCAPS) RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

Creating a New Security Profile

You are now going to define a new monitor profile Operator@Profile
that prevents access to all sublevel besides Group@ (your group) sublevel.
If you group number is 1, it means you are going to define RO profile that will be
named Operator1Profile that will allow you to access only to Group1, and you will
not have the access to other sublevels.
You will use the Monitor Base profile, but with certain modifications that will
reduce its permissions.

 To add a new profile :

1. Select Tools > Admin Console. From the Security Administrator window, select
Profile.
2. Select Add…. The Add Profile dialog box appears.
3. Enter as a Profile Name Operator@Profile (the character @ represents the
group number).
4. Enter a Profile Description (enter the profile name “Access to Group@ only”).
5. Select Base profile Operator.

6. Press Continue. The Add <New Profile Name> Profile dialog box appears.

RADview EMS RADview Security (FCAPS) 8-73

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

 To prevent access to all other sublevels besides your Group@ sublevel:

7. In the Profile pane on the left, expand the admin folder, and then expand the
ner folder to display the Permissions.
8. Double-click ENTRY_accessible under the ner folder, to change the permission
to (no access).

9. Right-click the ner folder and select Add Domain.

8-74 RADview Security (FCAPS) RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

10. In the Select Domain dialog box, click the browse (…) button.

11. In the Select Source dialog box, select Group@. (If your group is Group 1,
select Group1, etc.)

12. In the Select Domain dialog box, type an asterisks (*) in the Domain field
after Group@ to ensure that the domain includes everything in Group@.

RADview EMS RADview Security (FCAPS) 8-75

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

13. You will now see a folder /Group@* under the ner folder.

14. In the Basic Permissions pane, double-click the admin folder. Then double-
click ner folder to display a list of permissions in the Ner_perm folder.

8-76 RADview Security (FCAPS) RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

15. In the Ner_perm Permissions list select ENTRY_accessible, and drag it to the
/Group@* folder in the Profile pane .

16. Press Set.

17. The new profile appears in the profile tree under Operator.
You have just created a new profile called Operator@Profile (Operator1Profile,
etc.), which is based on the Operator permissions, together with changes.

Creating a New User

 To assign a new user to the new profile Operator@Profile:

Note A user is assigned to only one role (profile); however one role (profile) may be
assigned to many users.

1. From the Security Administrator window, select User.

2. From the User menu, select Add. The Add User dialog box appears.

RADview EMS RADview Security (FCAPS) 8-77

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

3. Enter a User Name (case sensitive) and a Description.

4. Select the New profile you have just created (Operator@Profile).
5. Enter a password for this user and enter the password again for
confirmation.

6. Press Set.
7. The Admin Console now includes a new user assigned to the Operator@
profile, meaning that this user has the permissions you previously defined for
this specific profile.

8-78 RADview Security (FCAPS) RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

Testing the New User

The current user you are working with (root/root) can access all submaps.

 To verify access to all levels in NER:

Check that all levels you created appear in the Network Element Repository.

 To log in as the new user you created:

1. Close the shelf-view application if still open.
2. Go to File > Logout.
3. Go to File > Login.
4. Log in as the new user you created, group@
5. Verify the levels in the NER:
6. Only the Group@ domain is accessible. The other parts of the network cannot
be accessed by the group@ user.

8.8 RADview Administration (FCAPS)

Log Viewer
The Log Viewer enables tracking of successful and/or failed logons and logoffs.

 To track your login operations:

1. Open Tools > Log Viewer
2. In the Log Viewer screen, note the blue lines, which correspond to your login
failure.

RADview EMS RADview Administration (FCAPS) 8-79

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

The Log Viewer System tab lets you track all operations performed in the
RADview map.
3. The Log Viewer Application tab displays all operations performed in the shelf-
view applications.

8-80 RADview Administration (FCAPS) RADview EMS

User's Manual Chapter 8 Application Tutorial

Viewing Logged-in Users

You can view the list of all users who are currently logged in by displaying the
Active Login table.

 To track login operations:

1. From the RADview Network Manager select Tools > Admin Console.
2. Double-click on the directory on the left, and open the sub-directories to
reach the following consoles:
 Fault Service
 NER Explorer
 Log Admin
 Security Service
3. Select the Security Service.
4. Go to Login > Active Login Table.
The Active Login Table Dialog Box is displayed.
It displays the user name, the date and time of user login, the user host
IP address, and the terminal from which the login was performed.

RADview EMS RADview Administration (FCAPS) 8-81

Chapter 8 Application Tutorial User's Manual

8-82 RADview Administration (FCAPS) RADview EMS

 Appendix A
Updating RADview Clients
Automatically

A.1 Introduction
In some cases, a patch is inserted into the RADview server, to be distributed to
its RADview clients. When this is necessary, RAD Technical Support provides the
patch file(s) and procedure for inserting a patch on the RADview server.

A.2 Updating Clients

 To update the clients:
1. Install the patch on the RADview server, using the procedure provided by RAD
Technical Support.
2. At the client station, close the RADview Network Manager if it is open.
3. At the client station, perform the procedure to open the RADview Network
Manager.
The RADview Network Manager does not open; instead, the following
dialog box appears.

Figure A-1. EMS Server Updated

4. At the client station, click <Update>.

The server transfers the patch to the client station, and installs it in the
client. When this is completed, the following dialog box appears.

RADview Updating Clients A-1

Appendix A Updating RADview Clients Automatically User's Manual

Figure A-2. EMS Client Updated

5. At the client station, click <OK>.

The dialog box closes. The RADview-EMS Network Manager can now be
opened at the client station.

A-2 Updating Clients RADview

 Appendix B
Updating RADview Clients
with Multiple Server
Information

B.1 Introduction
The automatic update mechanism described in Appendix A is used for scenarios
where it is necessary to define a primary and secondary server. RAD Technical
Support provides the necessary files and procedure for installing them in the
server. The following files are provided:
• ems_servers.xml – Contains the definitions for the primary and secondary
servers
• emsupdate.xml – Contains the patch.

B.2 Updating Multiple Server Information in Clients

 To update the clients with the multiple server information:
1. Install the patch in the primary server, using the procedure provided by RAD
Technical Support.
2. Perform the procedure described in Appendix A for updating the clients with
the patch information.
After a client station has been updated, when it detects that the server
to which it is connected to is unavailable, the Connect to Server dialog
box appears, showing server availability. A timer countdown is displayed
in the status bar, showing when the next attempt to connect is to be
performed.

RADview Updating Multiple Server Information in Clients B-1

Appendix B Updating RADview Clients with Multiple Server Information User's Manual

Figure B-1. RADview Primary Server Down

When the timer displayed in the status bar expires, the client connects to
an RADview server if one is available. If one is not available, the timer is
restarted.

B-2 Updating Multiple Server Information in Clients RADview

Publication No. 357-264-10/14

Order this publication by Catalog No. 803901

International Headquarters
24 Raoul Wallenberg Street
Tel Aviv 69719, Israel
Tel. 972-3-6458181
Fax 972-3-6498250, 6474436
E-mail [email protected]

North America Headquarters

900 Corporate Drive
Mahwah, NJ 07430, USA
Tel. 201-5291100
Toll free 1-800-4447234
Fax 201-5295777
E-mail [email protected]

www.rad.com